JP7342074B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention performs variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result, it is possible to control the variable display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Regarding gaming machines.

As a conventional gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title to inform you of the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect (for example, see Patent Document 1). Furthermore, a gaming machine is disclosed that is equipped with a time saving mode in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected. (Patent Document 2)

JP2019-118411A JP 2019-217007 Publication

However, there was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine of claim 1 includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
a state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means for performing variable display,
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
controllable to the advantageous state when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result;
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result when controlled to the second special state, and the variable display period is such that the next variable display starts from the end of the variable display. It is possible to execute a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period until
Of the variable displays that are executed when the second special state is controlled and the display result is the predetermined display result, the proportion of the special variable display that is executed is such that the variable display that is different from the special variable display is higher than the rate of execution;
The proportion of the variable display period of the variable display in which the display result when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result is shorter than the predetermined period, the display result when controlled to the first special state is the predetermined display result. a variable display period of the variable display resulting in the predetermined display result is higher than a ratio that is shorter than the predetermined period;
The game control means is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium enters the starting region;
Executing variable display of the specific identification information,
Based on the result of the determination, select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns,
when determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command to the production control means;
when determining the second variation pattern, transmitting a second command to the production control means;
The performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
When being controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating that the first special state is being controlled can be displayed on the display means;
A first specific change effect that changes a mode of the first special display can be executed,
When being controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating that the second special state is being controlled can be displayed on the display means;
A second specific change effect that changes the aspect of the second special display can be executed,
The period at which the aspect of the second special display changes in the second specific change performance is shorter than the period at which the aspect of the first special display changes in the first specific change performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The decoration identification information is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach, and the display position of the decoration identification information in the reach mode is used in the title display part in the specific reach, so as to correspond to the specific reach. It is characterized by displaying a title display.
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying a title display corresponding to a specific reach using the display position of the identification information, the title display can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title display can be suitably performed. Furthermore, during the period controlled by the special state, if the display result is a predetermined display result, a very short variable display period is likely to be selected, so the player may not be able to execute a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. This allows players to comfortably play games without feeling frustrated by the fact that they are playing games. In addition, in the second special state where the special variable display is executed at a high rate, the period in which the aspect of the second special display changes is short, so that it is possible to emphasize the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state. .

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this example. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this example. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 131SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine in the feature section 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern type determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the expectation degree of the reach effect of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing the difference in the degree of expectation between reach effects of super reach. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a data holding area for game control. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transition. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing an execution rate of a look-ahead notice performance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a determination ratio of stopping symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns according to variation patterns. It is an explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns according to variation patterns. It is a figure showing the flow of performance during variable display in a normal state. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance during variable display in time saving state A and variable probability state. It is a figure showing the flow of performance during variable display in time saving state B. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base weak reach A effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base weak reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base strong reach A effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image which shows a bad example of low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base strong reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base strongest reach effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strongest reach effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image in the modified example of a title display part. It is a diagram showing the transition of images during execution of high base super reach effects A to D. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of high base super reach effects A to D. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing positions where title characters are displayed in a display area of an image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing performance time of super reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between performance times of super reach performance. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between title characters and decorative patterns of a super reach effect. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution status of expectation level suggestion display. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of a selection effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing the number of operations until switching to the next title in the selection performance and the execution rate of the super reach performance when the selection performance is executed. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed during variable display. It is an explanatory diagram about the execution rate of the performance which can be performed during variable display. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display state of an explanatory text displayed in an explanatory text display effect. It is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect. It is a figure which shows the execution status of title color change effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of title characters changes in a title color change effect. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion effect A. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance B. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance C. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance D. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the operation promotion image. It is a diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect. It is a figure which shows the display situation of the remaining number of times until play time. It is a diagram showing the execution status of play time start effect. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters of the super reach performance, the explanatory text characters, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, and the operation promotion characters. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters, etc. of the super reach performance and the title characters, etc. of the play time start performance. It is a diagram showing the arrangement state of game effect lamps. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. It is a diagram showing a brightness data table used for super reach effect. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the title common chance up red child table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the title common chance up golden child table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a strong reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a strong reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a high base reach type common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a high base reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a high base reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a high base reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a high base reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of high base reach system reach B introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach type reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach system reach C introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach type reach C introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach system reach D introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach system reach D introduction. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the engine which comprises the title display part of low base weak reach A, B effects, and brightness data. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F. It is a figure showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart which shows starting port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for normal state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for a time saving state. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode regarding the high speed time saving small hit. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect regarding the rush fluctuation deviation. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the deviation of the rush fluctuation. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the deviation of the rush fluctuation. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the deviation of the rush fluctuation. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the deviation of the rush fluctuation. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the performance regarding the pseudo fluctuation deviation. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding pseudo fluctuation deviation. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding pseudo fluctuation deviation. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode regarding direct jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern judgment table for a time saving state (Dream RUSH). It is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern judgment table for a time saving state (Dream RUSH). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state (ultra high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state (ultra high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state (ultra high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the b-time saving state (invincible RUSH). It is an explanatory diagram showing a control table after winning by game state. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the variable display of decorative symbols in Dream RUSH. (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a production mode related to the first logo cycle change production, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode related to the second logo cycle variation production. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the fluctuating display of decorative symbols in ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH. It is a front view of a movable body, a logo panel, and an image display device. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the first change performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the first change performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a second change performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a second change performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a first look-ahead performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a first look-ahead performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to a second look-ahead performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to a second look-ahead performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance determination process at the time of a start winning prize. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for active display, and (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing change pattern determination tables. (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing change pattern determination tables. It is an explanatory diagram showing a production mode decision table of change production. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to perform a first pre-reading effect, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to perform a second pre-reading effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production determination processing during a jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production determination processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance determination process at the time of waiting for a fluctuation|variation start. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance determination process at the time of a fluctuation|variation start. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production determination processing during fluctuation. Symbol 3R is a time chart showing the execution timing of the performance when a normal jackpot occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode in the case where a symbol 3R normal jackpot occurs. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when a symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode in the case where a symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode in the case where a symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot occurs. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the performance regarding the case where the symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the production mode when a symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the production mode when a symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the production mode when a symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when a jackpot with jackpot occurrence count value=3 occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode in the case where a jackpot with jackpot occurrence count value=3 occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode in the case where a jackpot with jackpot occurrence count value=3 occurs. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the performance regarding the case where a small hit normally occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode in the case where a small hit normally occurs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode in the case where a small hit normally occurs. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between firing intervals and pending expiration periods. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval, the pending expiration period, and the second pending storage number. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval, the pending expiration period, and the second pending storage number. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval, the pending expiration period, and the second pending storage number.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and in the title display part in the specific reach, the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) becomes the reach mode. This system is characterized by displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach so as to use the display position of the title.
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying a title display corresponding to a specific reach using the display position of the identification information, the title display can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title display can be suitably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 1-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-1,
Decorative identification information is displayed in the reach mode of the first size (decorative pattern (large)) before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) displayed in the reach mode is displayed. (large)) is displayed in a second size (decorative design (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in the second size. It is characterized by being displayed using the display position of the displayed decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decoration identification information displayed in the first size becomes the second size to attract the attention of the player, and the display position of the decoration identification information in the second size is used to reach a specific reach. By displaying the corresponding title display, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-3 is the gaming machine described in Embodiment 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part of the specific reach, at the timing when the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach mode is displayed, the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach mode. It is characterized by displaying the corresponding title display (title characters).
According to this feature, at the timing when the decoration identification information that has become the reach mode is displayed in the title display part in the specific reach, the title corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decoration identification information that has become the reach mode. By displaying this, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects) and a second reach (low base strong reach effect) that has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach. A to C performances), including
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state where they overlap with one of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern on the left side) among the decoration identification information in the reach mode. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state where they overlap with one of the decoration identification information in the reach mode, This makes it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of Form 1-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach performance) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach performance) with a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The title display corresponding to the third reach is characterized in that it appears in a state where it overlaps with the decoration identification information (decoration patterns on both sides) of both sides in the reach mode.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which is expected to be controlled to be more advantageous than the first reach and the second reach, is displayed in a state where it overlaps with the decoration identification information of both reaches in the reach mode. Therefore, the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

The gaming machine of Form 1-6 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-5,
The title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) ) The title display corresponding to the above appears in a state where it overlaps with one of the decoration identification information (decoration pattern on the left side) or both of the decoration identification information (decoration pattern on both sides) among the decoration identification information in reach mode, It is characterized in that it is displayed in a fixed position, and even during the period when it is displayed in the fixed position, it is displayed in a state that overlaps with a part of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that has become a ready-to-reach mode.
According to this feature, even after the title display is displayed at a fixed position, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
Displaying second decoration identification information (an even-numbered decorative pattern) in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode and Display the title display (title characters) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. The present invention is characterized in that the title display (title characters) is displayed using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative patterns).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information has become the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach and the second reach using the display position of the decoration identification information that has become the mode, it is possible to draw attention naturally to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be suitably displayed. It can be carried out.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1,
The case where the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a ready-to-win mode and the case where the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) are displayed in a ready-to-win mode are the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ) is characterized by different levels of expectations controlled by
According to this feature, when the decorative identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the degree of expectation for being controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on which decorative identification information is in the ready-to-reach mode, making it easier to draw attention to the title display. .

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth variation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. ), and determine one of the multiple fluctuation patterns including
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
When determining the fifth variation pattern, transmitting a fifth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13) to the production control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The third reach (low base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
Displaying second decoration identification information (an even-numbered decorative pattern) in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode and Display the title display (title characters) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd-numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the first decoration in the reach mode is displayed. The title display (title characters) is displayed using the display position of the decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns),
The second decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the second display part in the reach mode is displayed. It is characterized by displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative designs).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information has become the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach, second reach, and third reach using the display position of the decoration identification information in the reach mode in the display part, it is possible to naturally draw attention to the title display. As a result, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and in the title display part in the specific reach, the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) becomes the reach mode. Display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach so as to use the display position of
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying a title display corresponding to a specific reach using the display position of the identification information, it is possible to naturally draw attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to PA2-9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide on one of the multiple fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second variation pattern (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-3), transmitting a second command to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to PB1-7) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-7 to PA2-9) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B performance) and the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) are reaches in which multiple characters are used,
The first reach (low base weak reach B production) uses the first character (ally character "Yumemu") in the first reach and the second character (enemy character "Boingo") in the first reach, The reach is informed that the first character (ally character "Yumemu") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is a game in which the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach and the second character (enemy character "Robo") in the second reach a reach that is used and is notified that the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach is on the near side and the second character (enemy character) in the second reach is The display starts with the character "Robo") placed at the back,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach B effect), the first character (ally character "Yumemu") in the first reach is on the near side, and the second character (enemy character "Boingo") in the second reach is ”) is characterized in that the display starts from a display that is placed so that it is not on the back side.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has relatively high expectations, the first character who is informed that it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state is on the front side, and the second character is on the back side. This allows the player to empathize with the game, makes it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the player has high expectations, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-1,
The first character is a character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") that is given a benefit when winning a battle,
The second character is a character (enemy character "Robo") that is not given a benefit when winning a battle,
At the start of the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first characters (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed in the front position with their backs turned, and the second The character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed in a position on the back side facing toward you, and the first character and the second character are facing each other.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has relatively high expectations, the player's direction and the first character's direction are the same, making it easier for the player to empathize with the player, and making the player have high expectations. This makes it easier to recognize that the level is high.

The gaming machine of Form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are shown in the title display part. The title display (title characters) is displayed at a position that includes the display area where the title display (title characters) was displayed.
According to this feature, a player who has been paying attention to the title display will naturally look at the first character and the second character when the title display disappears.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second variation pattern (a variation pattern designation command that specifies PA2-2 and PA2-3), transmitting a second command to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performances) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performances),
The execution time of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The first reach and the second reach are reaches in which dialogue subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles are displayed,
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), continue to display the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part in the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the title display (title characters) is displayed without displaying dialogue subtitles.
According to this feature, the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation level and a long execution time, is displayed so as not to overlap the title display and dialogue subtitles as much as possible, while the second reach, which has a relatively low expectation level and a short execution time. At the time of the first reach, even if the dialogue subtitles and title display overlap, by finishing the title display first, the dialogue subtitles can also be noticed, and the title display and dialogue subtitles can be suitably provided to the player. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1,
If the title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), in the subsequent introduction part, the title The feature is that the production scene does not change until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed at the same time as the title characters have finished displaying.
According to this feature, if the title display and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, in the subsequent introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed at the same time as the title display are displayed. The scene does not change until the end of the scene, so you can draw attention to the title display and then the dialogue subtitles.

The gaming machine of Form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1 or 6-2,
When the title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output. However, the feature is that the audio corresponding to the title display (title characters) is not output.
According to this feature, when the title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed at the same time, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title display is not output, so that the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles can be heard. It becomes easier.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the particular reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The titles of the specific reaches (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effects A to D) are displayed with multiple characters (``6 people catch Bakuchu!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D'')) It consists of
The display means (image display device 5) displays the title (title characters) of the specific reach at a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of the plurality of characters is visible in the title display part of the specific reach. The display size gradually decreases from the first size, and the title display (title characters) of the specific reach is displayed so that the display size becomes a second size (reduced size) where all the multiple characters can be seen. ,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title for strongest reach system, common title for high base reach system),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D) It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, the first size is displayed where only a portion of multiple characters can be seen, and then the size is gradually decreased until all characters are visible. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 7-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect) is started, a movable object (movable body 32) is operated so as to overlap with the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
During the period from when the movable object moves until the movable object returns to its initial position (falling effect), a background corresponding to the movement of the movable object (background exclusively for falling effect) is displayed, and the movable object returns to its initial position. The title display (title characters) is displayed at a first size (enlarged size) in which, when returning to It is characterized in that the display starts, and then a second size (reduced size) title display and a background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, while giving an impact with the display method of the reach title, it is possible to simultaneously switch the background without feeling strange, and the title display can be suitably shown to the player.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the particular reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The titles of the specific reaches (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effects A to D) are displayed with multiple characters (``6 people catch Bakuchu!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D'')) It consists of
The display means (image display device 5) enlarges and displays the plurality of characters from a state in which the plurality of characters are displayed (a state in which they are displayed in a reduced size and in a fixed position) in the title display part in the specific reach. By (expanding the display area until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters), the title display part ends, and the display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (the background at the start of the introduction part) becomes visible. Display it so that
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title for strongest reach system, common title for high base reach system),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D) It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display in the title display part, and can suitably use the title display to smoothly switch to the display corresponding to the next introduction part. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
Execution time (T1-1 to 2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and execution time of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) Unlike (T2-1~3),
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position. It consists of the third part (title end period) from displaying the fixed position to ending the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). The title display (title characters) is displayed such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the second part displayed in a fixed position is made the longest to draw attention to the type of title display. I can do it. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the first reach and the second reach, the first part until it is displayed at the fixed position is longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position until the display ends. By setting the time to be long, it is possible to influence which title display is displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the 1st reach and the 2nd reach, the title display part can be easily understood by making the relationship between the execution times of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd parts the same. It can be made easier.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in the normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled by the advantageous state), and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a winning fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including (outlier fluctuation pattern),
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates an outlier fluctuation pattern in the normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies an outlier variation pattern in a probability variation state) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
Execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in normal state) and title display in the second reach (super reach performance in variable probability state) Unlike the part execution time (T4),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach performed in the normal state, and the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is a special condition (probable variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state. is the reach executed in
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position. It consists of the third part (title end period) from displaying the fixed position to ending the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). , displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). , the title display (title characters) is displayed such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed in the fixed position is the most By making it longer, you can draw attention to the type of title display. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part will be displayed in the fixed position until it is displayed in the fixed position. By making the time from the time to the end of the display longer than the third part, it is possible to influence which title display is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the relationship between the execution times of the first part, second part, and third part is By making them common, the title display part can be made easier to understand.

The gaming machine of Form 10-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is the execution time (T1-1 to T1-2, It is characterized by being shorter than T2-1 to T2-3 and T3).
According to this feature, since the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short, the special state can be advanced at a good tempo, while the execution time of the title display part in the first reach executed in the normal state is relatively short. The execution time of the title display part is relatively long, so it can be thoroughly stimulated.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position. It consists of the third part (title end period) from displaying the fixed position to ending the display,
The display means (image display device 5) is arranged such that in the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), the second part (title display period) is different from the first part (title start period) and the third part ( displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, by making the second part displayed at a fixed position the longest, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title display. Further, by making the first part until the title is displayed at the regular position longer than the third part from when the title is displayed at the regular position until the display ends, it is possible to influence which title is displayed. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the particular reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The display means is
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) is displayed in a first mode (white mode), and the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a first mode It is possible to display in a second mode (red mode) in which the expectation level of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the second mode (red mode),
In the title display part (title display part shown in Figure 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production), the expectation level suggestion display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first size. and then displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in a second size larger than the first size,
When the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode (white mode) and the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode (red mode). In any case when displaying, displaying the expectation level suggestion display in a common manner,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach system strongest reach title, strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to a specific reach is larger in size than the expectation level suggestion display, and its appearance suggests the expectation level, so it attracts the player's attention. By displaying the expectation level suggestion display before the title display, attention can be drawn to the expectation level suggestion first. Moreover, since the expectation level suggestion display is performed in a common manner whether the title is displayed in the first manner or in the second manner, attention can be drawn to the manner in which the title is displayed thereafter.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. ~9), a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PA2-12) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among the multiple fluctuation patterns including and,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-5 to PB1-7) to the production control means;
When the second fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-7 to PA2-9) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-8 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When determining the fourth variation pattern, transmitting a fourth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-10 to PA2-12) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means is
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B production), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C production), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second mode (4 stars),
The expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance) and the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance) are made to be the same. highlight and
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach type strong reach C title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). It is said that
According to this feature, even when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the first mode in the title display part in the first reach, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the second reach. In this case, development costs can be reduced by using a common highlighted display. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 13-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 13-1,
The expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
In the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the degree of expectation is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
In the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the degree of expectation is suggested by N+1 (4) objects,
In the expectation level suggestion display, each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and even if one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, , is characterized by highlighting in a common manner.
According to this feature, whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, development costs are reduced by highlighting in a common manner. It can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 13-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 13-2,
The expectation level suggestion display is characterized in that the time during which one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted is the same as the time during which 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) are highlighted. It is said that
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by making the time for highlighting one object and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects the same.

The gaming machine of Form 13-4 is the gaming machine described in Form 13-2 or 13-3,
In the expectation level suggestion display, a common emphasis sound ( It is characterized by the output of a sound that suggests the degree of expectation.
According to this feature, a common voice is output whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, reducing development costs. be able to.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect). It is possible to notify the
When the second command is received, the specified reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). It is possible to notify the
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach; An introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced;
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect), an expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. It is possible and
In the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production), emphasis is placed on the first object (star-shaped object). Then, while continuing to highlight the first object (star-shaped object), highlight the second object (star-shaped object), and then highlight the first object (star-shaped object). The third object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, in the title display part of a specific reach, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display consisting of multiple objects, and in the expectation level suggestion display, before the highlighting for the first object ends. , the highlighting for the second object starts, but the highlighting for the third object does not start until the highlighting for the first object ends, so we are aware of the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation. It becomes easier to do so.

The gaming machine of Form 14-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 14-1,
In the expectation level suggestion display, an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) is output every time an object (star shaped object) is highlighted, and an emphasis sound ( After the output of the expectations-suggesting sound is finished, a highlighting sound for highlighting the next object (expectations-suggesting sound) is output.
According to this feature, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation.

The gaming machine of Form 14-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation level"),
The object (star-shaped object) is highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text (the text "Expectation level").
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to both the plurality of objects and the characters that constitute the expectation level suggestion display by highlighting the objects.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect). It is possible to notify the
When the second command is received, the specified reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). It is possible to notify the
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach; An introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced;
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect), an expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. It is possible and
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach performance A to D performance), the suspension display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strong reach type common title, strongest reach type strongest reach title, high base reach type common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using the high base reach type reach B introduction, the high base reach type reach C introduction, and the high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, while an expectation level suggestion display consisting of multiple objects is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistakenly recognized as an expectation level suggestion display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 15-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display that has started matches the maximum number (5) of objects (star-shaped objects) constituting the expectation level suggestion display.
According to this feature, even if a specific reach is reached in a situation where the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is mistakenly assumed that the pending display and active display are displaying the maximum number of objects that constitute the expectation level display. It is possible to prevent this from being recognized as such.

The gaming machine of Form 15-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 15-1 or 15-2,
The present invention is characterized in that the suspended display ends when the display means (image display device 5) displays a monochrome display before the start of the title display part.
According to this feature, the hold display can be ended without any discomfort.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16), a third variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. A certain fourth variation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a certain fourth variation pattern (PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) Deciding one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PA2-12/PA2-18) which is an uncontrolled fluctuation pattern,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) to the production control means;
When determining the second variation pattern, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-6/PA2-16) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-15) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) to the production control means,
When determining the fifth variation pattern, transmitting a fifth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-8 to PB1-10/PB1-16) to the production control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-10 to PA2-12/PA2-18) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance), it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of a first number (3) of objects (star-shaped objects),
Expectations that the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is composed of objects (star-shaped objects) of a second number (3.5) that is larger than the first number. It is possible to display a degree-suggestive display,
Expectation level suggestion made up of a third number (4) of objects (star-shaped objects) that are larger than the second number in the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) display is possible and
The difference in number between the first number and the second number is the same as the difference in number between the second number and the third number (0.5),
The expectation level controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed and the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) The difference from the expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed is the expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed. The difference is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number to the second number, and when it increases from the second number to the third number, The amount of increase in the number is the same, but the amount of increase in expectation that is controlled to be more advantageous when increasing from the second number to the third number than when increasing from the first number to the second number is Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the increased number of objects will be controlled to an advantageous state. I never get my hopes up.

The gaming machine of Form 16-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns include a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-17) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19),
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15/PA2-19) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The display means displays an object (star-shaped object) with a fourth number (4.5), which is larger than the third number, in the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect). It is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of
The difference in numbers between the third number and the fourth number (0.5) is smaller than the difference in numbers between the first number and the third number (1),
The expectation level controlled to the advantageous state when the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is executed and the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) ) is executed and the expectation level is controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed. The difference is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the third number to the fourth number, more objects are displayed as the expectation level suggestion display than when the number increases from the first number to the third number. Although the amount of increase in the number is small, the amount of increase in the degree of expectation controlled to be advantageous is greater when increasing from the third number to the fourth number than when increasing from the first number to the third number. Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the control will be more advantageous even if the increased number of objects is small.

The gaming machine of Form 16-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 16-2,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, the number of objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number than when the number increases by 1 from the first number to become the third number. If the number is 4, it can be expected that the control will be more advantageous.
The gaming machine of Form 16-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16-1 to 16-3,
When the third reach (high base reach C performance) is executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state and the second reach (high base reach B performance) ) is executed and the expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is the difference from the expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect) is executed in the normal state. The difference is greater than the difference between the degree of reach and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to expect that a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state will be controlled to an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases. can.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach effects A to C) are both reaches executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach effects) is a reach executed in a normal state. Reach A to C effects) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performances) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performances),
The display means (image display device 5)
displaying an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production);
The expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), use the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) controlling the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using a strong reach C system.
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach, which has relatively high expectations, is longer than the title display part in the first reach, which has relatively low expectations, and the title display part in the second reach While the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the first reach, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach, so it is made to feel that the expectation level is higher in the second reach than in the first reach. be able to. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 17-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period) and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period). and
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects). It is characterized by
According to this feature, the text display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the text display part of the title display part in the first reach, so the second reach is longer than the first reach. It is possible to make the user feel that the level of expectation is high.

The gaming machine of Form 17-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 17-1 or 17-2,
This is a reach executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach performance) that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach effects A to C effects). ,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period) and consists only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach effect A to C effect). It is said that
According to this feature, the text display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the text display part of the title display part in the second reach, so the third reach is longer than the second reach. It is possible to make the user feel that the level of expectation is high.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2 to 3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-4) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. 12) Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies PB1-2, 5, and 8) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 to PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) can be executed,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches executed in a normal state,
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), there is no notification that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a result of the performance, and ), there are cases where it is announced that it will not be controlled, and cases where another reach (super reach effect) is executed.
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performances) is performed when it is announced that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) as a result of the production, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). There are cases where it is announced that it will not be done, and there is a certain reach.
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification whether or not the other reach is executed. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The display means (image display device 5)
displaying an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production);
The expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), use the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) controlling the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using a strong reach C system.
According to this feature, while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the second reach where it is sometimes reported that the control will be directly controlled to an advantageous state, Since the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach that is not reported, it is possible to prevent the first reach from giving an excessive sense of expectation. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 18-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 18-1,
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), the title is displayed (title letters) in a confirmed mode (gold) that confirms that another reach (super reach effect) will be executed. It is characterized by being able to be displayed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach where the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) is achieved through a selection effect using title display (title letters) corresponding to multiple reaches including the specific reach (super reach effect). may be executed,
The display means is
It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display together with the title display (title characters) in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach) and the selected production,
When displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach), the expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects). step by step,
When displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the selection performance, the expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed in stages.
According to this feature, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of a specific reach, the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is displayed in stages, whereas the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is displayed in stages, whereas the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is When displaying the degree suggestion display, the expectation degree suggestion display consisting of multiple objects is not displayed in stages, so the expectation degree suggestion display is not only displayed in stages in the title display part but also in the selection performance before it. This eliminates the annoyance caused by the display of

The gaming machine of Form 19-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 19-1,
The selection performance is a performance that changes in stages from a reach with low expectations (super reach performance) to a reach with high expectations (super reach performance) by operating the performance operation means (push button 31B),
The time required to change by one level in the selected production (minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach production) is based on the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach) It is characterized in that the time required for displaying one level of the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part of the title display part (the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold through highlighting) may be shorter.
According to this feature, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the stepwise changes in the selection performance.

The gaming machine of Form 19-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 19-2,
The selection performance is a performance that changes from the current reach (super reach performance) to a reach (super reach performance) with a higher expectation level by one stage at each stage, and changes to the next stage each time it changes by one stage. This feature is characterized in that the number of operations of the effect operation means (push button 31B) required for this purpose is increased.
According to this feature, the higher the expected level of reach, the more anxious the player can be.

The gaming machine of Form 19-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection performance, the game starts from the title display part.
According to this feature, even when a specific reach is executed via a selection effect, it starts from the title display part, so it is easy for the player to determine which reach has finally been executed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) in a manner with larger movement than the title display corresponding to the specific reach (title letters of the super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is a situation in which it is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by moving the name display of the advantageous state more greatly, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 20-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D), when displaying the title display (title characters), a background dedicated to the title display is provided. displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is characterized in that it is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, by moving the background of the advantageous state name display more greatly, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to be in an advantageous state.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part (operation promotion effects B and D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
Displaying the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) in a manner with larger movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional character display displayed in the introduction part prompts the player to take action, and by moving it larger than the title display displayed in the title display part, it intuitively prompts the player to move. can encourage action. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 21-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to take action and suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed. Promotional characters (large)) can be displayed,
Both the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) and the special promotion text display (operation promotion text (large)) move more than the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being displayed in a large format.
According to this feature, whether it is a promotion character display or a special promotion character display, by moving the title display larger than the title display displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to make a move. .

The gaming machine of Form 21-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 21-1 or 21-2,
The number of characters (3) of the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is smaller than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, since the number of characters in the promotion character display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display, the content of the characters can be recognized even if the character is moved significantly.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display an explanatory character display (explanatory characters) that is different from the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach,
Displaying the explanatory character display (explanatory character) in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory text display in a manner with greater movement than the title display, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory text display is added in addition to the title display. Can be done. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 22-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 22-1,
The explanatory character display (explanatory character) is characterized in that the content suggests that the particular reach (super reach performance) is advantageous.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw more attention to the fact that the explanatory character display is added.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The degree of expectation that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) will be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is better than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects). Also displays the font size to be larger,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), use the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) controlling the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using a strong reach C system.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed in a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation. Therefore, just by displaying the title, it is possible to make the user realize that the second reach has higher expectations than the first reach. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 23-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effects) The display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect) is larger than the number of characters (7, 8) that make up (title characters). It is characterized by being larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, since the display area occupied by one character is larger in the title display corresponding to the second reach, it is made to feel that the expectations for the second reach are higher than the first reach. be able to.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of multiple characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
The first size of the decoration identification information (decorative design (large)) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the second size smaller than the first size is displayed. Displaying the decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)) in a reach mode,
displaying at least one character of a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) in a size larger than the second size (decorative design (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to a specific reach is displayed in a larger size than the decorative identification information reduced to the second size, so it is possible to draw attention to the title display in the title display part. can. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 24-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 24-1,
Any character of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is smaller than the first size (decorative design (large)) and smaller than the second size (decorative design (small)). It is also characterized by being displayed in a large size.
According to this feature, the decoration identification information can be reliably recognized when the reach mode is reached, but after that, the decoration identification information is reduced and the title display is configured in a larger size than the decoration identification information. Since each character is displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part (operation promotion effects B and D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) larger than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which promotion characters are displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the control will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is a situation in which the advantageous state is already controlled. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled into an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled into the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 25-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) is composed of a first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and a second character string (“BONUS”),
After the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) is displayed in the first position (upper position), the second character string (“BONUS”) is displayed in the second position (lower position). is,
After the second character string (“BONUS”) is displayed in the second position (bottom position), the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) displayed in the first position (top position) is displayed. ") and the second character string ("BONUS") displayed at the second position (at the bottom of the fixed position) are gradually enlarged and displayed,
The first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed in the first position (upper position) and the second position (lower position). Sometimes the font size is displayed at its smallest size,
When the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed in the first position (upper regular position) and the second position (lower regular position); The size of the characters is larger than the size of the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that being controlled to be in an advantageous state can be celebrated even more.

The gaming machine of Form 25-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character of the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is greater than the largest character of the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)). It is also characterized by its large size.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that makes up the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that makes up the promotion character display. Even so, since the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state even more.

The gaming machine of Form 25-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 25-1 to 25-3,
A special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) can be displayed;
The special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of jackpot start effect).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display, which suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display, is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, so that the player can feel the advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of Form 25-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 25-4,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) is the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of jackpot start effect). It is characterized by being larger than.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that makes up the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that makes up the advantageous state name display, so which character should you focus on? Even so, since the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) larger than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is a situation in which it is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 26-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes multiple types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the title display (title letters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, being controlled to be in an advantageous state can be congratulated by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach.

The gaming machine of Form 26-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 26-2,
The smallest character among the character strings that make up the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) is the character that makes up the title display (title letters) that corresponds to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). Characterized by being larger than the largest character in the column.
According to this feature, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the title display that corresponds to any type of specific reach. Therefore, no matter which character you pay attention to, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, so you can celebrate being controlled to be in an advantageous state even more.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) larger than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part and displaying the title display that will be displayed thereafter larger than the promotion text display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 27-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 27-1,
After the promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed, the game progresses to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), and a title display part in the specific reach starts. .
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part in a series of flows, and by displaying the title display that will be displayed later larger than the promotion text display. can.

The gaming machine of Form 27-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character of the character strings forming the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) constitutes the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)). It is characterized by being larger than the largest character in the string.
According to this feature, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the title display that corresponds to a specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character of the character string that makes up the promotional character display. Even if the user pays attention to the title, the title display can draw the user's attention.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special map, second special map),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
After it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the advantageous condition name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) corresponding to the advantageous condition to be controlled will be displayed. It is possible to display
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) larger than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) larger than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (effect control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is a situation in which it is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state. Moreover, by displaying the promotional text display before the title display part and displaying the subsequent title display larger than the promotional text display, attention can be drawn to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 28-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 28-1,
After the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed, it develops into the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display part in the specific reach starts, and the specific reach ( The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed after it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled by the low base weak reach A and B performances).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part in a series of flows, and by displaying the title display that will be displayed later larger than the promotion text display. After being informed that the player will be controlled into an advantageous state due to a specific reach, the name display of the advantageous state is displayed larger than the title display, thereby congratulating the player on being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) for a longer time than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 29-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 29-1,
The time from when all the character strings forming the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed corresponds to the specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by a longer time than the time from when a part of the character string that makes up the title display (title characters) is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed.
According to this feature, by making the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with the intention of blessing is clearly visible longer than the time during which the title display whose purpose is to agitate the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state, the game can give people a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of Form 29-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is changed to an operation suggestion display (image (small) promoting right-handed hitting and promotion of right-handed hitting) that suggests how to operate during the advantageous state. image (large)), and after a predetermined period of time has passed since switching to the operation suggestion display, operate using the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (operation method of launching the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R). This allows for advantageous control,
The time at which the advantageous state name display (title letters of jackpot start performance) switches to the operation suggestion display (right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and right-handed hitting promotion image (large)) corresponds to the specific reach (super reach performance). It is characterized by being shorter than the time it takes to finish the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is switched to the operation suggestion display in a short time, and after a predetermined period of time, advantageous control is performed by operating in the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display. It is possible to prevent disadvantages to the player due to changing the operating method from the period in which display of the advantageous state name ends.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part (operation promotion effects B and D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which promotion characters are displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the control will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is a situation in which the advantageous state is already controlled. This is the situation after being notified that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state for a longer period of time than displaying the promotion characters, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 30-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 30-1,
The prompting character display (operation prompting characters (small)) is displayed until the prompted action is performed or a valid time period for the prompted action has elapsed;
The time during which the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed is the period after the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small)) is displayed, the prompted action is not performed, and the prompted action is not performed. It is characterized by the fact that the effective time is longer than the time it takes to elapse.
According to this feature, after the prompting character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the time when the prompted action is not performed, thereby controlling the vehicle to an advantageous state. can be blessed.

The gaming machine of Form 30-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when all the character strings forming the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) are displayed until at least a part of the character strings is no longer displayed is the time when the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (lower case) )) is characterized by being longer than the displayed time.
According to this feature, the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with the intention of blessing is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the display of promotional characters whose purpose is to encourage the player to take action, thereby satisfying the player. It can give a feeling.

The gaming machine of Form 30-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 30-1 to 30-3,
A special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is a display of promotion characters (characters encouraging operation) without a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect);
In the special operation promotion display (operation promotion characters (large)), promotion characters (characters that prompt operation) are displayed after the promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed for a longer period of time than the special promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with blessings is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. be able to.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) for a longer time than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part and displaying the title display that will be displayed thereafter for a longer time than the promotion text display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 31-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 31-1,
The promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is displayed for a period of time from when all the character strings forming the title display (title characters) are displayed until at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed. It is characterized by being longer than time.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by making the time during which the title display is clearly visible longer than the time during which the promotional character display whose purpose is to encourage the player to take action is displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 31-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 31-1 or 31-2,
A special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is a display of promotion characters (characters encouraging operation) without a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect);
In the special operation promotion display (operation promotion characters (large)), promotion characters (characters that prompt operation) are displayed after the promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed,
The time during which the title display (title characters) is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, by making the time during which the title display is displayed longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed, attention can be drawn to the title display.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
After it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the advantageous condition name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) corresponding to the advantageous condition to be controlled will be displayed. It is possible to display
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start performance) for a longer time than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) for a longer time than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being notified that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in an advantageous state. Further, by displaying the promotional text display before the title display part and displaying the title display that will be displayed thereafter for a longer time than the promotion text display, attention can be drawn to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-14) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a sixth variation pattern (PA2-16) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and A plurality of fluctuation patterns including a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-15 to PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to an advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-17 to PA2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
When determining the fifth variation pattern, transmitting a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-14) to the production control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-16) to the production control means,
When determining the seventh variation pattern, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-15 to PB1-17) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-17 to PA2-19) to the production control means;
The performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The third reach (high base reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A performance) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performances) are reaches performed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A effect),
The third reach (high base reach A effect) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means is
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The expectation level suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The expectation level suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A performance),
It is characterized in that the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects).
According to this feature, since the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation level than the second reach in the normal state, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second reach, but the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the first reach. By not displaying it, it is not possible to make people expect excessively that the first reach will control the player to an advantageous state. On the other hand, the third reach in the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation level than the fourth reach in the special state, but the expectation level is higher than the first reach in the normal state. By displaying the expectation level suggestion display even in reach, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled in an advantageous state both in the case of the third reach and in the case of the fourth reach.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in the normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled by the advantageous state), and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a winning fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including (outlier fluctuation pattern),
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates an outlier fluctuation pattern in the normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies an outlier variation pattern in a probability variation state) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is a reach performed in the normal state,
The second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is a reach performed in a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state), the light emitting means control,
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table (high base reach system common title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (super reach performance in normal state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong Controlling the light emitting means using the introduction of reach A, the introduction of strong reach system strong reach B, and the introduction of strong reach system strong reach C,
In the introduction part of the second reach (super reach performance in variable probability state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled by using reach C and high base reach system reach D.
According to this feature, by making the title display part of the second reach in the special state shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, the special state can be advanced at a good tempo. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 34-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 34-1,
The frequency of the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) in the special state (variable probability state) is higher than the frequency of the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) in the normal state. There is.
According to this feature, even if the frequency of second reach increases in the special state, the special state can be advanced at a good tempo.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. ~12), a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PA2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among the multiple fluctuation patterns including and,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13) to the production control means,
When determining the fourth variation pattern, transmitting a fourth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The second reach (low base strongest reach performance) has a higher expectation of being in the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performances),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), the first reach is performed in the first display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side to the center of the display area). Display the title display (title characters) corresponding to
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strongest reach effect), the second display operation mode (display mode in which title characters are displayed reduced from enlarged display) that is different from the first display operation mode is displayed. Display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the reach,
When the special state (time saving state B (play time)) is controlled after reaching the specific number of times, a display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is displayed in the second It is characterized by display in a display mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed in a reduced size instead of being enlarged).
According to this feature, when the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specific number of times is displayed in the same way as the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation. Since the display is performed in two display operation modes, it is possible to recognize that the special state is highly advantageous after reaching the specific number of times.

The gaming machine of Form 35-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 35-1,
When ending the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state (time saving state B (play time)) will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times, the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) The present invention is characterized in that the title display (title characters) of the title display part is ended in the same display operation manner as that in which the title characters are enlarged and erased.
According to this feature, even when ending the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a certain number of times, the display operation mode is the same as when ending the display of the title of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation. Since the operation is ended in the display mode, it is possible to recognize that the special state is highly advantageous after reaching the specific number of times.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times (time saving state B (play time)), a display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times can be displayed. can be,
The size of the characters composing the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times (title letters of the play time start effect) is the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). larger than the size of the characters that make up the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether the title will be controlled to an advantageous state or not, whereas the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the title will be controlled to an advantageous state. The display shown is a situation in which the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, and the size of the characters that make up the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is changed to the title display corresponding to the specific reach. By making it larger than the font size, you can celebrate being controlled into a special state after reaching a certain number of times. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 36-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes multiple types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The characters that make up the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times are the title display (title letters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being larger than the letters that make it up.
According to this feature, the characters composing the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a specific number of times are displayed larger than the characters composing the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. After reaching it, you can be blessed with being controlled by a special state.

The gaming machine of Form 36-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 36-2,
The smallest character of the character string that makes up the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times (title characters of the play time start effect) corresponds to which type of specific reach (super reach effect) It is characterized by being larger than the largest character in the character string that makes up the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the character strings composing the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a certain number of times is the character string composing the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. It is displayed larger than our largest font, so no matter which font you pay attention to, the display indicating that you will be controlled into a special state after reaching a certain number of times will be displayed larger than the title display corresponding to a specific reach. Therefore, being controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times can be a blessing.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times (time saving state B (play time)), a display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times can be displayed. can be,
The display time of the display (title letters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times is longer than the display time of the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). Also long,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether the title will be controlled to an advantageous state or not, whereas the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the title will be controlled to an advantageous state. This is a situation in which a special state is entered after reaching a certain number of reaches, and by displaying a display indicating that a special state will be entered after reaching a certain number of reaches for a longer period of time than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, After reaching it, you can be blessed with being controlled by a special state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 37-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 37-1,
The time from when all the character strings that make up the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times is displayed until at least part of the character strings is no longer displayed is , characterized by being longer than the time from when a part of the character string forming the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed. There is.
According to this feature, a title display whose purpose is to arouse the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state is displayed during the time when the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a certain number of blessings is clearly visible. By making the time longer than the average time, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters),
The size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is the display (remaining number of characters until play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. larger than the size of the constituent characters,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters that make up the title display corresponding to a specific reach larger than the size of the letters that make up the display that shows the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching a certain number of times, It is possible to draw attention to the title display corresponding to the title. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 38-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach performance) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) and a second reach (low base strong reach) that is expected to be controlled to the advantageous state more than the first reach. A to C performances), including
The display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters) is displayed during the execution of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), (Low base strong reach A to C effect) is not displayed during execution.
According to this feature, in the first reach where expectations are low, by displaying the remaining number of times until reaching a special state after reaching a certain number of times, it is possible to make people aware of the number of times until reaching a special state after reaching a certain number of times. With a high second reach, it is possible to draw attention to the performance by not displaying the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times, and also reduce the player's sense of regret when the number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is small. It can be alleviated.

The gaming machine of Form 38-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 38-2,
When it is announced that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state, a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining time until play time) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) without displaying the number of times character) again,
If it is reported that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state, the specified number of times is reached after the second reach (low base strong reach effects A to C effects) is completed. The feature is that the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state (remaining number of times until play time characters) is displayed again.
According to this feature, when it is announced that the second reach will be controlled to the advantageous state, the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is not displayed again, so that the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is When the number of plays is small, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated. In addition, if it is reported that the second reach is not controlled to an advantageous state, the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed again after the second reach ends, so the number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed again. It can quickly provide relief when there is little.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation promotion effects A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters),
The size of the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is the same as the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number of times until play time characters) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. bigger than it,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means (C introduction).
According to this feature, the size of the characters that make up the promotional text display that prompts the player to take action at a timing related to a specific reach, and the size of the letters that make up the display that shows the remaining number of times until a special state after reaching a certain number of times are changed. By making the size larger than that of , it is possible to draw attention to the promotion character display, and it is possible to effectively urge the player to take action. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 39-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 39-1,
If the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion production A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the specific reach has been reached. A display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state (remaining number of times until play time) is displayed at the same time,
If the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed in the introduction part (operation promotion production D) of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), a special state will be activated after reaching the specific number of times. It is characterized by the fact that the display indicating the remaining number of times until the play time (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before developing to a specific reach, the remaining number of times until a special state after reaching a certain number of times is displayed at the same time as the promotional text is displayed, so that the remaining number of times until a special state after reaching a certain number of times is displayed. By not displaying the remaining number of times until a special state is reached after reaching a certain number of times in the operation promotion display of the introduction part, it is possible to determine whether or not it is notified that the control will be in an advantageous state.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters),
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance), the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters) is ended,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number characters until play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. Bigger than size;
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means (C introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the name of an advantageous state is displayed is the situation after it has been announced that the advantageous state will be controlled, and there is no need to display the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching a certain number of times. Therefore, before displaying the advantageous state name display, the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times ends, and the size of the characters that make up the advantageous state name display is changed to By making the size of the characters larger than the size of the characters that make up the display indicating the number of times remaining until the state is reached, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 40-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 40-1,
Regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching the specified number of times, a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times until play time) is displayed. The sizes of the characters that make up the characters are the same,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is the same as the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number characters until play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. It is characterized by being larger than its size.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of times remaining to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times, the size of the characters forming the advantageous state name display indicates the number of remaining times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times. By making the size of the characters larger than the size of the characters composing the display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 40-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) first puts the game media into the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) in the special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times. It is characterized in that a special fluctuation pattern (time saving B start fluctuation pattern) is determined when a (game ball) enters the ball.
According to this feature, when the game medium first enters the start area in the special state after reaching the specific number of times, it is possible to perform an effect according to the special variation pattern.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) may be changed from a first aspect (white aspect) to a second aspect (red or gold aspect) and displayed. It is possible and
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed. ) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), the specific reach (low base weak reach A, The time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is displayed is longer than the time when the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is displayed in the first mode (white mode). (title characters) are displayed for longer than the displayed time,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, when changing the title display corresponding to the specific reach from the first aspect to the second aspect in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the specific reach is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. By making the time that the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed longer than the time that the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode, it is possible to ensure that the change to the second mode has been made. It can be recognized. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 41-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed. ) may be changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), or may not be changed as the first aspect (white aspect),
When changing the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), , at a specific timing (when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the first mode (white mode) is changed to the second mode (red or golden mode), and a specific effect is generated. Outputs a sound (specific sound),
If the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not changed in the first mode (white mode), when the specific timing comes (title display When the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the period), the specific sound effect (specific sound) is output without changing the first mode (white mode).
According to this feature, a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at a specific timing, and a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at a specific timing. Since a specific sound effect is also output, it is possible to expect that the mode will change to the second mode by outputting the specific sound effect.

The gaming machine of Form 41-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes multiple types of aspects (red and golden aspects),
When changing the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red, gold aspect), , a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output when changing to any type of the second mode (red mode, golden mode).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at a specific timing, a specific sound effect is output when changing to any type of second mode. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which type of second mode changes by outputting the specific sound effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to change and display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect). can be,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled from the first aspect (white aspect) to a more advantageous state than the second aspect (red aspect). It is possible to change and display the third aspect (golden aspect) with high expectations,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed. ) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect) or the third aspect (golden aspect), the first aspect (white aspect) The display is changed from a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow) to a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow) and then to the second mode (a red mode) or the third mode (a golden mode). It is said that
According to this feature, even when changing the title display corresponding to a specific reach from the first mode to the second mode in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first mode to the third mode. Also, when changing from the common display mode to the second mode or the third mode, the common display mode is changed to the second mode or the third mode. Alternatively, until the change to the third mode, the user can expect the change to the third mode, which is more expected than the second mode, until the end.

The gaming machine of Form 42-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) shine, and when the light is clear, the characters change to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode). It is characterized by change.
According to this feature, by lighting the characters forming the title display, it is possible to encourage a change to the second mode or the third mode.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2) to the production control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-3) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base weak reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
A brightness data table (weak reach type) for the title display part that is common to the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) controlling the light emitting means using a common title);
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction). It is said that
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for two different reaches, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part can be set to the same brightness data table corresponding to each title display part. By using the data table, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until it is announced whether or not the situation will be advantageous, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state; a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-6) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state; and a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state. a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10), and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12), which is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2) to the production control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-3) to the production control means,
When the fifth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fifth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-4) to the production control means;
When the sixth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-4 to PA2-6) to the production control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part until the
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether the fourth reach is controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part until the propriety of the judgment is announced, and
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) are the same as the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach The expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
The luminance data table (weak control the light emitting means using the reach system common title),
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) Control the light emitting means using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means (C introduction).
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part the same for Reach 2 with high expectations and Reach 2 with low expectations, increases in cost and capacity can be prevented, and By using the corresponding brightness data tables, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state is reached, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed. .

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state; a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-6) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state; and a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state. a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10), and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12), which is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. A plurality of patterns including a ninth variation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a tenth variation pattern (PA2-13 to PA2-15) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2) to the production control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-3) to the production control means,
When the fifth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fifth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-4) to the production control means;
When the sixth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-4 to PA2-6) to the production control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) to the production control means;
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a ninth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13) to the production control means,
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a tenth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part until the
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether the fourth reach is controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part until the propriety of the judgment is announced, and
The fifth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) are the same as the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach The expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) includes the first reach (low base weak reach effect A effect), the second reach (low base weak reach effect B effect), and the third reach (low base strong reach effect A effect). ), the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than either of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
The luminance data table (weak control the light emitting means using the reach system common title),
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) Control the light emitting means using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for
In the title display part in the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the third title display part (strongest reach system strongest reach title) for the fifth reach. ,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the fifth reach (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). .
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for Reach 2, which has a high expectation level, and Reach 2, which has a low expectation level, the increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and the introduction part The brightness data table corresponding to By providing dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introduction part, the interest can be increased, and as a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to change and display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from a first aspect (white) to a second aspect (red or gold),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), if the title display (title characters) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), the first brightness data table (common title for weak reach systems) (white)) to control the light emitting means,
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), when changing the title display (title characters) to the second mode (red or gold), the second brightness data table (common title for weak reach systems) (red) or weak reach common title (gold)) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), regardless of whether the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach changes to the second mode (red or gold), the same The light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, whether the title display is not changed to the second mode or changed to the second mode in the title display part of a specific reach, the brightness data table corresponding to each introduction part can be made common. By using brightness data tables corresponding to each title display part to prevent an increase in cost and capacity, it is possible to prevent the title display from changing to the second mode and when changing it to the second mode. Each can be suitably rendered, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is as follows:
A first part (title start period) from when the title display corresponding to the specific reach starts to be displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed at the fixed position,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the luminance data table for the first part (weak reach title start) is used to emit light. control the means;
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the brightness data table for the second part (weak reach type title display) is set. controlling the light emitting means using
In the introduction part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponds to the first part from when the title display starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position in a specific reach, and the second part after the title display is displayed at the fixed position. By using the luminance data table corresponding to the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part and the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part, the period for displaying the title and the period until notifying whether or not an advantageous state is reached can be optimized. As a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Example]
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[Configuration, etc. of Pachinko gaming machine 1]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable piece becomes the winning ball. It approaches the device 6A and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting prize opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray), apart from the upper tray, from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the batting rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, for example.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 may be used as long as it can display setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. It should be noted that the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be executed repeatedly until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time saving state is also called a low certainty/high base state, the variable probability state is also called a high certainty/high base state, the normal state is also called a low certainty/low base state, etc. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

[Progress of production, etc.]
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching a reach mode with a non-probability variable pattern, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Substrate configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. It's good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

[Main operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is good if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the symbols.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so as to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in an on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

The CPU 103, which has executed such game control main processing, receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random numbers. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority play). Furthermore, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball hitting rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball launch rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball launch rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the variable special figure has a setting value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 8, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reach and super reach may differ depending on the setting value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

[Main operations of the production control board 12]
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the original position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the production control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

[Variation of basic explanation]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. Alternatively, the process may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May be included. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 131SG]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the feature section 131SG will be explained. In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic section 131SG, for example, the part written as "Step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "131SGS1", and "Normal reach" is replaced by "N reach" and "Super reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as "SP reach". Further, in the characteristic section 131SG, "variation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, configurations that are similar to those of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic explanation or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the following, the front side of Fig. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1.

Unlike the explanation of FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different ratios of displaying jackpot display results. This game machine will be described as a gaming machine in which the variable display result is not ``time saving, winning or losing'' and the jackpot probability is set to about 1/319.

In addition, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, variable display is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times) in a low certainty state. If the next jackpot does not occur, the game may be controlled to a time saving state B (also referred to as a relief time saving state or relief time saving state) among a plurality of types of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided to help players who have not won a jackpot despite playing games for a long period of time (for example, to reduce investment in games). , is a gaming state also called "play time" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled to be the jackpot A of the plurality of types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in the time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) among the plurality of time-saving states. Therefore, the number of variable display times from the end of the time saving state A to the arrival of the relief time saving is 790 times, but if the jackpot game state is controlled to be either jackpot B or jackpot C among multiple types of jackpots. Since the variable display is performed 110 times in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state), the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the variable probability state to the arrival of the relief time reduction is 900 times. Further, in this embodiment, the number of variable display times in the time saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time saving number counter becoming "0" is 1100 times.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, at the lower left of the image display device 5, it is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the first special symbol pending memory for which a starting prize has been won but the variable display has not been executed yet. A first special figure pending storage display area 130SG005D is provided, and in the lower right corner of the image display device 5, a pending display corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in which a starting prize has been won but the variable display has not been executed yet is displayed. A displayable second special figure pending storage display area 130SG005U is provided. At the lower center of the image display device 5, an active display area 130SG005F is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

In addition, on the right side of the image display device 5, there is a fourth symbol 131SG005J for informing the player that the variable display is being executed, and the same as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the center of the image display device 5. It is possible to display a small pattern 131SG005M in which a variable display is executed, and in the upper right corner of the image display device 5, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays until the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is controlled, which will be described later. It is possible to display a remaining number of rescue time reduction attainment display 131SG005Z indicating the remaining number of rescue time reduction attainment.

Furthermore, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a left game area 2L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed with a left side where game balls can flow down. It is formed in the right game area 2R that can be flowed down. The game ball weakly launched by the firing device flows down the first path as the left game area 2L, and the game ball strongly launched by the firing device flows down the second path as the right game area 2R.

Further, at the lower left of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory display area 131SG005D that indicates the number of reserved special symbols by the number of reserved displays is displayed, and at the lower right of the image display device 5, a second reserved special symbol is displayed. A second pending storage display area 131SG005U is provided in which the number of stored items is indicated by the number of pending displays. Furthermore, an active display area 131SG005F is provided at the lower center of the image display device 5, in which a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed as an active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first big winning hole and a second big winning hole along the downward direction of the game balls. The first big prize opening is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 131SG082A (see Figure 11-2) to open and close the big winning opening door (not shown), which allows the game ball to enter the open state and the game ball to enter the closed state where the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change the state. The second grand prize opening is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 131SG082B (see Figure 11-2) to open and close the grand prize opening door (not shown). It is possible to change the state.

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A that can detect game balls is provided in the first grand prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B that can detect game balls is provided in the second grand prize opening. There is.

In other words, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 2L (first route) can win in the general winning opening 10 and the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and can win in the right gaming area 2R (first route). 2 paths), the game balls flowing down the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, It is possible to win a prize, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

The switch circuit 110 in this embodiment is connected to a first count switch 131SG023A, a second count switch 131SG023B, and a jackpot start switch 131SG024 built in the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 2L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 2R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there is a first Special symbol display device 131SG004A, second special symbol display device 131SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, first reservation display device 131SG025A capable of displaying the first reservation memory number, capable of displaying the second reservation memory number 2nd pending display 131SG025B, normal symbol display 131SG020 that can perform variable display of normal symbols, normal pattern pending display 131SG025C that can display the number of normal patterns stored, number of rounds of the jackpot game during the jackpot game (jackpot Round indicator 131SG131 capable of displaying the game type), jackpot game state, high-accuracy/high-base state (variable probability state), low-accuracy/high-base state (time-saving state), etc. A game in which game balls are launched toward the right gaming area 2R. right-handed lamp 131SG132 that lights up in the high-accuracy/high-base state (variable-probability state), variable-probability lamp 131SG133 that lights up in the high-accuracy/high-base state (variable-probability state), and low-accuracy/high-base state (variable-probability state) and low-accuracy/high-base state (time-saving state) A game information display section is provided in which lighted time-saving lamps 131SG134 are collectively arranged. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lights up exceptionally from the timing when the variable display stops.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 transmits gaming information (signals) to external devices such as a management computer of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). It is equipped with an information output circuit for output.

In this embodiment, the second big winning hole is provided with a V winning hole and an outlet located on the downstream side of the V winning hole. Further, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided on the upstream side of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, the game ball flowing down inside the second big winning hole can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. It is assumed that the water cannot pass through the water and flows down to the outlet.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 includes a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that a game ball has passed through the V winning hole provided downstream of the second big winning hole. and an ejection switch 131SG023B2 that can detect that the game ball has passed through the ejection port.

Further, a vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 are connected to the effect control board 12. In addition, the lamp control board 14 includes a right-handed LED 131SG031 for encouraging a right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up while the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that is lit while the second special symbol is being variably displayed. the second special figure LED 131SG033, the first reservation LED 131SG034A that lights up when the first reservation memory number is 1 to 2, and the first reservation LED 131SG034B that lights up when the first reservation memory number is 3 to 4. , a second hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second hold memory number is 1 to 2, a second hold LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second hold memory number is 3 to 4, and are built in the push button 31B. The button LED 62, the movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR2 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern, a random number MR4 for determining a fluctuation pattern, a random number MR5 for determining a normal figure display result, and a random number MR6 for determining an initial value of MR5 is controlled to be countable. . Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these The range of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in the variable display of special symbols, normal symbols, etc. A variation pattern determination table and the like that store a plurality of types of variation patterns serving as modes are stored.

FIG. 11-3(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this embodiment, the special figure display results are displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/319.68 in this example), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/319.68 in this example). /80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, in addition to the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7, the jackpot type determination table (C1) shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), the fluctuation pattern type determination table, the fluctuation pattern determination table, and the regular pattern display result determination table (not shown) ), a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball launch rate) does not change depending on the setting value, but the probability of winning the jackpot (ball launch rate) varies depending on the setting value. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the values change.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 11-3 (C1) and FIG. 11-3 (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 11-3 (C1), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 11-3 (C1), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot type in this example will be explained using FIG. 11-3(D). In this embodiment, as jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided, in which time saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, these jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C can be achieved by entering the V winning hole after the game ball enters the second big winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and the maximum after the end of the jackpot game. This is also a jackpot in which variable probability control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this embodiment, the open states of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) include a short open state in which the open state is short (for example, 0.1 seconds) and a long open state in which the open state is long. (for example, 15 seconds). Jackpot A is when the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and jackpot B and jackpot C are when the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state. shall be.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short-circuit open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can't expect it, it's essentially a regular jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot B" changes the second jackpot in the first round to an open state that is advantageous for the player, and the first jackpot in the second to sixth rounds that is advantageous to the player. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability change control is executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot C" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to 10th rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

In addition, in this example, a form in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of jackpot types is two or less, or four. More than one type may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 are assigned to jackpot A. 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state at a rate of 50%, so that the jackpot is achieved. After the game ends, both probability change control and time saving control are carried out. Furthermore, if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state with a probability of 100%, and the probability change control will be performed after the jackpot game ends. and time-saving control are both implemented.

In this example, even if the jackpot A is achieved, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is short-circuited, but it is extremely rare. , V will not be won and probability variable control will not be executed. In addition, even in the case of jackpot B and jackpot C, it is possible but extremely rare that you will not be able to win a prize when the V lid is in a long open state, so it will be jackpot B and jackpot C. In this case, the description will be made on the assumption that V is won and probability variable control is executed.

In addition, in this example, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by the special figure display result determination. It may also be determined using MR1, which is a random value for.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C in which probability change control and time saving control can be executed 110 times after the end of the jackpot game state is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and for example, a jackpot D etc. may be provided in which the time saving control is performed 1009 times (variable probability state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. By doing this, it is highly likely that there will be a jackpot next time, so the interest will be increased, and even if the probability variable control ends without a jackpot occurring in the probability variable state 110 times after the end of jackpot D, the time saving state A (low probability After performing 899 variable displays without a jackpot in the /high base state), by performing only one variable display in the normal state, the system is further controlled to the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state), which will be described later. Therefore, interest will increase.

[Number of time savings]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, when jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, (1) time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low In the time saving state A (in this embodiment, the time saving control is performed 110 times, BATTLE RUSH) in which the probability control is performed 110 times.In addition, either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game enters the probability variable area. When a ball wins, (1) the time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the variable probability state where the variable probability control is performed 110 times (in this example, the time saving control is performed 110 times). RUSH)).In addition, when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled by jackpot in a low accuracy state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low accuracy It is controlled to time saving state B in which the control is performed 1100 times (in this example, the play time is 1100 times shortened).However, after the end of time saving state B, the control is performed again 900 times without being controlled to hit the jackpot in a low probability state. Even if the number of changes is made, the time saving state B will not be controlled again based on this change.

Note that the relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by variable displaying n times (900 times in this embodiment) without being controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving attainment rate K is It can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K=Relief time saving arrival rate, ML=Jackpot probability, n=Number of variable displays)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is about 1/319, the relief time saving attainment rate K is 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that allows setting of a setting value, if the setting value with a lower jackpot probability is set, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate becomes, the player can be rescued even with a setting value with a low jackpot probability. can do.

[Variation pattern]
FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation patterns in this embodiment. The variation patterns of this embodiment are roughly divided into a loss variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss, and a jackpot variation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-5, the out-of-reach fluctuation patterns can be roughly divided into non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns whose fluctuation pattern type is non-reach), and normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns in which no reach effect is executed and the result is a loss. Variation pattern of normal reach where reach effect is executed and misses (variation pattern where variation pattern type is normal reach), reach effect of low base weak super reach A or reach of low base weak super reach B in normal state (low base state) Variation pattern of low base weak super reach where the performance is executed and misses (fluctuation pattern type is low base weak super reach variation pattern), final low base strong super reach A reach in normal state (low base state) A variation pattern of low base strong super reach A that results in a miss after the performance is executed (a variation pattern where the variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A), and finally a low base strong super reach B in the normal state (low base state) The variation pattern of low base strong super reach B that is executed and misses (the variation pattern of variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B), in the normal state (low base state), the low base strong super reach Variation pattern of low base strong super reach C that results in reach effect of reach C being executed (fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C variation pattern), finally low base in normal state (low base state) The variation pattern of the strongest super reach on a low base that is executed and misses when the reach effect of the strongest super reach is executed (the variation pattern of the strongest super reach on a low base), the final result in time saving state A or definite variable state (high base state) Variation pattern of high base super reach A that results in a miss when the reach effect of high base super reach A is executed (fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A variation pattern), time saving state A or definite variable state (high base state) , the fluctuation pattern of high base super reach B is finally executed and the reach effect of high base super reach B is missed (the fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of high base super reach B), the time saving state A or the variable probability state (high base super reach B). Variation pattern of high base super reach C that ultimately results in the execution of reach effect of high base super reach C (base state) (variation pattern of high base super reach C as variation pattern type), time saving state A or definite variation In the state (high base state), a fluctuation pattern of high base super reach D (fluctuation pattern of high base super reach D whose fluctuation pattern type is a fluctuation pattern) is provided in which the reach effect of high base super reach D is finally executed and misses. ing.

As a variation pattern where the variation pattern type is non-reach, the special figure variation time is 12000ms, and when the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display in the normal state is 2 or less, no reach effect is executed. PA1-1, special figure fluctuation time is 5000 ms, and when the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display in the normal state is 3, no reach effect is executed PA1-2, special figure fluctuation time PA1-3 is 2000 ms and no reach effect is executed during time saving control (time saving state A or probability variable state), and special symbol variation time is 500 ms and any reach effect is not executed during time saving control (time saving state B). There are four types of variation patterns PA1-4 in which no performance is executed.

As a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is normal reach, there is one type of variation pattern PA2-1 in which the special symbol variation time is 20000 ms and the reach effect of normal reach is executed and the player loses.

The variation pattern of the low base weak super reach variation pattern is PA2-2, where the special figure variation time is 43000ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, and the special figure variation time is Two types of variation patterns are provided, PA2-3, which is 53000ms and results in a low base weak super reach B reach effect being executed and a miss.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach A, the special symbol variation time is 63000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed. PA2-4, which is executed and misses, the special symbol fluctuation time is 73000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed and it becomes a miss. PA2-5, the special symbol fluctuation time is 40000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, and it misses. There are three types of variation patterns PA2-6.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach B, the special symbol variation time is 78000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed. PA2-7 is executed and misses, the special figure fluctuation time is 83000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed and it becomes a miss. PA2-8, the special figure fluctuation time is 45000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B and misses. Three types of variation patterns are provided, PA2-9.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach C, the special symbol variation time is 88000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed. PA2-10, which is executed and misses, the special symbol fluctuation time is 93000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed and it becomes a miss. PA2-11, the special symbol fluctuation time is 50000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B and it misses. There are three types of variation patterns PA2-12.

The variation pattern of the variation pattern type of low base strongest super reach is that the special symbol variation time is 98000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed. PA2-13 is a miss, and PA2-14 is a miss because the special symbol fluctuation time is 103000ms, and after the low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, the low base strongest super reach reach effect is executed. , the special figure variation time is 60000ms, and the reach effect of the strongest low base super reach is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a miss PA2- 15 three types of variation patterns are provided.

As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach A, there is one variation pattern of PA2-16 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach A is executed and misses. It is provided. As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach B, there is one variation pattern of PA2-17 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach B is executed and misses. It is provided. As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach C, there is one variation pattern of PA2-18 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach C is executed and misses. It is provided. As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach D, there is one variation pattern of PA2-19 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach D is executed and misses. It is provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-6, the jackpot variation patterns include non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, as well as the loss variation pattern. Variation patterns of the following variation pattern types are provided: low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, as a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is non-reach, the special symbol variation time is 500ms + 15000ms, and during time-saving control (time-saving state B), any reach One type of variation pattern, PB1-18, in which no performance is performed is provided.

As a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is normal reach, there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-1 in which the special symbol variation time is 20000ms+15000ms and a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a jackpot is achieved.

The variation pattern for the low base strong super reach A variation pattern type is that the special symbol variation time is 63000ms+15000ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach A reach effect is executed. PB1-2, which is executed and becomes a jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation time is 73000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed and becomes a jackpot. PB1-3, the special symbol fluctuation time is 40000ms + 15000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. Three types of fluctuation patterns of PB-4 are provided.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach B, the special symbol variation time is 78000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed. PB1-5 is executed and becomes a jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation time is 83000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed and becomes a jackpot. PB1-6, the special symbol fluctuation time is 45000ms + 15000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. There are three types of variation patterns PB1-7.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach C, the special symbol variation time is 88000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed. PB1-8 is executed and becomes a jackpot, the special symbol variation time is 93000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed and becomes a jackpot. PB1-9, the special symbol fluctuation time is 50000ms + 15000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. There are three types of variation patterns PB1-10.

The variation pattern of the variation pattern type of low base strongest super reach is that the special symbol variation time is 98000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed. PB1-11 which becomes a jackpot when the special symbol fluctuation time is 103000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed and becomes a jackpot PB1-12 , PB1- where the special symbol variation time is 60000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of the strongest low base super reach is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. There are 13 types of variation patterns.

The variation pattern of the variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach A, the special symbol variation time is 30000ms + 15000ms, and there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-14 in which the reach effect of High Base Super Reach A is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided. The fluctuation pattern type of high base super reach B is one type of fluctuation pattern of PB1-15 where the special symbol fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of high base super reach B is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided. The fluctuation pattern type of high base super reach C is one type of fluctuation pattern of PB1-16 where the special symbol fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of high base super reach C is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided. As a variation pattern of the variation pattern type High Base Super Reach D, there is one variation pattern of PB1-17 where the special symbol variation time is 30000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of High Base Super Reach D is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided.

[Fluctuation pattern type determination table/Fluctuation pattern determination table]
The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include a plurality of variable pattern type determination tables for determining variable pattern types according to gaming conditions and variable display results, and variable patterns determined by the variable pattern type determination tables, gaming conditions, and variable display results. Also included are a plurality of variation pattern type determination tables for determining variation patterns according to the display result and the number of pending memories of special symbols to be variable displayed (number of pending memories for variable display).

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the gaming state and variable display results. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read out in step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing, and the variation pattern type is determined.

For example, if the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result is a loss, select the loss variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the variation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base weak super reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the variation pattern type is determined. If the type is determined as "low base strong super reach A" and the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach B", and the value of random number MR3 is determined as "low base strong super reach B". is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach C", and when the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4095, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strongest super reach" decided on.

In addition, if the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state and the variable display result is a loss, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) and determine the fluctuation pattern for the loss. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing table B with the value of the random number MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the variation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the variation pattern type is determined as "High Base Super Reach A", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the variation pattern is determined. If the type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach B" and the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach C" and the value of the random number MR3 is 4095. If it is within the range, the variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state B and the variable display result is a loss, select the loss variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7(C), and select the loss variation pattern determination table C. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach".

In addition, if the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Normal Reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strong Super". If the random number MR3 value is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the variation pattern type is determined to "Low Base Strong Super Reach B" and the random number MR3 value is in the range of 2677 to 3706. If so, the variation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the random value MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state and the variable display result is a loss, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (E) and determine the corresponding jackpot variation pattern. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing table B with the value of the random number MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Normal Reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach". A", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the variation pattern type is determined to "High Base Super Reach B", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380 The variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and when the random value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state B and the variable display result is a loss, select the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), and The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach".

After determining the variable pattern type as described above, depending on the gaming state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols to perform variable display (number of reserved variables subject to variable display), Select one of the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in , and compare the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 read out in step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the fluctuation pattern type.

For example, if the variable display result is a loss, the gaming state is normal, and the number of variable display target pending memories is 0 to 2, select the loss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-8 (A). , the deviation pattern determination table A is compared with the random value MR4 to determine a variation pattern. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1. If the determined variation pattern type is low base weak super reach, if the random number MR4 value is within the range of 0 to 199, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-2, and the random number MR4 value is 200 to 255. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-3.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the random number MR4 value is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, and the random number MR4 value is 89 to 173. If the random number value MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a loss, the gaming state is normal, and the number of variable display target pending memories is 3, select the loss variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-8(B) and select the corresponding A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4. If the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the random number MR4 value is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, and the random number MR4 value is 89 to 173. If the random number value MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a loss and the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, select the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), and select the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C. A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing C and the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-3. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-17. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-18. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-19.

In addition, if the variable display result is a loss and the gaming state is the time saving state B, select the loss variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-4.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is the normal state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-10 (A), and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the random value The fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to PB1-2, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-2. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-3, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to PB1-5, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-5. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-6, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-8, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-8. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-9, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strongest Super Reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to PB1-11, and the value of random number MR4 is 82 to 166. If the random number value MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-10(B), and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing B with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-14. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-15. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-17.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is time saving state B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-18.

[Expectations for super reach performance]
When the type of variation pattern and the variation pattern are determined as described above, the expected jackpot is as shown in FIGS. 11-11(A) to 11-11(C). The jackpot expectation of a super reach performance is the percentage of jackpots when the corresponding super reach performance is executed, and the probability of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed is the probability of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed. It is a value calculated by dividing by the sum of the percentage of winnings by executing the corresponding super reach effect and the percentage of losing by executing the corresponding super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-11(A), among the reach performances of super reach performed when the gaming state is normal, the reach performances of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B are Since there is no direct jackpot, the expected jackpot is 0% for each, but from the reach effects of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B, other super reaches (low base strong super reach A ~ C, low base weak super reach) may develop into a reach effect, and the expected degree of development from low base weak super reach A to other super reach reach effects is approximately 44%, and from low base weak super reach B to other super reach effects. The level of expectation for the development of Super Reach's Reach production is approximately 68%. The expected level of development of a super reach performance is the rate at which it will develop into other super reach performances when the corresponding super reach performance is executed. The rate of development is determined by the sum of the ratio of executing the relevant super reach performance and developing into another super reach performance, and the ratio of executing the relevant super reach performance and failing without developing into another super reach performance. This is the value calculated by dividing.

Also, among the super reach effects that are executed when the gaming state is normal, the jackpot expectation for the low base strong super reach A reach effect is about 20%, and the jackpot expectation for the low base strong super reach B reach effect is about 20%. The jackpot expectation level is about 25%, the jackpot expectation level for the low base strong super reach C reach effect is about 35%, and the jackpot expectation level for the low base strong super reach reach effect is about 55%. Furthermore, the jackpot expectation of the reach performance of Low Base Strong Super Reach A to C and Low Base Strongest Super Reach is as follows: when developing from Low Base Weak Super Reach A, when developing from Low Base Weak Super Reach B, and when developing from Low Base Weak Super Reach B. The expected jackpot is different when executed directly without going through Weak Super Reach A and B, and the expected jackpot for the reach performance of Low Base Strong Super Reach A, which evolved from Low Base Weak Super Reach A, is approximately 19. %, the expected jackpot of the reach effect of low base strong super reach A that evolved from low base weak super reach B is about 20%, the jackpot of the reach effect of low base strong super reach A that was executed directly without going through B The expectation level is about 21%, and the jackpot expectation of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, which evolved from low base weak super reach A, is about 24%, and the low base strong super reach B, which developed from low base weak super reach B. The expected jackpot for the reach effect of is about 25%, and the expected jackpot for the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, which was executed directly without going through B, was about 27%, which evolved from low base weak super reach A. The jackpot expectation of the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is about 33%, and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, which evolved from low base weak super reach B, is about 35%. The expected jackpot for the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, which was executed directly without any hit, is about 37%, and the jackpot expectation for the reach performance of low base strong super reach, which evolved from low base weak super reach A, is about 53%. The expected jackpot of the low base strongest super reach reach effect developed from low base weak super reach B is approximately 55%, and the jackpot expectation level of the low base strongest super reach reach effect executed directly without going through B is approximately This will be 57%.

As shown in Figure 11-11(B), the jackpot expectation of the reach performance of high base super reach A executed when the gaming state is time saving state A is about 14%, and the reach performance of high base super reach B The jackpot expectation level of the reach performance of the high base super reach C is about 27%, and the jackpot expectation level of the reach performance of the high base super reach D is about 70%.

As shown in Figure 11-11(C), the jackpot expectation of the reach effect of high base super reach A executed when the gaming state is variable probability state is about 40%, and the reach effect of high base super reach B is about 40%. The jackpot expectation level is about 45%, the jackpot expectation level for the reach performance of the high base super reach C is about 60%, and the jackpot expectation level for the reach performance for the high base super reach D is about 90%.

As will be described later, in the super reach performance, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display that suggests the jackpot expectation level of the corresponding super reach performance by the number of stars. As shown in Figure 11-11(A), among the super reaches performed when the gaming state is normal, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed for the low base weak super reach A and B reach effects, and the 3 stars for the expectation level suggestion display in the reach performance of strong base super reach A, 3.5 stars for the expectation level suggestion display for the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, and expectations for the reach performance of low base strong super reach C 4 stars are displayed in the degree suggestion display, and 4.5 stars are displayed in the expectation degree suggestion display in the reach performance of the strongest low base super reach. As shown in Figures 11-11 (B) and (C), 3 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display in the reach performance of high base super reach A that is executed when the gaming state is time saving state A and variable probability state. 3.5 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for the reach performance of high base super reach B, and 4 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for the reach performance of high base super reach C. 4.5 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for D's reach performance.

The same number of stars will be displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for the super reach reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is normal and the super reach reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is variable. However, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation level suggestion display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectation level is not the same. If the number of stars displayed in the degree suggestion display is the same, the super reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is in a variable state is greater than the super reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is in the normal state. It is suggested that the reach performance of the reach has a higher jackpot expectation.

In addition, whether it is a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is normal or a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is variable, the expectation level suggestion is displayed. Each time the number of stars displayed increases by 0.5, the implied jackpot expectation increases, but as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the super Also in the reach effect expectation level suggestion display, the more the number of stars increases, the greater the amount of increase in the suggested jackpot expectation level. Also, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), when the number of stars displayed in the expectation level suggestion display increases from 3 to 3.5, the amount of increase in the jackpot expectation level is It is the same whether it is a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is normal or a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is variable, but the expectation level The amount of increase in the jackpot expectation when the number of stars displayed in the suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4 and from 4 to 4.5 is when the gaming state is normal. The reach effect of the super reach executed when the gaming state is in a variable probability state is larger than the reach effect of the super reach.

[Production control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIGS. 11-13(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and any value may be set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (B), determines whether the variable display result is a "miss" or "jackpot" (predetermined result), or the variable display result. ``In the event of a jackpot, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation designation command that specifies the stop (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. be.

Command 9000H is an initialization designation (power-on designation) command for displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on in the image display device 5. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery designation command for displaying a power outage recovery screen on the image display device 5 indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from a power outage (power outage) state.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command that designates display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot start specification command and the jackpot end specification command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command that the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the first pending memory display area 132SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the second pending memory display area 132SG005U or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that designates the winning determination result at the time of starting winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

The command D100H is a jackpot start switch passage notification command that notifies that the game ball has passed the jackpot start switch 131SG024 in a state where the variable display result is a jackpot, that is, the start of the jackpot game. The command D200H is a V winning notification command that notifies that the game ball has passed the V switch 131SG023B1 in the jackpot game state, that is, the game state will be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game.

The command E1XXH is a remaining time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining number of times of time saving control in the time saving state (time saving state A) excluding the relief time saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining probability variation number notification command that notifies the remaining probability variation number of times in the probability variation state.

Command F100H is a right-handed player LED lighting notification command that notifies the right-handed player LED 131SG031 to be lit. Command F101H is a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command that notifies that the right-handed LED 131SG031 is turned off.

The command 91XXH is a command for specifying the number of rescue time reductions at the time of recovery, and is an effect control command for converting the value of the rescue time reduction counter into hexadecimal and specifying it at the time of power restoration. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), the command for specifying the number of times saving time is Different EXT data is set depending on the digit (4th digit).

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are commands 1 command for specifying the number of times saving time saving during recovery that specifies the first digit of the value of the number of saving time saving times. It is. Commands 9110H to 911FH are 2 commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions during recovery, which specify the second digit of the value of the number of rescue time reductions. Commands 9130H to 913FH are three commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions during recovery, which specify the third digit of the value of the number of rescue time reductions. Commands 9140H to 914FH are four commands for specifying the number of times the rescue time is shortened during recovery, which specifies the fourth digit of the value of the number of times the rescue time is shortened.

The command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the rescue time is shortened. In the rescue time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (D), different EXT data is set depending on the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the rescue time is shortened. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13(D), the command 9400H is a rescue time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a relief time reduction number B designation command that specifies that there are 1 to 125 times remaining until relief time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a relief time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 times remaining until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947FH is a command for specifying the number of rescue time reductions D, which specifies that there are 127 or more times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened. In the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is shortened is 100, command 9601H is sent as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of variable display times is 700, the relief Command 9607H is transmitted as a time saving number 1 designation command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data holding area]
The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 131SG150 as shown in FIG. It is being The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 131SG151C, a game control flag setting section 131SG152, It includes a game control timer setting section 131SG153, a game control counter setting section 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 131SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store pending data (pending memory) in the second special figure pending storage section 131SG151B is always 4 regardless of the gaming state. The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 131SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store pending data (pending memory) in the second special figure pending storage section 131SG151B is always 4 regardless of the gaming state. The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum of four reservation memories can be stored as the first special symbol reservation memory (retention memory that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151A), and a maximum of four reservation memories can be stored as the second special symbol reservation memory ( A maximum of four pending memories can be stored in the second special figure pending storage section 131SG151B.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

In addition, when executing the variable display, the CPU 103 first inputs random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the second special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151B if the second special symbol reservation memory exists in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 6). After reading out, the storage contents of the second special figure reservation storage section 131SG151B are shifted. In other words, when the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the second special figure reservation storage section 131SG151B, the CPU 103 stores the random numbers MR1 to MR4 stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the second special figure reservation storage section 131SG151B. At the same time as reading out the values of MR1 to random number MR4, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of pending number 2 is used as the pending memory of pending number 1 and the pending memory of pending number 3. The stored suspension memory is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 2, and the suspension memory stored as suspension memory of suspension number 4 is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 3.

Moreover, CPU103 determines whether the 1st special figure reservation memory exists, when the reservation memory is not memorize|stored in the 2nd special figure reservation memory|storage part 131SG151B. When the first special figure reservation memory exists, after reading the random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A, the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A are shifted. In other words, when the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A, the CPU 103 stores the random numbers MR1 to MR4 stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A. At the same time as reading out the values of MR1 to random number MR4, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of pending number 2 is used as the pending memory of pending number 1 and the pending memory of pending number 3. The stored suspension memory is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 2, and the suspension memory stored as suspension memory of suspension number 4 is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result (if the variable display result is a jackpot, the random number value After executing the judgment of the jackpot type based on MR2), in the variation pattern judgment process (see Figure 6), different variation patterns are determined depending on the gaming state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol for which variable display is executed. After determining the type of variation pattern using the type determination table, the variation pattern is further determined using a different variation pattern determination table depending on the determined type of variation pattern, gaming status, number of pending memories, etc.

That is, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of pending memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the pending memory immediately before variable display.

The normal pattern holding storage section 131SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 131SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 131SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 131SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 131SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 131SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 131SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR6 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 131SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

[Production control data holding area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190 as shown in FIG. 11-15(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 131SG190 shown in FIG. 11-15(A) includes a production control flag setting section 131SG191, a production control timer setting section 131SG192, a production control counter setting section 131SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 131SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 131SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 131SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 131SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 131SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 131SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-15(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 131SG194. The start winning command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) is provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) is provided. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 131SG194A are an area for storing these starting opening winning designation commands and a storage area for storing the symbol designation commands. The storage area, the area for storing the variable category designation command, the area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and the area for storing the pending display flag are associated with the pending memory number, and the first special figure pending memory is created. A storage area (entry) is secured for separately storing the special figure and the second special figure reservation memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition has been met is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in FIG. will be deleted. Then, the storage contents of storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted one by one to the storage areas higher up.

As described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the active display buffer 131SG194B stores the content of the pending memory (for which the start condition is satisfied). data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 11-15(C), a storage area similar to the starting winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is provided. In other words, there is an area for storing the starting opening winning designation command, an area for storing the symbol designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag. , is provided.

In this embodiment, if a starting winning occurs when the variable display is not executed and there is no pending memory, a starting winning prize designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a pending memory based on the starting winning, etc. The number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without passing through the reception command buffer 131SG194A at the time of starting winning. Incidentally, the suspension display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing a prefetch notice setting process (S161) to be described later.

The storage contents of the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Note that the pending display flag is a flag indicating a display mode of an active display corresponding to a pending display or a variable display in progress. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to suggest the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of the pending display flag).

[Start winning determination process]
FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (131SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (131SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 131SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 131SGS102 (131SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 131SGS101 (131SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 131SGS102 (131SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (131SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (131SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 131SG154. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 131SGS105 (131SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 131SGS103 and 131SGS106, the number of special figure reservations stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 131SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the winning type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section 131SG154. 131SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the free entry in the special figure reservation storage section (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a “big hit” or “small hit”. is used to determine the jackpot type/small win type when the variable display result is a "big hit" or "small win". The random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine a variation pattern including a variable display time of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. By executing the process of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (131SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (131SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (131SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 131SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 131SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N at 131SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

[Random numerical value judgment process when winning a prize]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 131SGS 112 in FIG. 11-17 as the winning random value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (FIG. 6) is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "jackpot" and enter the jackpot game state. A determination is made as to whether or not to control. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 6), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined that the special figure display result will be a "jackpot", and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will perform a pre-read notice such as a panel display performance or a pending notice performance, as will be described later. will be executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-17, the CPU 103 first specifies the gaming state (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3(B) (step 131SGS122). . Then, in step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, a symbol designation command transmission setting is made in accordance with the loss (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 131SGS126b). If the gaming state is the normal state, select the loss variation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(A) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the gaming state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether the gaming state is the time saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the gaming state is not the time-saving state B, that is, the gaming state is the time-saving state A or the variable probability state, select the loss variation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7(B) and proceed to step 131SGS131 ( In step 131SGS126e), if the gaming state is time saving state B, select the losing variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7(C) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

Further, in step 131SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 131SGS130a). When the gaming state is the normal state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (D) is shown, and when the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the table is shown in Figure 11-7 (E). If the jackpot variation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. , step 131SGS130d, step 131SGS130e).

In step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern type determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 131SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and other (normal reach). For example, if the random number MR3 is a variation pattern type of non-reach, the variation category is determined to be non-reach, and if the random number MR3 is a variation pattern type of normal reach, the variation category is determined to be other (normal reach), and the variation category is determined to be other (normal reach). Numerical MR3 is low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B , high base super reach C, or high base super reach D, the fluctuation category may be determined to be super reach. Then, transmission settings are made for a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in FIGS. 11-17(B)) according to the determination result, and the winning random value determination process is ended (step 131SGS132).

Note that the command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

[Game control main processing]
FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processing in steps S1 to S7, the processing in steps S8 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when the production control command instructing recovery from a power outage is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of variable displays until the relief time is shortened. Then, a value obtained by converting the current value of the rescue time reduction number counter into hexadecimal is set, and control is performed to send a command for specifying the number of rescue time reduction times at the time of recovery to the effect control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to set a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction number counter and send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 125, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9401H as the relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions is sent, and the remaining variable number until the current rescue time reduction is You will be notified of the number of views.

Note that although this embodiment shows a case where, at the time of restoration from a power outage, a command for specifying the number of times to shorten rescue time and a command for specifying the number of times to shorten rescue time are transmitted in addition to the command at the time of recovery, but this is limited to such an embodiment. do not have. For example, the configuration may be such that the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 is set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened and then transmitted. .

Further, when RAM clear is requested in step S3, if there is no backup data in step S4, or if there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, the area of the rescue time reduction counter is also cleared in the initialization process of step S8. Execute clear processing on the included area.

Further, when the production control command instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "900" (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "900" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this embodiment, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if a jackpot does not occur even after executing the variable display 900 times, the relief time is shortened and the game enters the time saving state B. It will be controlled. In addition, in this embodiment, since the effect control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 performs initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the transmission of the production control command instructing.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (in this embodiment, it is "900"), sets the current value of the rescue time reduction counter to a hexadecimal number, and performs the recovery at the time of recovery. Control is performed to transmit a time saving number designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction number counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the game progress process, is executed, so that the variable display does not start before the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until relief time is shortened.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" for initial setting. However, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed when the RAM clearing process is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and RAM clear processing is executed. When an abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time saving counter may be initialized.

[Time saving flag, fixed variable flag]
In this embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for being controlled to be in the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. Note that in the following description, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the time-saving state A is controlled via jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and when the time-saving state A ends (the timing when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state A, the 110 time-saving control ends and the normal state (timing controlled by).

The time saving flag B is set when the time saving state B is controlled via the relief time saving. This time saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays are executed after the RAM is cleared and the display result does not become a jackpot symbol, or when the display result does not become a jackpot symbol after the end of the jackpot game state in a low probability state. is set when is executed, and is cleared when time saving state B ends (timing when a jackpot occurs during time saving state B, timing when 1100 time saving controls are completed and control returns to normal state, etc.) .

The variable probability flag is set when the variable probability state is controlled. In this embodiment, when a V prize is won in the first round of a jackpot game, when the jackpot game ends, a probability change flag is set as the game state is controlled to a probability change state. This probability variation flag is erased at the timing when the probability variation state ends (timing when a jackpot occurs during the probability variation state, timing when the 110th probability variation control is executed and control returns to the normal state, etc.). For example, if the determination is YES in step 131SGS69A of FIG. 11-20, which will be described later, the variable probability flag is erased based on the fact that this is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the variable probability state.

[Special design normal processing]
11-19 and FIG. 11-20 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 131SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 131SGS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 131SGS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps 131SGS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Note that the mode is not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured to do so.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 131SGS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 131SGS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value and a random number for hit determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot when they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if the probability variable state is low), the CPU 103 performs jackpot determination using the low probability jackpot determination value. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 performs jackpot determination using the high probability jackpot determination value. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any jackpot determination value, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (Step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (Step 131SGS64). The type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) corresponding to the value that matches the random number value is determined as the jackpot type (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a jackpot (step 131SGS63; No), the process moves to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing special symbol normal processing, the rescue time saving condition (by subtracting the value of the rescue time shortening counter to control the rescue time shortening regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss) is set to "0". The configuration is such that it is possible for this to occur. In this embodiment, the time-saving state A is established based on the fact that the jackpot A has been reached, and the next jackpot has not occurred even after the variable display has finished a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 900 times). Although the time saving state B is controlled, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the rescue time saving condition is satisfied becomes a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a jackpot, the control is performed to the time saving state A based on the jackpot.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of variable display during the time saving state is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 131SGS67), and checks whether the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the variable display (step 131SGS69).

Note that in this embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed to perform subtraction processing of the time saving number counter before the counting process of the number of variable display times until relief time saving is performed after step 131SGS71. It is not limited to the processing mode. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of variable displays until the time saving time reduction after step 131SGS71 is executed. In this case, for example, if the variable display is a relief time reduction, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time reduction counter to "110" (see step 131 SGS172), the value of the time reduction counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in a variable display that shortens the rescue time, the value of the time saving counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the time reduction counter may be configured to be set to "111" which is one more than the number of time reduction counters.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, when the process of step 131SGS69A is executed and the game is in a variable probability state, the processes after step 131SGS70 (particularly the process of step 131SGSS71) are not performed, so when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, Even if the variable display is executed during extreme battle rush (in this embodiment), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the state is non-probability variation), the process moves to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is set, the process moves to step 131SGS84 without executing the processes from step 131SGSS70. If it is set, the process moves to step 131SGSS70, but the process of step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated, a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction number counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process moves to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time saving number counter is 0 at this point, it means that the timing after the time saving state (time saving state B) has already been controlled via the rescue time saving (time saving state B) or the time saving state B This is the timing when the control is returned to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations), and the jackpot that is the trigger for setting the relief time reduction number counter to 900 has not occurred. Further, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 131SGS71). In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the process of step 131SGS71, it does not matter whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (step 131SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data and issues a relief time reduction number designation command. Control is performed to transmit data to the control CPU 120 (step 131SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time reduction number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 947EH as a relief time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 131SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that control is to be made to the time reduction state B at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 131SGS75). ). Then, the process moves to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data and sends command 957FH as the rescue time reduction number designation command for effect control. Control is performed to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 131SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 times (in this embodiment, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). ) (step 131SGS77). Note that whether or not the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining number of variable display times until relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and issues a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed to transmit data to the control CPU 120 (step 131SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9601H as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608H as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction, and sends a rescue time reduction number designation command and a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Although this example is illustrated, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to count the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time is shortened, and execute an inciting effect or a countdown effect, which will be described later.

For example, if the relief time reduction count counter is set (set to "900") at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the configuration is such that relief time reduction can occur continuously, only when the relief time reduction occurs the first time. The system is configured to send a command for specifying the number of times of saving time reduction and a command for specifying number of times of saving time reducing 2, and is configured not to send a command for specifying number of times of saving time saving and a command for specifying number of times of saving time saving 2 when saving time is shortened from the second time onwards. Also good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make jackpot A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is decided to be jackpot B, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3". If it is determined to be a jackpot C, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a loss, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stopping symbol in the stopping symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 11-21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer is in operation (step 131SGS131). If the symbol determination period timer is not operating, a stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed (step 131SGS132). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (step 131SGS133).

If the jackpot flag is set, clear the game status flags such as the time saving A flag, the time saving B flag, and the variable probability flag (step 131SGS134), clear the time saving number counter (step 131SGS135), and set the time saving flag according to the jackpot type. The transmission setting of the jackpot start designation command is performed and the process proceeds to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). The jackpot start designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the relief time saving determination flag is not set, the process advances to step 131SGS147. If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the relief time saving determination flag is cleared and the time saving B flag indicating that the time saving state B is set is set (step 131SGS141, step 131SGS142). Further, the time saving number counter is set to 1100 corresponding to the time saving state B (relief time saving), and the transmission setting of the time saving state B designation command is performed (step 131SGS143, step 131SGS144). The time-saving state B designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Moreover, while starting the lighting of the right-handed player lamp 131SG132, the transmission setting of the right-handed player LED lighting notification command is performed (step 131SGS145, step 131SGS146). In addition, the right hit LED lighting notification command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, the symbol confirmation period timer is set to a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, which is the symbol confirmation period, and a symbol confirmation designation command is set to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). Note that the symbol confirmation designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a gaming state designation command according to the gaming state, and ends the special symbol stop processing. In addition, the game state designation command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, if the symbol determination period timer is operating in step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150), and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out ( Step 131SGS151). If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stop processing is finished, and if the symbol confirmation engine timer has timed out, it is determined whether the derived stop symbol is a missed symbol or not (step 131SGS152) . If the derived stopping symbol is a losing symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol halting process is ended (step 131SGS153), and the derived stopping symbol is a jackpot symbol. If so, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 131SGS154).

[state transition]
Next, state transition in this embodiment will be explained. FIGS. 11-22 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region (V switch 131SG023B1), it is controlled to a variable probability state, and the jackpot occurs. When A occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)) is controlled. Although not shown, even if the jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is controlled. In addition, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or after the probability variable state ends, the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or in the time shortened state) After the end of 110 variable displays in A, if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving (low probability / high base state) ) is controlled by

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-22, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) and the game ball passes through the variable probability region, the state returns to the variable probability state. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the probability variable state will occur. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state A, when the variable display is completed 110 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the probability variable state will occur. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display is completed 1100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state. Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the rescue time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or after the variable probability state ends, the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or the time is shortened) When the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the occurrence of the next jackpot after the completion of 110 variable displays in state A), the control is performed to time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, the case is shown in which the game is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A. Unlimited. For example, by comparing the remaining number of current time saving times with the number of time saving times (in this embodiment, 110 times) corresponding to the case where the game ball did not enter the probability variable area (V switch 131SG023B1), If the remaining number of times is greater, the current time saving state B may be continued as is.

In this embodiment, although it is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or the variable probability state, it is a disadvantageous game for the player. The state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed.

[Production control process processing/pre-read notice]
As shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, in the prefetch notice setting process of this embodiment, the timing at which a starting winning occurs (the received command buffer at the starting winning shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is stored pending) Active display or pending display can be activated by setting the pending display flag to any of 0 to 2 at the timing when the starting opening winning prize designation command, symbol designation command, fluctuation category command, and pending storage number notification command are newly stored. The display mode of the active display and the pending display can be used to suggest the proportion of the jackpot gaming state.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-24, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "non-reach", the pre-read notice is not executed ( Set the value of the pending display flag to "0") at a rate of 95%, and execute the pre-read notice in production pattern α (set the value of the pending display flag to "1") at a rate of 5%. , and execution of the pre-read notice in presentation pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a ratio of 0%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "other (normal reach)", the pre-read notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to " 90% of the time, it is decided to execute the pre-read notice in production pattern α (set the value of the pending display flag to "1") at a 10% rate, and Execution of the preview in production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "super reach", the pre-read notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0"). 70% of the time, the execution of the pre-read notice in production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") is decided at a 20% rate, and the pre-read notice is set to "1". Execution in production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 10%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is a "jackpot", the non-execution of the pre-read notice (setting the value of the pending display flag to "0") is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pre-read notice is is executed in production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") at a rate of 30%, and the pre-read notice is executed in production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2"). (to be set) at a rate of 65%.

After executing the pre-read notice setting process, the pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), the display update process for the remaining number of times the relief time reduction etc. are reached (step 131SGS163), and the relief time reduction arrival notification performance execution process (step 131SGS164) are executed. do. In the pending display/active display update process, the process starts displaying the pending display or active display in a display mode according to the value of the pending display flag, and the active display is deleted from the active display area 131SG005F at the end timing of the variable display. Processing and processing to hide or start displaying the pending display and active display according to the progress of the performance during the variable display are executed. In the display update process for the remaining number of rescue time reductions, the value of the remaining number of rescue time reduction display 131SG005Z (see FIG. 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 is updated each time the variable display starts, and In accordance with the progress of the current performance, processing to hide or start displaying the remaining number of rescue time reduction attainment display 131SG005Z is executed. In the relief time saving arrival notification performance execution process, from the end timing of the variable display when the number of variable displays has reached 900 times, a process for executing a relief time saving arrival notification effect that notifies that the time saving state B has been controlled is executed. .

[Variable display start setting process]
FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, copy the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS602). In addition, the first special figure pending memory (various command data stored in correspondence with buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") in the start winning command buffer 131SG194A is shifted upward one by one. (Step 131SGS603). Note that at this time, the various command data stored in the buffer number "1-1" are erased because there is no destination to shift them to.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not on in step 131SGS601, it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set, copy the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS605). In addition, the second special figure pending memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning command buffer 131SG194A is shifted upward one by one. (Step 131SGS606). Note that at this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" are erased because there is no destination to shift them to.

Incidentally, if the second special figure variable display start command reception flag is not on, the variable display start setting process is ended.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are determined according to the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in Figure 11-26, if the variable display result is "miss" and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach is off), the stop symbols are set to "124" or "578" at a rate of 100%. ” and other “non-reach” combinations (non-reach mode, non-reach mode). In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (normal reach is off), the stop symbol will be a combination of "reach" with an even number such as "242" or "676" at a rate of 95% ( Even number reach format, even number reach is off format), and a 5% ratio of "reach" combinations with odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" and "545" (odd number reach format, odd number reach is off format) do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (super reach is off), the stop symbol will be "reach" with an even number such as "242" or "676" at a rate of 80%. The combination (even number reach mode, even number reach is off) is decided, and 19% of the combinations are "reach" with odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" and "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach is off) The combination of "reach" with seven symbols such as "767" and "787" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach off mode) is determined at a rate of 1%.

Then, if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the stop symbol is determined to be a "reach" combination (even number reach mode, even number reach jackpot mode) with an even number such as "222" or "666" at a rate of 20%. Then, 50% of the time, the combination of "reach" with odd numbers other than 7 such as "111" and "555" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach jackpot mode) is decided, and 30% of the time, the combination of "777" is decided. A combination of "reach" with 7 symbols ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) is determined.

In other words, the expectation of jackpot is highest when the decorative symbol is a "7" symbol and it is a reach, and from then on, when it is a reach with an odd number symbol other than "7", when it is a reach with an even number symbol, and when it is a non-reach. The jackpot expectation level is set to decrease in order (Jackpot expectation level due to decorative symbols: Reach with "7" symbol > Reach with odd symbols other than "7" > Reach with even numbers > No reach). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the decorative symbol is a reach mode, and which symbol is a reach mode.

In addition, in this example, a form in which the jackpot expectation level is different depending on the case where the combination of even numbers of decorative symbols is a reach and the case where a combination of odd numbers is a reach, etc., has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the expected level of jackpot may be the same no matter which combination of decorative symbols becomes a reach, or the expected level of jackpot when a reach is achieved depending on the size of the number indicated by the decorative pattern. may be different.

Returning to FIG. 11-25, after determining the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute a preview performance during variable display that indicates the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot during variable display. A variable display preview performance determination process (step 131SGS609) is executed to determine the.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table (performance control pattern) according to the variable pattern, the gaming state, the variable display result, and the determination result of the variable display notice performance determination process (step 131SGS610), and starts the process timer. Start (step 131SGS611).

Note that a production control pattern is set in each process table. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound control for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operations of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (131SGS612). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (131SGS613). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (131SGS614). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (131SGS615).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each reduced by 1. Then, control of the presentation device is executed according to the value of the process timer, variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and decorative pattern is displayed according to the value of the variable display time timer. What is necessary is to stop the variable display of and set the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173).

[About production during variable display]
When the production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, the production control CPU 120 sets the variable display start setting of the subsequent step S171. In the process, based on the variable display result such as the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command, the special pattern or decorative pattern specified by the variable display result specification command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), Decide on the variable display mode of the decorative design, whether or not to execute the reach effect, its mode, execution start timing, etc., set the effect control pattern that reflects the decision results, etc., and set the effect control pattern based on the set effect control pattern. Controls variable display of symbols, reach effect, etc.

[About production control pattern]
As shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28, the production control pattern is set for each of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA2-1 to PA2-1 to PA2-19 and PB1-1 to PB1-18.

As performance control patterns corresponding to the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, non-reach patterns 1 to 4 are set in which the decorative symbols do not become a reach mode and are out of reach mode. The fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are fluctuation patterns specified in the normal state, PA1-3 is the fluctuation pattern selected in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, and PA1-4 is the fluctuation pattern specified in the time saving state B. This is a variation pattern selected in , and in the corresponding non-reach patterns 1 to 4, the time until the variable display of the decorative pattern ends is set to be different depending on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. ing.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-1, a pattern is set in which a normal reach performance ("Normal" in the figure) in which the decorative pattern is in a reach mode is executed, and then the reach is off. The fluctuation pattern PA2-1 is a fluctuation pattern specified in the normal state, time saving state A, and variable probability state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-2, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance ("low base weak A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. It is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-3, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance ("low base weak B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. It is set.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-4, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach A reach performance ("Low base strong A" in the figure) is executed. ”) and then the reach is off. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-5, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-6, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-7, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach B reach performance (in the figure, the low base strong B ”) and then the reach is off. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-8, after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the reach performance of low base strong reach B is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-9, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-10, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-11, after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the reach performance of low base strong reach C is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-12, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-13, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strongest super reach reach performance ("low base strongest" in the figure) ) is executed, and then a pattern is set in which the reach is off. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-14, after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the reach performance of low base strongest super reach is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-15, a pattern is set in which after the normal reach performance, the low base strongest super reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

The variation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are all variation patterns specified in the normal state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-16, a pattern is set in which after the normal reach reach performance, the high base reach A reach performance ("high base A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-17, a pattern is set in which after the normal reach reach performance, the high base reach B reach performance ("high base B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-18, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of high base reach C ("high base C" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-19, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of high base reach D ("high base D" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is.

The fluctuation patterns PA2-16 to PA2-19 are all fluctuation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the variable probability state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-1, a pattern is set in which a normal reach performance is executed and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-2, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-3, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-4, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach performance A is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-5, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-6, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-7, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-8, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-9, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-10, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-11, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, and then the jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-13, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strongest super reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

The variation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are all variation patterns selected in the normal state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-14, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach A reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-15, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-16, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-17, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach D reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

The fluctuation patterns PB1-14 to PB1-17 are all fluctuation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the variable probability state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-18, a pattern is set in which a jackpot is achieved without executing a normal reach or super reach performance. The fluctuation pattern PB1-18 is a fluctuation pattern selected in the time saving state B.

[About the flow of production during variable display]
FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in the normal state. The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, the decoration To control so that a symbol is not in a reach mode and is out of reach mode.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, the decoration Execute the reach effect of normal reach where the symbol is in the reach mode, and then control so that if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach will be off, and the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command If the fluctuation pattern is PB1-1, control is performed so that it is a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-2, the production control CPU 120 executes the normal reach production. After execution, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach A is executed, and then a miss is reported as a performance result of the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and the reach is controlled so that the reach is missed.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-3, the production control CPU 120 executes the normal reach production. After execution, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach B is executed, and then a miss is reported as a performance result of the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and control is performed so that the reach is missed.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 4, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, and the reach will be controlled so that it will be a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-2, the low base A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach A, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 5, a miss is announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, and the reach is controlled so that it is a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-3, the low base is A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach A, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-6. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-4, a jackpot will be announced as the production result of the low base strong super reach A reach production. and control it so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, the normal reach After executing the reach effect, execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 7, a miss is announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, and the reach is controlled so that it is a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-5, the low base is A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach B, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 8, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, and the reach will be controlled so that it will be a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-6, the low base will be A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach B, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-9. Control is performed so that a miss is announced as the performance result and the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-7, a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the low base strong super reach B reach performance. and control it so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 10, a miss is announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, and the reach is controlled so that it is a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-8, the low base is A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach C, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 11, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, and the reach will be controlled so that it will be a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-9, the low base A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach C, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-12. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-10, a jackpot will be announced as the production result of the low base strong super reach C reach production. and control it so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2-13. If so, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and control will be performed so that the reach will be missed, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-11, the low base strongest super A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of the reach, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, the normal reach After executing the reach effect, execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2-14. If so, a miss will be announced as the result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and control will be performed so that the reach will be missed, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-12, the low base strongest super A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of the reach, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-15, the result of the reach effect of low base strongest super reach If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-13, a jackpot will be announced as a result of the reach performance of the strongest super reach on a low base, and a jackpot will be announced. Control so that

In this way, in the normal state, a jackpot is announced as a result of the reach effect of low base weak super reach A and B, and it is not controlled by the jackpot and goes through the reach effect of low base weak super reach A and B. Low base strong super reach A to C executed with low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest reach, low base weak super reach A to C executed without going through the reach effect of B, low base strongest Only in the reach performance of Super Reach, a jackpot is announced as a result of the performance, and the jackpot is controlled.

FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing the flow of performance during variable display in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA1-3, the decoration To control so that a symbol is not in a reach mode and is out of reach mode.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-1 or PB1-1. To do this, execute the normal reach effect, and then control so that if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach will be off, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is If it is PB1-1, it is controlled so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-16 or PB1-14. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach A reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-16, the high base super reach A reach effect is executed. A loss is announced as the result of the performance, and control is performed so that the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-14, a jackpot will be announced as the result of the reach performance of high base super reach A. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-17 or PB1-15. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach B reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-17, the high base super reach B reach effect is executed. A loss is announced as the result of the performance, and control is performed so that the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-15, a jackpot will be announced as the result of the reach performance of high base super reach B. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-18 or PB1-16. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the reach effect of high base super reach C, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-18, the reach effect of high base super reach C. A loss is announced as the result of the performance, and control is performed so that the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-16, a jackpot will be announced as the result of the reach performance of high base super reach C. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-19 or PB1-17. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach D reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-19, the high base super reach D reach effect is executed. A loss is notified as a result of the performance, and control is performed so that the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-17, a jackpot will be announced as a result of the reach performance of high base super reach D. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

In this way, in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the performance results of jackpot or miss are announced in the normal performance or the reach performances of high base super reach A to D that are controlled after the normal performance, and then the performance is controlled to be a jackpot or miss. Therefore, another reach effect is not executed from the high base super reach A to D that are controlled after the normal effect.

FIG. 11-31 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in time saving state B. The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA1-4, the decorative pattern is in reach. Control is performed so that the reach is out of reach without becoming a problem.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PB1-18, the decorative pattern is in reach. It is controlled so that it becomes a jackpot without becoming a pattern.

In this way, in the time saving state B, the control is made such that in the case of a loss and the case of a jackpot, there is always a non-reach.

[About super reach performance]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance during variable display. As mentioned above, the reach performance of super reach is performed in the normal state, low base weak super reach A, B, low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest super reach reach performance, time saving state A, fixed variable state Includes reach effects of high base super reach A to D performed in . In addition, below, the normal reach and super reach reach effects may be simply referred to as normal reach effect and super reach effect, respectively, and are referred to as low base weak super reach A, low base weak super reach B, low base strong super reach A, and low The reach effects of Strong Base Super Reach B, Low Base Strong Super Reach C, and Low Base Strongest Super Reach are simply Low Base Weak Reach A Effect, Low Base Weak Reach B Effect, Low Base Strong Reach A Effect, and Low Base Strong Reach, respectively. These are sometimes referred to as B effect, low base strong reach C effect, and low base strongest reach effect, and the reach effects are high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D, respectively. Sometimes they are simply called high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach performance.

The super reach performance executes a performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, as well as the performance results that will ultimately lead to a jackpot (for low base weak super reach A and B, low base strong super reach A to C, This is a performance that informs you of whether the low base will develop into the strongest super reach or whether it will fail.

In addition, a title is set for each type of super reach performance, and a super reach performance has a title display part where the title of the super reach performance is displayed, and a performance result is announced after the title display part. It consists of an introductory part up to and including.

[About variations of low base weak reach A and B effects]
In this example, as a variation pattern for executing a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, after executing a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, it develops into another super reach performance. Although the configuration does not include a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without any development, after the execution of the low base weak reach effect, there is a variation pattern PB1-JA that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect, and a low base weak reach effect B effect. After execution, it may be configured to include fluctuation patterns PB1-JB that become a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects.

In such a configuration, the production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PB1-JA, After executing the normal reach performance, execute the low base weak reach A performance, notify the jackpot as a result of the low base weak reach A performance, control so that it becomes a jackpot, and execute the first variable display start command or When the second variable display start command is received and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-JB, after executing the normal reach effect, the low base weak reach B effect is executed, and the low base weak reach B effect is executed. A jackpot is announced as a result of the production, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs. Therefore, in such a configuration, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, either it will be announced whether or not there will be a jackpot as a result of the performance, or it will develop into another super reach performance. Therefore, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance, either it will be announced whether or not there will be a jackpot as a result of the performance, or it will develop into another super reach performance.

In addition, after the execution of the low base weak reach performances A and B, a configuration may be adopted that does not include a variation pattern that develops into other super reach performances. In such a configuration, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach performances A and B, , it will be announced whether or not there will be a jackpot as a result of the performance.

Also, in the following embodiments, a configuration may be applied that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of the low base weak reach effects A and B; in this case, , Low base weak reach A so that the jackpot expectation level of low base strong reach A to C productions and low base strongest reach production is higher than the jackpot expectation level of low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach A production. , a variation pattern that results in a loss after execution of performance B, and a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after execution of low base weak reach performance A and B, without developing into another super reach performance, has a determined ratio.

[About low base weak reach A production]
FIG. 11-32 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base weak reach A effect, and FIG. 11-33 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the relative As shown in Figure 11-32 (a1), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result designation command starts changing at a predetermined timing, as shown in Figure 11-32 (a1). ) is stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to perform a normal reach effect in which the reach mode is set. After that, operation promotion effect A to be described later is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a2), the pending display and active display of the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F After executing a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining , the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is started.

As shown in Figures 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (background of the daytime sky) in which the decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash effect is changing is different from the white flash effect. After that, it switches to the background of the low base weak reach A effect (corridor background), and the decorative pattern (large) that was displayed in reach mode before the white flash effect is larger than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash effect. Switches to reach mode with small decorative pattern (small).

As shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, a part of the title characters of the low base weak reach A performance “Catch the Bakuchu!” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when the title is displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period in which the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed in the fixed position, and the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" that was displayed in the fixed position. Catch me!'' disappears and the title ends until it switches to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a3) to (a4), a part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed from the left side of the display area in the reach mode. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), make it appear in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small), then move the entire title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" toward the fixed position and stop at the fixed position. let When the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" is stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in a manner that overlaps with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. be done.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach A production. During the start period, even if the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", part of the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" will be the decoration on the left and right side of the reach mode. It appears in a state where it overlaps with the decorative pattern (small) on the left side of the pattern (small), and when the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" is stationary in the fixed position, the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" A portion is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-reach mode.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a4) to (a5), the enemy character ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' is displayed behind the title character ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' that is displayed in a fixed position. "Bakuchu" appears, and below the title text "Catch Bakchu!", a subtitle with the line "If you can, try to catch it!" is displayed according to the scene where the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears. The audio of the dialogue displayed as subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-33, no sound for reading the title is output. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-33, the title display period of the low base weak reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11- 48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a5) to (a6), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the display area. Move the title to the right side until all the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, the expectation level suggestion display described later is not displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect is the same as the background of the title display part (corridor background), and from the title display part The scene of the video that started (the scene where the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears) continues throughout the introduction part, and the line that was displayed in the title display part, "Catch it if you can!", continues to be displayed. , the speech voices being output from the speakers 8L and 8R are also continuously output. After that, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a7) to (a8), at the timing when the audio output of the line "Catch it if you can!" displayed in the title display part is finished, the next part of the introductory part is started. The scene changes to a video scene (a scene in which the ally character ``Mumemu'' chases the enemy character ``Bakuchu'').

The production control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern is specified by a variation pattern specification command that develops after a low base weak super reach A to one of the low base strong super reach A to C or the low base strongest super reach. After performing a falling effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the part, it is developed into one of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, and a low base strongest reach effect. . On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is off after the low base weak super reach A, the ally character "Yumemu" will catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. , the performance result of the low base weak reach A performance is notified to the effect that it is not a jackpot, and then a decorative pattern indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Display the (large) combination.

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after the execution of the low base weak reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the low base weak super reach A performance using the fluctuation pattern specification command. After executing the low base weak reach A effect, if a variation pattern is specified that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect, at the end of the introduction part, the ally character ``Yumemu'' will become the enemy character ``Bakugo''. "Chu" is caught and the performance result of the low base weak reach A performance is a jackpot (controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is notified by a variable display result designation command. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating a designated type of jackpot is displayed.

[About low base weak reach B production]
FIG. 11-34 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, and FIG. 11-35 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, As shown in FIG. 11-34 (b1), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. , and executes a normal reach performance in which it stops at the "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and takes a reach mode. After that, operation promotion effect A to be described later is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b2), the pending display and active display of the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F After executing a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining , the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect is started.

As shown in Figures 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (background of the daytime sky) in which the decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash effect is fluctuating is different from the white flash effect. After that, the background changes to the low base weak reach B effect (the background where the character "Yumemu" and the character "Boingo" face each other from side to side with a hockey table in between), and the decorative pattern that was displayed in the reach mode before the white flash effect is displayed. (Large) switches to the reach mode of the decorative pattern (small), which is smaller in size than the decorative pattern (large), after the white flash effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" of the low base weak reach B performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from 2009 until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period in which the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are displayed in the fixed position, and the display of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" that was displayed in the fixed position. This includes the title end period until it disappears and switches to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b3) to (b4), part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed from the left side of the display area to the left and right sides of the reach mode. The decorative pattern (small) is made to appear in a manner overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small), and then the entire title character ``Bilibili Hockey Showdown'' is moved toward a fixed position and kept stationary at the fixed position. When the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach B production During the start period, even if the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode are numbers from "1" to "9", part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will be replaced by the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. When the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" appears in the reach mode. It is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps both the left and right decorative patterns (small).

The production control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b4) to (b5), the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" are displayed below the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown". '' is displayed in response to the scene in which the left and right players are facing each other, and the subtitles ``Let's play hockey! We won't lose!'' are displayed, and the audio of the lines displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-35, no sound for reading the title is output. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect (Figures 11-47 and 11-35). 48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move it until everything disappears. As shown in Figure 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, the expectation level suggestion display described later is not displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect is the background of the title display part (the character ``Yumemu'' and the character ``Yumemu'' with a hockey table in between. The scene in the video that starts from the title display part (the scene where the friendly character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other left and right) continues throughout the introduction part. In addition, the line "Let's play hockey! We won't lose!" that was displayed in the title display part continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line that is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R continues to be output. After that, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b7) to (b8), at the timing when the audio output of the line "Let's play hockey! We won't lose!" that was displayed in the title display part ends, the introductory part starts. The scene switches to the next video scene (the scene where the ally character "Mumemu" hits the puck back).

The production control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern that develops into any of the low base weak super reach B, the low base strong super reach A to C, or the low base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command. After executing a falling effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the part, it is developed into one of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, and a low base strongest reach effect. . On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the low base weak super reach B, the ally character "Yumemu" will fight against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introduction part. Unable to win, a performance result indicating that it is not a jackpot is notified as a performance result of the low base weak reach B performance, and thereafter, the image display device 5 shows the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command. Display the combination of decorative designs (large).

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that becomes a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after the execution of the low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach B performance by the fluctuation pattern specification command. After execution, if a variable pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects is specified, at the end of the introductory part, the ally character "Yumemu" wins the battle with the enemy character "Boingo" and receives a low The performance result of the base weak reach B performance is a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is notified of the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About low base strong reach A production]
FIG. 11-36 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base strong reach A effect, and FIG. 11-37 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. , develop into a low base strong reach A production. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach effect, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be performed. Execute and develop into a low base strong reach A production.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance starts. In the falling effect, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c1), the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are displayed, the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are displayed. While maintaining the hold display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A production or the low base weak reach B production to the background dedicated to the falling production (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable object 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, in the case of direct development from normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance after executing the selection performance described later, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1'). do. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance is the same as the prologue display period before the title characters of the low base strong reach A performance are displayed. , the title start period from when a part of the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in the fixed position, and the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" The title display period during which “Catch the Bakuchu!” is displayed in a fixed position, and the title end period until the display of the title characters “Catch the Bakuchu!”, which was displayed in a fixed position, disappears and switches to the introduction part. ,including.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying a prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A performance that has transitioned from the falling performance, a background dedicated to the falling performance (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), a display of decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, and the first reserved memory are displayed. While maintaining the pending display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center). , after displaying on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A performance that has transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance (here, the result image of the low base strong reach A performance), the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right of the reach mode. While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Yumemu'' is displayed in a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection performance, and then the ally character ``Yumemu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period that transitions from the falling effect, only the falling effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" After the prologue display period ends, the background (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) will switch to the background of the low base strong reach A production (the background where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway). , the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period when the selection effect is transitioned, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is changed to the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background changes to a low base strong reach A production (background where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway). In addition, the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the end of the prologue display period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance are maintained hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c4), a part of the title characters "Let's catch Bakuchu together!" is displayed from the left side of the display area. Out of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, make it appear in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small), and then move the entire title character "Two people catch Bakuchu!" toward the fixed position. and hold it in place. When the title character "Two people catch the Bakuchu!" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Two people catch the Bakuchu!" appears on both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach A production During the start period, regardless of whether the decorative pattern (small) on the left or right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", a part of the title character "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" will be displayed in the reach mode. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), it appears in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small), and when the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" remains in the fixed position, the title character "2" appears. A portion of "Catch the Bakuchu with people!" is displayed in a manner that overlaps with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Two people catch the Bakushu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach A production, first, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c4), the title text "Two people catch Bakushu!" is displayed with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The title is kept displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title, as shown in FIG. 11-37. Next, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c5) to (c6), below the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" there is a smaller size than the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" Display the expectation level suggestion display. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display period of the low base strong reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c6) to (c7), the title characters displayed in the fixed position ``Catch the Bakuchu with two people!'' are displayed in the fixed position. Move the title from to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. Furthermore, the expectation level suggestion display as well as the title characters are also moved to the right side of the display area until they all disappear. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-37, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the speaker 8L, The audio of the lines is not output from 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect is the background after the title start period in the title display part (the ally character "Yumemu" in the hallway). and the background where "Jam" is displayed), and the video scene that starts from the title display part (the scene where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) continues throughout the introduction part. do. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c8) and 11-37, after the introduction part starts, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and the lines corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears. A subtitle saying "Catch it if you can!" is displayed, and the audio of the dialogue displayed in the subtitle is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A production, the sound that reads the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R in the title display part, but the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is now output according to the character.

When the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot after a low base strong super reach A, the production control CPU 120 changes the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" to enemy characters at the end of the introduction part. Catch the "bakuchu" and notify the effect that it is a jackpot as a result of the low base strong reach A effect (that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state), and then specify the variable display result on the image display device 5. A combination of decorative patterns (large) representing the type of jackpot specified by the command is displayed. On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after a low base strong super reach A, at the end of the introduction part, the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" will ”, the performance result of the low base strong reach A performance is notified that it is not a jackpot, and after that, the image display device 5 shows that the reach of the type specified by the variable display result designation command is off. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the low base strong reach A production]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" and the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" with a smaller size than the expected level. A suggestion display is displayed. The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star-shaped objects and the star-shaped object, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c5), and the star-shaped object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In a normal state where the low base strong reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reservations and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, since the expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part also suggests the expectation level by multiple objects, the pending display and active display and the expectation level suggestion display are displayed at the same time in the title display part. In this case, there is a possibility that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents an object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating an expectation level indication.

In addition, since it is almost impossible for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening under normal conditions, if the number of pending special drawings for the first special drawing is at the maximum (4) and is being displayed variablely, the pending display and active display will be displayed. Up to 5 objects may be displayed, which corresponds to the number of objects that indicate the highest level of expectation in the level of expectation suggestion display, but the title display part of the low base strong reach A production. In , the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so even if the low base strong reach A effect is executed in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, It is possible to prevent objects displayed in the pending display and active display from being confused with objects in the expectation level suggestion display and being mistakenly recognized as having the highest level of expectation in the expectation level suggestion display.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the pending display and active display are displayed in the prologue display period before the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part, but the prologue display period starts. From time to time, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending display and active display are hidden, and even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent objects forming the pending display and active display from being mistakenly recognized as objects in the expectation level suggestion display.

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c2) to (c3), a background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center) during the prologue display period. , After displaying the ally character "Yumemu" on the layer in front of the pending display and active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled, and the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged. Since the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area is completely filled are hidden after the prologue display period ends, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, by displaying the character on a layer in front of the pending display and active display and enlarging the display until the entire display area is filled, the character is displayed before the entire display area is filled. The configuration is such that the hold display and active display are not displayed, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the entire display area is displayed in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode. By executing the display performance, the configuration may be such that the pending display and active display that were displayed before the monochrome display performance are erased, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. I can do it.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c4), the title text ``Catch the Bakuchu with two people!'' is placed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. It remains displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c5) to (c6), a display indicating the level of expectation is displayed below the title characters "Let's catch the Bakushu together!" Display. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c5), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in Figure 11- As shown in 36 (c6), by changing the color of the three star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strong reach A effect from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects, the low-base strong reach A effect is created. The expectation level of jackpot is suggested.

When developing from a low base weak reach A production or a low base weak reach B production to a low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-38 (x1) to (x2), during the prologue display period, the ally character " Until the entire display area is filled with the enlarged display of "Yume Yume", if there is a pending number remaining, the pending display and active display will be displayed, and the expectation level suggestion display will be hidden in the subsequent title display part. As shown in Figure 11-38 (x3) to (x4), without going through the step of displaying the title text "Two people catch Bakushu!" in a fixed position, the title text "Two people catch Bakushu!" is displayed. !” At the same time, five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed, and then the color of the star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold, and the objects that make up the pending display and active display are Immediately after the display is started, objects constituting the expectation level suggestion display are displayed, and there is a possibility that the pending display and active display are confused with the expectation level suggestion display. On the other hand, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, after the expectation level suggestion display is hidden during the prologue display period, the expectation level suggestion display is hidden during the title display period, and the title text "Two people "Catch Bakushu!" remains displayed in the fixed position for a predetermined period of time, and then a display indicating the level of expectation is displayed below the title characters "Catch Bakushu!", so the display is on hold. Also, it is possible to prevent the active display and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About low base strong reach B production]
FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach B effect is executed, and FIG. 11-40 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base strong reach B effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. , develop into a low base strong reach B production. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach effect, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be performed. Execute and develop into a low base strong reach B performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect starts. In the falling effect, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d1), the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are displayed, the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are displayed. While maintaining the hold display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A production or the low base weak reach B production to the background dedicated to the falling production (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable object 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, in the case of direct development from the normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance after executing the selection performance described later, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1'). do. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect is the prologue display period before the title characters "Gekisha Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach B effect are displayed, and the display part of the image display device 5. The title start period from when part of the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period during which the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is displayed in the fixed position, and the fixed position This includes the end period of the title until the title character "Gekken Robo Battle" that was displayed on the screen disappears and switches to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying a prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B performance that has transitioned from the falling performance, a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center), a display of decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, and the first reserved memory are displayed. While maintaining the pending display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center). , after displaying on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B performance that has transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B performance), the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right of the reach mode. While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Yumemu'' is displayed in a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection performance, and then the ally character ``Yumemu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period that transitions from the falling effect, only the falling effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" After the prologue display period ends, the background (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) will be changed to the background dedicated to displaying the title of the low base strong reach B production (the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo") The pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" will disappear after the prologue display period ends. . Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period when the selection effect is transitioned, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is changed to the end of the prologue display period. Thereafter, the background is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low base strong reach B effect (a background in which the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed at the left and right positions). In addition, the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the end of the prologue display period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance are maintained hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach B production, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d4), part of the title characters "Gekishock Robo Battle" is displayed from the left side of the display area to the decorations on the left and right sides of the reach mode. The symbol (small) is made to appear in such a manner that it overlaps with the left side decorative symbol (small), and then the entire title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is moved toward a fixed position and is stopped at the fixed position. When the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach B production During the start period, even if the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode are numbers from "1" to "9", a part of the title character "Gekushin Robo Battle" will be displayed as the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode. ) appears in a manner that overlaps with the decoration pattern (small) on the left side, and when the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is stationary in the fixed position, part of the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" appears as a decoration on the left and right side of the reach mode. It is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps both of the small design.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach B production, first, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekken Robo Battle" were displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. This state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-40, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle". As shown in Figure 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach B production, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekishock Robo Battle" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move the title characters until all of them disappear. Furthermore, the expectation level suggestion display along with the title characters is also moved to the right side of the display area until they all disappear. As shown in Figure 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-40, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the speaker 8L, The audio of the lines is not output from 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect is the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (allied characters "Jam" and "Nana"). ” and the enemy character “Robo” are displayed on the left and right positions), at the start of the introduction part, the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect changes from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part. (The background shows the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" confronting each other in the town). In the introductory part of the low base strong reach B production, the enemy character "Robo" faces the front from the back position when viewed from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face from the front position when viewed from the player. The video begins with the two facing each other with their backs turned. At this time, the enemy character "Robo" located in the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" located in the front as seen from the player, are not displayed during the title display period of the title display part. The characters ``Gekisha Robo Battle'' are displayed in a position that overlaps with the original position. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the introduction part starts, the dialogue "Losing The subtitle "No!" is displayed, and the audio of the dialogue displayed in the subtitle is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B production, the sound that reads the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R in the title display part, but the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, the subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is now output according to the character.

When the fluctuation pattern designation command specifies a fluctuation pattern that becomes a jackpot after a low base strong super reach B, the production control CPU 120 controls the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" to change to the enemy character "Jam" and "Nana" at the end of the introduction part. ``Robo'', the performance result of the low base strong reach B performance is a jackpot (controlled to a jackpot game state) as a result of the low base strong reach B performance, and then a variable display is displayed on the image display device 5. A combination of decorative patterns (large) representing the type of jackpot specified by the result specification command is displayed. On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the low base strong super reach B, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" will interact with the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introduction part. is defeated in the battle, and the performance result of the low base strong reach B performance is notified to the effect that it is not a jackpot, and thereafter, the image display device 5 shows that the type of reach specified by the variable display result designation command is off. Display the combination of decorative designs (large).

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the low base strong reach B performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" as well as an expectation level suggestion display in a size smaller than the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle." The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star-shaped objects and the star-shaped object, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d5), and the star-shaped object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach B effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the pending display, the active display, and the expected If the degree suggestion display and the expectation degree suggestion display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistaken as objects of the expectation degree suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents an object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating the level of expectation.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, the low Even when the base strong reach B effect is executed, the objects displayed as pending display and active display are confused with the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, and the expectation level is mistakenly recognized as being the highest in the expectation level suggestion display. You can prevent it from being put away.

In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the pending display and active display are hidden from the start of the prologue display period in the low base strong reach B performance, and even in such a configuration, the objects that make up the pending display and active display are It is possible to prevent the object from being mistakenly recognized as a suggestive display object.

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d2) to (d3), a background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center) during the prologue display period. , After displaying the ally character "Yumemu" on the layer in front of the pending display and active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled, and the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged. Since the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area is completely filled are hidden after the prologue display period ends, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, by executing the monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, it is possible to A configuration may be adopted in which the displayed pending display and active display are deleted, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d4), the title character "Gekisha Robo Battle" is displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Gekisha Robo Battle." At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects forming the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in 39 (d6), by changing the color of 3.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strong reach B effect from black to gold among the 5 star-shaped objects, the low-base strong reach This suggests the level of expectation for a jackpot in performance B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About low base strong reach C production]
The low base strong reach C performance has many points in common with the low base strong reach B performance described above, so the drawing for the low base strong reach C performance will be omitted.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. , develop into a low base strong reach C performance. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach effect, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be performed. Execute and develop into a low base strong reach C performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect starts. In the falling effect, while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the low base After switching from the background at the end of the weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance to the background dedicated to the falling performance (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is moved to the initial position. rise to.

In addition, when directly developing from the normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance after executing the selection performance described later. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C performance is the prologue display period before the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach C performance is displayed, and the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when a part of "Robobattle" is displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period during which the title characters "Great Earthquake Robobattle" are displayed in the fixed position, and the title that was displayed in the fixed position Including the end period of the title until the display of the characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" disappears and the switch to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 moves to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, it first starts displaying a prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C performance that has transitioned from the falling performance, a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center), a display of decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, and the first reserved memory are displayed. While maintaining the pending display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center). , after displaying on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C performance that has transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance (here, the result image of the low base strong reach C performance), the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right of the reach mode. While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Yumemu'' is displayed in a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection performance, and then the ally character ``Yumemu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title start period.

During the prologue display period that transitions from the falling effect, the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is replaced by the prologue display. After the period ends, the background will change to a low base strong reach B production (background where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Big Robot" are displayed on the left and right positions), and the ally character "Yumemu" The pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Additionally, although not shown, during the prologue display period when the transition from the selection effect occurs, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. Afterwards, the background is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low base strong reach C production (a background in which the friendly characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Big Robot" are displayed on the left and right positions). The display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the end of the prologue display period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance remain hidden.

During the title start period for the low base strong reach C production, a part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" will be displayed from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. After that, the entire title character ``Great Earthquake Robo Battle'' is moved toward a fixed position, and then stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" are stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

One of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed as the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, but during the title start period, the reach mode Even if the left and right decorative patterns (small) are numbers from "1" to "9", a part of the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is the left side of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in reach mode. It appears in a manner that overlaps with the design (small), and when the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" appears in the left and right decorative design (small) of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner with both.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach C production, first, the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" remain displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden for a predetermined period of time. , the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle." The title display period of the low base strong reach C effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach C performance, the title characters ``Great Earthquake Robo Battle'' displayed at a fixed position are moved from the regular position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear. Furthermore, the expectation level suggestion display along with the title characters is also moved to the right side of the display area until they all disappear. The title end period of the low base strong reach C effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, unlike the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed, and the audio of the dialogue is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance after the end of the title end period. The background at the beginning of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production is the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Big Robot" are displayed on the left and right positions). At the beginning of the introduction part, the background for the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect (the background of the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character The scene changes to a background scene where the "Big Robot" confronts each other in the town. In the introductory part of the low base strong reach C production, the enemy character "Big Robot" is facing forward on the back side as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" are on the back side on the front side as seen from the player. The video starts with a scene where the two face off against each other. At this time, the enemy character "Big Robot" located in the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" located in the front as seen from the player, are displayed during the title display period of the title display part. , the title characters ``Great Earthquake Robo Battle'' are displayed in a position that overlaps with the regular position where they were displayed. In addition, after the introduction part starts, the subtitles ``I will never lose!'' are displayed, corresponding to the scene where the friendly characters ``Mumemu'' and ``Nana'' confront the enemy character ``Big Robot'', and the speaker 8L, The audio of the lines displayed in subtitles is output from 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C production, while the title display part outputs the audio reading out the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed and are output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is now output according to the character.

When the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot after a low base strong super reach C, the production control CPU 120 changes the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" to enemy characters at the end of the introduction part. After winning the battle with the "big robot", the performance result of the low base strong reach C performance is announced as a jackpot (controlling to a jackpot game state), and then on the image display device 5, A combination of decorative patterns (large) representing the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command is displayed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after a low base strong super reach C, at the end of the introduction part the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" '', the low base strong reach C effect is notified that it is not a jackpot, and then the image display device 5 shows that the reach of the type specified by the variable display result specification command is off. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the low base strong reach C performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" as well as an expectation level suggestion display in a smaller size than the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle." The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star-shaped objects and the star-shaped object, and the text "Expectation Level" is displayed above the star-shaped object to indicate that the star-shaped object indicates the level of expectation. The degree of expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach C effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the pending display, the active display, and the expected If the degree suggestion display and the expectation degree suggestion display are displayed at the same time, there is a possibility that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation degree suggestion display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents an object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating an expectation level indication.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, the low Even when the base strong reach C effect is executed, the objects displayed as pending display and active display may be confused with the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, and the expectation level may be mistakenly recognized as having the maximum level in the expectation level suggestion display. You can prevent it from being put away.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the pending display and the active display are hidden from the start of the prologue display period in the low base strong reach C performance, and even in such a configuration, the objects that make up the pending display and the active display are It is possible to prevent the object from being mistakenly recognized as a suggestive display object.

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach B effect, during the prologue display period, the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the ally character "Dream" on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display. After displaying "Yume", the ally character "Yume" is enlarged and displayed until the display area is completely filled, and the pending display and the display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled due to the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume" are Since the active display is hidden after the prologue display period ends, the pending display and the active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach C effect, by executing the monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, it is possible to A configuration may be adopted in which the displayed pending display and active display are deleted, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the title text "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" remains displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden for a predetermined period of time, and then the title text A display indicating the level of expectation will be displayed below "Great Earthquake Robo Battle". At this time, at the initial stage, all of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then among the five star-shaped objects, the low base strong reach C effect is displayed. By changing the color of the corresponding four star-shaped objects from black to gold, the expectation level of a jackpot in the low base strong reach C performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About low base strongest reach performance]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low-base strongest reach effect, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect. It is.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 If the pattern is a variable pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance, Develop into the strongest reach performance with low base. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the lowest base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be executed. Execute and develop into the strongest reach performance with low base.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect will start. In the falling effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e1), the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are displayed, the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are displayed. While maintaining the hold display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A production or the low base weak reach B production to the background dedicated to the falling production (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable object 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, in the case of direct development from the normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance after executing the selection performance described later, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1'). . Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-42, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, a part of the title characters of the low-base strongest reach effect, ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'', is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when it is displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period in which the title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" is displayed in the fixed position, and the title text that was displayed in the fixed position This includes the end period of the title until the display of "Six people catch Bakuchu!" disappears and the introduction part changes.

When the performance control CPU 120 moves to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period for the strongest low-based reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e3), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode is maintained, and the title text ``6 people catch Bakuchu! !” is displayed at an enlarged size such that only some of the characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the entire display area is displayed with a portion of the title characters ``Six people catch Bakuchu!''. Further, the part of the title character "Six people catch Bakuchu!" that is displayed in the display area appears in a manner that overlaps with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title text "Six people to catch Bakushu!" gradually shrinks until all characters in the title text "Six people catch Bakushu!" are displayed. The reduced size title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is made to stand still in a fixed position so that it can be seen in the area. When the title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is reduced to a fixed position and remains in place, a part of the title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' with the strongest low-base reach effect is in reach mode. It is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps both the left and right decorative patterns (small).

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title starts with the strongest reach effect on a low base. During the period, regardless of whether the decorative pattern (small) on the left or right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" that appears in enlarged size will be reached. The title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' appears in a manner that overlaps with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the aspect, and is displayed in a reduced size while stationary in a fixed position. It is displayed in a manner that overlaps both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period after the transition from the falling effect, the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' The background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radiating out from the center) that was displayed before being displayed in its full state has been changed to a part of the enlarged title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" While the display area is completely filled, a background dedicated to displaying the title of the strongest low-base reach effect (background where 6 friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right positions) When the title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is reduced in size and stationary in a fixed position, a background dedicated to displaying the title of the lowest base strongest reach effect is displayed as the background. In addition, during the title start period after transitioning from the falling effect, a portion of the enlarged title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' was displayed before the display area was completely filled. The pending display and the active display are hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Six people catch Bakuchu!". Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the title start period ends.

In addition, during the title start period when the selection effect was transitioned, a part of the enlarged title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" was displayed before the display area was completely filled. The selection result image of the selection effect (in this case, the title image of the low-based strongest reach effect) is displayed in such a way that the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' While this is happening, the background changes to the title display for the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which 6 ally characters and the enemy character ``Bakuchu'' are displayed on the left and right positions), and the title text ``Six people make Bakuchu'' appears. Catch it!'' is reduced to a fixed position, and a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as the background. Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance are maintained hidden.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Six people catch the Bakushu!" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low-based strongest reach production, first, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title character "6 people catch the Bakushu!" is set with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The title is kept displayed at that position for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-42, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e5) to (e6), below the title characters "Six people to catch the Bakushu!", there is a message smaller than the title characters "Six people to catch the Bakushu!" Display the expectation level suggestion display. As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base strongest reach effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title text "Catch Bakushu with 6 people!" displayed in a reduced size and in a fixed position. , a portion of the title text ``Six people catch Bakushu!'' is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. In this case, instead of being displayed in an enlarged manner, which is the opposite of the case where the title text "Six people catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, the title text "Six people catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in an enlarged manner during the title start period. Catch the Bakushu!'' is reduced and displayed in a different manner from the reverse. Expand until the entire display area is filled. In other words, during the title start period, the trajectory of each part of the title character shrinks as the title character "Six people catch the Bakushu!" expands during the title end period. This is different from the trajectory that each part of the title character takes during the process. For this reason, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Six people catch Bakushu!" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-42, the title end period of the low-based strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect (Figures 11-47 and 11-48 reference). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-42, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, subtitles for dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, and the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed on the speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is also not output.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the beginning of the introductory part of the low-based strongest reach effect (the background in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" in the city) is the title Unlike the background dedicated to displaying the title in the display part (the background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right positions), during the title end period, the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" After the background dedicated to displaying the title is completely filled and the title end period ends, the background changes to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect. The introductory part of the low-base, strongest reach performance begins with a video scene in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu." In addition, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e8) and 11-42, after the introduction part begins, the line ``If you can, try to catch it! !” is displayed, and the audio of the lines displayed in the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low-base strongest reach production, while the title display part outputs the sound that reads the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the title display part does not display subtitles with lines corresponding to the scene of the title display part, and the title is read out from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the displayed part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the sound of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the lines you respond to will be output.

When the variation pattern designation command specifies a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after the strongest super reach with a low base, the production control CPU 120 causes six ally characters to capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. The performance result of the low base strongest reach performance is a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is notified of the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating . On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the strongest super reach on a low base, six ally characters are unable to catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. , notifies the performance result that it is not a jackpot as the performance result of the low base strongest reach performance, and then displays on the image display device 5 a decorative pattern (large) indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command. Display the combination.

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the lowest base strongest reach performance]
In the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Six people to catch Bakuchu!" and a smaller size than the title text "Six people to catch Bakuchu!" suggesting the level of expectation. Display is displayed. The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star objects and the star object, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e6), and the star object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low base strongest reach effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level are displayed. If the suggestion display and are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-based strongest reach performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating the level of expectation.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so when the low base Even when the strongest reach effect is executed, the objects displayed as pending display and active display may be confused with the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, resulting in the misunderstanding that the expectation level is the highest in the expectation level suggestion display. can be prevented.

In addition, when executing the low-based strongest reach effect, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e2) to (e4), during the title start period, the title characters ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' It was displayed at an enlarged size so that only the letters of the section were visible in the display area, and then reduced to a reduced size so that all letters were visible in the display area, and a background dedicated to displaying the title with the strongest reach of a low base was displayed. Sometimes, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, by executing a monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, the display before the monochrome display effect can be executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the pending display and active display that have been displayed are erased, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title text "6 people catch the Bakushu!" is placed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The displayed state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e5) to (e6), a display indicating the level of expectation is displayed below the title characters "Six people to catch the Bakushu!" Display. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in 41 (e6), by changing the color of 4.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect from black to gold among the 5 star-shaped objects, the low-base strongest reach effect is achieved. The expectation level of jackpot is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About the modification of the title display part]
FIG. 11-43 is a diagram showing the transition of images in a modified example of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, the low base strong reach C performance, and the low base strongest reach performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 moves to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f1), the display area is Executes a blackout effect that displays the entire screen in black. If the pending display and the active display are displayed before the execution of the blackout effect, the pending display and the active display are hidden when the blackout effect is started.

After continuing the blackout effect for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an expectation level suggestion display (see FIG. 11-43 (f2)) while maintaining the background of the entire display area in black. In step 43 (f2), a display indicating the degree of expectation of low base strongest reach effect is displayed.

Next, the production control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the background of the entire display area is displayed in black and the expectation level suggestion display is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (f3) (f5), the corresponding super reach is displayed. The title characters of the performance (in FIGS. 11-43 (f3) and (f5), the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance) are displayed in a fixed position in a size larger than the expectation level suggestion display.

When the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect are all displayed in a fixed position, a part of the title characters are displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. One of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed as the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode. Regardless of whether the small) is a number from 1 to 9, part of the title character of the corresponding super reach effect when displayed in the fixed position is the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner with both.

Further, the title characters are displayed in either a white format (FIG. 11-43 (f3)) or a red format (FIG. 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are to be displayed in white or red is determined in the aforementioned step 131SGS609 during the variable display preview effect determination process. In the variable display preview performance determination process, if a variable pattern including execution of low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, low base strong reach C performance, and low base strongest reach performance is identified, a jackpot will be awarded. Whether the title characters are displayed in white or red is determined by the probability depending on whether the title is present or not, and if the title characters are displayed in red, it is a jackpot. Whether to display the title characters in white or red is determined with a probability that the ratio is higher than the ratio of winning a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in white. Therefore, when the title characters are displayed in red in the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the title characters are displayed in white.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the expectation level suggestion display and the title characters of the corresponding super reach performance, and then displays the expectation level suggestion display and the corresponding super reach performance, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (f4) and (f6). While maintaining the display of the title characters of the reach performance, a background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance is displayed, and a sound reading out the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, in the title display part, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the audio of the dialogue is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, in the title display part, the title characters are displayed for a longer time than the time from when the blackout effect starts until the title characters are displayed (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title end period. Note that the control of the title end period is the same as each of the above-mentioned super reach effects, so the explanation here will be omitted.

In this way, in the modified example of the title display part, the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect are larger in size than the expectation level suggestion display, and the expected appearance depends on whether the appearance is white or red. Since the degree is suggested, it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the expectation degree suggestion first.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f2), whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, if the type of super reach effect is the same, the same format is used. An expectation level suggestion display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether the title characters after the expectation level suggestion display are displayed are white or red.

[About high base reach A to D effects]
FIG. 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of high base reach performances A to D, and FIG. 11-44 shows the execution status of high base reach performances A to D. FIG. In addition, high base reach A to D productions are the same except that the expectations suggested by the type of enemy character appearing, the title name, and the expectation level suggestion display are different, so we will explain high base reach A production here. However, the explanation of the high base reach B to D effects will be omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the high base super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g2), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. A normal reach performance is executed in which the robot stops at the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and takes a reach mode. After that, the title display part of the high base reach A performance is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A performance starts after part of the title characters “Battle Reach A” of the high base reach A performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period until it is displayed in the position, the title display period in which the title letters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in the fixed position, and the title letter "Battle Reach A" that was displayed in the fixed position disappears. This includes the title end period until switching to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the high base reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. Display at an enlarged size such that only some characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the entire display area is displayed with a portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A". Further, the portion of the title character "Battle Reach A" displayed in the display area appears in a manner overlapping both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced to a reduced size where all characters of the title characters "Battle Reach A" are visible in the display area. The title characters ``Battle Reach A'' are held still in a fixed position. When the title character "Battle Reach A" is reduced to a fixed position and remains stationary, a portion of the title character "Battle Reach A" is displayed overlapping both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. Ru.

One of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed as the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, but the title of the high base reach A production will start. During the period, regardless of whether the decorative pattern (small) on the left or right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", the title character "Battle Reach A" that appears in enlarged size will be the decoration on the left or right side of the reach mode. The title character "Battle Reach A" appears in a manner that overlaps with both the symbols (small) and is displayed in a reduced size while stationary in a fixed position, and part of it is the decorative symbol (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner with both.

As shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the time saved before the display area is completely filled with part of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" The changing background (night sky background) of the decorative pattern (large) in state A or variable state is displayed in such a way that the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A". While there, the background changes to a special background for displaying the title of the high base reach A production (a background in which the ally character "Mumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are displayed on the left and right positions), and the title characters "Battle Reach A" are reduced. When the size is fixed at a fixed position, a background dedicated to displaying the title of the high base reach A effect is displayed as the background. In addition, the hold display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A" are replaced by the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A". A" is hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of "A". Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the title start period ends.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the high base reach A performance, first, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" were displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. This state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-45, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A". As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A performance (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the high base reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title characters "Battle Reach A" displayed in the fixed position in reduced size are replaced with the title characters "Battle Reach A". The display area is expanded until the entire display area is filled with a portion of "Reach A". In this case, instead of being enlarged in the opposite manner to the case where the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period. The title character "Battle Reach A" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled with a part of the title character "Battle Reach A" in a manner different from the reverse manner. In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title character takes as the title character "Battle Reach A" shrinks during the title start period is the same as the trajectory that each part of the title character takes as the title character "Battle Reach A" expands during the title end period. is different. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-45, the title end period of the high base reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the high base reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11-48 reference). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-45, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance, subtitles for dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed on the speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is also not output.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the high base reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the beginning of the introduction part of the high base reach A production (the background where the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting) differs from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (the background in which the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are displayed on the left and right positions), the title character "Battle Reach A" is displayed during the title end period. After the background dedicated to title display is partially filled and the title end period ends, the background is switched to the background at the start of the introduction part of the high base reach A performance. The introductory part of the high base reach A production begins with a video scene where the ally character "Mumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g7) and 11-45, after the introduction part starts, the line ``Fight'' corresponding to the scene where the ally character ``Yumemu'' and the enemy character ``Maskman'' are fighting !” is displayed, and the audio of the lines displayed in the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high base reach A production, while the title display part outputs the audio reading out the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the title display part does not display subtitles with dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part, and the title is read out from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the displayed part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the sound of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the lines you respond to will be output.

The production control CPU 120 specifies a variation pattern that will be a jackpot after high base super reach A by the variation pattern specification command, and in the final stage of the introduction part, the ally character "Yumemu" will interact with the enemy character "Maskman". After winning the battle, the performance result of the high base reach A performance is a jackpot (it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is designated by a variable display result designation command. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot won is displayed. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern specification command specifies a fluctuation pattern in which the reach is off after a high base super reach A, the ally character "Yumemu" is defeated by the enemy character "Maskman" at the end of the introduction part, and the high A performance result indicating that the base reach A performance is not a jackpot is notified, and then a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Display.

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for high base reach performances A to D]
The expectation level suggestion display for high base reach A to D performances are the same except for the different expectations suggested by the expectation level suggestion display, so here we will explain the expectation level suggestion display for high base reach A performance, and A description of the display of expectation level suggestions for base reach B to D effects will be omitted.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" as well as an expectation level suggestion display in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A." The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star objects and the star object, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), and the star object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the time saving state A or the variable probability state in which the high base reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the pending display and the active display are displayed in the title display part. If , and the expectation level suggestion display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating the level of expectation.

In addition, in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the game ball almost never enters the first starting prize opening, so if the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum (4) and is being displayed variablely, the reserved A maximum of 5 objects may be displayed as display and active display, and this will match the number of objects that indicate the maximum expectation level in the expectation level suggestion display, but the In the title display part, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so if the high base reach A effect is executed in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display. However, it is possible to prevent objects displayed in the pending display and active display from being confused with objects in the expectation level suggestion display and being mistakenly recognized as having the highest level of expectation in the expectation level suggestion display.

In addition, when executing the high base reach A effect, only some of the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed during the title start period, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g1) to (g3). When the display is enlarged so that it is not visible in the display area, and then reduced to a reduced size where all characters are visible in the display area, and a background dedicated to displaying the title of the high base reach A effect is displayed, the title start period Since the pending display and active display that were displayed before are hidden, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the high base reach A effect, by executing a monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, excluding the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, the display before the monochrome display effect can be executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the pending display and active display that have been displayed are erased, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A". At this time, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects forming the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), As shown in 44 (g5), out of the five star-shaped objects, 3 correspond to the high base reach A effect (3.5 objects for the high base reach B effect, 4 objects for the high base reach C effect, By changing the color of the star-shaped objects (4.5 pieces in the reach D performance) from black to gold, the expectation level of a jackpot in the high base reach A performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About the display position of title characters]
FIG. 11-46 is a diagram showing the position where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11-46(A) and (B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L, and since the game board 2 is arranged in front of the rectangular display area 5L, the image display device 5 The visible area in the display area 5L is an area that is visible from the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, that is, an area that is not covered by the members that constitute the game board 2.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" at a fixed position during the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance. At this time, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch the Bakushu!" is displayed is the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (A). 5L, and as shown in FIG. 11-46(B), it is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2. This position overlaps with the intersection of diagonal lines of a certain visible rectangular area 5S.

Similarly, the title text for the low base weak reach B production is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the title text for the low base strong reach A production is "Two people catch the Bakushu!", and the title text for the low base strong reach B production is "Gekishaku". "Robo Battle", title text with low base strong reach C production, "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", title text with low base strongest reach production, "6 people catch Bakuchu!", title text with high base reach A production, "Battle Reach A" , the title characters "Battle Reach B" for the high base reach B performance, the title characters "Battle Reach C" for the high base reach C performance, and the title characters "Battle Reach D" for the high base reach D performance. As shown in FIG. 11-46(A), the fixed position at which the title character is displayed during the title display period is the position where the title character overlaps the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. As shown in 11-46(B), the intersection of the diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5; They are in overlapping positions.

Game machines are often subject to design changes during the development stage, and due to changes in the design of the game board 2, the area covered by the display area 5L of the image display device 5 by the members constituting the game board 2 changes. The visible area of the display area 5L may be changed. In addition, gaming machines installed in gaming parlors may be taken over, refurbished, and sold again, and in such cases, the design of the gaming board 2 may be changed and the parts that make up the gaming board 2 may be changed to the image display device 5. The area covered by the display area 5L may change, and the visible area of the display area 5L may be changed. In such a case, if the arrangement of the title characters in the super reach effect is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, there is a risk that the display position of the title characters will deviate greatly from the center of the visible area. .

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the title display part of any super reach effect, the fixed position where the title characters are displayed during the title display period is such that the title characters are located between the diagonals of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. This is a position that overlaps with the intersection, and also a position that overlaps with the intersection of diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5. The title characters displayed at a fixed position during the title display period are displayed at positions that overlap both of the intersections of the diagonals of the display area 5L and the intersections of the diagonals of the rectangular area 5S. Even if the design of the game board 2 is changed when the machine is reused, the display position of the title characters can be prevented from being largely deviated from the center of the visible area.

[About the performance time of super reach performance]
FIG. 11-47 is a diagram showing the performance time of each super reach performance, and FIG. 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the performance times of each super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the entire performance time (time from the start of the title display part to the end of the introduction part) of the low base weak reach A performance is T1-1, and the performance of the title display part is T1-1. The time is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The entire presentation time of the low base weak reach B presentation is T1-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, and the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b. Yes, the performance time of the title end period is Tt1c.

In addition, the overall performance time for low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance is different, but the performance time of the title display part, the performance time of the title start period, the performance time of the title display period, and the end of the title. The performance time of each period is the same.

As shown in FIG. 11-47, the entire performance time of the low base strong reach A performance is T2-1, the performance time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the performance time of the title start period is Tt2a, The presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The entire presentation time of the low base strong reach B presentation is T2-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b. Yes, the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall performance time of the low base strong reach C performance is T2-3, the performance time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the performance time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the performance time of the title display period is Tt2b. Yes, the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall performance time for the low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production is different, but the production time of the title display part, the production time of the title start period, and the title. The presentation time of the display period and the presentation time of the title end period are both the same time.

The overall performance time of the low base strongest reach performance is T3, the performance time of the title display part is Tt3, of which the performance time of the title start period is Tt3a, the performance time of the title display period is Tt3b, and the performance time of the title display part is Tt3b. The performance time of the end period is Tt3c.

The overall performance time of high base reach performances A to D is all T4, the performance time of the title display part is all Tt4, and the performance time of the title start period is Tt4a, and the performance time of the title display part is Tt4a. The presentation time is Tt4b in both cases, and the presentation time in the title end period is Tt4c in both cases.

Comparing the overall performance time of the super reach performance in the low base medium (normal state) in this form, as shown in Figure 11-48 (A), it is longer than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The overall performance time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance with high jackpot expectation is low base weak reach A The performance is longer than the overall performance time (T1-1, T1-2) of the low base weak reach B performance, and is expected to be a bigger hit than the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach performance B, and the low base weak reach C performance. The total performance time (T3) of the strongest low base reach performance with a high degree of intensity is the total performance time (T2-1, T2- 2, T2-3).

In addition, among the low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production, the overall performance time (T1 -2) is set longer than the entire performance time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A performance. In addition, among the low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production, the low base strong reach C production has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A production and low base strong reach production B. The overall performance time (T2-3) is longer than the total performance time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A performance and the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach A performance, Among the low base strong reach B performances, the total performance time (T2-2) of the low base strong reach B performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A performance, is the entire performance time of the low base strong reach A performance. It is set longer than (T2-1).

Comparing the production times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), which of the super reach productions (low base weak reach A, B Even in the case of production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production), the production time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is the production of the title start period. (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is longer than the title end period. It is set longer than the presentation time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

Comparing the performance time of the title display part in the super reach performance in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (C), it is found that the low base weak reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The production time (Tt2) of the title display part of the strong base reach A production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production is the production time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production. The production time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, which is longer than the time (Tt1) and has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach production A, low base strong reach production B, and low base weak reach production C production. is set longer than the performance time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance. In addition, the production time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A to D production is the production time (Tt4) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, and the low base strongest reach production. It is set shorter than the time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3).

In this embodiment, if we compare the performance times of the title start period and title display period in the low-base strongest reach effect and the high-base reach effect A to D, we can see that the title in the low-base strongest reach effect is shown in Figure 11-48 (D). The production time (Tt3a) of the start period is set longer than the production time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D productions, and as shown in Figure 11-48 (E), the production time (Tt3a) of the low base reach is the strongest. The presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach presentations A to D.

Comparing the production times during the title start period for super reach productions (low base weak reach A and B production, low base strong reach A to C production, and low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) in this form, As shown in Figure 11-48 (F), the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The production time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the C production is longer than the production time (Tt1a) of the title start period of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and is longer than the production time (Tt1a) of the title start period of the low base weak reach A production and the low base strong reach A production. The performance time (Tt3a) during the title start period of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the strong reach performance B and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance. It is set longer than the performance time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the base strong reach C performance.

Comparing the production times during the title display period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) in this embodiment, As shown in Figure 11-48 (G), the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of C presentation is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of low base weak reach A presentation and low base strong reach A presentation. The performance time (Tt3b) during the title display period of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the strong reach performance B and low base weak reach performance C, is the low base strong reach performance A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance. It is set longer than the performance time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the base strong reach C performance.

Comparing the production times during the title end period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) in this form, As shown in Figure 11-48 (H), the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The performance time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the C performance is longer than the performance time (Tt1c) of the title end period of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The performance time (Tt3c) during the title end period of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the strong reach performance B and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance A, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance. It is set longer than the performance time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the base strong reach C performance.

In this form, the character display period of the title display part (title display Comparing the performance time of the part (which does not include the prologue period described later and which is the sum of the title start period, title display period, and title end period), as shown in Figure 11-48 (I), the low base The performance time (Tt2d) during the character display period for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, which have higher jackpot expectations than the weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, are as follows: It is longer than the character display period duration (Tt1d) of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and is more jackpot than the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach performance B, and the low base weak reach C performance. The performance time (Tt3d) during the text display period of the highly anticipated low base strongest reach performance is the performance time (Tt2d) during the text display period for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance. ).

In this form, the production time of the title start period and title display period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) As shown in Figures 11-48 (J) and (K), any of the super reach performances (low base weak reach performances A, B, low base strong reach performances A to C) during low base (normal state) , low base strongest reach effect), the effect time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a) /Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the presentation time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c) of the title end period.

In this form, super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) during low base (normal state) and high base (time saving state A and definite variable state) Comparing the overall performance time of the middle super reach performances (high base reach A to D performances), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the super reach performances during the high base (time saving state A and variable probability state) The overall performance time (T4) of (high base reach A to D performances) is the super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base reach performance) during low base (normal state). It is set shorter than the entire performance time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the base strongest reach performance).

[About the title characters of super reach production]
FIG. 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns of the title display part in the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the title text of the low base weak reach A production is "Catch the Bakuchu!", the number of characters in the title is 10 characters, and the font size of the title characters (per character (standard size) is FJ, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area including all title characters) is EJA.

The title text of the low base weak reach B production is "Bilibiri Hockey Showdown", the number of characters in the title is 10 characters, the font size of the title characters is FJ, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EJB. .

The title text of the low base strong reach A production is "Two people catch Bakushu!", the number of characters in the title is 13 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area where the title characters are displayed. The size is EKA.

The title characters of the low base strong reach B production are "Gekisha Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 7 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EKB.

The title text of the low base strong reach C production is "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 8 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EKC. .

The title text of the low base strongest reach production is "6 people catch Bakushu!", the number of characters in the title is 13 characters, the font size of the title characters is FSK, and the display area size where the title characters are displayed. is ESK.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before it develops into a super reach effect is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after it develops into a super reach effect. is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this form, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the low base strong reach A performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. , the font size FK of the title characters for the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect is a larger font size than the font size FJ of the title letters for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. . Furthermore, the size of the smallest font among the characters that make up the title characters for Low Base Strong Reach A Production, Low Base Strong Reach B Production, and Low Base Strong Reach C Production is the same as for Low Base Weak Reach A Production, Low Base Weak The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the title characters of the reach B effect.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title character of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance A, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance A, The font size is larger than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters for the low base strongest reach effect constitutes the title characters for the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title characters for the low base weak reach A effect, the low base weak reach B effect, the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base weak reach B effect. The font size FK of the title characters for the base strong reach C effect and the font size FSK of the title characters for the low base strongest reach effect are both smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before it develops into the super reach effect. The font size is larger than the font size KS of the decorative pattern (small) after it is developed into a super reach effect. In addition, the size of the largest character of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect, the low base weak reach B effect, the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach The size of the largest font among the characters that make up the title letters for the C production, and the size of the largest font among the letters that make up the title text for the low base strongest reach production, will both develop into a super reach production. It is smaller than the size of the smallest character among the characters that can be taken by the previous decorative pattern (large), and is the smallest of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production. Small font size, size of the smallest font among the characters that make up the title characters of low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, low base strong reach C production, low base strongest reach production The size of the smallest size of the letters that make up the title letters is larger than the size of the largest size of the letters that can be taken by the decorative design (small) after the development of the super reach effect. .

Comparing the display area sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the low base strong reach A has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. The display area size EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title text for the production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production are the display area size EJA of the title text for the low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production. , the display area size ESK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance, which is larger than EJB and has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance A, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance ESK. It is larger than the display area size of the title characters EKA, EKB, and EKC for the strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance.

[About expectation level suggestion display]
FIG. 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-50(A), the expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star-shaped objects and the star-shaped object, and the star-shaped object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

When performing the expectation level suggestion display, the performance control CPU 120 first displays five star-shaped objects in black, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), and displays the star-shaped objects indicating the expectation level. After displaying the characters ``expectation level'' to indicate that the object is a certain object, a plurality of star-shaped objects that are to be changed from black to gold are gradually changed from black to gold in order from the left side. Moreover, when changing a star-shaped object from black to gold, the performance control CPU 120 highlights the corresponding star-shaped object and then changes it to a normal display of gold.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-50(B), the production control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the star-shaped object that changes color, changes the color to white so that it shines from the center to the periphery, and The entire enlarged object changes to white until it disappears, and then a star-shaped object with the entire object or half of it changed to gold is displayed. In particular, for the second to third star-shaped objects, a part of the enlarged star-shaped object is a part of the text "Expectation Level" to indicate that the star-shaped object indicates the level of expectation. Expand it to a size that overlaps with . Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 performs highlighted display in a common manner both when changing from a black star-shaped object to the entire star-shaped object to gold, and when changing half of the star-shaped object to gold.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), when changing a plurality of star-shaped objects to gold, the production control CPU 120 waits until the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first has finished. At a timing (t1) before the normal display, the highlighted display of the star-shaped object next to the star object is started. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the star-shaped object that is two adjacent to it until the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that has started highlighting first ends; At the timing (t2) when the highlighted display of the star-shaped object that started is completed, the highlighted display of the star-shaped object two adjacent stars is started. In other words, two adjacent star-shaped objects are highlighted at the same time, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted at the same time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the production control CPU 120 outputs the expectation level suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the timing when the highlighting of the star-shaped object starts, and also outputs the expectation level suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and displays the multiple star-shaped objects. When changing an object to gold, the output of the expectation level suggestion sound that accompanies the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first is ended before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object starts, and then the next star-shaped object is highlighted. The sound that suggests the level of expectation accompanying the highlighting of the star-shaped object is no longer overlapped with the output.

[About selection effects]
FIG. 11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection performance is any type of super when directly executing the low base strong reach A to C performance or the low base strongest reach performance without going through the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance from the normal reach performance. This is a performance that specifies whether the reach performance will be executed.

When the selection performance is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the normal reach performance as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h1), and then controls the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h2). A window is displayed within the display area of , and the title of the selected performance is displayed within the window. In the title of the selection effect, the message "Upgrade your reach!" is displayed, suggesting that the selection effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the performance control CPU 120 displays the title image of the super reach performance in the window, a button image imitating the push button 31B, and continuous operation of the push button 31B. An operation promotion image consisting of operation promotion characters "Continuously press!" is displayed. The title image of the super reach effect is an image with the same content as the display content of the title display period in the title display part of each super reach effect, and the title images of the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effect are , an expectation level suggestion display is also displayed.

The production control CPU 120 selects, as the title image of the super reach production displayed in the window, the title image of the low base weak reach A production, which has a jackpot expectation of 0 and has the lowest expectation of development to other super reach productions. is first displayed, and each time the push button 31B is operated a number of times corresponding to the title image of the displayed super reach effect, the super reach effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is displayed. Switch to the title image of the next super reach effect until the title image is reached.

As shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the window is the low base weak reach effect A effect, which has the lowest expectations for development into other super reach effects. After the title image, the expectation of development to other super reach performances is higher than the low base weak reach A performance.The title image of the low base weak reach B performance, the expectation of jackpot is higher than the low base weak reach A and B performances. Title image of low base strong reach A performance, title image of low base strong reach B performance with higher jackpot expectation than low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach with higher jackpot expectation than B performance The title image of the C performance is switched in order, and the title image of the low base strong reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance, is switched in order.

Then, when the title image of the super reach effect corresponds to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 presses a push button a number of times corresponding to the title image of the displayed super reach effect. When the operation of 31B is detected, as shown in Figure 11-51 (h9), a confirmed image is displayed in which the operation promotion image disappears and only the title image of the super reach effect is displayed in the window. It is notified that the super reach performance of the title image will be executed, and then the transition is made to the title display part of the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-52, the number of times the push button 3B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance is 3 times, and from the title image of the low base weak reach B performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance. The number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch to the title image for the low base strong reach A performance is 4, and the number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image for the low base strong reach A performance to the title image for the low base strong reach B performance is 8. The number of times the push button 31B was operated was 10 times to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach C effect, and from the title image of the low base strong reach C effect to the title of the low base strongest reach effect. The number of operations of the push button 31B to switch to the image is 15 times, and the higher the developing attitude of the super reach effect of the title image to be switched to other super reach effects or the higher the jackpot expectation, the more necessary it is to switch to the next title image. This increases the number of times the push button 31B is operated, and it becomes necessary to operate the push button 31B many times.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-52, when the selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach effects A and B are never executed, and the jackpot expectation level is always higher than the low base strong reach effect A. It has been confirmed that the super reach effect will be executed, and the proportion that the low base strong reach effect will be executed is approximately 32.18%, the proportion that the low base strong reach effect B effect will be executed is approximately 30.16%, and the low base strong reach effect is approximately 30.16%. The rate at which the strong reach C effect is executed is about 30.30%, and the rate at which the low base strongest reach effect is executed is about 7.36%.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 will also display an expectation level suggestion display in the same way as the title display part in the title image of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach production in the selected production. In the expectation level suggestion display in the part, five star-shaped objects are displayed in black, and multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold are gradually changed from black to gold in order from the left side. , In the expectation level suggestion display displayed in the selected performance, out of the five star-shaped objects, the number of star-shaped objects indicating the expectation level of the corresponding super reach performance is displayed in a golden state from the beginning. .

The minimum time required to switch from the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the selected effect to the title image of the next super reach effect is the number of times corresponding to the title image of the super reach effect plus one press of the push button 31B. This is the time multiplied by the time required for the operation. The time required for one operation of the push button 31B is approximately 80 ms, and it is necessary to operate the push button 31B three times when switching from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. The minimum time required for this is approximately 240 ms.

On the other hand, in the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part, the time for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted, that is, the time for the suggested expectation level to change by one level, is approximately 300 ms, and the low base weak reach A It is set longer than the minimum time required to switch from the title image of the performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance. Therefore, in the selection performance, the performance control CPU 120 changes the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the low base weak reach A performance in a time shorter than the time for the expectation level suggested in the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part to change by one level. It becomes possible to switch to the title image with weak reach B effect.

[About effects that can be executed during variable display]
FIG. 11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-53, effects that can be executed during variable display include explanatory text display effects, title color change effects, and operation promotion effects A to D.

The explanatory text display performance is a performance that can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, and is a performance that displays an explanatory text that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high.

The title color change performance is a performance that can be executed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance and B performance, and is a performance that changes the color of the title characters from the original white to red or gold.

Operation promotion performance A is a performance that can be executed in the normal reach performance, and displays an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B, and develops into the low base weak reach performance A and B in response to the operation of the push button 31B. This is a performance that announces whether or not it is true. In addition, in the operation promotion performance A, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, it is possible to develop not only the low base weak reach performance A and B performance, but also the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance. good.

Operation promotion performance B is a performance that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach performances A and B, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. This is a performance that notifies whether or not the low base strong reach performance will develop into one of the low base strong reach performances A to C in response to the operation of the push button 31B. In addition, in a configuration in which a jackpot is announced as a performance result in the low base weak reach performances A and B, in the operation promotion performance B, the performance result as to whether or not it is a jackpot is notified in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B. It may also be used as a configuration.

Operation promotion performance C is a performance that can be executed in the middle of the introduction part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the strongest reach performance, and displays an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B, and prompts the user to operate the push button 31B. This is an effect that displays one of a plurality of types of cut-in images depending on the cut-in image.

The operation promotion performance D is a performance that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach performances A and B, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or an operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. This is a performance that notifies the performance result of whether or not there is a jackpot in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the explanatory text display effect during variable display, whether to execute the title color change effect and to which color it should be changed, and whether to execute the operation promotion effect A. , whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) in the operation promotion effect B, whether to execute the operation promotion effect C, and the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) It is determined in the preview effect determination process of the variable display start setting process whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) in the operation promotion effect D.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (A), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which low base strong reach effects A to C are executed is specified, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is determined. is determined. At this time, if a variation pattern that results in a negative performance result is identified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is specified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, execution of the explanatory text display performance is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a loss is identified, so the low base strong reach A The explanatory text display performance is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the ~C performance, thereby suggesting that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the explanatory text display effect is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and regardless of whether or not the explanatory text display effect is executed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. First, although the execution time of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the execution time of the title display part do not change, the first variation pattern is used as a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects are executed. a second fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the first fluctuation pattern, and when the first fluctuation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display effect is not executed and the second fluctuation pattern is specified. In this case, the explanatory text display effect may be executed using a variation time set longer than the first variation pattern. In such a configuration, it is not determined whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect in the preview effect determination process, but whether the explanatory text display effect is specified depending on whether the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. It is determined whether or not to execute the display effect. At this time, by determining the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern so that when the explanatory text display effect is executed, the expectation level of jackpot is higher than when the explanatory display effect is not executed, the low base strong reach The explanatory text display performance is executed in the title display part of the A to C performances, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (B), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which low base weak reach A and B effects are executed is specified, whether or not to execute the title color change effect is determined. In addition, when executing the title color change effect, it is determined which color to change to. At this time, if a variation pattern in which the production result is off is identified, non-execution (white) is determined at a rate of 80%, execution (red) is determined at a 20% rate, and execution (gold) is determined at a rate of 20%. Not determined. In addition, if a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, 20% of the time it will not be executed (white), and 75% of the time it will be executed (red ) is determined, and execution (money) is determined at a rate of 5%. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C production or a low base strongest reach production is identified, title color change production is executed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that deviates from the production is identified. Since it has been decided that the color of the title letters will change in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B performances, there is a high possibility that it will develop into the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance. It is suggested. In addition, execution (Friday) is determined only when a variation pattern that develops into the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect is identified, so in the title display part of the low base strong reach effects A and B. By changing the color of the title letters to gold, it is confirmed that the low base strong reach effects A to C will develop into the low base strongest reach effects.

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after execution of the low base weak reach effects A and B, if a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, a variation that results in a loss. It is decided to execute the title color change effect at a higher rate than when a pattern is identified, and the color of the title letters changes in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects, indicating that there is a high possibility of a jackpot. may be suggested. In addition, in such a configuration, execution (gold) is determined only when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, and the color of the title letters changes to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects. The jackpot may be confirmed by doing so.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (C), in the preview performance determination process, when a variation pattern that deviates from the normal reach performance or a variation pattern that develops from the normal reach performance to the low base weak reach performances A and B is identified. , it is determined whether or not to execute the operation promotion effect A. At this time, if a variation pattern that results in an error is identified, non-execution is determined 50% of the time, and execution is determined 50% of the time. Further, when a variation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B performances is specified, execution is determined at a rate of 100%. In this way, execution is always decided when a variation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B effects is identified, and execution may also be decided when a variation pattern that is out of reach is identified. , it is suggested that when the operation promotion performance A is executed in the normal reach performance, it may develop into low base weak reach performances A and B.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (D), in the preview performance determination process, there is a variation pattern in which the performance results of the low base weak reach A and B performances are off, and a low base strong reach from the low base weak reach A and B performances. When a variation pattern that develops into the A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance is specified, it is determined which of the operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) is to be displayed. At this time, if a deviation pattern is identified, the operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the operation promotion image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, an operation promotion image (small) will be determined at a rate of 10%, and an operation promotion image will be promoted at a rate of 90%. The image (large) is determined. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the operation promotion image (small) is used at a higher rate than when a deviation pattern is identified. Since the operation promotion image (large) is determined among the operation promotion images (large) and the operation promotion image (large), the operation promotion image (large) is displayed in the operation promotion performance B at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. In this case, it is suggested that the possibility of developing into the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance is higher than when the operation promotion image (small) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (E), in the preview performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance are specified, the operation promotion performance C It is determined whether to execute the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) when the operation promotion effect C is executed. At this time, if a variation pattern that results in a different performance result is identified, 50% of the time it will be decided not to execute it, 30% of the time it will be decided to execute it (cut-in image (A)), and 20% of the time it will be decided not to execute it. Execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined based on the ratio. In addition, when a variation pattern in which the production result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is decided at a rate of 5%, execution (cut-in image (A)) is decided at a rate of 30%, and execution is decided at a rate of 65%. Execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, the execution of the operation promotion performance C is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a loss is identified, so the low base strong reach A The operation promotion performance C is executed at the end of the introduction part in the ~C performance, which suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot. In addition, when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, a higher percentage of the cut-in image (A) and cut-in image (B) than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a loss is identified. B) is displayed, so when the operation promotion performance C is executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performance A to C and the cut-in image (B) is displayed, the cut-in image (A) is displayed. This suggests that there is a higher possibility of hitting the jackpot than if the player were to win the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (F), in the preview performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effect are specified, the operation promotion image ( It is determined whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large). At this time, if a variation pattern that results in a negative performance result is identified, the operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the operation promotion image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is specified, an operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 10%, and an operation promotion image (large) is determined at a rate of 90%. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, a higher percentage of operation promotion images (small) and operation promotion images (large) are selected than when a variation pattern that results in a loss is identified. Since the image (large) is determined, when the operation promotion image (large) is displayed in the operation promotion performance D at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance, the operation promotion image (large) is displayed. It is suggested that there is a higher possibility of winning the jackpot than when the image (small) is displayed.

[About explanatory text display]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect. .

The performance control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Yumemu" as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to (I) during the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances. After that, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled, and when an explanatory text is displayed during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed in front of the background. Display the explanatory characters ``Surprise!'', ``Peach Tree'', and ``Big Lucky!'' that make up the explanatory text in order on the layer. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 first displays the explanatory characters "Surprise!" while moving them leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (A). 11-56 (t1)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (B), when it is moved near the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Figure 11-56 (t2)), and then , as shown in FIG. 11-55(C), it is displayed while moving leftward at high speed again until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56(t3)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(D), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory characters "Peach Tree" while moving them leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center (FIG. 11-55(D)). -56 (t4)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (E), when it is moved near the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Figure 11-56 (t5)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55 (F), it is displayed again while moving leftward at high speed until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56 (t6)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory characters "Big Lucky!" while moving them leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center (FIG. 11-55(G)). -56 (t7)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (H), when it is moved near the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Figure 11-56 (t8)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55 (I), it is displayed again while moving leftward at high speed until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56 (t9)).

[About title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a title color change performance that changes white title characters to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the production control CPU 120 causes a part of the white title characters to appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, move them toward the home position, and move them toward the home position. Make it stand still. Thereafter, during the title display period, the performance control CPU 120 displays the white title characters in a fixed position as shown in FIG. 11-57(A). Then, when the execution of the title color change effect has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, and outputs the specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, as shown in FIG. -57 (B) (C) As shown in (B) and (C), the white title character is kept stationary in the fixed position, and then the white title character displayed in the fixed position is moved from the fixed position during the title end period. Move the title to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, when the execution of the title color change effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, and also outputs the specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. As shown in -57 (D), if the title characters displayed in a fixed position are changed to appear to glow, and after the time t2 has elapsed, it is determined that the title characters will change to red. As shown in Figure 11-57 (E), the title characters are changed to red, and if the change to gold is determined, the title characters are changed to gold, as shown in Figure 11-57 (F). After that, the title characters are moved from the regular position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear while maintaining the changed color displayed at the regular position during the title end period. When the title characters are changed from a glowing appearance to red or gold, the title characters change to red or gold when the light on the title characters becomes clear.

As shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and (B), the production time T1 of the title start period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions is 500ms, the production time T2 of the title display period is 2200ms, and the title end. The presentation time T3 of the period is set to 300ms, and the time t1 from the start of the title display period to the time when the title characters change to appear to glow is 800ms. The time t2 from which the title characters change to red or gold after changing to a visible mode is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 from which the title characters change to red or gold until the title display period ends is set to 1200 ms. There is.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-58 (C), when the color of the title character changes from white to red or gold, the time (t1) at which the title character is displayed in white during the title display period Also, during the title display period, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in red or gold after the change is longer than the time (T1+t1) during which the title characters are displayed in white in the title display part. Also, the time (t3+T3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold state in the title display part is longer.

[About operation promotion performance A]
FIG. 11-59 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion effect A.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance A that prompts the operation of the push button 31B in the normal reach performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the operation promotion performance A, as shown in FIGS. , an operation promotion image (small) consisting of a button image (small) imitating the push button 31B and operation promotion characters (small) "Press!" urging operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

A remaining time meter is formed on the button image (small) and indicates the remaining time of the valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected or the remaining amount of time on the remaining time meter becomes 0, in the case of a fluctuation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B effects, as shown in Figure 11-59 (C) , a white-out effect is executed to display the entire display area in white, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-59(D), low base weak reach A and B effects are executed.

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a miss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation promotion image (small) and stops the decorative pattern (large) in a miss state, as shown in FIG. 11-59 (E). let

[About operation promotion performance B]
FIG. 11-60 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion effect B.

In the low base weak reach performances A and B, the performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance B that prompts the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part.

When it is decided to execute the operation promotion effect B and it is decided to display the operation promotion image (small), the effect control CPU 120 executes the introduction part as shown in FIG. 11-60(A). At the end of the process, an operation promotion image (small) consisting of a button image (small) imitating the push button 31B and operation promotion characters (small) "Press!" urging operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

In addition, when it has been decided to execute the operation promotion effect B and it has been decided to display the operation promotion image (large), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect shown in FIGS. 11-60 (B) and (C). This is an image imitating the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, with a button image (large) larger than the button image (small) and operation promotion letters (large) encouraging the operation of the push button 31B: "Press! ” Displays an operation promotion image (large). At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-60(B), the production control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) with transparent backgrounds, unlike the case where the operation promotion image (small) is displayed. After performing a promotion introduction effect in which these multiple button images (large) are combined into one button image (large), the button image (large) and the operation promotion text (large) that urges the operation of the push button 31B "Press!" Display an operation promotion image (large) consisting of:

A remaining time meter is formed in both the button image (small) and the button image (large), and the performance control CPU 120 detects the operation of the push button 31B until the remaining time meter reaches 0. Or, when the remaining amount of time on the remaining time meter reaches 0, in the case of a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach effect A to C and a low base strongest reach effect, the operation as shown in Figure 11-60 (D). The promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) is erased, a falling effect is performed in which the movable body 32 falls, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-60(E), the low base strong reach A to C is performed. Performance, perform low base strongest reach performance.

On the other hand, in the case of a deviation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) and erases the entire display area, as shown in FIG. 11-60 (F). After that, as shown in FIG. 11-60(G), a failure is announced as a result of the effect.

[About operation promotion performance C]
FIG. 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation promotion effect C.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance C that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When execution of the operation promotion performance C is determined, the performance control CPU 120 displays a button image (small) imitating the push button 31B in the middle of the introduction part, as shown in FIGS. ) and operation prompting characters (small) "Press!" prompting the user to operate the push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 is determined to display the cut-in image (A), and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, the CPU 120 displays the cut-in image (A) in FIG. As shown in C), after the operation promotion image (small) is erased and the cut-in image (A) in which the ally character "Nana" is displayed is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-61 (F). , carry out the continuation of the introductory part.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 has been determined to display the cut-in image (B), and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, then as shown in FIG. As shown in Figure 11-61(D), after the operation promotion image (small) is erased and the cut-in image (B) in which the ally character "Jam" is displayed is displayed, the screen is displayed as shown in Figure 11-61(F). , continue the introductory part.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 also controls the remaining time meter when it is determined to display the cut-in image (A) and when it is determined to display the cut-in image (B). If no operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining amount reaches 0, the operation promotion image (small) is deleted while the middle part of the introduction part continues to be played, as shown in Figure 11-61(E). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-61(F), the continuation of the introduction part is executed.

[About operation promotion performance D]
FIG. 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation promotion effect D.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance D that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When it is determined that the operation promotion image (small) is to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a button that imitates the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part, as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (A) and (B). An operation promotion image (small) consisting of a button image (small) and operation promotion characters (small) "Press!" urging operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

In addition, when it is determined that the operation promotion image (large) is to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part, as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (A) and (G). Displays an operation promotion image (large) that is a simulated image and consists of a button image (large) that is larger in size than the button image (small) and operation promotion characters (large) that prompt the user to operate the push button 31B, ``Press!'' let At this time, unlike the case where the operation promotion image (small) is displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) whose backgrounds are transparent, and these button images (large) are combined into one button. After performing a promotional introduction effect that is organized into images (large) (see Figure 11-60 (B)), a button image (large) and operation promotion characters (large) urging the user to operate the push button 31B are made, ``Press!'' Display the operation promotion image (large).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern in which a jackpot is reached if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining amount of the remaining time meter reaches 0, or the remaining amount of the remaining time meter becomes 0, the performance control CPU 120 performs As shown in 11-62 (C) and (H), a rainbow effect is performed in which a rainbow-colored pattern swirls over the entire display area while the operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) gradually disappears, and then , as shown in FIGS. 11-62(D) and (I), a jackpot is announced as a performance result.

On the other hand, in the case of a deviation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large), as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (E) and (J). A darkening effect is executed to darken the entire display area, and then, as shown in FIGS. 11-62(F) and (K), a failure is notified as a result of the effect.

[About operation promotion images]
FIG. 11-63 is a diagram showing a display mode of the operation promotion image. The performance control CPU 120 displays the button images constituting the operation promotion image (small) and the operation promotion image (large) while alternately and continuously moving in the left and right directions, as shown in FIG. 11-63 (A). At the same time, the button is displayed while continuously changing between a state in which the button is not pressed and a state in which the button is pressed. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-63(B), the interval at which the button image moves in the horizontal direction and the interval at which the button changes from not being pressed to being pressed are different, and the button image The motion of moving in the left-right direction and the motion of changing the state in which the button is not pressed and the state in which the button is pressed are not synchronized, resulting in a complicated movement.

[About the jackpot start performance]
FIG. 11-64 is a diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-64(A), the production control CPU 120 stops the decorative pattern (large) in the jackpot mode, and then issues a jackpot start designation command that specifies display of a production image indicating the start of the jackpot game state. When received, a jackpot start effect is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that moves like a flickering flame as the background during the jackpot start effect, as shown in FIGS. As shown in Figure 11-64 (B), first the first half of the title character "BIG (REG)" of the jackpot title character "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" is displayed in an enlarged size, and then As shown in C), the first half of the title character "BIG (REG)" is gradually reduced to a reduced size that is visible in its entirety in the display area, and is displayed at a fixed position above the center of the display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (D), the performance control CPU 120 displays the second half of the title characters "BONUS" of the title characters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" of the jackpot title in an enlarged size. After that, as shown in Figure 11-64 (E), the second half of the title character "BONUS" is gradually reduced to a reduced size that makes it visible in its entirety in the display area, and then moved to a fixed position near the center of the display area. Display it at the bottom (below the first half of the title "BIG").

In this embodiment, when starting a jackpot game state where the jackpot type is 6 rounds, "REG BONUS" is displayed as the title character, and when starting a jackpot game state where the jackpot type is 10 rounds, Display "BIG BONUS" as the title text.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-64 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire title character "BIG BONUS" in a fixed position, and then gradually enlarges the title character "BIG BONUS". Then, as shown in FIG. 11-64(H), the jackpot effect is started and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the background of the jackpot game state.

When the production control CPU 120 starts the jackpot production, first, as shown in FIG. Display the hitting promotion image (small).

The right-hitting promotion image (small) is composed of a message "Right-hitting" (small) that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction, and is used for production control. As shown in FIGS. 11-64 (H) and (I), the CPU 120 displays a right-hand hitting promotion image (small) from the upper right of the display area over a period from the start of the jackpot performance until the end of the jackpot game state. Display it at the position.

The right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is a message that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right playing area 2R, and the message "Right-handed hitting" (large), which is larger than the right-handed hitting promotion image (small), and the right It is an arrow that indicates a direction and is composed of an arrow image (large) that is larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the performance control CPU 120 is configured to detect the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 11-64 (H) and (I). A right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a manner of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area only for the first certain period of time after the start of the medium performance until the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, when the jackpot game state is controlled, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, it is switched to the jackpot middle performance, and the operation method of the jackpot game state (operation method of launching the game ball toward the right game area 2R) ) A right-handed hitting promoting image (small) and a right-handed hitting promoting image (large) are displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 is operated on the main board 11 side at a timing a predetermined time before the timing at which control is performed that is advantageous by operating the game ball in an operation method that launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Switch to the jackpot performance and display a right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and a right-handed hitting promotion image (large). For this reason, it is advantageous to operate the game ball in an operation method that launches the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R after a predetermined period of time has passed since the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large) were displayed. Control will be implemented.

In addition, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the title in the title display part of the super reach performance when the jackpot start performance is ended, the title character is erased, and the next performance is switched. To erase the title characters of a jackpot start performance and switch to the next performance in a shorter time than when the title characters are erased during the end period.

In particular, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the mid-jackpot performance in one frame (minimum unit of image update), and displays a right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and a right-handed hitting promotion image. (Large) is displayed. In the title display part of the super reach performance, the title end period is set instead of one frame, and the title characters are erased over a certain amount of time. , and when displaying an image promoting right-handed hitting (small) and an image promoting right-handed hitting (large), if the title character is similarly configured to be erased over a certain amount of time, the title character will be erased. During some period of time, there is a risk that the game ball will be operated in an operation method that launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, but if you launch the game ball toward the right game area 2R at this timing, the game ball will still be launched toward the right game area 2R. Since the control that is advantageous by operating with the operating method of launching the ball toward the area 2R has not started, the game ball will be wasted. On the other hand, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the mid-jackpot performance in one frame (minimum unit of image update), and displays the right-hitting promotion image (small) and the right-hitting promotion image (small). Since the promotion image (large) is displayed, it is possible to suppress the generation of useless game balls.

[About the display of the number of remaining spins until play time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by jackpot in a low accuracy state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low accuracy control is performed. The time saving state B is controlled to be performed 1100 times (in this embodiment, the play time is performed 1100 times).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times to reach rescue time saving (hereinafter referred to as the remaining number of times until play time) 131SG005Z, which is the remaining variable display number until the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). (See Figure 11-1) can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(A), the performance control CPU 120 executes the normal reach performance, low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, and low base strongest reach performance in the normal state. If the game is not running, the remaining number of play times will be displayed at the top left of the display area. The remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is displayed as "XXX times remaining" (XXX is a numerical value from 0 to 900 depending on the remaining number of times). At this time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900, the number of times remaining until play time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(B), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z even during the execution of the normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) is in the ready-to-reach mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (C), when the normal reach performance develops into the low base weak reach performances A and B, the performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance during execution of the low base weak reach performances A and B. Continue to display the remaining number of times until the time 131SG005Z. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 11-65(D) and (E), when a loss is reported as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 controls the low base weak reach A. , The remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z continues to be displayed even after the B effect ends.

In addition, the configuration is such that a jackpot can be announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and when a jackpot is announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the low base weak reach A and B The remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z is continuously displayed until the performance ends, and the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A and B performances. Incidentally, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z may be erased at the time when content that confirms a jackpot is displayed as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (F), the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform a normal reach performance, a low base weak reach performance A and B, when the performance is developed to a low base strong reach performance A to C performance, and a low base strongest reach performance. Then, with the start of the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is erased. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z at the timing when the selection performance starts when the performance is developed from the normal reach performance, and when the performance is developed from the low base weak reach performance A and B. , If it is a low base strong reach A to C effect, during the prologue display period of the title display part, the remaining number of play times 131SG005Z will be erased along with the pending display and active display, and if it is a low base strongest reach effect, the title will be displayed. At the start of the part, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is erased.

In addition, when developing from the low base weak reach effects A and B, the hold display and activation will occur at the timing when the falling effect starts (timing shown in Figure 11-60 (D)) as the operation promotion effect B is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is erased along with the display. As a result, regardless of whether it develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the timing for erasing the stay display, active display, and number of remaining times until play time 131SG005Z can be made the same. .

Thereafter, when a failure is reported as a result of the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the low base reach performance as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (G) and (H). After the strong base reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance are finished, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is displayed again. On the other hand, when a jackpot is announced as a result of the low base strong reach A to C performances or the low base strongest reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the next time as shown in FIGS. 11-65(I)(J). , the remaining number of play times 131SG005Z remains erased until the normal state is reached.

In addition, if operation promotion performance A is configured to develop into low base strong reach performances A to C and low base strongest reach performance according to the operation of the push button 31B, during execution of operation promotion performance A, the play time It is sufficient to continue displaying the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z and erase the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z with the start of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. In such a configuration, in the operation promotion performance A, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is displayed, while the subsequent operation promotion performances in the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance In C and D, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is not displayed.

[About play time start performance]
The game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time saving state B (play time) when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled by jackpot in a low probability state. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-66(C), the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right-handed lamp 131SG132 and sends a right-handed LED lighting notification command, and then the performance control CPU 120 As shown in Figures 11-66 (A) and (B), when the variable display stops when the remaining number of play times is 0, and the right-hand hit LED lighting notification command is received, Figure 11-66 (C) As shown in , a right-hitting promotion image (small) is displayed that prompts the user to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R. The timing of lighting up the right-handed playing lamp 131SG132 and the timing of displaying the right-handed playing promotion image (small) are almost the same time, but the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right-handed playing lamp 131SG132 and then displays the right-handed playing promotion image (small). The LED lighting notification command is sent, and the performance control CPU 120 accordingly displays the right-handed hitting promotion image (small), so the right-handed hitting lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) is displayed. becomes.

When starting the time saving state B (play time), the game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lit until the time saving state B (play time) ends. In addition, the right-hitting promotion image (small) is composed of a message "right-handed hitting" (small) that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction. As shown in FIGS. 11-66 (C) to (H), the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-handed hitting promotion image when the time-saving state B (play time) starts, until the time-saving state B (play time) ends. (Small) is displayed in a position closer to the upper right of the display area.

When the variable display stops when the number of times remaining until the play time is 0 and the production control CPU 120 receives a game state designation command that designates the time saving state B (play time), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance changes from FIG. 11-66 (D) to As shown in (G), a play time start effect is executed.

The play time start effect includes a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Enter play time" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a title character "Enter play time". The title display period includes a title display period in which the title characters "Run in" are displayed at a fixed position, and a title end period until the display of the title characters "Enter in play time" which had been displayed in the fixed position disappears and the display switches to play time production.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title character "6" during the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the play time start performance, and the title display period, title display period, and title end period of the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance. The title characters ``Enter play time'' are displayed in the same manner as when displaying ``Catch the Bakuchu with people!''.

Specifically, during the title start period, the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the title characters "Enter play time" to an enlarged size such that only some of the characters are visible in the display area, as shown in FIG. 11-66 (D). Display it in . At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display area to be displayed in such a manner that the entire display area is completely filled with a part of the title characters "Enter play time". Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-66(D) and (E), the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the title character "Enter play time" so that all characters of the title character "Enter play time" are displayed in the display area. The title characters ``Enter play time'', which have been reduced in size and become visible, are made to stand still in a fixed position.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "entering play time" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the title characters "Enter play time" to remain displayed at a fixed position as shown in FIGS. 11-66(E) and (F).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period, the performance control CPU 120 replaces the title characters "Enter play time" displayed in the reduced size at the fixed position as shown in FIGS. Expand the display area until the display area is completely filled by a part of "Rush". In this case, instead of being enlarged and displayed in the opposite manner to the case where the title character "Enter play time" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, when the title character "Enter play time" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period. In a manner different from the reverse aspect, the title character "Enter play time" is expanded until the entire display area is filled with a part of the title character "Enter play time". In other words, the locus that each part of the title character passes during the process of shrinking of the title character "Entering play time" during the title start period is the trajectory that each part of the title character passes during the process of expanding the title character "Entering play time" during the title end period. is different. For this reason, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Enter play time" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-66(H), the background of the play time effect is switched to and the play time effect is started.

During the play time start performance, the production control CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image (large) that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, in addition to the right-handed promotion image (small), and An image to warn people against getting addicted (message "Beware of getting addicted!") is displayed at the bottom of the display area.

The right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is a message that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right playing area 2R, and the message "Right-handed hitting" (large), which is larger than the right-handed hitting promotion image (small), and the right It is an arrow indicating a direction and is composed of an arrow image (large) which is larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. A right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a manner of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area over the period in which the play time start effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the time saving state B, and when the variable display result is off, it selects the variation pattern PA1-4 with a special figure variation time of 500 ms. A variable display is performed, and the time saving state B is controlled, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern PB1-18 with a special figure variation time of 500 ms + 15000 ms is selected to perform a variable display, and the production control CPU 120 is configured to execute the play time start effect during the period in which the variable display based on these variable patterns is performed when the time saving state B control starts, but the game control microcomputer 100 In the first variable display controlled to , that is, after controlling to time saving state B, in the variable display based on the game ball winning in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole, the variable display result is a loss. In this case, the time saving B start variation pattern which has a longer variation time than the variation pattern PA1-4 and which has a variable time corresponding to the play time start effect is selected and variable display is performed, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the time reduction state. In the first variable display controlled by B, the play time start effect may be executed during the period when the variable display according to the time saving B start variation pattern is being performed. In addition, in such a configuration, when the variable display result is a jackpot in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state B, the game control microcomputer 100 changes the special figure variation time to the variation pattern PB1-18 of 500ms+15000ms. In addition to performing a variable display, the performance control CPU 120 may stop the decorative symbol (large) in a jackpot mode without executing the play time start performance.

[About title characters, etc. 1]
Figure 11-67 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the explanatory characters of the explanatory text display performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion performance (small), and the operation promotion performance (small). It is a figure which shows one form of the relationship of the operation promotion character (large) in large).

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, and the background image at that time is a still image (low base strong reach B, C effect, low Strongest base reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) or action image (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A performance). In addition, the number of characters in the title character of the super reach effect is 7 to 13 characters, and the display time of the title character of the super reach effect (after all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed, at least part of the character string is The time until it disappears) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the super reach effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the explanatory characters are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of explanatory characters is 3 to 6 characters, and the display time of the explanatory character (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) (all the character strings that make up the explanatory character are displayed) The time from when at least part of the character string is no longer displayed) is LS, the font size of the explanatory character is FS, and the explanatory character (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) is displayed. The display area size is ES.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is the moving image. In addition, the number of characters in the title character of the jackpot start effect is 8 characters, and the display time of the title character of the jackpot start effect (after all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed, at least a part of the character string is not displayed) The font size of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of characters for the operation promotion characters (small) is 3 characters, and the display time of the operation promotion characters (small) (the operation of the push button 31B is enabled when the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated). period) is L1P, the font size of the operation promotion characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of characters for the operation promotion characters (large) is 3 characters, and the display time of the operation promotion characters (large) (the operation of the push button 31B is enabled when the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated). period) is L2P, the font size of the operation promotion characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display times of the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), and the operation promotion letter (large), Figure 11-67 (B) As shown, the display time LB of the title character of the jackpot start performance is longer than the display time LR, LS, L1P, and L2P of the title character, explanation character, operation promotion character (small), and operation promotion character (large) of the super reach performance. The display time LR of the title character of the super reach effect is longer than the display time LS, L1P, L2P of the explanation character, operation promotion character (small), operation promotion character (large), and the operation promotion character (small), The display times LS and L1P of the operation promotion characters (large) are set longer than the display time LS of the explanatory characters. In addition, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P of the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), and the operation promotion letter (large) all constitute the explanatory text display effect. The display time is set longer than the display time required for all three explanatory characters to be displayed. Moreover, these display time relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach performance.

In this form, when comparing the font sizes of the title text, explanatory text, title text of the jackpot start performance, operation promotion text (small), and operation promotion text (large) of the super reach effect, Figure 11-67 (C) As shown, the font size F2P of the operation promotion text (large) is larger than the font size FR, FS, FB, F1P of the title text of the super reach effect, the explanation text, the title character of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion text (small). Also has a large font size. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character ( The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the character (large).

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the font sizes FR and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and operation promotion characters (small) of the super reach performance. In addition, the title characters "BIG BONUS" for the jackpot start effect will first display the first half "BIG" at the top of the regular position, then the second half "BONUS" will be displayed at the bottom of the regular position, and then the title characters "BIG BONUS" The display is gradually enlarged, and when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the characters that make up the title characters "BIG BONUS" becomes the smallest. In such a configuration, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the regular position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, the size of the title character of the jackpot start effect is the same as the title character of the super reach effect, and the description The size is larger than the size of the characters and operation promotion characters (small). Furthermore, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the regular position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is Super Reach. The size is larger than the largest size of the characters constituting the title character, explanatory character, operation promotion character (small), and operation promotion character (large) of the performance.

Furthermore, the font size FR of the title characters of the super reach effect is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and operation promotion characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest size of the characters that make up the title text of the super reach effect is larger than the size of the largest size of the letters that make up the explanatory text and operation promotion text (small). .

Further, the font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation promotion characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the explanatory characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small).

Furthermore, these font size relationships and character size relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start performance, operation promotion characters (small), and operation promotion characters (large) of the super reach effect, Figure 11-67 (D) As shown in , the display area size E2P of the operation promotion text (large) is the same as the display area size ER, ES, EB of the title text of the super reach effect, the explanation text, the title text of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion text (small). , E1P. Further, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and operation promotion characters (small) of the super reach performance. Further, the display area size ES of the explanatory characters is larger than the display area size E1P of the operation promotion characters (small). Further, the relationship between these display area sizes holds true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

[About title characters etc. 2]
Figure 11-68 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion performance (small), and the operation promotion characters (large) in the operation promotion performance (large). ), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times characters configuring the remaining number of times until the play time.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters of the super reach effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character strings are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the super reach effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title character of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed until at least part of the character string is no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the operation prompting character (small) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P. , the font size of the operation promotion characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-68(A), the display time of the operation prompting character (large) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (large) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P. , the font size of the operation promotion characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title character of the play time start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed until at least part of the character string is no longer displayed) ) is LY, the font size of the title characters of the play time start effect is FY, and the display area size in which the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed is EY.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the font size of the characters for the number of times remaining until play time is FZ, and the display area size in which the characters for the number of times remaining until play time are displayed is EZ.

In this form, the font size of the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), the operation promotion letter (large), the title letter of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of characters until the play time is changed. When compared, as shown in Figure 11-68 (B), the font size F2P of the operation promotion characters (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), The font size is larger than the font sizes FR, FB, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the play time start effect and the remaining number of times until play time characters. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), and the title character of the play time start effect. , is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters (remaining XXX times (X is a number from 0 to 900)) that make up the number of remaining times until play time character. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (large) constitutes the remaining number of times until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

In addition, the font size FB of the title character of the jackpot start performance, the title character of the super reach performance, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start performance, the font size of the remaining number of characters until play time FR, F1P, It is larger in size than FY and FZ. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start performance is the title character of the super reach performance, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start performance, and the number of times remaining until play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the character. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start effect is the number of characters remaining until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

In addition, the font size FY of the title character of the play time start effect is larger than the font size FR, F1P, FZ of the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion text (small), and the remaining number of times until play time. be. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title text of the play time start effect is the same as that of the title text of the super reach effect, the operation promotion text (small), and the characters that make up the number of remaining times until play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest font among them. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the play time start effect is the number of characters remaining until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the constituent characters.

Further, the font size FR of the title characters of the super reach effect is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation promotion characters (small) and the remaining number of times until play time characters. In addition, the size of the smallest size of the letters that make up the title letters of the super reach effect is the size of the operation promotion letters (small), and the size of the largest size of the letters that make up the number of remaining until play time letters. It is larger in size. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the super reach effect constitutes the number of remaining times until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

Furthermore, the font size F1P of the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the font size FZ of the remaining number of times until play time characters. Further, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the remaining number of times until play time characters. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (small) constitutes the remaining number of times until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

Furthermore, these font size relationships and character size relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this form, the display area size of the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), the operation promotion letter (large), the title letter of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of characters until the play time As shown in Figure 11-68 (C), the display area size E2P of the operation promotion characters (large) is different from the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion character (small). ), the display area size is larger than the display area size ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times until the play time character. In addition, the display area size EB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is the display area size ER of the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion text (small), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of characters until play time, The display area size is larger than E1P, EY, and EZ. In addition, the display area size EY of the title text of the play time start effect is larger than the display area size ER, E1P, and EZ of the title text of the super reach effect, operation promotion letters (small), and remaining number of play time letters. It is the area size. Further, the display area size ER of the title characters of the super reach performance is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation promotion characters (small) and the remaining number of times until play time characters. Further, the display area size E1P of the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining number of times until play time characters. Further, the relationship between these display area sizes holds true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

Comparing the display times of the title characters of the super reach effect and the title characters of the play time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title character of the play time start effect is It is set longer than the display time LR of the title characters of the reach effect. Moreover, these display time relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach performance.

Comparing the display formats of the title characters of the super reach effect and the title characters of the play time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-68 (E), the low base weak reach effects A, B effects, and the low base strong reach A In the ~C effects, the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center during the title start period, and are erased while moving from the center to the right side of the display area during the title end period. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach performance and the play time start performance, the title characters are displayed in a reduced size from being enlarged during the title start period, and are erased while being enlarged during the title end period.

[About LED placement]
The game effect lamp 9 in this embodiment includes frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in FIG. 11-69, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 are provided so as to surround the upper position of the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the left side of the gaming area, and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are It is provided so as to surround the right side of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4 are arranged at positions corresponding to the logo "POWERFULII" formed on the front surface of the movable body 32. Further, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are provided at positions corresponding to the decorative parts formed in the game area 2L. Further, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are provided at positions near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

Frame LEDL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are full-color LEDs consisting of RGB (Red, Green, Blue) light emitting elements, and logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit monochromatic red light. The decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are red LEDs, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are white LEDs capable of emitting monochromatic white light.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 11-70 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 transmits brightness data for lighting/blinking/turning off one or more of the plurality of LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Output to the LED driver (also called lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed by the performance control CPU 120 on lamps such as LEDs will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a brightness data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used during super reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed, and a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the jackpot game state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending effect to notify the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the brightness data table for the ending background used during the round of the low probability high base state (time saving and a time-saving background brightness data table used in the state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states, such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a time saving state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on the background brightness data table. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-70, the priority when used is increased in the order of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table.

For example, if a super reach effect develops while outputting brightness data based on a normal background brightness data table in a normal state, the effect control CPU 120 outputs an SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect. It is used preferentially over the normal background brightness data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, if the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and a super reach effect develops, the super reach effect will be supported based on the SP reach brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp controlled in this manner. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but after the super reach effect ends, When the normal state returns, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the normal background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and enters the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. is output to.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control, and controls the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control. However, when a super reach effect develops, the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect is used preferentially than the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. do. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the super reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

For example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table during a super reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 outputs the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to SP It is used preferentially over the reach brightness data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach effect based on the brightness data table for SP reach, the game is played in a manner corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. The effect lamp 9 is lamp controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but once the error is cleared, the super reach effect will resume. When returning to the medium gaming state, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the super reach performance that is being controlled, and controls the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach performance. However, when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach The brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, so the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the SP ready-to-reach brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 include "unlit,""substantiallyunlit,""lit," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED lights up in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the LED in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the brightness data of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "0", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (R data) of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "1", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the data of R is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

When the W (white) data defined as the brightness data of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "0", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are "extinguished". Furthermore, when the brightness data (data of W) of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "1", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the data of W is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting, in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a state other than "turning off" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" includes cases where the brightness data is one of "2" to "F", This includes switching over time between cases where the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. The two differ from each other in that blinking is that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

[Explanation regarding game effect lamp]
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11-71 to 12-36.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the image data (video data, The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the animation data). The display control unit 123 sends extended commands (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. (where “X” is an arbitrary (alphanumeric characters)) and transmits the extended command to the production control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 123.

FIG. 11-71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control on the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, an expansion for specifying the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance is performed. A command (B421) is sent to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table (weak reach common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123.

The parent table contains information that specifies which lamps (lighting locations) are the targets of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamps 9, and which are referenced during lamp control, corresponding to the lamps that are the targets of lamp control. The information that specifies the child table for which lamp control is performed and the information that specifies the maximum time for which lamp control is performed are stored. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, the lamp control targets are frame LEDL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decoration LEDS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), Tacker lamp LA1 ~LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) is specified. In addition, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and the logo LEDLL1 to Child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to LL4, 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5. 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control using this child table, and child table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and lamp control using this child table is specified. 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for this to occur.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time. If so, the counter is decremented by 1 every 10 ms to measure the 600,000 ms (10 minutes). That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is counted. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives another extended command before timing a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) after receiving the extended command, the CPU 120 for effect control stops the lamp control that is currently being executed, and restarts the lamp control. The lamp control of the target lamp is performed using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the extended command received. Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). Therefore, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can continue for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table contains information specifying a grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the execution time is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: Table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table perform ramp control execution time: 500ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table perform lamp control execution time: 230ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table Lamp control is performed by An execution time of 600,000 ms is specified in the order in which the lamp control using these grandchild tables is executed.

Furthermore, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: This Execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: 2 and this Execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: 2 and Execution time for ramp control using this grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: 600000 ms is specified in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when controlling a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, the production control CPU 120 uses, for example, the first specified grandchild table to control the target lamp. After performing lamp control for the target lamp and measuring the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, the process of performing lamp control for the target lamp using the specified grandchild table is performed using all specified grandchild tables. are to be performed in the specified order. For example, for the child table shown in Figure 11-75, lamp control is performed using the grandchild table: Perform ramp control using table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, then perform ramp control using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is measured, then perform ramp control using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 600000 ms is measured. . Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control using the grandchild table specified at the end is 600000ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). By setting, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can be continued for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In addition, in the child table, when the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are the targets of lamp control, the child tables corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are set as shown in FIG. 11-75, for example. One grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 may be specified, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 may be specified, as shown in Figure 11-75. Then, when one grandchild table is specified as a grandchild table corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the production control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to set the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame The same lamp control is performed for both LEDLWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, if two grandchild tables are specified as grandchild tables corresponding to frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the production control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to frame the frame. Lamp control is performed for LEDLWL1 to LWL12, and lamp control for frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 is performed using the other grandchild table. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, common lamp control is performed for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12.

The grandchild table specifies the brightness data to be referenced during lamp control and the execution time for performing lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. information is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x00 corresponds to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1). 0000, 0x000000, lamp according to this brightness data Execution time for control: 100ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x 000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 , 0x000000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA , 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time: 40 ms for lamp control based on these luminance data is specified in the order in which lamp control based on these luminance data is executed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), brightness data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, this Execution time for lamp control using brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms , brightness data: 0xAAAA, and execution time for performing lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD___LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), brightness data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100ms, brightness data: 0x00000, this Execution time for lamp control using brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms , brightness data: 0x66666, and execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD___LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 100ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, Execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Based on this brightness data An execution time for lamp control: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and an execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is performed.

In the luminance data of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) of the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the values of frame LEDLWL1 The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL2 and LWR2, which correspond to numbers 3 and 4. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data indicate the RGB values of the frames LEDLWL3 and LWR3, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 are the values of the frames LEDLWL4 and LWR4. This indicates the RGB value, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of the frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, and the data corresponding to No. 5 and 6 The values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the frames LEDLWL6 and LWR6, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 are the values of the frames LEDLWL7, It shows the RGB values of LWR7, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to No. 7 and No. 8 show the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8 and LWR8.

Also, like the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-81, when different grandchild tables are specified in the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 ( XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 ), the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWL1, and the lower 1 digit of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWL1. The values of the 3rd to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL2, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th digits indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL3, The values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 The value of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWL6, and the values of numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWL5. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the number indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL7, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL8. It indicates the RGB value, and in the luminance data of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 2 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR2. Yes, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR3, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 The value of indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWR4, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR5. The values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to No. 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR6, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8 are the values of the frame LEDLWR6. It shows the RGB values of LEDLWR7, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 show the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

In addition, in the brightness data of logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value of the lower fourth digit indicates the R (Red) value of logo LEDLL1, and the value of the lower third digit indicates the value of R (Red) of logo LEDLL1. The value of R of logo LEDLL2 is shown, the value of the second lower digit shows the value of R of logo LEDLL3, and the value of the fourth lower digit shows the value of R of logo LEDLL4.

In addition, in the luminance data of the decorative LEDs 1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) of the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value of the fourth lowest digit indicates the value of W (White) of the decorative LED LS1, and the value of the third lowest digit indicates the value of W (White) of the decorative LED LS1. The value of W of the decoration LEDLS2 is shown, the value of the second lower digit shows the value of W of the decoration LEDLS3, and the value of the fourth lower digit shows the value of W of the decoration LEDLS4.

In the brightness data of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA1. The lower 1st to 3rd digit values of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA2, and the lower 4 values of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the attacker lamp LA2. The values in the 1st to 6th digits indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA3, and the values in the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th digits indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA4. It is.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. The frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B", but the luminance data for each element is Corresponds to the current value output for. Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when luminance data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the luminance data of "A" flows to the "R" element, and "1" is output to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can emit light in various colors by flowing currents corresponding to the luminance data to each RGB element. Furthermore, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can be lit in colors corresponding to each effect or character by emitting light based on brightness data. As an example, data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in red. Further, data "F0F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in reddish-purple color. In addition, the data "FF0" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit red light with a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by flowing a current corresponding to the brightness data to the R (Red) element, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 can emit light in red with a brightness corresponding to the brightness data. By uniformly flowing currents corresponding to the luminance data to the three elements R, G, and B, it is possible to emit white light with a luminance corresponding to the luminance data.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when performing lamp control on a target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, for example, the production control CPU 120 outputs the initially specified brightness data to the LED driver. After measuring the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, the process of outputting the next specified brightness data to the LED driver is performed for all the specified brightness data in the specified order. There is. For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 is LE until the first 100ms is measured. to D driver Output brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 to the LED driver until the next 120ms is counted, then brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0 until the next 120ms is counted. x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 , Output 0x000000 to the LED driver, then output brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver, and then output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA until the next 40ms is counted. , Output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, 10ms cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the child table. On the other hand, while outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 11-72 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 11-72, in the child table: 500ms is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed in the third, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230ms is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed in the third, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, 600000 ms is specified as the time for the fourth lamp control to be performed, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the brightness data (RGB data) is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499 388, 0x4995AA" is specified to be executed at 100ms intervals. For convenience of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms will be referred to as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms will be referred to as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms will be referred to as data 4. .

When performing lamp control for the second designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: The luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on :XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until reaching 500 ms, but after outputting data 1 to data 4, the time is still 500 ms. If the luminance data has not been reached, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order starting from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 500ms, the production control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 at that point, and outputs the brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 specified by the child table. Start.

In addition, when performing lamp control for the fourth designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: Until the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on : If the time has not reached 600000 ms, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order starting from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 at that time. At this time, since the next grandchild table is not specified in the child table, output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: In this case, the time measurement never reaches 600,000 ms, and by receiving the next extended command from the display control unit 123 before the time measurement reaches 600,000 ms, the parent table/child table/child table specified by the newly received extended command is displayed. Output of luminance data based on the grandchild table will start.

As shown in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum lamp control time by the child table, and the 10 minute data in such a parent table is used for troubleshooting purposes. Responsible for That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the main board 11, but if some malfunction occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production Even if the control CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so different lamp control is performed one after another from the point where a problem occurs. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, as in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the lamp control execution time by the grandchild table specified at the end, and the 10 minute data in such a child table is , when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, the ramp control by the grandchild table specified at the beginning of the child table will be performed again because the timer of the parent table still remains. play the role of prevention.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that refers to the last specified luminance data. With this configuration, 10 minutes in the luminance data When the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, so lamp control is performed again using the luminance data specified at the beginning of the grandchild table. This will play a role in preventing things from being put away. In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

[About the brightness data table used for super reach effect 1]
FIG. 11-73 is a diagram showing a brightness data table used for the super reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 when executing the low base weak reach A performance Also, when executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title display part uses a common weak reach system common title that defines the luminance mode of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects as a brightness data table. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is carried out using.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 executes a title color change performance in the title display part, and when changing the title characters to red, the low base weak reach A Whether it is the title display part of the production or the title display part of the low base weak reach B production, there is a common brightness data table that defines the lighting mode when changing the title character to red in the title color change production. When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using title common chance up red, executing a title color change effect in the title display part, and changing the title letters to gold, display the title with a low base weak reach A effect. Whether it is a part or a title display part of a low base weak reach B production, a brightness data table is used to define the lighting mode when title letters are changed to gold in a title color change production. Common title common chance increase. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using money.

The execution time of the introduction part is different between the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when executing the low base weak reach A performance, the brightness data table is When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach type weak reach A introduction which has defined the light emitting mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, and executing the low base weak reach B effect, the introduction In the part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the weak reach system weak reach B introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 In the title display part, when executing the reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the low base strong reach A effect is displayed as a brightness data table in the title display part. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title that defines the light emitting mode of the title display part of the ~C performance.

The execution time of the introduction part is different for the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when performing the low base strong reach A performance, In the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach type strong reach A introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect as a brightness data table, and the low base strong reach B effect. When executing, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system strong reach B introduction which defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table. In the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach type strong reach C introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a brightness data table.

As shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing the low base strongest reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 uses the title display part and the introduction part as a brightness data table from the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance to the introduction part. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes up to.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A performance, the high base reach B performance, the high base reach C performance, and the high base reach D performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 The title is displayed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, when executing the high base reach C effect, and when executing the high base reach D effect. In this part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title which defines the light emission mode of the title display part of high base reach A to D effects as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, but as shown in Figure 11-73, high base reach A performance When executing, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high base reach system reach A introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach A effect as a brightness data table, and When executing the base reach B effect, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high base reach type reach B introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach B effect as a brightness data table. When executing the high base reach C effect, the introduction part uses the high base reach type reach C introduction that defines the lighting mode unique to the introduction part of the high base reach C effect as a brightness data table. 9, when performing the high base reach D effect, the introduction part uses the high base reach type reach D introduction which defines the light emitting mode unique to the introduction part of the high base reach D effect as a brightness data table. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed.

In this way, both when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title display part uses the common weak reach common title as the brightness data table to improve the game effect. Since the lamp 9 is controlled, the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved, but in the introduction part, there are separate cases when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect. Since the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the introduction of weak reach system weak reach A and the introduction of weak reach system weak reach B, the respective performance contents are changed in the introduction part of low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance. It becomes possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emitting modes depending on the situation, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the introduction part up to the introduction of the performance result in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common weak reach common title is used as a brightness data table in the title display part, both when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect. However, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title starts from when a part of the title characters are displayed until it is displayed at the fixed position. A display control unit includes a weak reach title start that defines a light emission pattern specific to a period, and a weak reach title display that defines a light emission pattern that is unique after a title display period in which title characters are displayed in a fixed position. 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the start of a weak reach title, the performance control CPU 120 can display the brightness data table: The display control unit 123 controls the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the weak reach title start, and the display control unit 123 displays the title in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects. When starting the display control of the display period, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the weak reach title display, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach title display to display the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and Lamp control may be performed for the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, one of the brightness data table: weak reach title start or weak reach title display. A common brightness data table may be used for the first and second brightness data tables, and separate brightness data tables with individual contents may be set for the other.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A and B effects, when executing the title color change effect in the title display part, even if it is the low base weak reach A effect, it is the low base weak reach B effect. Also, since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the common title common chance up red (title common chance up gold) as the brightness data table, the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved.

Also, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the brightness data table is common in the title display part. Since the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system common title of , the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved. When executing the B effect and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, game effects are achieved by introducing separate strong reach type strong reach A, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, and strong reach type strong reach C introduction. Since the lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 is set in different light emission modes according to the content of each performance in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect in the introduction part up to the introduction of the performance result in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title display part is The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table, but in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the prologue display period and title characters are A strong reach title start with a unique light emitting pattern during the title start period from when a part is displayed until it is displayed in a fixed position, and a unique light emitting pattern after the title display period when the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. A strong reach title display with a defined pattern, and an extension that specifies the start of a strong reach title when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. By transmitting the command, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: Strong reach title start, and displays the display control unit 123. However, when starting the display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performances, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the strong reach title display, the performance control CPU 120 Luminance data table: The lamp control of frames LEDL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 may be performed using a strong reach type title display. In addition, in such a configuration, the brightness data table: Strong reach title is set depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance. A common brightness data table may be used for one of the start and strong reach title displays, and separate brightness data tables may be set with individual contents for the other.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the strong reach prologue has a unique lighting pattern during the prologue display period, and part of the title characters are displayed before being displayed in a fixed position. It is equipped with a strong reach title start that has a unique light emitting pattern for the title start period up to and a strong reach title display that has a unique light emitting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, by transmitting an extended command specifying the strong reach prologue, the effect control CPU 120 controls the brightness. Data table: Lamp control of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the strong reach system prologue, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. When starting display control for the title start period, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the start of a strong reach title, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: start of a strong reach title to display frames LEDLWL1 to When the display control unit 123 performs lamp control of the LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C effects, By sending an extended command that specifies strong reach title display, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach title display to display frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. Lamp control may also be performed. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach system prologue A common brightness data table may be used for at least one of , strong reach title start, and strong reach title display, and the remaining tables may be separate brightness data tables in which individual contents are set.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the strong reach prologue has a unique lighting pattern during the prologue display period, and part of the title characters are displayed before being displayed in a fixed position. A strong reach title display that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title start period up to, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. , by sending an extended command that specifies the strong reach prologue, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue to adjust the lamps of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 starts the display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command specifying the strong reach title display. The performance control CPU 120 may control the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach system prologue , a common brightness data table may be used for one of the strong reach title displays, and a separate brightness data table in which individual contents are set for the other.

Also, when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, when executing the high base reach C effect, and when executing the high base reach D effect, In the title display part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common high base reach common title as a brightness data table, so the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved, while in the introduction part, the high base reach A production , high base reach B effect, high base reach C effect, and high base reach D effect. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by introducing system reach B, high base reach system reach C, and high base reach system reach D, high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C In the introduction part of the high base reach D performance, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have a different light emission mode according to the content of each performance, increasing the performance effect in the introduction part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high base reach D effect is executed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, and when executing the high base reach C effect. In this case, the title display part is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common high base reach common title as a brightness data table, but the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects is Among them, a high base reach title start that has a unique light emitting pattern during the title start period from when a part of the title text is displayed until it is displayed in a fixed position, and a title display where the title text is displayed in a fixed position. A high base reach title display that has a unique light emission pattern after the period is provided, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the high base reach title display By sending an extended command that specifies the start of a series title, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: High base reach series title start to set the lamps of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command specifying the high base reach title display. The performance control CPU 120 may perform lamp control of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: high base reach type title display. In addition, in such a configuration, the brightness data is adjusted depending on whether it is a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance. Table: A common brightness data table may be used for one of the high base reach title start and high base reach title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other.

In addition, when executing a low-based strongest reach effect whose execution time for the title display part does not share with other super reach effects, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect can be used as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. Since the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes from to the introduction part, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common weak reach common title is used as the brightness data table in the title display part, both when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect. However, when executing the low base weak reach A effect, the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using the determined weak reach type weak reach A title and executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title of the low base weak reach B effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using a weak reach system weak reach B title that has a lighting mode specific to the display part, and thereby, a low base weak reach A effect and a low base weak reach B effect. In the title display part, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emitting modes according to the content of each performance, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title display part is The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the low base is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach type strong reach A title that has a lighting mode specific to the title display part of the strong reach A performance, and executing a low base strong reach B performance, the title display part Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system strong reach B title that defines the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table, and the low base strong reach C effect is executed. In this case, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach type strong reach C title that defines a light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect as the brightness data table of the title display part. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in a different manner in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance according to the content of each performance. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the title display part in super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high base reach D performance is executed when the high base reach A performance is executed, when the high base reach B performance is executed, and when the high base reach C performance is executed. Even when performing a high base reach A effect, the title display part is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common high base reach common title as a brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach type reach A title that defines the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach A performance as the brightness data table of the display part, and the high base reach B performance is executed. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach system reach B title which defines the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach B performance as the brightness data table of the title display part, and When executing the reach C effect, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high base reach type reach C title that defines the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach C effect as the brightness data table of the title display part. When performing a high base reach D effect, a high base reach type reach D title that has a luminance mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach D effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part to improve the game effect. The lamp 9 may be controlled, so that the title display part of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance can be controlled according to the content of each performance. This makes it possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emitting modes, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect is defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. Although the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach system strongest reach title, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table of the low base strongest reach effect is Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach system strongest reach title that has a lighting mode specific to the title display part, and a lighting mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect is determined as the brightness data table for the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using the strongest reach system.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base weak reach A and B effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common weak reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the introduction The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the introduction of weak reach system weak reach A and the introduction of weak reach system weak reach B as the brightness data table of the part, but when executing the low base weak reach A effect, , In the title display part and the introduction part, a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the low base weak reach A to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table. When performing lamp control and executing the low base weak reach B effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part of low base weak reach B to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using the weak reach type weak reach B title introduction, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strong reach A to C effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the common strong reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part. As part of the brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, and strong reach type strong reach C introduction. When executing Reach A performance, a strong reach type strong reach A title that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using the introduction and executing the low base strong reach B effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, it is introduced from the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach type strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes up to the part, and executing a low base strong reach C effect, in the title display part and the introduction part. , Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system strong reach C title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a brightness data table. When executing the strong reach D effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach D effect is defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using the title introduction, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing high base reach effects A to D, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, and high base reach type reach D introduction as part brightness data table. Regarding the configuration, when executing the high base reach A performance, in the title display part and the introduction part, a high base reach A performance that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part as a brightness data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using base reach type reach A title introduction and executing high base reach B effect, the title of high base reach B effect is displayed as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the high base reach system reach B title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes from the display part to the introduction part, and execute the high base reach C effect, the title display part and In the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach system reach C title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the high base reach C performance to the introduction part as a brightness data table, When executing the high base reach D effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach D effect are defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using the title introduction, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

[About the brightness data table used for super reach effect 2]
Below, the setting contents of the brightness data table used for the super reach effect will be explained. As mentioned above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. In some cases, only the following tables are shown and other tables are omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects]
FIG. 11-74 shows the brightness data table: Weak reach used when the display control unit 123 receives extended command: B421 transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in low base weak reach A and B performances. FIG. 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common title, and FIG. 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach series common title, and FIGS. 11-76 to 11- 78 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of weak reach common title.

When receiving the extended command B421, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the weak reach common title based on the extended command B421. In the parent table of the weak reach common title, as shown in Figure 11-74, it is set to perform lamp control by referring to the child table: Therefore, when the production control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it refers to the child table: conduct.

In the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, as shown in FIG. 11-75, grandchild tables and execution times of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are set in the reference order.

The production control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (FIG. 11-76) which is initially set in the child table: As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are turned on in blue for 160 ms.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, and executes the grandchild table: Please refer to the lamp control conduct. As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue-based colors, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and executes the grandchild table: Please refer to the lamp control conduct. As a result, some of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are turned off, and the rest are turned on in blue, and the parts that are turned off and the parts that are turned on change every 30 ms or 20 ms.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 230ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, and executes the grandchild table: Please refer to the lamp control conduct. As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue-based colors, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

The production control CPU 120 then receives the extended command (B400 or B40F) that is sent when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, thereby newly receiving the extension command (B400 or B40F). Switch to lamp control using the brightness data table based on the extended commands. As a result, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 continue to light up in a blue color until a new extension command is received, and the brightness continues to change every 100ms, and at the same time, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 continue to be lit in a blue color until a new extension command is received. By doing so, the light emission mode is switched to the one based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table of common weak reach titles has child tables that also refer to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. In the child table, grandchild tables etc. to be referred to are set in order of execution, and in these grandchild tables, brightness data etc. to be referred to are set in order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 is set in the parent table. Refer to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table and use the same procedure as above to set the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. Performs lamp control.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 change from the off state to red until 500ms have passed, and then turn on in red until 500ms have passed, and the brightness changes every 100ms, and then go from red to almost off until 230ms have passed. After that, it lights up in red again, and then it continues to light up in red until a new extension command is received, and the brightness changes every 100ms.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white until 500ms have elapsed, then turn on in white until 500ms have elapsed, and change the brightness every 100ms, and then go from white to almost off until 230ms have elapsed. After that, it lights up in white again, and then it continues to light up in white until a new extension command is received, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

In addition, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from the off state to blue until 500ms elapse, then turn on in a blue color until 500ms elapse, and the brightness changes every 100ms, and then change from blue to almost blue until 230ms elapse. After going through the off state, it turns on again in blue, and then continues to turn on in blue color until a new extended command is received, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (A), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period of 500 s from the start is the title start period, and after that, the period of 2200 ms is the title display period, After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: common title for weak reach systems, so that the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward the fixed position. During the title start period (period from the start of the title display part until 500ms elapse), the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from off to blue, and the logo LEDs L1 to LL4 turn off. The state changes to red, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white (lamp control by the grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). In addition, during the title display period in which the title characters remain stationary at a fixed position and the title end period in which the title characters move toward the right from the fixed position (the period from the start of the title display period to the end of the title display part), the frame LEDLWL1 ～LWL12, frame LEDLWR2～LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1～LA4 are lit in blue color until 500ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100ms (Lamps according to grandchild table (2) specified by child table in Figure 11-75) Control), then after 230 ms have passed, the lamp goes from blue to almost off and then turns on again in blue (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then turns on again in the blue color system. However, the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red until 500ms elapse, and the brightness changes every 100ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then until 230ms elapse. The lamp goes from red to almost off, then turns red again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then turns red again, and the brightness changes every 100ms. The state continues (ramp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white until 500ms elapse, and the brightness changes every 100ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then until 230ms elapse. The lamp goes from white to almost off, and then turns white again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then turns white again, and the brightness changes every 100ms. The state continues (ramp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75).

In addition, after 3000 ms have passed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is sent when starting the display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. As a result, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach system common title is completed, and the lamp control is switched to the lamp control based on the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it performs lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title based on the extended command B421, thereby controlling the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2. ~LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are used during the title start period when the title character moves from the left side of the display area toward the regular position, and when the title character moves from the regular position to the right side. The light emitting color and light emitting mode change depending on the end period of the moving title.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (red)]
FIG. 11-79 shows a luminance data table: title used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B511 transmitted when performing display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to red. FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of common chance up red, and FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: title common chance up red, and FIGS. -83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: title common chance up red grandchild table.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing at which title characters are changed (title display part The extended command 511 is transmitted at a timing when 1300 ms has passed after the start.

When receiving the extended command B511, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-79) of the title common chance up red based on the extended command 511, and the child table (FIG. 11-79) specified by the parent table. -80), grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-81 to 83), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (Figures 11-81 to 83). ~LS5, performs lamp control of attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As a result, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink in white at 40ms intervals until 200ms have passed, and then turn on in red until 1200ms have passed, and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals. changes, and then gradually turns off from red in 280 ms, and remains off until a new extension command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 turn off until 200ms have elapsed, then turn on in red until 1200ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, then gradually turn off from red in 280ms, and the new expansion The light remains off until a command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at 40ms intervals until 200ms have elapsed, then remain lit white until 1200ms have elapsed, and change their brightness at 20ms intervals, and then gradually change from white to white at 280ms. The light goes out and remains off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period of 500 s from the start is the title start period, and after that, the period of 2200 ms is the title display period, After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. In addition, when executing a title color change effect that changes from white to red, the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have passed after the start of the title display period, and then the title characters are displayed in red. , and after another 1200 ms has elapsed, the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extension command B511 is received at the timing when the title color change effect is executed, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red, so that the title characters shine. During the period in which it is displayed in a manner that looks like this (the period until 200 ms has passed after receiving the extended command B511), the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink in white, and the logo LEDs L1 to LL4 blink in white. The light goes out, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash in white (lamp control by the grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, until the title characters change to red and the title end period begins (a period from 200 ms after receiving extended command B511 to 1200 ms), frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in red and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and brightness changes at 20ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white. Then, the brightness changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, during the title end period (period after 1400 ms has elapsed after receiving the extended command B511) when the title characters move from the regular position to the right and disappear, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 gradually turns off from red, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 gradually turn off from red, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually turn off from white (Lamps by grandchild table (7) specified by child table in Figure 11-80) control).

In addition, after 3000 ms have passed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is transmitted in conjunction with starting the display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. As a result, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red is completed, and it is switched to the lamp control based on the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
FIG. 11-84 shows a luminance data table: title used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B512, which is transmitted when performing display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to gold. FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the common chance up gold, and FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold, and FIGS. -88 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of title common chance up money.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing at which title characters are changed (title display part The extension command 512 is transmitted at a timing when 1300 ms has passed after the start.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B512, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-84) of title common chance up money based on the extended command 512, and the child table (FIG. 11-84) specified in the parent table. -85), grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-86 to 88), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (Figures 11-86 to 88). ~LS5, performs lamp control of attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As a result, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 flash in white at intervals of 40ms until 200ms have elapsed, and then turn on in a yellow color until 1200ms have elapsed, and the brightness increases at intervals of 20ms. changes, and then gradually turns off from yellow in 280 ms, and remains off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 turn off until 200ms have elapsed, then turn on in red until 1200ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, then gradually turn off from red in 280ms, and the new expansion The light remains off until a command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at 40ms intervals until 200ms have elapsed, then remain lit white until 1200ms have elapsed, and change their brightness at 20ms intervals, and then gradually change from white to white at 280ms. The light goes out and remains off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period of 500 s from the start is the title start period, and after that, the period of 2200 ms is the title display period, After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. In addition, when executing a title color change effect that changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow for 200 ms at the timing of 800 ms after the start of the title display period, and then the title characters change to gold. , and after another 1200 ms has elapsed, the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extended command B512 is received at the timing of executing the title color change effect, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up money, so that the title characters shine. During the period in which the frame is displayed in a manner that looks like this (the period until 200 ms has passed after receiving the extended command B512), the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink in white, and the logo LEDs L1 to LL4 blink in white. The light goes out, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash in white (lamp control by the grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, until the title characters change to gold and the title ends (period from 200ms after receiving extended command B512 to 1200ms), frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in yellow and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and brightness changes at 20ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white. Then, the brightness changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, during the title end period (period after 1400 ms has passed after receiving the extended command B512) when the title characters move from the regular position to the right side and disappear, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 gradually turns off from yellow, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 turn off from red and gradually turns off, and decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually turn off from white (Lamps by grandchild table (10) specified by child table in Figure 11-85) control).

In addition, after 3000 ms have passed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is transmitted in conjunction with starting the display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. As a result, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up money is completed, and the lamp control is switched to the lamp control based on the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Modified example of brightness data table used in title color change effect]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title to frame the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, regardless of whether title change performance is performed or not. If you control the lamps of LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and do not perform a title change effect, use the brightness data table as is: Using the weak reach common title, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 ~LWR12, when controlling the lamps of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 to perform a title change effect, the title common chance up red or title common chance up red or By receiving an extended command specifying the title common chance up money, the color of the title text changes.Brightness data table: Frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 using title common chance up red or title common chance up money. ~LWR12, the configuration was to perform lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table is set with the brightness data when title change effects are not performed: Weak reach common title (white) , In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, a brightness data table with brightness data set when performing a title change performance in which the title characters change to red: Weak reach system common title (red) and title The display control unit 123 includes a brightness data table in which brightness data is set when performing a title change effect in which the characters change to gold: Weak reach common title (gold), and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A and B effects. When starting the display control of the title display part, if the title change effect is not performed, the effect control CPU 120 can change the brightness data by sending an extended command that specifies the weak reach common title (white). Table: Lamp control of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the weak reach system common title (white), and the display control unit 123 displays the titles of low base weak reach A and B effects. When starting the display control of the display part, if you want to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to red, by sending an extended command that specifies a weak reach common title (red), the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title (red) to control the frames LEDL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A, When starting the display control of the title display part of the B effect, if you want to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to gold, by sending an extended command that specifies the weak reach common title (gold), The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: Weak reach common title (gold).

As a result, the performance control CPU 120 changes the title characters to gold when performing a title change performance that changes the title characters to red when not performing the title change performance in the title display part of the base weak reach A and B performances. It is possible to control the lamps of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 in a light emitting manner according to each situation when performing a title change effect.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base weak reach A production]
FIG. 11-89 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B400 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A performance: Weak reach type Weak reach FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for introducing A, and FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table for introducing brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A, and FIGS. 11-91 to 11 -95 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach type weak reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B400, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-89) for introducing the weak reach type weak reach A based on the extended command B400, and the child table (FIG. 11-89) specified in the parent table ( 11-90), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-91 to 95), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-90 includes an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production, a grandchild table with the luminescent color and luminescence mode according to the production scene. are set, and furthermore, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-91 to 11-95, brightness data that is the light emission color and light emission mode according to the characters etc. appearing in the scene of the performance is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect]
FIG. 11-96 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B40F transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base weak reach B effect: weak reach system weak reach FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for introducing B, and FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table for introducing brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B, and FIGS. 11-99 to 11 -103 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of weak reach type weak reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B40F, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-96) for introducing the weak reach type weak reach B based on the extension command B40F, and the child table ( 11-97), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-98 to 103), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-97 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the luminous color according to the scene of the production, and the grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. are set, and furthermore, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-98 to 11-103, luminance data that is the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. appearing in the scene of the performance is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects]
FIG. 11-104 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B517 transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects: strong reach FIG. 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common title, and FIG. 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title. 109 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of the strong reach common title.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B517, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-105) of the strong reach common title based on the extension command B517, and the child table (Fig. 11-105) specified in the parent table. -106), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-107 to 109), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (Fig. 11-107 to 109). ~LS5, performs lamp control of attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in Figure 11-106, the scenes of the production such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, title end period, etc. that constitute the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production are switched. A grandchild table is set for the execution time according to the time, the luminous color and the light emission mode according to the scene of the production, and furthermore, the grandchild table shown in Figures 11-107 to 109 includes characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production. Luminance data that corresponds to the luminous color and luminous mode are set.

As a result, frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are used to display the scene of the production in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production, characters appearing, etc. The color and mode of emitted light change accordingly.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base strong reach A production]
FIG. 11-110 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B500 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A effect: strong reach system strong reach FIG. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of A introduction, and FIG. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, and FIG. 11-112 to FIG. -117 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of strong reach type strong reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B500, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-110) for introducing the strong reach type strong reach A based on the extended command B500, and the child table (FIG. 11-110) specified in the parent table ( 11-111), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-112 to 117), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-111 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. Further, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-112 to 117, brightness data for the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the performance scene are set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect]
FIG. 11-118 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B504 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach B effect: strong reach system strong reach FIG. 11-119 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for B introduction, and FIG. 11-119 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table for brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and FIGS. -124 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of strong reach type strong reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B504, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-118) for introducing the strong reach type strong reach B based on the extended command B504, and the child table (FIG. 11-118) specified in the parent table ( 11-119), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-120 to 124), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-119 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the luminous color according to the scene of the production, and the grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. Furthermore, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-120 to 11-11-11-120, brightness data for the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the performance scene are set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect]
When the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B505 that is sent when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach C performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a strong reach type strong reach based on the extended command B505. Specify the parent table (not shown) for C installation, and refer to the child table (not shown) specified in the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed for frames LEDL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table of strong reach type strong reach C introduction will have an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, and a luminescent color and luminous mode according to the production scene. A grandchild table is set up, and the grandchild table that introduces strong reach type strong reach C will have a luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production. Brightness data is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in low base strongest reach performance]
FIG. 11-125 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B600 transmitted when controlling the display of the low-based strongest reach effect: the parent of the strongest reach title introduction of the strongest reach system. FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the table, and FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, and FIGS. 11-127 to 11-135 are Brightness data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table for the introduction of the strongest reach system strongest reach title. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B600, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-126) for introducing the strongest reach title based on the extended command B600, and the child table (FIG. 11-126) specified in the parent table ( 11-127), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-128 to 135), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-126 contains the execution time corresponding to the time when the scenes of the production change from the title display part of the low-base strongest reach production to the end of the introduction part, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the luminous emission color. A grandchild table is set as a mode, and further, in the grandchild table shown in FIGS. 11-127 to 135, luminance data is set, which is a luminous color and a luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production. .

As a result, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach production, the characters appearing, etc. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D effects]
FIG. 11-136 shows the brightness data table: High base reach used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B605 transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in high base reach A to D productions. FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common title, and FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach common title, and -140 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of the high base reach common title.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B605, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-136) of the high base reach common title based on the extension command B605, and the child table (Figure 11-136) specified in the parent table. 11-137), grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-138 to 140), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table Performs lamp control for LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-137 shows the execution according to the time when the scenes of the production, such as the title start period, title display period, and title end period, which constitute the title display part in the high base reach performances A to D, change. A grandchild table is set that has a luminous color and a luminous mode according to the time and scene of the production, and the grandchild table shown in Figures 11-138 to 140 has a luminous color that corresponds to the characters, etc. that appear in the scene of the production. , brightness data that becomes the light emission mode is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are used for the production scenes, appearing characters, etc. in the title display part of high base reach A to D productions. At the same time, the luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach A performance]
FIG. 11-141 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B606 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach A performance: high base reach type reach A FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the introduction, and FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction, and FIG. 11-143 to FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of high base reach type reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B606, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-141) for introducing the high base reach system reach A based on the extension command B606, and the child table ( 11-142), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-143 to 145), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-142 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach A production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. Further, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-143 to 145, brightness data that is the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the scene of the performance is set.

As a result, the frame LEDs WL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, the characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach A production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach B effect]
FIG. 11-146 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B607 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach B performance: high base reach type reach B FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach B introduction. Note that the child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and the grandchild tables are all omitted.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B607, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-146) for introducing the high base reach system reach B based on the extension command B607, and the child table (FIG. 11-146) specified in the parent table ( 11-147), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDS1 to LS5 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (not shown). , performs lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-147 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach B production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, the grandchild table of the high base reach system Reach B introduction is set with luminance data that becomes the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters, etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach B production. has been done.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach B production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach C effect]
FIG. 11-148 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B608 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach C performance: high base reach type reach C FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach C introduction. Note that the child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and the grandchild tables are all omitted.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B608, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-148) for introducing high base reach type reach C based on the extension command B608, and the child table ( 11-149), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDS1 to LS5 by referring to the grandchild table (not shown) and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table. , performs lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-148 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach C production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, the grandchild table of high base reach type reach C introduction is set with luminance data that becomes the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach C production. has been done.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach C production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach D effect]
FIG. 11-150 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B609 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach D performance: high base reach type reach D FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: high base reach type reach D introduction. Note that the child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and the grandchild tables are all omitted.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B609, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-150) for introducing high base reach system reach D based on the extension command B609, and the child table (FIG. 11-150) specified in the parent table ( 11-151), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDS1 to LS5 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (not shown). , performs lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-150 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach D production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, the grandchild table of the high base reach type reach D introduction is set with luminance data that becomes the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach D production. has been done.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach D production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a ready-to-reach mode. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Then, a decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in the super reach effect, and in the title display part, title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed using the display position of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach mode. let By doing this, when a decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative pattern, the title characters can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that became a reach mode is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player can select either ornament. This draws attention to whether or not the design is in a reach mode, and the title characters can also draw more attention.

In addition, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the super reach performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in reach mode is reduced to a smaller size decorative pattern (small), The title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed using the display position of the reduced decorative pattern (small). By doing this, the decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a reduced size to attract the player's gaze, and the display position of the reduced decorative pattern (small) is used to display the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By displaying the title characters, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title characters.

Also, in the title display part of the super reach effect, at the timing when the decorative pattern that has become a reach mode is displayed, the title character corresponding to the super reach effect will be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern that has become a reach mode. This makes it easier to draw attention to the title text.

In addition, the super reach performance includes low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base weak reach A. , The title characters corresponding to the B effect and the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects appear in a state where they overlap with one of the decorative symbols in reach mode (the left decorative symbol). Therefore, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

In addition, the super reach effect includes the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach effects A to C. Since it appears overlapping the pattern (decorative pattern on both sides), the title character corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach effects A to C, and the title letters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect are of the decorative pattern that has become a reach mode. After appearing in a state overlapping one of the decorative patterns (the decorative pattern on the left) or both decorative patterns (the decorative patterns on both sides), it is displayed in the fixed position, and even during the period when it is displayed in the fixed position, it is in a reach mode. Since the title character is displayed overlapping a part of the decorative pattern on both sides, even after the title character is displayed in a fixed position, it is easy to draw attention to the title character.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the reach mode. . The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. Then, when an odd number of decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display position of the odd number of decorative symbols in the reach mode is used in the title display part. If the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed, and an even number of decorative symbols are displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title display will be In the part, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed using the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that is in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects. When odd-numbered decorative patterns are displayed in reach mode, in the title display part, title characters corresponding to low base strong reach A to C effects are used to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbols that are in reach mode. If an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in a low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern in a reach mode in the title display part. Title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed as if used. By doing this, when the decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has become the reach mode, but the low base weak reach A, B effect, the low base To display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances using the display position of the decorative pattern in the reach mode in the title display part of the strong reach A to C performances. In this way, the title characters can be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that became a reach mode is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player can select either ornament. This draws attention to whether or not the design is in a reach mode, and the title characters can also draw more attention.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the reach mode, the performance control CPU 120 controls the low base weak reach A and B performances, the low base strong reach A to C performances, and the low base strongest reach. It is possible to perform the performance. Low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the production result is announced. It is composed of both. Then, when an odd number of decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display position of the odd number of decorative symbols in the reach mode is used in the title display part. If the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed, and an even number of decorative symbols are displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title display will be In the part, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed using the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that is in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects. When odd-numbered decorative patterns are displayed in reach mode, in the title display part, title characters corresponding to low base strong reach A to C effects are used to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbols that are in reach mode. If an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in a low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern in a reach mode in the title display part. If the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach effects A to C are displayed, and an odd number of decorative symbols are displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect, then in the title display part , the title character corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect is displayed using the display position of the odd numbered decorative pattern that is in the reach mode, and the even numbered decorative pattern is in the reach mode before the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect. When displayed, in the title display part, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed so as to use the display positions of even-numbered decorative symbols in the reach mode. By doing this, when the decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has become the reach mode, but the low base weak reach A, B effect, the low base Strong reach A to C production, low base weak reach A to B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base using the display position of the decorative pattern that became reach mode in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production By displaying title characters corresponding to the strongest reach effect, the title characters can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that became a reach mode is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player can select either ornament. This draws attention to whether or not the design is in a reach mode, and it is possible to draw more attention to the title characters.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-reach mode. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Then, a decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the super reach effect, and in the title display part, title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative pattern in the reach mode. let By doing this, when the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative pattern that has changed, the title characters can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach B performance and the low base strong reach B performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach B performance. The low base weak reach B performance and the low base strong reach B performance are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B production, the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Yumemu" announces that there will be a jackpot, and in the low base strong reach B production, Allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" are used, and the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" notify that the jackpot will be won. In the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the display starts with the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" placed in the front and the enemy character "Robo" in the back, and the low base weak In the introduction part of Reach B production, the ally character "Mumemu" is arranged so that the enemy character "Boingo" is not on the front side and the enemy character "Boingo" is on the back side (the ally character "Mumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" are on the left and right) Start displaying in a facing manner). By doing this, for the low base weak reach B performance where the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high, the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" who will be notified of the jackpot will be on the front side, and the enemy character "Robo" will be on the front side. By starting from an arrangement where ``'' is on the back side, the player can empathize with the game, and it becomes easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, ally characters are characters that are given benefits when they win in battle, and enemy characters are characters that are not given benefits when they win in battle. ” and “Nana” are displayed in the front position with their backs turned, the enemy character “Robo” is displayed in the back position with their backs facing you, and the ally characters “Jam” and “Nana” and the enemy character “Robo” are displayed in the back position. '', and the low base strong reach B effect, which has relatively high expectations, has the player facing the same direction as the ally characters ``Jam'' and ``Nana'', so the player It becomes easier to make the player empathize with the player, and it becomes easier to make the player realize that the player has a high expectation of winning the jackpot.

Also, in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in a position that includes the display area where the title characters were displayed in the title display part. Therefore, when the title characters disappear, the player who has been paying attention to the title characters naturally starts to look at the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo."

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 is configured to control the low base weak reach A, B production, the low base weak reach A, B production, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and the low base weak reach A, B production, which has a longer production time. It is possible to perform strong base reach A to C effects. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. Also, dialogue subtitles are used for both the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances. In the low base weak reach A and B productions, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part continue to be displayed, while the low base In the strong reach A to C effects, title characters are displayed without dialogue subtitles in the title display part. By doing this, the low base strong reach A to C productions that have a relatively high expectation of a jackpot and a long execution time are displayed so that the title characters and dialogue subtitles do not overlap as much as possible, and the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high. In the case of low base weak reach A and B productions with low intensity and short execution time, even if the display of dialogue subtitles and title characters overlap, by finishing the display of title characters first, attention will also be paid to dialogue subtitles. This makes it possible to suitably provide the title characters and dialogue subtitles to the player, and as a result, it is possible to suitably display the title.

In addition, if title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B productions, in the subsequent introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed at the same time as the title characters will be displayed until the display ends. Since the scene does not change, you can draw attention to the title text and then the dialogue subtitles.

In addition, when title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title characters is not output. It becomes easier to hear the audio that corresponds to dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display for the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D is composed of multiple characters (``Catch the Bakushu with 6 people!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B ~ D)''). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach effect A to D, the display of title characters is started at an enlarged size where only part of the multiple characters is visible, and from the enlarged size The display size is gradually reduced and the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all the multiple characters can be seen.By doing this, the title display for the strongest low base reach effect and the high base reach effect A to D is displayed. In the part, multiple characters are displayed at an enlarged size where only part of them can be seen, and then gradually become smaller and displayed at a reduced size where all characters can be seen, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the title characters. can.

In addition, before the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect is started, the movable body 32 is moved so as to overlap with the front side of the image display device 5, and after the movable body 32 is operated, the movable body 32 is moved to the initial stage. A background dedicated to the falling effect is displayed during the period during which the falling effect is executed until returning to the position, and when the movable body 32 returns to the initial position, all of the plurality of characters forming the title character do not become visible. , and starts displaying the title characters in an enlarged size that fills the display area and makes the background invisible, and then displays the title characters in a reduced size and a background dedicated to displaying the title. By doing so, it is possible to create an impact with the display method of the title characters, and at the same time, the background can be switched without any discomfort, and the title characters can be suitably shown to the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and high base reach A is controlled. ~In the introduction part of the D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (introducing high base reach type reach A, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the brightness data table for title display (luminance data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach system strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect) The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction), and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results The title can be suitably displayed as follows.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display for the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D is composed of multiple characters (``Catch the Bakushu with 6 people!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B ~ D)''). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and high base reach A to D performance, the title display part is ended by expanding and displaying multiple characters from the state where multiple characters are displayed, Display the background at the beginning of the introduction part.By doing this, the player is paying attention to the title characters in the title display part, and using the title characters appropriately, the background corresponding to the next introduction part is displayed. You can switch between the two without feeling any discomfort.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and high base reach A is controlled. ~In the introduction part of the D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (introducing high base reach type reach A, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode depending on the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the brightness data table for title display (luminance data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach system strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect) The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction), and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results The title can be suitably displayed as follows.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach performances A and B, and low base strong reach performances A to C. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. Also, the execution time of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances (T1-1 to 2) is different from the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances (T2-1 to 3). , in both title display parts, the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the display ends from the display at the fixed position. It consists of the title end period until the end of the title. In addition, both in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances and in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. To display title characters so that the period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title display period displayed at the fixed position can be made the longest. By doing this, you can draw attention to the type of title characters. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title start period until it is displayed at the regular position will be displayed from the regular position display. By setting the time period until the end of the title to be longer than the title end period, it is possible to influence which title characters are displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period is the same. By doing this, you can make the title display part easier to understand.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance both in a normal state and in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Also, the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance in the normal state (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) is different from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the super reach performance in the variable probability state. , in both title display parts, the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the display ends from the display at the fixed position. It consists of the title end period until the end of the title. In both the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the title display part of the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is the title end period. Display the title character so that it is longer than . By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable probability state, the title display part can be displayed by making the title display period displayed at the fixed position the longest. It can draw attention to the type of characters. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable state, the title start period until it is displayed in the fixed position is changed from the display in the fixed position to the end of the display. By setting the time period to be longer than the title end period, it is possible to influence which title characters are displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period can be made the same. , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is longer than the execution time of the title display part (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the super reach effect in the normal state. Since the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance executed in a variable probability state is relatively short, it is possible to proceed with the game in a variable probability state at a good tempo. Since the execution time of the part is relatively long, it can be thoroughly stimulated.

In addition, regardless of the type of super reach performance executed in the variable probability state, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the low base weak reach performances A and B, which have lower jackpot expectations among the super reach performances executed in the normal state. Even if the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance is high and the probability is variable, and the execution time of the title display part is relatively short, the expectation of a jackpot can be made just by executing the super reach performance.

In addition, the execution time of the super reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of super reach effect executed in the variable probability state, but among the super reach effect executed in the normal state, The expected jackpot is higher than the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a low jackpot expectation, and the execution time of the super reach performance and the execution time of the title display part, regardless of the type of super reach performance executed in the variable probability state. Even if it is the same, you can expect a big hit just by executing the super reach effect.

Also, among the super reach performances executed in normal conditions, the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B, is the same as the low base weak reach performances. The execution time of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in the AB performance, and has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performances A to C. It is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in A to C performances. By doing this, in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part is longer for a super reach performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot, so that it can be more strongly promoted.

Also, among the super reach performances executed in normal conditions, the title display period during which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position in the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The execution time is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB production, and the title display period in the low base strongest reach production, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C productions. The execution time is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A to C effects. By doing this, in the normal state, the longer the execution time of the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the longer the execution time of the title display period, so that the excitement can be firmly promoted.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display part includes the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the time when the display ends from the display at the fixed position. It consists of a title end period up to. In the title display part, title characters are displayed such that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing so, the type of title character can be drawn to the attention by making the title display period displayed at a fixed position the longest. Further, by setting the title start period until the title is displayed at the fixed position to be longer than the title end period from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display, it is possible to influence which title characters are displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period can be made the same. , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C and low base strongest reach performance. The low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-43, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the low base strong reach effect A to C effects, the title characters are displayed in white, and in red, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the white color. It is possible to display it in various ways. In the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the low base strong reach performance A to C, the corresponding expectation level suggestion display is displayed, and then the title characters are displayed in a larger size than the expectation level suggestion display. At this time, whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in a common manner. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect and the low base strong reach effect A to C are larger in size than the expectation level suggestion display, and their appearance suggests the level of expectation. Therefore, it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation level suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the expectation level suggestion first. Moreover, since the expectation level suggestion display is performed in a common manner whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, attention can be drawn to the subsequent appearance of the title characters.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach B performance. The low base strong reach B and C effects include both a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, and in the second mode (4 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach C production. ) to display the expectation level suggestion display. At this time, the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance and the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance are highlighted in a common manner. By doing this, even when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the first mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach B performance, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach C production. Even when displaying the expectation level suggestion display, the development cost can be reduced by making the highlighted display a common mode.

In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects, and in the low base strong reach B production, the expectation level is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, In the low base strong reach C performance, the level of expectation is suggested by N+1 (4) objects, and each star-shaped object is highlighted, and even when one object is highlighted, the level of expectation is 0. Even when five objects are highlighted, the highlighting is done in a common manner. By doing this, whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, the highlighting is done in a common manner. This can reduce development costs.

Furthermore, in the expectation level suggestion display, the time during which one star-shaped object is highlighted is the same as the time during which 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. By doing this, the time for highlighting one star object and the time for highlighting 0.5 star objects can be made the same, reducing development costs. Can be done.

In addition, in the expectation level suggestion display, a common expectation level suggestion sound is output both when one star-shaped object is highlighted and when 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. . By doing this, a common expectation level suggestion sound is output whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. This can reduce development costs.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for strong base systems), and the low base strong reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of the B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong base system common title) in the title display part, but in the low base strong reach B performance In the title display part, a brightness data table for displaying the title in the low base strong reach B performance (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance (strong reach type strong reach B title) )) to control the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach type strong reach C title) that is configured with brightness data corresponding to the low base strong reach. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different brightness data tables for title display in the title display part of the B performance and the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the appropriate light emission according to the title display is performed. The game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light depending on the mode, and as a result, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C, low base strongest reach performances, and high base reach performances A to D. For the low base strong reach A to C production, the low base strongest reach production, and the high base reach A to D production, the title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and the introduction part until the production result is announced are all It is also composed of Further, in the title display part of the low base strong reach performance A to C, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach performance A to D, an expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects can be displayed. In the expectation level suggestion display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, and then the second star-shaped object is highlighted while continuing to highlight the first star-shaped object. After that, the highlighting for the first star-shaped object is ended, and the highlighting for the third star-shaped object is performed. By doing this, in the expectation level suggestion display, the highlighting for the second star-shaped object starts before the highlighting for the first star-shaped object ends, but the highlighting for the third star-shaped object ends. Since the highlighting of the objects does not start until the highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, it becomes easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the expectation level suggestion display, an expectation level suggestion sound is output every time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation level suggestion sound for the first star-shaped object is finished, the next star-shaped object is highlighted. A sound indicating the expectation level of highlighting for the object is output. By doing so, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object does not overlap with the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation.

In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects and the characters "expectation level" indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the level of expectation. '' is carried out in a size that overlaps with the above. By doing so, by highlighting the star-shaped object, it is possible to draw attention to both the multiple star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display and the text indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the level of expectation. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when highlighting some of the star-shaped objects among the plurality of star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is changed to text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. Although this is a superimposed configuration, for all star-shaped objects, the highlighted display for the star-shaped object may be superimposed on the text indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C, low base strongest reach performances, and high base reach performances A to D. For the low base strong reach A to C production, the low base strongest reach production, and the high base reach A to D production, the title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and the introduction part until the production result is announced are all It is also composed of In addition, it is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not started yet, and multiple hold displays can be displayed in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach effects A to D. It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of star-shaped objects. Then, in the title display part of the low base strong reach performance A to C, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach performance A to D, the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. By doing this, an expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the low base strongest reach effects, and the high base reach effects A to D. Since the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, it is possible to prevent the pending display from being mistakenly recognized as the expectation level suggesting display.

In particular, the maximum number of active displays corresponding to pending displays and variable displays that have been started will match the maximum number of star objects that make up the expectation suggestion display, but the maximum number of pending displays and active displays will be Even if low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach effects A to D are executed in the displayed situation, the pending display and active display constitute a star-shaped object that constitutes an expectation level suggestion display. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that the maximum number of is displayed.

Moreover, by erasing the hold display when a monochrome display effect in which the display area is displayed in a single color is executed before the start of the title display part, the hold display can be ended without any discomfort.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to D effects, the brightness data table for title display (strong base common title, high base, high base reach type Common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to D effects, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction , introduction of strong reach system strong reach B, introduction of strong reach system strong reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the high base reach A to D performances, the game uses a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. Since the effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the brightness data table for title display (the brightness data table composed of the brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach system strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect) The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction), and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results The title can be suitably displayed as follows.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C and high base reach performances A to C. The low base strong reach A to C performances and the high base reach A to C performances are comprised of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. . In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A production/high base reach A production, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of the first number (3) star-shaped objects, and the low base strong reach B production/ In the title display part of the high base reach B performance, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display consisting of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects, which is larger than the first number, and a low base strong reach C performance/high In the title display part in the base reach C performance, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of a third number (4) of star-shaped objects, which is larger than the second number. The difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same as the difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4) (0.5 ), and the expected jackpot when the low base strong reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4)/high base reach C performance is executed and the low base strong reach corresponding to the second number (3.5) The difference from the jackpot expectation level when the B performance/high base reach B performance is executed is when the low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. It is larger than the difference between the jackpot expectation level when the low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing this, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5), and the second number ( The increase in the number of star objects is the same as when increasing from 3.5) to the third number (4), but the number increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5). The amount of increase in the jackpot expectation is larger when the number increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than when the number of star objects increases, so the increase in the number of star objects increases. While it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot more than the number of objects, it does not make the player expect an excessive jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance, and the number of title display parts in the low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance is greater than the third number (4). It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display consisting of a star-shaped object of the fourth number (4.5), and the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) (0.5 ) is smaller than the difference (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and is the lowest base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance corresponding to the fourth number (4.5). The difference between the jackpot expectation level when the is executed and the jackpot expectation level when the low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed is the third number (4). ) corresponding to the low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance when the jackpot expectation level is executed and the low base strong reach B performance corresponding to the first number (3)/high base reach B performance is executed. This is larger than the difference between the expected jackpot and the expected jackpot. By doing this, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). The increase in the number of star-shaped objects is smaller when increasing from the first number (4.5) to the fourth number (4.5), but the increase in the number of star objects is smaller than when increasing from the first number (3) to the third number (4). The amount of increase in the jackpot expectation is greater when increasing from (4) to the fourth number (4.5), so the more the number of star-shaped objects increases, the smaller the number of star-shaped objects increased. But you can expect to hit the jackpot.

Also, the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1. Yes, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases by 1 from the first number (3) to become the third number (4). If the number is increased by 0.5 to the fourth number (4.5), it can be expected to be an even bigger hit.

In addition, the jackpot expectation level and the high base reach B corresponding to the second number (3.5) when the high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The difference between the jackpot expectation level when the performance is executed is the difference between the jackpot expectation level and the second number (3.5) when the low base strong reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state. ) is larger than the difference from the jackpot expectation level when the low base strong reach B performance corresponding to the above is executed. By doing this, it is possible to make people expect that the variable probability state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, will hit the jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases. can.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B performances and low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state. . The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. The title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is longer than the title display part in the low base weak reach performances A and B. While the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, which have relatively high expectations, is better than the title display part in the low base weak reach performances A and B, which have relatively low expectations. In addition, while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach performances A and B. It is possible to make the user realize that the level of expectation is higher for the strong base reach performances A to C than for the low base weak reach performances A and B.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), The title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances has no prologue display period and consists only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances does not have a prologue display period. is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. Also, it is possible to make the user realize that the level of expectation is higher for the low base strong reach performances A to C than the low base weak reach performances A and B.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C performances in the normal state, and the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is , consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period (title start period, title display period, title end period) in which title characters are displayed, and the title display part in the low base strongest reach production is It consists only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach performance A to C. . By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, so It is possible to make the user realize that the level of expectation is higher for the strongest base reach performance than for the low base strong reach performances A to C.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the brightness data table for each title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems). Control the game effect lamp 9 using the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B performances and low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state. . The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. In addition, in the low base weak reach performances A and B, there are cases where a jackpot is not announced as the performance result, there are cases where a loss is announced as the performance result, and there are cases where it develops into other super reach performances. In the low base strong reach A to C performances, there are cases where a jackpot is announced as a result of the performance, and there are cases where a miss is reported. Then, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach performances A to C, while the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach performances A and B. By doing this, while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances that may directly notify that there will be a jackpot, it will also directly notify that there will be a jackpot. Since the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances that are not reported, it is possible to prevent the low base weak reach A and B performances from creating an excessive sense of expectation. .

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach performances A and B, it is possible to display the title letters in a golden form that is certain to develop into other super reach performances, so the expectation level suggestion display is Even the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances that is not displayed can draw the attention of the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the brightness data table for each title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems). Control the game effect lamp 9 using the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach effects A to C and low base strongest reach. The low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach are composed of both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach may be executed via a selection effect using title characters that correspond to multiple super reach effects, and the low base strong reach effects A to C It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display together with the title characters in the performance, the title display part of the lowest base strongest reach, and the selected performance. Then, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach, the expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, When displaying the expectation level suggestion display in a selection performance, the expectation level suggestion display constituted by a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages. By doing this, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C production and low base strongest reach, the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects will be displayed. However, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the selection performance, the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, so only the title display part is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance caused by the step-by-step display of the expectation level suggestion display even in the previous selection performance.

In addition, the selection performance is a performance that changes in stages from a super reach performance with a low jackpot expectation level to a super reach performance with a high jackpot expectation level by operating the push button 31B, and it takes a certain amount of time to change one stage in the selection performance. The time, that is, the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect, is displayed in one step in the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. In some cases, this time is shorter than the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted, and it is possible to give a sense of speed to the gradual change in the selection effect.

In addition, the selection performance is a performance that changes at each stage to a super reach performance that has a higher expectation of jackpot than the current super reach performance, and each time it changes by one stage, it is necessary to change to the next stage. The number of times the push button 31B is operated increases. By doing this, it is possible to irritate the player as the expectation level of the jackpot in the super reach effect increases.

Furthermore, when the low base strong reach performance A to C performance or the low base strongest reach performance is selected as the selection performance, the game starts from the title display part of the super reach performance. By doing this, even if the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effects are executed via the selection effects, it will start from the title display part, so which super reach effect will be executed in the end. It is easy for the player to determine whether the

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters of the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation in which the title text is displayed in the super reach effect is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the situation in which the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect is This is a situation after it has already been announced that a jackpot will be won, and by moving the title characters of the jackpot start performance more widely, it is possible to celebrate that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance in a manner with greater movement than the title characters of the super reach performance, it is possible to congratulate the control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the title display part of the super reach effect, when displaying title characters, a background dedicated to title display is displayed (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D). The background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to displaying the title in the super reach effect. By doing this, the background of the title characters of the jackpot start effect can be moved more greatly to congratulate the control of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach performance is a static image, but the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach performance may be a moving image. The background of the title characters of the start performance is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to displaying the title in the super reach performance, so that it is possible to congratulate the control to a jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B Introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in operation promotion performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) displayed in the introduction part encourage the player to perform an action (operation), and should be moved more than the title characters displayed in the title display part. This allows the player to intuitively prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, in the operation promotion effects B and D in the introduction part of the super reach effect, the player is prompted to operate the push button 31B, and operation promotion letters (small) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the operation promotion letters (small) are also used. (large) can be displayed, and both the operation promotion characters (small) and operation promotion characters (large) are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, whether the operation promotion characters (small) or operation promotion characters (large) are moved larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, players can intuitively Actions (operations) can be encouraged.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the operation promotion letters (small) in a manner that moves more than the title letters of the super reach performance, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to perform an operation (operation). In addition, even in such a configuration, both the operation promotion characters (small) and operation promotion characters (large) are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, so that the operation promotion characters (small) or operation prompting characters (large), by moving them larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, the number of characters (3) of the operation promotion characters (small)) is smaller than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title characters of the super reach effect, so even if you move the operation promotion characters (small)) greatly, the content of the characters will not change. It can be recognized.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in the title display part of the super reach effect, explanatory characters that explain the content of the super reach effect can be displayed. At this time, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory characters in a manner that moves more than the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory characters are added in addition to the title characters. can.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the explanatory text in a manner with greater movement than the title text in the super reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory text is added in addition to the title text. .

Furthermore, since the explanatory text suggests that the super reach performance is advantageous, the fact that the explanatory text is added can draw further attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B Introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach performances A and B, and the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. . Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach performances A to C are displayed in a larger size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances, which have a relatively high expectation level, are better than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B, which have a relatively low expectation level. Since the font size is displayed larger than the title, you can experience that the low base strong reach A to C effects are more likely to hit the jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B effects just by looking at the title text. It can be recognized.

In addition, the number of characters (10) forming the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach effects A and B is greater than the number of characters forming the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects (7, 8), The display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C performances is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B. By doing this, the display area size of one character for the title character corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects is larger, so the low base strong reach B and C effects are better than the low base weak reach. It is possible to make the player realize that the expectation level of jackpot is higher than that of performances A and B.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the brightness data table for each title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems). Control the game effect lamp 9 using the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 24]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-reach mode. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode before a title display part in a super reach performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in a ready-to-reach mode is displayed reduced to a small-sized decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one of the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed in a size larger than the size of the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, at least one of the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect will be displayed in a larger size than the reduced decorative pattern (small), drawing attention to the title character in the title display part. be able to.

Further, any characters of the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed in a size smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, the decorative pattern (large) when the reach mode is reached can be reliably recognized, and after that, the decorative pattern (large) is reduced and becomes the decorative pattern (small), and the Since each character constituting the title character is displayed in a larger size than the pattern (small), the title character can draw attention to the title display part.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in operation promotion performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the title text of the jackpot start effect will be displayed, whereas the situation where the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed in the super reach effect is when it is not yet known whether or not it is a jackpot. The situation is after the jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the operation promotion letters (small), it is possible to celebrate that the jackpot game state is controlled. can.

In addition, the title character of the jackpot start effect consists of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS", and after "BIG" or "REGULAR" is displayed at the top of the fixed position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, and then "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the regular position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the regular position gradually expand. Is displayed. "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed in the smallest font size when displayed at the top of the regular position and the bottom of the regular position, and "BIG", "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed in the smallest size. The size of the characters when displayed at the upper and lower fixed positions is larger than the size of the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the characters that make up the title letters of the jackpot start effect are always displayed larger than the letters that make up the operation promotion letters (small), making it even more congratulatory that the jackpot game state is controlled. be able to.

In addition, the smallest character of the character string that constitutes the title character of the jackpot start performance is larger than the largest character of the character string that constitutes the operation promotion character (small). By doing this, no matter which character you pay attention to, the title character of the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the operation promotion character (small), so you can celebrate the control of the jackpot game state even more. I can do it.

In addition, it is possible to display special promotion characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the operation promotion characters (small), and the operation promotion characters (large) are larger than the title characters of the jackpot start effect. By displaying it, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, the smallest character of the character string that makes up the operation promotion character (large) is displayed larger than the largest character of the character string that makes up the title character of the jackpot start effect. Even if the player pays attention to it, the operation promotion letters (large) are displayed larger than the title letters of the jackpot start effect, so the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation in which the title text is displayed in the super reach effect is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the situation in which the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect is This is a situation after a jackpot has already been announced, and it is possible to celebrate that the jackpot game state is controlled by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect. can.

In addition, the super reach performance includes multiple types of super reach performances with different title characters, and the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach performance, so that the jackpot game Being controlled by the state can be a blessing.

In addition, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the title letters of any type of super reach effect. Therefore, no matter which character one pays attention to, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance, so that the control to the jackpot game state can be more celebrated.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) urging the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach effects A and B are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small) to draw attention to the title characters. Can be done.

Further, after the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects starts. By doing this, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part in a series of flows, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). It can draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the title characters corresponding to low base weak reach (A, B effects) is displayed larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the operation promotion characters (small). Therefore, no matter which character the user focuses on, the title character can be drawn to the viewer's attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the low base weak reach A and B performances are notified of a jackpot, the title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Then, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation promotion letters (small). Make it larger. By doing this, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the low base weak reach performance A and B is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not it will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the jackpot start performance is The displayed situation is the situation after the jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the jackpot game state is displayed. It is a blessing to be controlled by In addition, by displaying operation promotion letters (small) before the title display part, and displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards larger than the operation promotion letters (small). It is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, after the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, the title display part for the low base weak reach A and B effects starts, and the low base weak reach A and B effects begin. After the jackpot is announced, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed. By doing this, in a series of steps, the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards are displayed to encourage operation. By displaying it larger than the letters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and then after the low base weak reach A and B effects are announced to be a jackpot. By displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to congratulate the control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the situation where the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect is the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect. This is a situation after a jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect for a longer time than the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect, it is possible to control the game into a jackpot gaming state. can be blessed.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least a part of the character strings are no longer displayed is the same as the time from when all the character strings that make up the title letters of the jackpot start effect are no longer displayed. This is longer than the time from when the part is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed. By doing this, the time when the title characters of the jackpot start effect, which has the intention of blessing, can be clearly seen is longer than the time when the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, whose purpose is to incite the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed. By making the length longer, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, after the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are switched to a right-hand hitting promotion image (small) and a right-hand hitting promotion image (large) that suggest the operation method during the jackpot game state. , After a predetermined period of time has passed after switching to the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large), the operation method suggested by the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large) (pushing the game ball to the right) An advantageous control is performed by operating with the operating method (operation method of launching the ball toward the gaming area 2R), and the time it takes to switch from the title letters of the jackpot start effect to the right-hand hitting promotion image (small) and the right-hand hitting promotion image (large). is shorter than the time required to finish the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are switched to the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large) in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time, the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) Advantageous control is performed by operating in the operating method suggested by the promotion image (large), so changing the operating method from the period when the title character of the jackpot start effect ends may cause disadvantages to the player. You can prevent it from becoming a profit.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in operation promotion effects B and D in the introduction part of the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed, whereas the situation where the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed in the super reach effect is when it is not yet known whether or not it is a jackpot. The situation is after the jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect for a longer time than the operation promotion letters (small), it is possible to control the jackpot game state. can be blessed.

In addition, the operation promotion text (small) will be displayed until the prompted operation is performed or the time period for which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed, and the time when the title text of the jackpot start effect is displayed is the operation promotion text. After (small) is displayed, the prompted operation is not performed, and the time required for the prompted operation to be valid is longer than the time elapsed. By doing this, after the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer time than the time they are displayed without the prompted operation, so that the jackpot can be won. You can celebrate being controlled in a gaming state.

Further, the time from when all the character strings constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed until at least part of the character strings is no longer displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed. By doing this, the time when the title characters of the jackpot start effect, which has the meaning of blessing, can be clearly seen is longer than the time when the operation promotion characters (small) whose purpose is to encourage the player to operate. This can give players a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, it is possible to display operation promotion letters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation promotion letters (small). The operation prompting characters (large) are displayed after the promotion introduction effect is executed. The time period in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is longer than the time period in which the operation promotion character (large) is displayed. By doing this, the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with the intention of blessing is displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion letters (large) accompanying the promotion introduction display are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. can give.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) urging the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. Title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). can draw attention to.

Further, the time from when all the character strings forming the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character strings is no longer displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display is clearly visible becomes longer than the time during which the promotional text display whose purpose is to encourage the player to take action is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the title text.

In addition, it is possible to display operation promotion letters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation promotion letters (small). The operation prompting characters (large) are displayed after the promotion introduction effect is executed. The time period in which the title characters are displayed is longer than the time period in which the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display is displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion characters (large) accompanying the promotion introduction display are displayed, and the title characters can be drawn to attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the low base weak reach A and B performances are notified of a jackpot, the title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed as operation promotion characters ( small) for a longer period of time. By doing this, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the low base weak reach performance A and B is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not it will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the jackpot start performance is The situation displayed is the situation after the jackpot has already been announced, and the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances. You can congratulate yourself on being controlled into a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion letters (small). By displaying this, it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A, B performances and low base strong reach A to C performances in a normal state, and high base reach A to C performances in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. D effect can be executed. Low base weak reach A and B performances, low base strong reach A to C performances, and high base reach A to D performances in variable state are the title display part that displays the corresponding title letters and the time until the performance result is announced. It consists of both an introduction part and. In addition, low base strong reach A to C performances have higher jackpot expectations than low base weak reach A and B performances, and high base reach B to D performances have higher jackpot expectations than high base reach A performances. The high base reach A performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances. Then, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances, the high base reach A performances, and the high base reach B to D performances, an expectation level suggestion display is displayed, and the title display part of the low base weak reach performances A and B is displayed. In this case, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed. By doing this, the low base weak reach performances A and B in the normal state have a lower jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performances A to C in the normal state, so the low base strong reach performances A to C are expected. A degree suggestion display is displayed, but an expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed in low base weak reach A and B performances, thereby preventing excessive expectation of a jackpot due to the low base weak reach A and B performances. On the other hand, although the high base reach A performance in the variable probability state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower jackpot expectation than the high base reach B to D performances in the variable probability state, it is more likely to hit the jackpot than the low base weak reach performances A and B in the normal state. Since expectations are high, by displaying an expectation level suggestion display for both high base reach A performance and high base reach B to D performances, it is possible to display expectations in both high base reach A performance and high base reach B to D performance. You can also expect to hit the jackpot.

[Effect 34]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance both in a normal state and in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display part of the super reach performance in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state. By doing this, the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state, and the game in the variable probability state can be played at a good tempo.

In addition, even if the frequency at which super reach effects are executed in a variable probability state is higher than the frequency at which super reach effects are executed in a normal state, the title display part of the super reach effect in a variable probability state is the same as the title display part of the super reach effect in a normal state. By being shorter than the display part, the game can be played with variable probability at a good tempo.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable state, the luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system, high base reach The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the system common title), and in the introduction part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, Introducing weak reach type weak reach B, introducing strong reach type strong reach A, introducing strong reach type strong reach B, introducing strong reach type strong reach C, introducing high base reach type reach A, introducing high base reach type reach B, high base The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the reach type reach C introduction and the high base reach type reach D introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach performance A to C performance and the low base strongest reach performance with higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance A to C performance. The low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. In the title display part in the low base strong reach effects A to C, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters move from the left side to the center of the display area, and the title display in the low base strongest reach effect. In the part, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from the enlarged display, and when the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, in the play time start performance, the play time start performance is Title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from being enlarged, similar to the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance. By doing this, when the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, in the play time start effect, the title character of the play time start effect is changed to the title of the low base strongest reach effect with relatively high jackpot expectation. Since it is displayed in the same display mode as the characters, it can be recognized that the time saving state B (play time) is highly advantageous.

In addition, when the title characters are erased in the play time start effect, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title letters are enlarged and erased, similar to when the title letters are erased in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect. Make it disappear. By doing this, even when the title characters are erased in the play time start effect, they are erased in the same display mode as when the title letters are erased in the low base strongest reach effect where the expectation of jackpot is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to make the user recognize that the time saving state B (play time) is highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. When the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, the title letters of the play time start effect are displayed in the play time start effect, and the size of the characters constituting the title letters of the play time start effect is The size is larger than the size of the characters composing the title characters corresponding to the production. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach performance when it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the play time start performance is displayed in the time-saving state B ( The characters that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title letters that correspond to the super reach effect, so the time-saving state B (play time) is controlled. ) can be blessed to be controlled by.

In addition, the super reach effect includes multiple types of super reach effects with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title letters of the play time start effect are different from the characters that make up the title letters that correspond to any type of super reach effect. It's also big. By doing this, the characters that make up the title letters of the play time start effect are displayed larger than the letters that make up the title letters that correspond to any type of super reach effect, so time saving state B (play time) It is a blessing to be controlled by

Further, the smallest character of the character strings forming the title characters of the play time start effect is larger than the largest character of the character strings forming the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach effect. By doing this, no matter which character you pay attention to, the title character of the play time start effect will be displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, so the time saving state B (play time) will be controlled. We can celebrate our blessings even more.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to time saving state B (play time), the title characters of the play time start performance are displayed in the play time start performance, and the display time of the title characters of the play time start performance corresponds to the super reach performance. It is longer than the display time of title characters. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach performance when it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the play time start performance is displayed in the time-saving state B ( Since the title character of the play time start effect is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, it is a blessing that the time saving state B (play time) is controlled. can do.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed until at least a part of the character strings are no longer displayed is the time that the character string that makes up the title letters that corresponds to the super reach effect is This is longer than the time from when a part of the character string is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed. By doing this, the time when the title letters of the play time start effect, which has the intention of blessing, can be clearly seen is longer than the time when the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect, whose purpose is to incite the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed. The game also lasts a long time, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the remaining number of times until the play time is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters composing the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is larger than the size of the characters composing the remaining number of times until play time characters. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the remaining number of play times until play time, so it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect. .

In addition, the super reach performance includes low base weak reach performances A and B, and low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The number of times character is displayed during the execution of the low base weak reach performances A and B, and is not displayed during the execution of the low base strong reach performances A to C. By doing this, in the low base weak reach A and B performances where the expectation of jackpot is low, the remaining number of times until play time is displayed, so it is possible to make you aware of the number of times until time saving state B (play time) On the other hand, in the low base strong reach A to C performances where the expectation of a jackpot is high, attention can be drawn to the contents of the performance by not displaying the characters of the number of times remaining until play time. In addition, in the time-saving state B (play time), since it is easier to win a jackpot which is more advantageous than in the normal state, the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated when the number of times remaining until the time-saving state B (play time) is small.

In addition, if the selection effect develops to the low base strong reach A to C effects without going through the low base weak reach effects A and B, the number of remaining times until play time will not be displayed even while the selection effect is being executed. By doing so, the number of remaining times until play time will not interfere with the selection performance in which the super reach performance that is higher than the low base strong reach A to C performance is determined by the number of characters remaining until play time, and the number of times remaining until time saving state B (play time). If there are few players, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated.

In addition, when it is announced that there will be a jackpot in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the character will not be displayed again for the remaining number of times until the play time and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and the low base strong reach A to C performances will be controlled. When it is reported that the player is out of the game, the number of remaining times until the play time is displayed again after the low base strong reach performances A to C are finished. By doing this, when it is announced that there will be a jackpot with the low base strong reach A to C effect, the remaining number of times until the play time will not be displayed again, and the number of times until the time saving state B (play time) will be reduced. To alleviate a player's sense of regret when the number of remaining games is small. In addition, if it is announced that you will lose in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the characters remaining until the play time will be displayed again after the low base strong reach effects A to C are finished, so the time saving state B ( If there are only a few times left until play time, it can be relieved quickly.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Further, in operation promotion effects A to D executed at timings related to the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the remaining number of times until the play time is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of times until play time characters. By doing this, the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed larger than the letters that make up the characters for the number of remaining times until play time, so you can draw attention to the operation promotion letters (small) and effectively It is possible to prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach performances A to C of the super reach performances, if the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed in the operation promotion performance A that is executed before the title display part, the play time The characters for the number of times remaining until play time are displayed at the same time, but when displaying the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion effect D that is executed at the end of the introduction part, the characters for the number of times remaining until play time are not displayed. . By doing this, before the development of the low base strong reach A to C effect, the promotion text display operation promotion text (small) and the number of remaining times until the play time remain displayed at the same time, the time is saved. It is possible to make the player aware of the number of times until B (play time), and by not displaying the remaining number of times until play time in the operation promotion letters (small) in the introduction part, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot will be announced. It can draw attention.

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach A to C effects, the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part is more advantageous than the operation promotion text (small) and the operation promotion text (small). Of the operation promotion letters (large) that are suggested, only the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed, while in the operation promotion effect D executed at the end of the introduction part, the operation promotion letters (small) are also displayed (large). ) can also be displayed, and when the operation promotion letters (large) are displayed in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the remaining number of times until play time letters are not displayed at the same time. By doing so, in addition to whether or not a jackpot will be announced, operation promotion characters (large) are displayed to draw attention to the fact that a more advantageous situation is suggested.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems), and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part of the super reach performance. In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Further, after it is announced that there will be a jackpot due to the super reach performance, title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the remaining number of times until the play time is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). Before displaying the title characters for the jackpot start performance, the characters for the remaining number of times until play time are erased, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start performance is changed to the number of times remaining until play time. larger than the size of the characters that make it up. By doing this, the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is the situation after the jackpot has already been announced, and the remaining number of characters until play time is unnecessary, so the jackpot start effect is displayed. Before displaying the title characters, the remaining number of play time characters are erased, and the characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the remaining number of play time characters. Therefore, you can congratulate yourself on being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, regardless of the number of times remaining until time saving state B (play time), the size of the characters that make up the remaining number of times until play time is the same, and the size of the letters that make up the title letters of the jackpot start effect is the same. The size of the characters is larger than the size of the characters forming the remaining number of times until play time character. By doing this, no matter what number of times remain until time saving state B (play time)), the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect will make up the characters that make up the remaining number of times until play time. Since it is displayed larger than the text, you can congratulate yourself on being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state B (play time) in the variable display caused by the game ball entering the first starting prize opening and the second starting winning opening in the time saving state B (playing time). A variable display is performed using the time saving B start variation pattern which has a longer variation time than the variation pattern normally used. By doing so, it is possible to execute the play time start performance in the variation period according to the time saving B start variation pattern in the first variation in the time saving state B (play time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems), and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part of the super reach performance. In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, it is possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach effects A and B from white to red or gold and display them. When changing the title characters from white to red or gold in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the time when the title characters are displayed in red or gold is longer. To display title characters in white for longer than the time they are displayed. By doing this, when changing the title characters from white to red or gold in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, the red or gold color, that is, the changed color Since the title characters are displayed longer than the title characters in the white mode, that is, in the mode before the change, it is possible to reliably recognize that the color has changed from white to red or gold.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, there are cases where the title characters change from white to red or gold, and cases where they do not change from white to white. When changing the color from white to red or gold, when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, the white color is changed to red or gold, a specific sound is output, and the title characters are changed to white. If the mode remains unchanged, when the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, the white mode remains unchanged and the specific sound is output. By doing this, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from white to red or gold at a specific timing, a specific sound is output, and at the same time, the title characters change from white to red or gold at a specific timing. Since the specific sound is output even when the mode remains unchanged, it is possible to expect that the mode will change to red or gold due to the output of the specific sound.

In addition, when changing the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects from a white aspect to another aspect, a specific sound is also used when changing to a red aspect or a gold aspect. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which type of mode changes when the specific sound is output.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are changed from white to red, or gold to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the red color. is possible. In the title display part of low base weak reach A and B productions, in any case where the title characters are changed from white to red or gold, the display becomes common from the white format. The image is displayed in such a manner that the color changes to a red color or a gold color. By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters can be changed from white to red, or from white to gold. , since the display mode is changed to the common display mode and then changed to the red mode or the gold mode, by changing from the white mode to the common display mode, the common display mode changes to the red mode or the gold mode. Until the end, you can expect the game to change to the gold color mode, which has higher jackpot expectations than the red color mode.

Moreover, a common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title characters are made to shine, and when the light is clear, the display mode changes to a red mode or a golden mode. By doing so, the characters constituting the title characters can be illuminated to encourage the characters to change to a red color or a gold color.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, the production control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table for the common title display part (common title for the weak reach system) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B production. ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach system weak reach A introduction). In the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B performance (weak reach type weak reach B introduction). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for the two different super reach effects, thereby preventing increases in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part is different from each other. By using the corresponding brightness data table, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until notification of whether or not there is a jackpot, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach performances A and B, and the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. . In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, the production control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table for the common title display part (common title for the weak reach system) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B production. ) to control the game effect lamp 9, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach system common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, the brightness data for the low base weak reach A performance is The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the table (weak reach type weak reach A introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach type weak reach B In the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A performance (strong reach system strong reach A introduction). 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B effect (strong reach type strong reach B introduction), and the low base strong reach B effect is controlled. In the introduction part of the reach C performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C performance (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part can be shared for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase in luminance data tables and using luminance data tables corresponding to each introduction part, it is possible to suitably increase the period until it is announced whether or not it is a jackpot, and as a result, a suitable title can be created. Can be displayed.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to control the low base weak reach A, B performances, the low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances. It is possible to perform a low-base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the performance. Low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the production result is announced. It consists of each. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, the production control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table for the common title display part (common title for the weak reach system) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B production. ) to control the game effect lamp 9, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach system common title), and in the title display part for the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the low base strongest reach effect is controlled. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table (strongest reach title for the strongest reach system), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, the brightness data table for the low base weak reach A performance (weak reach system weak title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. In the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach type weak reach B introduction). The effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A performance (strong reach type strong reach A introduction), and the low base strong reach A performance is controlled. In the introduction part of the base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B effect (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), and the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect. In , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C effect (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the low base strongest reach effect is controlled. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table (strongest reach system, strongest reach introduced). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part can be shared for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase in luminance data tables and using luminance data tables corresponding to each introduction part, it is possible to suitably increase the period until it is announced whether or not it is a jackpot, and as a result, a suitable title can be created. Can be displayed. Furthermore, the low-based strongest reach effect, which is the most expected, is provided with dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introduction part, respectively, to increase interest, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are changed from white to red, or gold to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the red color. is possible. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, when the color of the title characters is not changed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 creates a brightness data table in which brightness data for when the title change performance is not performed: When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach system common title (white) and changing the color of the title letters to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, use the title change effect. Brightness data table with brightness data set when performing: Control the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach common title (red) or the weak reach common title (gold) to perform low base weak reach A and B effects Regardless of whether or not the color of the title characters is changed in the introduction part, the game effect lamp is set using the brightness data table for the common introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction). Control 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, whether the title characters are not changed to red or gold or changed to the second mode, the luminance data corresponding to the introduction part can be used. By using a common table, we can prevent an increase in cost and capacity, and by using brightness data tables corresponding to each title display part, we can change the color of the title character from red or gold to red or gold. In the case where the title is changed to , each can be suitably produced, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). In addition, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects is the title start period from when the title characters start displaying until they are displayed in the fixed position, and the title after the title characters are displayed in the fixed position. In the title start period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 creates a brightness data table (which defines a light emitting pattern specific to the title start period), including a display period and a title end period. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach title start), and during the title display period and title end period, a brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title display period is used. to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the regular position in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title character are displayed at the regular position. By using the brightness data tables corresponding to the title display period and the title end period after the title is displayed, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part, an advantageous state can be obtained during the period in which title characters are displayed. It is possible to suitably lengthen the period until it is announced whether or not the title is displayed, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, a brightness data table corresponding to the title start period, or a brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period. By making one of them a common brightness data table and the other a separate brightness data table with individual contents, the brightness data table corresponds to the title start period, or the title display period and title end period. By using a common brightness data table for one side, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using a brightness data table that corresponds to each of the other brightness data tables, it is possible to determine whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect. Depending on whether the title is a presentation or not, the presentation can be performed appropriately, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

In addition, in a gaming machine that has multiple game states, it is possible to increase the efficiency of the number of fluctuations in a specific game state by shortening the fluctuation display time or varying the time until the next fluctuation display starts. I can think of a machine. In this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestive effect that suggests which gaming state the game state is, a variable time suggestive effect that indicates the variable time to be executed, or the like. The specific control will be explained below.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electroluminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 13). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 13), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 12), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 13).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 13).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of performance, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various performances (performances that notify the progress of the game or make the game more exciting) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 13, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, An I/O (Input/Output port) 105 is provided.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 15 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The production control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transferred from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 15 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the presentation content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 17 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 18, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 152F)
Next, the characteristic portion 152F of this embodiment will be explained. Regarding the feature section 152F, a technique aimed at a pachinko gaming machine in which setting means can set setting values having different advantages for players, such as the probability of winning a jackpot, will be described below. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player as the setting value of the jackpot winning probability. .

First, the setting values will be explained. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the setting value by a setting change operation performed by a person on the gaming parlor side (such as a clerk at the gaming parlor) using an operating means such as a predetermined switch. It is said to be composed of

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) executes a setting change process that allows changing the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, a setting change process is executed that allows the jackpot winning probability to be changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting values are, for example, comprised of six levels (multiple levels) from 1 to 6, and the probability of winning the jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage is in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. It increases in stages. It should be noted that the set value may be set in multiple stages, and is not limited to six stages. In this way, as the probability of winning the jackpot can be changed, the ball release rate (number of balls played per unit time (number of prize balls)) will change, so changing the setting value will change the ball release rate. It can also be said that it is something to do.

For example, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Among the six levels of setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 are called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

Further, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting the setting value 1 to setting value 6, similarly to the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similar to the jackpot winning probability. The selection probability of the variable pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similarly to the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding the characteristic part 152F, in a pachinko game machine in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is In some cases, a hold series in which hold information determined to be controlled (win) is executed is stored. Specifically, the pending connection means that among the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred, there is pending information that will become a hit in the future, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred Refers to consecutive wins within the range of pending information in which the next winning occurs consecutively within the range of . In addition, in the case of a small win, it becomes a jackpot via a small win based on the occurrence of a V winning, so it can be said that the pending information of a small win is the pending storage information of a win that will become a jackpot in the future. When such a pending series is executed, a notification effect that notifies that the series is on hold may be executed.

FIG. 19-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 152F, the reference numerals and descriptions of the same components as in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 will be omitted, and the different parts will be described.

In the game area where the game ball that has been hit can flow down, the first path of the flow paths along which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game ball is flown down. A second path different from the first path among the downstream paths along which the balls flow down is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. The first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the left side of the game area, so it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area, so it may be called a right-handed route.

Note that the first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left gaming area and the right gaming area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the gaming nails within the gaming area.

When the game ball that is fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area in response to the operation of the ball operation handle 30 is guided to the left game area, it is guided, for example, along the array of game nails. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the right gaming area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area because it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A in which a first starting winning opening is formed is provided as a structure into which the game balls that have been distributed can enter the left gaming area of the gaming area. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning hole.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V judgment winning device 87 are provided as structures into which the game balls that are divided into the right game area of the gaming area can enter. The variable prize winning ball device 6B has a second starting prize opening into which game balls can be won. In addition, as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered each, a gate switch 21 is installed inside the passage gate 41, a second starting opening switch 22B is installed inside the second starting winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87 is installed. Inside, a V winning switch 87a, a V judgment winning switch 15a, and a V judgment discharge switch 15b are provided, respectively.

In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure through which game balls can enter (pass through). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for determining the V winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a jackpot when a small hit occurs.

The V judgment prize winning device 87 is formed of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually check the game ball passing through the inside. The V judgment winning device 87 has a width at the top that allows the game ball to pass in the front and back direction, and walls on both sides (the front side and the back side) of the passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right direction. A guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, when a small hit occurs, a signal is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 open periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second). By repeating opening and closing, an operating opening is formed as an opening through which a total of about 10 or more game balls can be won within a predetermined period of time when the opening is open. The path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball so as to protrude alternately on both sides of the wall, so that when hitting right-handed, , A structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly is formed in the passage above the operation opening on the upper part of the V judgment winning device 87.

In the small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Opening control is executed. In the V judgment winning device 87, the portion of the guideway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guideway, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guideway and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens in the guideway, so the game ball guided to the guideway can fall from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (operating port), a V-winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a winning region where the game ball that enters from the operating port can win. Further, a ramp is provided for guiding all of the game balls entering from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide the gaming ball that has entered from the V winning opening downward.

A plate-shaped opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided at the top end of the winning hole (V winning hole) of the V winning area 870. There is. The opening/closing member is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. In the state where the V winning hole is opened depending on the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is in a state where it can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. The ball is placed in a state where it can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small winning game state in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, one game ball is When entering the V winning area 870 and winning a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a provided in the V winning area 870. In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 from then on will be inside the winning ball area. will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 is detected by the V winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V judgment winning switch 87a and the V judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V judgment winning device 87, which is opened in the small winning game state, closes its operating port and the game ball enters. considered to be an impossible situation. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the bottom, and the gaming balls that have passed through the merged discharge passage and entered the V judgment winning device 87 are placed in a predetermined position inside the game board 2. It is discharged into the discharge channel. The discharge path is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect the game balls to be discharged, and all the game balls to be discharged are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. , the conditions for generating a jackpot are satisfied, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The winning of a game ball in such a V winning area 870 is called a V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as mentioned above, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 game balls can be collected on average without requiring any special operation. The structure and control design are such that the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, the game ball is always (100%) in the V winning area. The structure is designed to enter 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-hitting promotion notification that instructs the player to hit the right-hand ball is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. Ru.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87, and unless the player hits the ball left-handed, the player must hit right-handed. In this case, the game ball will definitely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the V judgment winning device 87 was provided with a structure for decelerating the game ball. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operating port that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operating port is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to cause a game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that it may be arranged so that there is a possibility that the game balls hit into the left gaming area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of playability, It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls that are distributed into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the gaming area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nails.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a big winning opening covered by a rectangular door on the front, and when a jackpot occurs, the door is tilted forward about the bottom by a solenoid, and the big winning opening appears ( open). A count switch 23 is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 to detect the game ball that has entered. A winning route is set to the special variable winning ball device 7 using a game nail or other structure so that the game ball can enter the grand prize opening only when the game ball is hit into the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that it may be arranged so that a prize can be won in the big winning hole regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Occurs in When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the first starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is drawn and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the second starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B.

A jackpot also occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 while the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small winning gaming state. Hereinafter, the game ball entering the V winning area 870 and being detected by the V winning switch 87a will be referred to as a V winning. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value imparting, and a jackpot can occur on the condition of a V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a gaming state in which the operating port is opened is called a "small winning gaming state." Then, in the small hit game state, a jackpot that occurs based on the game ball winning a V prize is called a "jackpot via a small win." On the other hand, a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as "jackpot by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player as a predetermined value imparting, and a repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeated continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning hole is open) is called a round. Repeated continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is set to the open state, a predetermined end condition of the open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the fulfillment of the opening termination condition (that is, the occurrence of winning balls). Then, when the release end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed when the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, when the game ball After passing (including winning) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole as the starting winning area, the start condition for the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is started based on the establishment of a state in which a jackpot game is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed, and when a variable display time (variable time) has elapsed, a display result (stopped pattern) is derived and displayed. Note that the game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been predetermined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning opening (winning a prize). It is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means to finally stop and display the symbol (an example of identification information) (determined display).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the starting conditions have not yet been met even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole, if the game ball has not yet started within the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information regarding variable displays for which conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "suspended storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been stored. Pending memory is also called starting memory or starting winnings memory.

Regarding the first special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the first pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole. Regarding the second special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the second pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole. If a jackpot occurs in a state where such first pending memory or second pending memory exists, the pending memory that existed before the jackpot occurrence will be maintained as it is, and the variable display will be displayed after the jackpot gaming state ends. used for.

When a second starting prize enters the second starting winning hole, even if there is a pending memory of the first starting winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning will be executed with priority. Ru. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is a second reserve consisting of four displays that display the number of valid winning balls that entered the second starting winning hole, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, a first reservation display 25A is provided which is made up of four indicators that display the effective number of winning balls that have entered the first starting prize opening, that is, the number of first reservation memories. . The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game ball in two ways: ``left-handed'' aiming at the left playing area, and ``right-handed hitting'' aiming at the right playing area. The game state and performance state are controlled so that a rich variety of games can be enjoyed. Below, the flow of the game after the player starts playing the game on the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

When a player takes a seat at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening by hitting the ball to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot due to the special symbol), the user switches from left-handed batting to right-handed batting and plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that is released. . After the jackpot game state ends, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to play the game by hitting right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, a game is performed in which the player aims at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by hitting the ball with the right hand. During the jackpot game state, right-handed hitting promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state ends, if the time saving state described later is reached, the player continues playing the game by hitting right. After the jackpot game is over, if the time saving state has been reached, a time saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the time saving state will start. Further, during the time saving state, a right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hitting promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends, and the game ball switches from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting and enters the first starting prize opening. Play the game as follows. In addition, if the time saving state does not occur, a left-handed playing promotion notification (also called left-handed playing notification) is made to be performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to switch back to left-handed playing and play the game. It's okay.

During the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the player plays the game by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole. When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole and the display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot due to a special symbol), the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting the right hand. In addition, if the game ball enters the second starting prize opening and the display result becomes a small hit display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 will be opened in the small winning gaming state, so the V judgment will be made while hitting the right hand. Aim for the winning device 87 and play the game. At the start of the small winning game state, a small winning start notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state is started. In addition, when controlled to a small winning gaming state, a specific timing (depending on the gaming situation, the start timing of the small winning display that is executed before the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the small winning) , or at a predetermined timing before the small win display is executed.), the right-hand hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is in an open state due to the small winning gaming state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V judgment winning device 87, enters the V winning region 870, and is detected. When a V-win occurs, a jackpot via a small hit occurs. When a V winning prize occurs, a V winning notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V winning prize has occurred. Further, when the small winning gaming state ends, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small hit ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 is released in the jackpot game state, so the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting right.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning gaming state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, the jackpot will occur. does not occur. In this way, when a V winning does not occur during the small winning game state, a V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Furthermore, at the end of the small winning gaming state, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small winning game state ends, while the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable prize winning ball device 6B while hitting right. When the time saving state ends, the player switches from right-handed to left-handed and plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening. At the end of the time saving state, time saving end notification to notify that the time saving has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and left-handed playing promotion notification to urge the player to return to left-handed playing and play the game.

FIG. 19-2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The winning type table shows, for each type of winning, the conditions for generating a jackpot, the control state (gaming state) after the jackpot, the number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the jackpot. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4 )R Time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the jackpot via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is released.

A small hit occurs when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (jackpot probability, small win probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out to a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball is entered into the operating port while the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), a jackpot occurs. do. A jackpot via such a small hit is called a jackpot via a small hit. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. It will be done. 16(15)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9(8)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a second small win. 5(4)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpots include a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot that occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, a jackpot occurs due to a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. This includes small wins and jackpots. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via small hit is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and is named a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous for the player in this embodiment includes opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

The symbol 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). For the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 16 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 15 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type. Via small hit 9 (8) R Time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) with the condition of V winning. It is. Via small hit 5 (4) R Time-saving jackpot: After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 5 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 4 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type.

Symbol 4R Time Saving The time saving state after the jackpot has two conditions: the second special symbol is displayed 1 time, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 5 times. Two end states are set: The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is determined by taking into account that the game balls that enter the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is that when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of generating a jackpot via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7. It is assumed that there is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is one time is set for the following reason. In the case of symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically the time-saving state (including electric support state) continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to display the second special symbol in a variable manner, It is necessary to hit the game ball to the right and enter the passage gate 41 to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, such a variable winning ball device It takes time to place the game ball in 6B, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed fluctuating is 5 times is that the jackpot can be achieved immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the condition for starting the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbols that are likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started due to the reserved memory based on the 1st starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state This is a condition for making it possible to reliably display batch fluctuations. By doing this, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from not being performed.

After a jackpot other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the end condition is that the second special symbol is displayed 7 times, and the total number of times that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11. Two end states are set: The number of times of seven times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 7 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot via a small hit will occur compared to the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot. This is the number of times that the number of cases becomes significantly higher. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is such that the jackpot occurs immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol starts due to the reserved memory based on the first starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state, the second special symbol 7 is likely to be determined as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the display of changes in the number of times of changes can be executed reliably. By doing this, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first starting prize opening is provided so that winnings can be won from the first route, so if the game ball flows down the first route, it will be easier to win from the second route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball were to fall. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so that the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a jackpot than when the game ball flows down.

In addition, the comparison is not limited to such advantages, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winnings or non-starting winnings)) are compared to the first route. and the second route, and in the low base state which is the normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning hole than the second route, and in the high base state, jackpot game state, and small In other states such as a winning game state, it is easier to win the variable winning slot on the second route than on the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second path.

FIG. 19-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 19-3, the type of random number, update range, purpose, and addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: This is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot and whether or not to win a small hit. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1: Jackpot type (type, symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Determine (any type of R time-saving jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the jackpots in the specific gaming state include symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and small hit. It includes multiple types of via 5(4)R time-saving jackpots. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number for determining a hit (random R), or when a determination is made as a small hit, based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a jackpot via a small hit, if a V-win does not occur, the determined jackpot will be invalidated. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the type of small win is determined, the small win symbol is determined at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining small winning symbols.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and using the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3), This fluctuation pattern is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve a reach, and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves a reach.

FIG. 19-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table, a second special figure hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 19-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. “Probability” shown in FIG. 19-4(A) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

FIG. 19-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special figure hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot and a small hit for the second special symbol, and a jackpot determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R are set. This is the table where The upper part of FIG. 19-4(B) is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part of FIG. 19-4(B) is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper part of Figure 19-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting a jackpot.The "probability" shown in the lower part of Figure 19-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of winning a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. Note that a small win may be provided in the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability due to the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a starting prize in the first starting winning hole (first starting winning) or a starting winning in the second starting winning hole (second starting winning), the CPU 103 activates the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. Extract the count value (random R). For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the first special symbol. decided on. Regarding the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the second special symbol. decided on. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is matched with any of the small hit judgment values. If they match, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Deciding to make a small win also means making a tentative decision to make a jackpot via a small win (described as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled by a jackpot unless a V win occurs during a small win). .

In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but if the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to shift to a small winning gaming state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol a small winning symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

FIGS. 19-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 19-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 19-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 19-4(C) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, including "Symbol 15R time-saving jackpot" and "Symbol 4R time-saving jackpot". A jackpot judgment value corresponding to each of these is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 19-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The jackpot type determination table via small hit in FIG. 19-4 (E) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, including "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and " Jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" are set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot type determination table via small hit are the 1st small hit (16 (15) R time-saving jackpot), the 2nd small hit (9 (8) R time-saving jackpot) This is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the 3rd small win (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalidated if a V win does not occur in the small win gaming state.

FIGS. 19-5 and 19-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In FIGS. 19-5 and 19-6, the relationship between specific command data for the production control command, the name of the command, and the specified contents of the command is shown. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 19-5 and 19-6, various performance control commands are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state.

The main commands in FIGS. 19-5 and 19-6 will be explained. Command 80XX(H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving the command 80XX(H), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance display device to start a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designation commands that indicate display results including loss display results, jackpot display results for each jackpot type, small win type, and small win display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start varying display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are win start designation commands that designate the start of a jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A1XX(H) is a command for specifying the opening of the big winning hole, which indicates that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a designation command after the opening of the big winning hole which indicates the opening (closure) of the big winning hole of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are win end designation commands that designate the end of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command A402 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies the first pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first pending storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second pending storage number designation command that specifies the second pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second pending storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when subtracting the number of pending memories, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a pending memory number designation command that specifies the number of pending memories after subtraction; however, the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories, a pending storage number subtraction designation command may be used to specify that the number of pending memories is to be subtracted by one.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small winning. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small winning. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning designation command that designates that there is a V winning. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) has been detected entering the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first reservation storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number is secured in the first pending storage buffer. The first pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second pending storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second pending storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second pending storage buffer. The second pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saves them in a storage area in the first holding storage buffer. Execute the process to (storage). Specifically, these random numerical values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first holding storage buffer based on the winning in the first starting winning opening. In addition, based on the winning in the second starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second holding storage buffer. Execute the process to save (storage) to. Specifically, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second holding storage buffer based on the winning in the second starting winning opening.

Storing information regarding the starting winnings in the pending storage buffer in this manner may be referred to as "being stored pending storage." In addition, the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the reservation memory buffer in advance, but are extracted at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. It may be extracted.

FIG. 19-7 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process in S101. In the starting port switch passage process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first starting port switch 22A is in the on state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not in the on state, the process moves to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first pending memory for counting the number of first pending memories). It is confirmed whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process moves to S1221.

If the first pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first pending memory counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reservation storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance the variation display result and variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected first special symbol's starting winning is subsequently executed at the starting winning (S1215).

In this embodiment, after a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as pending storage information, the start conditions for the variable display are set. If established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal processing (S110), the variable display result is determined for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for which the variable display is to be started based on the relevant pending storage information. The determination as to whether or not to be displayed as a jackpot display result and the jackpot type are determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111), the fluctuation pattern (including the determination of the fluctuation pattern type) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination value and the fluctuation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random values described above. Based on.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the variable display starts based on the starting winnings in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, specifically, the timing when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole. Or, at the timing when a starting prize is won in the second starting prize opening (the timing at which the pending memory information is stored), the pending memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the starting prize is pre-read, and based on the pre-read pending memory information. In this way, the determination of whether or not it will be a jackpot, the determination of whether or not it will be a small hit, the type of jackpot, and the type of fluctuation pattern are performed in advance by a jackpot set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. A winning presentation process is executed to pre-read and determine based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the fluctuation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the fluctuating display result in advance before the fluctuating display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the start winning time, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that foretells that there will be a jackpot (possibility of a jackpot).

Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1216), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first starting prize designation command to the production control CPU 120 (S1218), and sets the value of the first pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the first pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command, and the A set of four commands, including the first pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (S1221). If the second starting port switch 22B is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending memory for counting the number of second pending memories). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1222). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is immediately terminated.

If the second pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second pending memory counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reservation storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 regarding the starting winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1226), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second starting prize designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and sets the value of the second pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the second pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when a starting prize to the second starting winning hole occurs, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a second starting winning designation command, A set of four commands, including the second pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 19-8 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing (S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer in S51, processing for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command (S80) is performed, and then the processing ends. On the other hand, when there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is pending memory data in the second pending memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A will be displayed depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A based on the pending memory data stored in the first pending memory buffer. be exposed. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B based on the pending memory data stored in the second pending memory buffer. will be held.

Through the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data in the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. Store it in the random number buffer of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second pending storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. Additionally, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command for specifying the number of reserved memories indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (S59 ). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, data indicating "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first starting winning hole, that is, "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first special symbol. , or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed targeting the second starting prize opening, that is, data indicating "second" indicating executing the process targeting the second special symbol. , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the same can be used for both the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the starting port switch passing process or S1224 of the starting port switch passing process and stored in the pending storage buffer or the random number buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small hit determination value with a random number for jackpot determination, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or small hit. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process and a small hit determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 19-4 (A), then the second special symbol will match any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 19-4 (B). If it matches the judgment value, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not to make it a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped symbol on the special symbol display a jackpot symbol. .

If it is determined in S61 that it is a jackpot (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 19-4(C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 19-4 (D) (S74). , proceed to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type. It is determined (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

In addition, if the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is the data indicating "second". By checking whether or not there is, it is checked whether the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (it is a variable display of the first special symbol), the process advances to S82, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (fluctuating display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol in FIG. 19-4 (B) Using the determination table, a small hit determination process is performed by determining whether or not the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values (S77). That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 19-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that the second special symbol will be a small hit. do. If it is determined to be a small win (S77Y), a small win flag indicating that it is a small win is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via jackpot type determination table in Figure 19-4 (E) (S79), and select the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area. The jackpot type corresponding to the value matching is determined as the jackpot type via small hit (S80). Then, the process moves to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process moves to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating 16 (15) R time saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving jackpot via small hit are V winnings in the small winning gaming state. If this does not occur, the jackpot will not occur and there will be invalid data, which will be provisionally set.

In S82, a stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is a losing symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the small hit flag is set, one of "1", "5", and "9", which is a small winning symbol according to the small winning type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol. do. If the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot symbol according to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 19-9 is a flowchart showing the small win release preprocessing (S118). In the small winning opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small winning, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small winning start designation command indicating that a small winning game state is started to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judgment winning number counter as a counting means in order to use the number of winnings in the V winning area 870 in the small winning open state as the condition for ending the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is set to "10", and settings are made to count down the number of V winning prizes. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 19-10 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit release process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit release control timer by -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is checked whether the count value of the V judgment winnings counter that counts the number of V winnings is "0" (S431). The V judgment winning balls counter is set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 19-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the counted value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning prize counter is "0" in S430, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is checked whether the small hit release control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit release control timer has timed out in S432, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit release control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is brought into the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 in accordance with the timed value of the small win release control timer based on the opening mode of the small win. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not a V winning that occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 which is in an open state inside the V judgment winning device 87 from the V winning opening is detected, It is determined whether the switch 87a is in the on state (S434). When it is in the ON state in S434, it means that a V winning prize is detected, and a V winning flag that is set when a V winning prize is detected is set (S435). Then, processing for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). Thereby, the production control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning hole in the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 wins a V-win, the V-winning opening in the V-winning area 870 is closed, and after that, the game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not in the on state in S434, it is the time when the V winning prize is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V judgment winning switch 15a is in the on state (S438). If it is in the on state in S438, the process advances to S439, and if it is not in the on state in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V judgment winning ball counter, which was set to ``10'' in S413 of FIG. The following processing is performed (S440). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and the game that has entered the judgment winning device 87 It becomes possible to recognize the number of balls.

When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is "0" in S431, it is the time when the small winning opening end condition is satisfied because the small winning V winning number reaches the upper limit value, and, When the small win release control timer times out in S432, the small win release control is completed and the small win release end condition is satisfied. At these times, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 22, and closes the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small winning, the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter becomes "0". The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small win release control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed in accordance with the end of the small win release control in the small win release mode.

Next, data corresponding to a specific period that is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process (S442). The value is updated to the value corresponding to step S120) (S443), and the process ends. As a result, time measurement for a specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed, is started. In addition, by setting the specific period that is the V winning prize validity period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning prize area later than the normal time for some reason, the game ball can be detected. Further, since a specific period is set, even if someone attempts to enter the V winning area illegally, only that period will be detected, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 19-11 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the small winning post-end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning prize validity period timer by -1 (S441), and checks whether the V winning prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

If the V winning valid period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 when a V winning is already detected has been set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a It is determined whether or not it is in the on state (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, it means that a V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that a V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, processing for transmitting the V winning prize designation command is performed (S446), and the processing ends. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that a V winning prize has occurred.

When the V prize validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small winning end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that it is a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small winning game state, if you play right-handed in accordance with the right-handed hitting promotion notification described later, you can make the game ball enter the V judgment winning device 87 with approximately 100% probability, and you will receive a V judgment winning prize. Based on the fact that the game ball that enters the device 87 always makes a V win in the V win area 870, the V win flag is set with approximately 100% probability (S435 in FIG. 19-10). A jackpot flag is set and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot is officially won due to the occurrence of the V winning. is formally stored (S450). Then, the time saving flag that was set at that point is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, jackpot start 4 designation command, or jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state has started. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Also, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, depending on the type of jackpot, the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval. Open pattern data indicating the opening mode such as time (big winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Among such data, data on the number of openings is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small winning gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot game state will not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win does not occur in the small winning gaming state, the state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state.

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 02TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 02TM will be explained using FIGS. 20-1 to 20-66.
In this embodiment, it is possible to update the count value (big hit occurrence count value) in response to being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.
In addition, when this count value exceeds a predetermined value (more than the mode switching judgment value (in this example, "3")), the variable display period will be changed if this count value does not exceed the predetermined value (mode switching judgment value (in this example)). In this example, it is possible to make the variable display period shorter than "3")).
Further, the performance control CPU 120 can display a specific display (jackpot count display) regarding the relationship between this count value and a predetermined value on the image display device 5.

[Decorative designs, small designs]
Each effect pattern (decoration pattern, small pattern) in this embodiment will be explained in detail.

<Decoration pattern>
In this embodiment, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, decorations as decoration identification information of multiple types different from the special symbols are displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. A variable display of symbols is performed. The decorative pattern in this embodiment is composed of a numerical pattern indicating a number or the like.

In this embodiment, the decorative pattern including a number pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers "1" to "7", for example, a decorative pattern including the numbers "1" to "7". .

In addition, in this embodiment, among the decorative patterns, even numbered patterns (numbered patterns corresponding to the numbers "2", "4", and "6") are in blue mode (in this example, the decorative patterns indicated by blue numbers). ), and among the decorative patterns, odd-numbered designs excluding the number "7" (numbered designs corresponding to the numbers "1", "3", and "5") are shown in red (in this example, they are indicated by red numbers). Among the decorative patterns, the odd numbered design with the number "7" (the numbered design corresponding to the number "7") is a golden pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern indicated by the golden number). .

(Confirmed decorative pattern)
In this embodiment, the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game is started in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5 as effects executed according to the progress of the game. In response to this, variable display of decorative patterns is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a confirmed special symbol) is stopped/displayed/determined in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, a pattern alignment effect is executed, resulting in a variable display of decorative patterns. The determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

In this embodiment, the types of confirmed decorative symbols are changed depending on the display result and jackpot type (see FIGS. 20-3 and 20-4). In this embodiment, the types of missed symbols, even symbols, and odd symbols are set as the determined decorative symbols.

<Small design>
In the present embodiment, a symbol that is smaller than a decorative symbol and that is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5 and that indicates whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special symbol is referred to as a small symbol. to be called. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stationary display of the small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stationary display of the special symbols. Then, from the left, the area at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are variably displayed and statically displayed are a small symbol display area 5l, a small symbol display area 5c, and a small symbol display area 5r. The upper left area of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small symbols corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in a variable and static manner is also the same as the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

The display areas of the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are smaller than those of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than that of the decorative pattern.

[Active display, pending display, number of pending memories]
In this embodiment, a first pending display area 02TM01E is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and the first pending display area 02TM01E is provided to display the first pending storage number (0 to 4 first pending displays 02TM01). At the lower right of the screen of the device 5, a second reservation display area 02TM02E is provided that displays the number of second reservations stored (0 to 4 second reservation displays 02TM02). In addition, at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, active display 02TM03 is displayed, which is information corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols being executed, and also information corresponding to the variable display of special symbols being executed. An active display area 02TM03E is provided.

Note that a first pending memory number display area for displaying the first pending memory number may be provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first pending display area 02TM01E), and (above the second pending display area 02TM02E), a second pending storage number display area 02TM06E may be provided to display the second pending storage number.

Here, the first pending display area 02TM01E displays a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the first pending memory number, and the second pending display area 02TM02E displays a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the second pending memory number. A number object (a round image) is displayed.

[Time saving state]
In this embodiment, in the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In this embodiment, the time saving state is (A) that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times, (B) that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state, or (C) that the state is controlled to be a small win game state of a specific type. The process continues until any one of the termination conditions is met first, such as the following. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction).

In this embodiment, as the types of time saving states, a time saving state and b time saving state are provided. In the a time saving state, (A) the special symbol game with the second special symbol has been executed 10,000 times, (B) the state has been controlled to a jackpot game state, and (C) it corresponds to the normal small win described later. The game ends when any one of the end conditions for controlling the small winning game state is satisfied.

In addition, in the b time saving state, when either one of the ending conditions is satisfied: (A) the special symbol game of the second special symbol has been executed 10,000 times, or (B) the jackpot game state has been controlled. ends at In the time saving state b, unlike the time saving state a, (C) being controlled to the small winning game state corresponding to the normal small winning is not the end condition (see Figure 20-21 (3) No. 3-1) .

[Win type table]
FIG. 20-1 is a diagram showing a hit type table. Among the hit type tables, FIG. 20-1 (1) is a diagram showing a jackpot type table, and FIG. 20-1 (2) is a diagram showing a jackpot type table via small hit. The hit type table shows, for each type of jackpot, jackpot generation conditions, control status (gaming status) after the jackpot, number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), and opening time of each round in the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the jackpot types include "Symbol 3R normal jackpot", "Symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot", "Symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot", "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit", "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit". It is provided.

A small hit occurs when the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small hit occurs, it becomes a small win game state, and there is an opening pattern where the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 0.04 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "first opening pattern"), and a pattern where the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.04 seconds. The operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in any of the opening patterns with an opening time of 0.1 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "second opening pattern").

In a small win, a prize ball is paid out to a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball is entered into the operating port while the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), a jackpot occurs. do. A jackpot via such a small hit is called a jackpot via a small hit. The jackpot via small hit includes "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit" and "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" which have different opening patterns of the V judgment winning device 87.

In this embodiment, for the small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit", the opening pattern of the V judgment winning device 87 is the first opening pattern, and the game ball is made to win the V judgment winning device 87. It is extremely difficult to do so, and it cannot be expected to generate a jackpot. In addition, if it is not possible to win a V prize in this small win that occurred while being controlled to the a time saving state, after the small win ends, the control is not controlled to the a time saving state but to the normal state (Fig. 20-24). Therefore, the small win corresponding to this "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" is a small win that is substantially controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state. Hereinafter, this small hit will be appropriately referred to as a "normal small hit", a "falling small hit", or a "first small hit".

In addition, in this embodiment, for the small hit corresponding to "10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small hit", the opening pattern of the V judgment winning device 87 is the second opening pattern, and the game ball is sent to the V judgment winning device 87. It is extremely easy to win a prize, and you can expect to win a jackpot. Further, if it is possible to win a V prize in this small win that occurs while the control is in the a time saving state, the control is performed in the a time saving state after the jackpot corresponding to the small win ends. Therefore, the small win corresponding to this "10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small win" will essentially be a small win that will be controlled to be in the time saving state the next time as well. Hereinafter, this small win will be appropriately referred to as a "time-saving small win," "continuous small win," or "second small win."

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpots include "symbol 3R normal jackpot", "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot", and "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" that occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the jackpot includes a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a small hit that occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. This includes jackpots via small wins that occur due to V winnings.

As shown in FIG. 20-1 (1), the "symbol 3R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened three times (3R). The gaming state controlled after the "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" is the normal state.

Moreover, the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). The gaming state controlled after the "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot" is the time saving state a.

The time-saving state is based on the above-mentioned termination conditions: the second special symbol is displayed 10,000 times, and the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 10,004 times. Two end states are set: a condition (not shown). The number of times the second special symbol is variable and displayed 10,000 times, which is the end condition for the time-saving state, is that when a "time-saving small hit" occurs, the game ball that enters the V judgment winning device 87 is approximately 100% This is set in consideration of entering the V winning area 870 at a rate of . In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of approximately 1/41.1. Therefore, the end condition of the time saving state that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 10,000 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility that a small hit will occur at a rate of about 100%. This is a certain number of times, and the next small win is essentially determined. However, in this embodiment where there are "normal small hits" and "time saving small hits" as small hits that occur in the time saving state, if the "normal small hits" occur, a jackpot will occur. Instead, it will be controlled to normal state.

Moreover, the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). The gaming state controlled after the "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot" is the time saving state b.

The b time-saving state after "Symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" is based on the above-mentioned ending conditions that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 10,000 times, and the number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Two termination states are set, including a termination condition (not shown) in which the total number of times is 10,004. The number of times the second special symbol is variable and displayed 10,000 times, which is the end condition of the time-saving state, is approximately 100% when the game ball enters the V judgment winning device 87 when a "time-saving small hit" occurs. This is set in consideration of entering the V winning area 870 at a rate of . In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of approximately 1/41.1. Therefore, the end condition of the b time saving state that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 10,000 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility that a small hit will occur at a rate of about 100%. This is a certain number of times, and the next small win is essentially determined. However, in this embodiment, there are two types of small hits that occur in the time-saving state: a "normal small win" and a "time-saving small win." Even if a "normal small win" occurs, the jackpot does not occur. This does not occur and the control is continued to the b time saving state. Therefore, the time saving state b is a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed until the "time saving small hit" is actually won, and the jackpot is generated via the small winning at a rate of about 100%, and the The next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

As shown in Figure 20-1 (2), the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit" is made after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.04 seconds x 1 time), and the V winning is the condition. This is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 9 times (9R) for a total of 10 times (10R). In addition, in the "10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small hit", after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 9 times (9R) with the condition of V winning, for a total of 10 This is a jackpot that will be opened 10 times (10R). These time-saving jackpots via small hits are opened by the winning device for one round, but the actual number of openings of the big winning hole is 10 times, and the player has to be aware of the symbol 10R time-saving jackpot when opening the big winning hole. I feel like it's the same or similar type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first starting prize opening is provided so that winnings can be won from the first route, so if the game ball flows down the first route, it will be easier to win from the second route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball were to fall. In addition, in a special state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment prize winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so if the game ball flows down the second route, it is better to enter the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a jackpot than when the game ball flows down.

In addition, the comparison is not limited to such advantageousness, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winnings or non-starting winnings)) are the first. It is provided in the route and the second route, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning hole than the second route, and in the high base state, jackpot game state, and In other states such as a small winning gaming state, it is easier to win the variable winning slot on the second route than on the first route, and from other viewpoints, the first route is used as the gaming medium in the normal state. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second route, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second route.

[Random value]
FIG. 20-2(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 20-2(A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR2 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of a random number MR3, a random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and a random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable.

Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Note that although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 20-2(A), the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these The range of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in the variable display of special symbols, normal symbols, etc. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns serving as modes are stored.

[Display result judgment table]
FIG. 20-2(B) ((B1) and (B2)) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol and a display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 20-2 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table [for the first special symbol]. [For the first special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for making a jackpot determination and a small hit determination for the first special symbol, and includes a jackpot determination value that is compared with the random number MR1, and a small hit determination. This is a table in which values are set. In FIG. 20-2 (B1), the upper part is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (proportion) of a small hit.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/319.7. Further, the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/200.

FIG. 20-2 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table [for second special symbol]. [For the second special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for making a jackpot determination and a small hit determination for the second special symbol, and includes a jackpot determination value that is compared with the random number MR1, and a small hit determination. This is a table in which values are set. In FIG. 20-2 (B2), the upper part is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (proportion) of a small hit.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/319.7. Further, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/41.1.

In this embodiment, an example in which a small hit is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this form. You may adopt the structure which provides a hit. For example, while the second special symbol is provided with a small win, the first special symbol may not be provided with a small win.

When the CPU 103 detects a starting prize in the first starting winning hole (first starting winning) or a starting winning in the second starting winning hole (second starting winning), the CPU 103 activates the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined timing. The count value (random value MR1) is extracted.

For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the first special symbol is Decided to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the [1st special symbol use] display result judgment table, and if the extracted value does not match any of the small hit judgment values. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the first special symbol will be a small hit.

For the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the second special symbol is Decided to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value does not match any of the small hit judgment values. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Deciding to make a small win also means making a tentative decision to make a jackpot via a small win (described as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled by a jackpot unless a V win occurs during a small win). .

In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but if the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. In addition, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to shift to a small winning gaming state, but the stop symbol due to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It also means deciding whether to use the winning symbol or not.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIGS. 20-3 and 20-4 are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table and the small hit via jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 20-3 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the gaming state is the normal state, and a jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when the gaming state is the normal state. This is a small hit via jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of the small hit via jackpot when it is determined.

Figure 20-4 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined when the gaming state is a time saving state and b time saving state, and a jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when the gaming state is a time saving state and b time saving state. and b is a small hit via jackpot type determination table used to determine the small hit via jackpot type of a small hit via small hit when it is determined to be a small hit when in the time saving state.

These jackpot type determination tables and the jackpot type determination table via small hit include the number of times of time-saving control to be executed after each jackpot and the type of confirmed decorative pattern corresponding to each jackpot type (jackpot type via small hit). and a jackpot determination value, which is a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

<Normal state jackpot type determination table>
Figure 20-3 (A1) shows the jackpot type [for the first special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state. This is a judgment table. Figure 20-3 (A2) shows the jackpot type [for second special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol when the gaming state is in the normal state. "Judgment Table".

([For 1st special symbol] Jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] in FIG. 20-3 (A1) contains numerical values to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, including "symbol 3R normal jackpot" and "symbol 3R normal jackpot". Jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "10Ra time saving jackpot" and "symbol 10Rb time saving jackpot" are set.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], out of the range of determination values for MR2 from 0 to 299, from 0 to 119 (40%) is the "symbol 3R normal jackpot" and from 120 to 239. (40%) is assigned to the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" and 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot".

Further, FIG. 20-3 (A1) also shows the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to each jackpot type. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 0 times for "symbol 3R normal jackpot", 10000 times for "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot", and 10000 times for "symbol 10Rb time saving jackpot".

Further, FIG. 20-3 (A1) also shows the types of confirmed decorative symbols corresponding to each jackpot type. In this example, the types of confirmed decorative symbols are: "Design 3R normal jackpot" is an even number symbol, "Design 10Ra time saving jackpot" is an odd number symbol excluding the number symbol "7", "Design 10Rb time saving jackpot" is a number symbol "7" ” is an odd numbered pattern.

([For 2nd special symbol] Jackpot type determination table)
The [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table in Figure 20-3 (A2) contains a numerical value that is compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and corresponds to the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot". A jackpot judgment value is set.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol], 0 to 299 (100%) of the determination value range of MR2 from 0 to 299 is assigned to "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot". .

Further, FIG. 20-3 (A2) also shows the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type. In this example, the "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot" has a time saving control number of 10,000 times.

Further, FIG. 20-3 (A2) also shows the types of confirmed decorative symbols corresponding to each jackpot type. In this example, the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is an odd-numbered pattern whose confirmed decorative pattern type is the numerical pattern "7".

<Jackpot type determination table via small hit in normal state>
FIG. 20-3 (B1) is used to determine the type of jackpot via small hit when a small hit is determined by the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state [first For special symbols] This is a small hit via jackpot type determination table. FIG. 20-3 (B2) is used to determine the type of jackpot via small hit when a small hit is determined by the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state. For special symbols] This is a small hit via jackpot type determination table.

([For 1st special symbol] Jackpot type determination table via small hit)
The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol in FIG. A jackpot judgment value corresponding to "time saving jackpot" is set.

In this example, in the [1st special symbol] jackpot type determination table via small hit, out of the judgment value range 0 to 299 of MR2, from 0 to 299 (100%) is "10Ra time saving jackpot via normal small hit". ” is assigned.

Further, FIG. 20-3 (B1) also shows the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type via small win. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10,000 times for "10Ra time saving jackpot via normal small hit".

Further, FIG. 20-3 (B1) also shows the types of confirmed decorative symbols corresponding to the types of jackpots via small wins. In this example, the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit" is a missed symbol of the type of confirmed decorative symbol. In this embodiment, if a V winning occurs when a "normal small win" occurs, the control is performed to the jackpot game state and then to the normal state (see FIG. 20-19).

([For 2nd special symbol] Jackpot type determination table via small hit)
The small hit jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. A jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "jackpot" and "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" is set.

In this example, in the [2nd special symbol] jackpot type determination table via small hit, out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 74 (25%) is ``10Ra time saving jackpot via normal small hit''. ”, 75 to 299 (75%) are allocated to “10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit”.

Further, FIG. 20-3 (B2) also shows the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type via small win. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10,000 times for "10Ra time saving jackpot via normal small hit" and 10,000 times for "10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small win".

Further, FIG. 20-3 (B2) also shows the types of confirmed decorative symbols corresponding to the types of jackpots via small wins. In this example, the type of confirmed decorative pattern is "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit" is a losing symbol or a special symbol described later, and "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" is an odd number symbol with the number pattern "7". It is a design.

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period when a jackpot or a jackpot via small hit occurs in the normal state is set to 0.1 seconds. Various performances performed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as fanfare performances.

Further, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs in the normal state is set to 0.1 seconds. Various performances performed during this small win fanfare period are referred to as small win fanfare performances.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds in any variation pattern of the variation display executed in the normal state (not shown).

<Jackpot type determination table for a time saving state and b time saving state>
Figure 20-4 (A1) shows the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol when the gaming state is the time saving state (a time saving state or b time saving state). It is. FIG. 20-4 (A2) is a jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol] when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol when the gaming state is the time saving state.

([For 1st special symbol] Jackpot type determination table)
The [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table in FIG. 20-4 (A1) contains numerical values to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, including "symbol 3Rb time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3Rb time-saving jackpot". A jackpot determination value corresponding to each of the "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is set.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], out of the range of determination values for MR2 from 0 to 299, from 0 to 239 (80%) is "symbol 3Rb time-saving jackpot" and from 240 to 299. (20%) is allocated to "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot".

Further, FIG. 20-4 (A1) also shows the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to each jackpot type. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10,000 times for "symbol 3Rb time saving jackpot" and 10,000 times for "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot".

Further, FIG. 20-4 (A1) also shows the types of confirmed decorative symbols corresponding to each jackpot type. In this example, the types of confirmed decorative symbols are ``Design 3Rb Time-saving jackpot'' is an odd-numbered symbol with the numerical symbol ``3'', and ``Design 10Ra Time-saving jackpot'' is an odd-numbered symbol with the numeric symbol ``7''.

As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A1), when the gaming state is in the time saving state (a time saving state or b time saving state) and the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, "symbol 3Rb time saving jackpot" Or, by being judged as one of the jackpot types of "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot", when the game state is in the time saving state and it is judged as a jackpot with the first special symbol, appropriate performance control can be performed. can.

Specifically, in this embodiment, if you win the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" at the first time, the next jackpot is virtually determined. A production that announces that a total of 3,000 prize balls will be awarded, including the prize balls (1,500 balls) and the prize balls (1,500 balls) for 10 rounds of the next jackpot that are virtually confirmed (3,000 notifications described later) The player is aware that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded (see FIG. 20-54).

In addition, if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is not executed for any reason even though it is controlled to be in the time-saving state, the problem that occurs during the period until the fluctuating display that won the first hit ends. A variable display of the suspended storage (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) of the first special symbol corresponding to the starting winning may be executed. Depending on the jackpot type of the jackpot (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "irregular special 1 jackpot") that occurs when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed at this time is determined to be a "jackpot" The number of prize balls awarded/scheduled to be awarded differs.

(A) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is “symbol 3Rb time-saving jackpot”,
(A1) Prize balls for the first 10 rounds (1500 balls)
(A2) Prize balls for 3 rounds of irregular special 1 jackpot (450 balls)
(A3) Prize balls for 10 rounds of the jackpot that is virtually confirmed next time in the b time-saving state controlled after the irregular special 1 jackpot (1500 balls)
It is virtually confirmed that a total of 3,450 prize balls will be awarded.

(B) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is “symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot”,
(B1) Prize balls for the first 10 rounds (1500 balls)
(B2) Irregular special 1 jackpot prize balls for 10 rounds (1500 pieces)
It is virtually confirmed that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded.

In addition, in the a-time saving state that is controlled after the irregular special 1 jackpot, the next jackpot is not substantially determined, so here (B3) 10 rounds worth of prize balls (1500 balls) will be awarded. is not assumed to be substantially certain.

In this embodiment, in which the player is made aware that a total of 3,000 prize balls will be awarded by the 3,000 notification performance at the time of the initial win, if an irregular special 1 jackpot occurs. Also, when the game state is in the time-saving state, when it is determined that the first special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined to be either "symbol 3Rb time-saving jackpot" or "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot". By doing this, it becomes possible to award more than 3,000 prize balls, and it is possible to avoid inconsistencies with the performance content of the 3,000 notification performance at the time of the first hit, and the point of the number of prize balls to be awarded. However, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too disadvantaged.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol when the gaming state is in a time-saving state (a-time-saving state or b-time-saving state), the jackpot type is not determined as "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot". .

(C) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is “symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot”,
(C1) Prize balls for the first 10 rounds (1500 balls)
(C2) Irregular special 1 jackpot prize balls for 10 rounds (1500 pieces)
(A3) Prize balls for 10 rounds of the jackpot that is virtually confirmed next time in the b time-saving state controlled after the irregular special 1 jackpot (1500 pieces)
It has been virtually confirmed that a total of 4,500 prize balls will be awarded, causing a contradiction to the presentation content of the 3,000 notification presentation at the time of the initial win, and also causing problems for players in terms of the number of prize balls awarded. Since this becomes excessively advantageous, "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" is not provided as a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol when the game state is a time-saving state.

([For 2nd special symbol] Jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol] in Figure 20-4 (A2) contains a numerical value that is compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and corresponds to the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot". A jackpot judgment value is set.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol], 0 to 299 (100%) of the determination value range of MR2 from 0 to 299 is assigned to "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot". .

Further, FIG. 20-4 (A2) also shows the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type. In this example, the "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot" has a time saving control number of 10,000 times.

Further, FIG. 20-4 (A2) also shows the types of confirmed decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot types. In this example, the "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is an odd-numbered pattern whose confirmed decorative pattern type is the numerical pattern "7".

<Jackpot type determination table via small hit in a time saving state and b time saving state>
Figure 20-4 (B1) shows the case where a small hit is determined by the first special symbol when the gaming state is in the time saving state (a time saving state, b time saving state) and the [for the first special symbol] small hit via This is a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 20-4 (B2) is a small hit via jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol] when a small win is determined by the second special symbol when the gaming state is the time saving state.

([For 1st special symbol] Jackpot type determination table via small hit)
The jackpot type determination table via small hit [for the first special symbol] in FIG. A jackpot judgment value corresponding to "time saving jackpot" is set.

In this example, in the [1st special symbol] jackpot type determination table via small hit, out of the judgment value range 0 to 299 of MR2, from 0 to 299 (100%) is "10Ra time saving jackpot via normal small hit". ” is assigned.

Further, FIG. 20-4 (B1) also shows the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type via small win. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10,000 times for "10Ra time saving jackpot via normal small hit".

Further, FIG. 20-4 (B1) also shows the types of confirmed decorative symbols corresponding to the types of jackpots via small wins. In this example, the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit" is a missed symbol of the type of confirmed decorative symbol.

([For 2nd special symbol] Jackpot type determination table via small hit)
The jackpot type determination table via small hit [for second special symbol] in FIG. Jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "time saving jackpot" and "10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small hit" are set.

In this example, in the [2nd special symbol] jackpot type determination table via small hit, out of the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 74 (25%) is ``10Ra time saving jackpot via normal small hit''. ”, 75 to 299 (75%) are allocated to “10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit”.

Further, FIG. 20-4 (B2) also shows the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type via small win. In this example, the number of times of time saving control is 10,000 times for "10Ra time saving jackpot via normal small hit" and 10,000 times for "10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small win".

Further, FIG. 20-4 (B2) also shows the types of confirmed decorative symbols corresponding to the types of jackpots via small wins. In this example, if the type of confirmed decorative pattern is "10Ra time saving jackpot via normal small hit", a time saving state is a losing symbol, and b time saving state is a special symbol (in this example, the characters "END" are ``10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit'' is an odd-numbered symbol that is the number symbol ``7''.

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period when a jackpot or a jackpot via small hit occurs in the time saving state a or the time saving state b is set to 0.1 seconds. Various performances performed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as jackpot fanfare performances.

Further, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs in the time saving state a or the normal time saving state b is set to 0.1 seconds. Various performances performed during this small win fanfare period are referred to as small win fanfare performances.

In addition, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds in any of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation display executed in the time saving state a or the time saving state b (see FIGS. 20-15 to 20-20).

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and determines whether the fluctuation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. This fluctuation pattern is determined.

<Fluctuation pattern without reach>
In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns that do not involve reach ("long fluctuation miss", "high speed miss", "ultra high speed miss", "high speed time saving small hit", "ultra high speed time saving small hit", "rush fluctuation miss"), "Rush fluctuation jackpot", "Rush fluctuation time-saving small hit", "pseudo fluctuation loss", "direct jackpot", ("high speed normal small win" = "high speed loss"), etc.) means that the fluctuation display has started. A fluctuating pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols that indicate that the reach is not established later and the fluctuating display result becomes one of "miss", "big hit", "time-saving small hit", or "normal small hit" are displayed in a static manner. be.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve reach when the fluctuation display result is "miss", the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "high speed miss" variation pattern is 1000 ms, ” The fluctuation display period is 200 ms when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “Long fluctuation is off”, and the fluctuation display period is 10000 ms when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “Long fluctuation off”, and it is determined as the “Rush fluctuation off” fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation display period in the case where the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "pseudo fluctuation error" is 30200 ms, and the fluctuation display period in the case where the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "pseudo fluctuation error" is 2800 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve reach when the fluctuation display result is a "jackpot", the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern is 10000ms, and the fluctuation of "rush fluctuation jackpot" The fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a pattern is 40,000 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve reach when the fluctuation display result is "time-saving small win", the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern is 5000ms, and "ultra-high speed The fluctuation display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "time-saving small win" is 500 ms, and the fluctuation display period is 30,500 ms when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern "rush fluctuation time-saving small win".

Further, among the fluctuation patterns without reach when the fluctuation display result is "normal small win", the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be the "high speed normal small win" fluctuation pattern is 1000 ms.

About the fluctuation pattern of the normal small hit during b time saving In addition, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation display result becomes "normal small hit" in the b time saving state, it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "high speed normal small win". This fluctuation pattern of "high-speed normal small hit" is a fluctuation pattern with the same effect as the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed loss", and after the fluctuation display starts, the reach is not established and the fluctuation display result is "miss". A combination of decorative symbols (for example, "245", etc.) corresponding to the above is displayed in a stopped state. In this embodiment, when a "normal small win" occurs in the b time saving state, even if a V winning does not occur, the control is continued to the b time saving state (that is, it is not controlled to the normal state (does not fall)) In (see Figure 20-24), in the b time saving state, there is no need to notify that the fluctuation display result is a "normal small hit", so the same fluctuation pattern as when the fluctuation display result is a "miss" is displayed. I am using it.

<Example of production of "Ultra high speed time saving small hit">
An example of the performance when the variation pattern is "super high speed time saving small win" will be explained using FIG. 20-5.

FIG. 20-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related when the variation pattern is "super high speed time saving small win".

Figures 20-5 (1) and (2), which will be described later, are related to various performance images and third decorative patterns corresponding to the production mode being [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH]. ), so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (3), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed in a reduced size, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third image in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Display the decorative pattern in a reduced size. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display being "time saving small hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that results in a "time-saving small hit" is stopped and displayed (that is, a symbol alignment performance is executed for the third decorative symbols). At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this step, the determined third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped (that is, the pattern matching performance is executed for the third decorative pattern). At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game in the small winning game state, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small winning game start image. . This small winning game start image is an image that includes a small winning right hitting promotion image including the characters "Aim for V!!" to win a V prize and an arrow image instructing right hitting, and an ally character.

[Rush fluctuation]
In this embodiment, the variation pattern executed in the first variation of the time saving state a when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 (that is, the first variation of "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" controlled for the first time) is the variation pattern (first half) and a fluctuation pattern (second half). In the variation pattern (first half), for example, a variation pattern of "inrush variation" is executed. In this embodiment, after the "inrush variation" variation pattern is executed in the variation pattern (first half), the variation pattern (second half) according to each variation display result is executed.

In the variation pattern (second half), a variation display of decorative symbols is executed to notify the display result of the variation display. This effect is referred to as a "display result notification variation effect." In the display result notification fluctuation performance of the fluctuation pattern (second half), for example, if the fluctuation display result is "miss", the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern (200ms) of "ultra high speed loss", and the fluctuation display result is "time saving small hit". In the case of ``, a variable display of a variable pattern (500ms) of ``ultra high speed time saving small win'' is executed.

The "rushing fluctuation" of the fluctuation pattern (first half) means that after information suggesting the currently controlled performance mode is displayed, a pseudo fluctuation display of the decorative pattern (fluctuating display of the decorative pattern starts, and the reach is A pseudo pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols that does not come true and results in a "miss" is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, a fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts, and a combination of decorative symbols that result in a "miss" without a reach is temporarily stopped. (a production that repeats fluctuations) is executed, and at a predetermined timing, information suggesting the production mode currently being controlled is displayed again, and information suggesting that the production mode currently being controlled is to be started is displayed. This is a fluctuation pattern (see Figures 20-7 to 20-9). In the following, a series of performances from the beginning of the display of the decorative symbols among the pseudo fluctuations until the combination of the decorative symbols that is "missing" without reaching reach is temporarily stopped will be appropriately referred to as "unit pseudo fluctuations". Therefore, the pseudo fluctuation performance is a performance in which unit pseudo fluctuations are performed multiple times.

In the "Rush fluctuation" in this embodiment, the information that suggests the currently controlled production mode is the text "Ultra high speed" or the text "Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH" (hereinafter referred to as "Mode start suggestion production" as appropriate). ), and the information that suggests that the currently controlled production mode will start is the words "Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" or "Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH entry" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start" as appropriate). ).

In addition, the pseudo-fluctuating display of decorative symbols in "rushing fluctuation" refers to the period from when the first fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts until the combination of decorative symbols that is "missed" without reach is temporarily stopped. (hereinafter referred to as the "unit pseudo fluctuation period" as appropriate), the second unit pseudo fluctuation period is shorter, and the third unit pseudo fluctuation period is shorter than the second unit pseudo fluctuation period. There is. Thereafter, a configuration is adopted in which the unit pseudo variation period becomes shorter each time pseudo variation is executed, that is, the speed of pseudo variation increases at an accelerating rate. Hereinafter, such a pseudo-fluctuation performance will be appropriately referred to as an "accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance." In this example, it is assumed that a total of seven unit pseudo fluctuations are executed in the accelerated pseudo fluctuation performance.

In this way, in the variation pattern of the first variation of "Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" which is controlled for the first time, "Rush variation", the acceleration pseudo-variation effect is executed, so that the variation display of [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is digested. It is possible to impress upon the player that the speed is faster than the digesting speed of the variable display in other performance modes.

In the present embodiment, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, when a pseudo variation of a decorative pattern (a "third decorative pattern" to be described later) during an accelerated pseudo variation effect is executed, a third When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the pedestal pattern and the number pattern are included, but the light ray effect display is not included. At this time, the display color of the third decorative pattern is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and the display color inside the number pattern appears to shine (hereinafter referred to as a "special mode" as appropriate). is displayed. In this way, when the third decorative pattern temporarily stops during the acceleration pseudo-variation performance, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special mode while not including the light ray effect display. The player can be made aware that the variation currently being executed is a pseudo variation.

In addition, when the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation performance ends and a variation display is executed to notify the display result of the variation display, the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner, so that the currently executed variation is simulated. It is possible to make the player recognize that the display is not a fluctuation, that is, a fluctuation display of decorative symbols is actually used to notify the display result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" starts (the "inrush fluctuation" starts) at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period of the jackpot game state where the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. The text "READY" to be notified is displayed on the image display device 5.

<Example of production of “Rush fluctuation is off”>
A production example when the variation pattern is "inrush variation off" will be explained using FIG. 20-6 and FIGS. 20-7 to 20-10.

Figure 20-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related performance when the fluctuation pattern is "Rush fluctuation is off", and Figures 20-7 to 20-10 are time charts showing the execution timing of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is "Rush fluctuation is off". FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (1), at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period in the jackpot game state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen in the center of the image display device 5. Display the word “READY”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 20-6), the production control CPU 120 issues a mode start suggestion. The effect is executed to display the words "super high speed" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 (3) to (7), the period ( During the period from T2 to T3 (7.5 seconds) shown in FIG. In 5L, 5C, and 5R, a pseudo variation of the third decorative pattern is executed. As shown in FIGS. 20-7 (3), (6), and (7), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in FIG. 20-7 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start suggestion effect and displays the words "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The words "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" are an image with a higher display priority than the third decorative pattern. Therefore, it appears to the player that the words "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" and the third decorative pattern are displayed in that order.

At this time, the display style of the words "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" is less visible than the display style of the characters "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" that is displayed in the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo fluctuation effect has ended. It is displayed as In this example, the words "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" during the acceleration pseudo fluctuation effect are displayed in thin white letters, while the "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" during the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo fluctuation effect is finished. HYPER RUSH'' is displayed in dark black letters.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 (8) to 20-8 (11), the timing when 21 seconds have elapsed from the timing when 17.5 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the second special symbol. In the period up to (period T3 to T4 (3.5 seconds) shown in FIG. 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes the acceleration pseudo fluctuation performance (second unit pseudo fluctuation), and In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a pseudo variation of the third decorative symbol is executed. As shown in FIGS. 20-8 (10) and (11), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in FIG. 20-8 (11), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start suggestion effect and causes the words "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (12) onwards, after 21 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-6), the production control is started. The CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo variation effect (3rd to 8th unit pseudo variation), and executes a pseudo variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 (13) to (15), the performance control CPU 120 executes the acceleration pseudo fluctuation performance (seventh unit pseudo fluctuation), and In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a pseudo variation of the third decorative symbol is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (16), at the timing when 25.5 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T9 shown in FIG. 20-6), the production control is started. The CPU 120 terminates the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect, erases the third decorative pattern from the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes a mode start notification effect, and displays the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The text "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" (dark black text) is displayed on the section.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (17), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the mode start notification effect, and displays the words "Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH entry" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 ( (dark black text) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (18) to FIG. 20-10 (21), the timing when 30.2 seconds have elapsed from the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the second special symbol. In the period up to (period T10 to T11 shown in FIG. 20-6), the effect control CPU 120 finishes the mode start notification effect and displays the words "Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH entry" from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. is erased, and variable display of the third decorative pattern is executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the combination of the determined third decorative pattern with which the display result is "miss" (in this example, " 145'') is stopped (stop display, confirmed stop). At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "145") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the third decorative pattern to stop ( (stop display, confirmed stop), the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner, but is displayed in a manner including a light ray effect display. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIGS. 20-28, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when controlled by [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], if you win a "normal small win" with a small number of fluctuating displays, the fluctuating display period will be shorter compared to other production modes. is controlled by [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], which has a high rate of selection of an extremely short fluctuation pattern ("Ultra-high-speed deviation" (0.2 seconds)), so it is controlled only after the jackpot occurs multiple times. There is a risk that the game [Ultra High-Speed HYPER RUSH] that can be played may end without being fully played.

In consideration of the possibility that such a situation could occur, the first controlled [Ultra-high-speed HYPER
In the first variation of [RUSH], the variation pattern of "Rush variation" (30 seconds or more) is executed at a rate of 100%, so even if you fall from [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage, It is possible to secure a control period of [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH] of at least 30 seconds or more.

In addition, in the first fluctuation of [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] that is controlled for the first time, the fluctuation pattern of "Rush fluctuation" (acceleration pseudo fluctuation effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, so that [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] Even if you fall from [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], a pseudo variation of the decorative pattern similar to the variation display of the third decorative pattern in [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] is executed multiple times, so even if it is a pseudo variation, It is possible to play the variable display of the third decorative symbol in [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] at least a plurality of times.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the length of the jackpot ending period depending on the number of jackpot occurrences, so for example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 (i.e., the first time you hit "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH") Set the jackpot ending period of the jackpot immediately before it is controlled to 30 seconds, and during this period, information suggesting that it will be controlled for the first time by [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] after the jackpot (the characters "Ultra High Speed", "Ultra High Speed") ``High-speed HYPER RUSH'', ``Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH entry'') can be displayed.

However, in the pachinko game machine, it is prohibited to display decorative symbols in a fluctuating manner during the jackpot game state (jackpot ending period), or to perform similar effects. Therefore, during the jackpot ending period, although it is possible to display information suggesting that [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] will be controlled for the first time, it is not possible to execute the acceleration pseudo fluctuation effect, and [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] It is not possible to notify the player that the speed at which the variable display of "RUSH" is consumed is faster than the speed at which the variable display of the other production modes is consumed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the display of information that suggests that the acceleration pseudo fluctuation effect is controlled for the first time by [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] is displayed during the first fluctuation controlled by [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] instead of during the jackpot ending period. is running.

[Pseudo fluctuation deviation]
In this embodiment, the variation pattern of "pseudo variation is off" means that the unit pseudo variation of a decorative pattern ("third decorative pattern" to be described later) is executed three times in a row, and is displayed after the third unit pseudo variation is completed. This is a variation pattern in which the third decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner to notify that the result is a "miss", and a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the display result is a "miss" is displayed in a static manner (Fig. 20-12 and Figure 20-13). That is, this is a variation pattern in which three unit pseudo variations and one variation display for notifying the display result of the variation display are executed. This effect in which a variable display is performed to notify the display result of the variable display is referred to as a "display result notification variable effect."

In this embodiment, the pseudo-variation performance of the decorative symbol in the variation pattern of "Pseudo-variation is off" means that the first unit pseudo-variation period, the second unit pseudo-variation period, and the third unit pseudo-variation period are all The period is set to 700 ms, which is the period during which the decorative pattern undergoes pseudo fluctuation (200 ms)+the period during which the decorative pattern temporarily stops (500 ms). That is, a configuration is adopted in which all three unit pseudo fluctuations are executed at the same speed (uniform speed). Hereinafter, such a pseudo-fluctuation performance will be appropriately referred to as a "uniform velocity pseudo-fluctuation performance."

In this embodiment, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, when the pseudo variation of the decorative pattern during the constant speed pseudo variation effect is executed, when the third decorative pattern temporarily stops, , the configuration includes a pedestal pattern, a number pattern, and a light beam effect display. At this time, the display color of the third decorative pattern is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and the display color inside the number pattern appears to shine (hereinafter referred to as a "special mode" as appropriate). is displayed. In this way, when the third decorative symbol temporarily stops during the uniform velocity pseudo fluctuation performance, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner, thereby making it possible for the game player to know that the fluctuation currently being executed is a pseudo fluctuation. It is possible to make people aware of this.

In addition, when the uniform velocity pseudo fluctuation performance is finished and a fluctuation display is executed to notify the display result of the fluctuation display, the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner, so that the fluctuation currently being performed is The player can be made aware that this is not a pseudo fluctuation.

<Example of production of “pseudo fluctuation deviation”>
An example of the performance when the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo fluctuation off" will be explained using FIG. 20-11 and FIGS. 20-12 to 20-13.

Figure 20-11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related performance when the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo fluctuation is off", and Figures 20-12 to 20-13 are time charts showing the execution timing of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo fluctuation is off" FIG.

First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (1) to (3), the period from the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol to the timing when 0.7 seconds have elapsed (as shown in FIG. 20-11) In the period T1 to T2), the performance control CPU 120 executes a constant velocity pseudo fluctuation performance (first unit pseudo fluctuation), and displays the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Perform pseudo-variation of. As shown in FIG. 20-12(3), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special manner.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIGS. 20-28 described later).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (4) to (6), the period ( During the period T2 to T3 shown in FIG. In this step, a pseudo variation of the third decorative pattern is executed. As shown in FIG. 20-12 (6), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (7) to 20-13 (9), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol and the timing is 2.1 seconds after 1.4 seconds have elapsed. In the period up to (period T3 to T4 shown in FIG. 20-11), the performance control CPU 120 executes a constant velocity pseudo fluctuation performance (third unit pseudo fluctuation), and displays the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5. , 5C, and 5R, a pseudo variation of the third decorative pattern is executed. As shown in FIG. 20-13 (9), when the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 20-13 (10) to (13), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol from the timing when 2.1 seconds have elapsed to the timing when 2.8 seconds have elapsed. During the period (period T4 to T5 shown in FIG. 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 ends the constant velocity pseudo fluctuation performance and displays the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The pseudo variation is ended, and the third decorative pattern is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in a variable manner. , "145") is stopped (stop display, confirmed stop). At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "145") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the third decorative pattern to stop ( (stop display, confirmed stop), the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner.

[Direct jackpot]
In this embodiment, in the time-saving state a (i.e., "Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH") or the time-saving state b (i.e., "Invincible RUSH") when the jackpot occurrence count value ≧ 3, the fluctuating display result of the second special symbol is a “jackpot”, a “direct jackpot” variation pattern is executed.

The "direct jackpot" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the decorative symbols are hidden after the variable display starts, and the decorative symbols continue to be hidden until the variable display ends. In this fluctuating pattern, when the fluctuating display ends, the combination of small symbols indicating that the fluctuating display result is a "jackpot" is fixed and stopped (see FIG. 20-14).

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is equipped with a light emitting device, and when the jackpot occurrence count value ≧ 3, a time saving state (i.e., "ultra high speed HYPER RUSH") or b In the time saving state (i.e., "Invincible RUSH"), when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display result of the second special symbol being "Jackpot", a special variable prize is won at the timing controlled by the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to cause the ball device 7 to emit light.

<Example of direct jackpot performance>
An example of the performance when the fluctuation pattern is "direct jackpot" will be explained using FIG. 20-14.

FIG. 20-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related when the variation pattern is "direct jackpot".

First, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (1), the performance control CPU 120 selects the fixed third decorative pattern combination of the previously executed variable display in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. (in this example, "245") is displayed. At this time, a combination of small symbols ("245" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIGS. 20-28 described later).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (2), the timing at which the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special symbol (the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory among the four pending memories) Then, the performance control CPU 120 erases the third decorative pattern from the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command erases the third decorative symbol. Then, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is a "jackpot" is fixed and stopped (i.e., the first 3) The pattern matching effect is not executed for the decorative patterns). At this time, the active display 02TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot round game start image on the image display device 5. Display. This jackpot round game start image has a round display indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot round game (in this example, the words "Round 1"), and the words "Aim for the attacker!!" to enter the jackpot and the right side. This is an image that includes a jackpot right-hitting promotion image that includes an arrow image that instructs hitting, and an ally character. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light.

In this embodiment, when the time saving state is controlled, the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is high, and there are many situations where a jackpot occurs when the display result is determined to be a "small hit". However, if the displayed result is determined to be a "jackpot" while the time saving state is being controlled, the user may feel disappointed that it would have been better to have won the prize in the normal state.

When such a situation occurs, information indicating that a jackpot has occurred due to the displayed result being judged as a "jackpot" (the characters "Aim at the attacker!!" (in case of a jackpot via a small hit, "V" Aim for it!'' characters)) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is made to emit light, thereby directing the player's attention from the image display device 5 toward the grand prize opening. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of regret that a jackpot has occurred due to the display result being determined to be a "jackpot".

<Variation pattern with normal reach>
In this embodiment, a variation pattern that accompanies a normal reach ("high-speed normal reach miss", "high-speed normal reach time-short small hit", etc.) means that after a reach state is established, a super reach effect (challenge effect, fall effect, etc.), which will be described later, The final display result is fixed and stopped without being executed.

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns with normal reach when the variation display result is "miss", the variation display period is 3000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be "high speed normal reach missed".

Further, among the variation patterns with normal reach when the variation display result is "time-saving small win", the variation display period when it is determined to be the "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win" variation pattern is 7000 ms.

<Variation pattern with super reach>
In this embodiment, the variation patterns accompanied by super reach ("super reach A missed", "super reach B missed", "super reach C missed", "super reach A time-saving small hit", "super reach A jackpot", " In "Super Reach B Normal Small Win" and "Super Reach C Time-Save Small Win"), a Super Reach performance is performed that informs you whether or not you have won the "Jackpot", "Time-Save Small Win", or "Normal Small Win". As a result, the final display result is fixed and stopped.

(Super reach A (challenge performance))
In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that involve super reach, in the fluctuation patterns of "super reach A miss", "super reach A time-saving small hit", and "super reach A jackpot", the reach state is established as soon as the fluctuation display starts. , Super Reach A performance (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "challenge performance") that informs whether or not a ally character has won a "time-saving small hit" or a "big hit" by performing an action of throwing a bomb at a rock. ) is executed. Here, if the final display result is "miss", a performance in which the ally character fails the challenge (failure performance) is performed. In the failure effect, a failed symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "time-saving small win" or a "big win", a performance (success performance) in which the ally character succeeds in the challenge is executed (see FIG. 20-58). In the failure effect, the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display area (the pattern alignment effect is executed).

(Super reach B (fall-inducing effect))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns that involve super reach, in the variation patterns of "super reach B missed" and "super reach B normal small hit", when the variation display starts, a fall suggestion display (in this example, " After a triangular object containing "!" and an image containing the word "WARNING") are displayed, a reach state is established and a special symbol (suggesting that the time saving state ends) is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. A super reach B effect (hereinafter referred to as a ``fall promotion effect'' as appropriate) informs you whether or not you have won a ``normal small hit'' by operating the push button 31B for the special symbol of the letters ``END''. ) is executed. Here, if the final display result is "miss", the temporarily stopped special symbol is successfully destroyed, and a performance (fall avoidance performance) is executed in which the missed symbol is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5C. be done. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "normal small hit", the special symbol that was temporarily stopped fails to be destroyed, and the special symbol is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5C (fall confirmed effect). executed (see Figure 20-61).

(Super reach C (immediate button hit effect))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns that involve super reach, in the variation patterns of "super reach C miss" and "super reach C time-saving small hit", after the variation display starts, reach is not established and the symbol display area An operation promotion display imitating the push button 31B and a time bar for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are displayed in each area of 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the push button 31B is operated once. Each time you press the push button 31B, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area (for example, they stop in the order of symbol display areas 5R → 5L → 5C), and by operating the push button 31B three times in total, the decorative symbols are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A super reach C performance (hereinafter appropriately referred to as a ``button instant hit performance'') is executed to notify whether or not a ``time-saving small win'' has been won by displaying a combination of decorative symbols in a stopped state.

Here, if the final display result is "miss", a combination of decorative symbols (missing symbols) whose final display result is "missing" will be stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. performance) is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "time-saving small hit", a combination of decorative symbols (odd number 7 symbol "777") will be displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R so that the final display result is a "time-saving small hit". An effect (symbol alignment effect) in which the symbols are stopped and displayed is executed (not shown).

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which Super Reach A to Super Reach C are provided as types of Super Reach. You may also have a super reach.

For example, assume that a super reach D is provided as a super reach. Among the fluctuation patterns that involve super reach, in the fluctuation patterns of "Super Reach D Miss", "Super Reach D Time-Save Small Hit", and "Super Reach D Jackpot", the reach state is established as soon as the fluctuation display starts, and the ally character becomes the enemy. A super reach D performance (hereinafter appropriately referred to as a "battle performance") is executed to notify whether or not a "time-saving small win" or a "big win" has been won by battling with a character. Here, if the final display result is "lost", an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "time-saving small win" or a "big win", a performance (victory performance) in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed. It is assumed that the ally character appearing in this battle performance is associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100, which will be described later.

Here, variation pattern determination during Dream RUSH, ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH, and Invincible RUSH (see FIGS. 20-25), which will be described later, will be explained. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment table includes a [missing] fluctuation pattern judgment table that is used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "loss", and a fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the fluctuation display result is determined to be a "jackpot". Variation pattern judgment table [for jackpot] used when it is predetermined to do so, and [for time-saving small win] used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result a "time-saving small win" A fluctuation pattern determination table and a fluctuation pattern determination table [for normal small win] used when it is predetermined to make the fluctuation display result "normal small win" are prepared in advance.

[For misses] In the variation pattern judgment table, "Long variation misses", "High speed misses", "High speed normal reach misses", "Super reach A misses", "Super reach B misses", "Ultra high speed misses", "Super A predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of "Reach C is off" and "Reach variation is off".

[For jackpot] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, for each fluctuation pattern of "Super reach A jackpot", "rush fluctuation jackpot", and "direct jackpot", the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination has a range that can be taken. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value.

[For time saving small hit] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, "High speed time saving small winning", "High speed normal reach time saving small winning", "Super reach A time saving small winning", "Rush fluctuation time saving small winning", "Super high speed time saving small winning" A predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of "win" and "super reach C time saving small win".

[For normal small hit] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, for each of the fluctuation patterns "Super reach B normal small hit", "rush fluctuation normal small hit", and "high speed normal small hit", the fluctuation pattern judgment table A predetermined random value within the range that the numerical value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value.

In this embodiment, as a jackpot, there is a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a small hit that is generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Since this includes a jackpot via a small win that occurs due to a V winning, different fluctuation patterns are used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small win." However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a common variation pattern may be used in cases where the display result is a "big win" and when the display result is a "small win."

<[For a time saving state (Jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [For 0 pending items] Fluctuation pattern judgment table>
Figures 20-15 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 pending items] in [a time saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. . Further, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value=1 or 2 in the time saving state a, the performance mode is controlled to "Dream RUSH" (see FIGS. 20-25). That is, FIGS. 20-15 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for "a time saving state (Dream RUSH)" and "for 0 pending items" in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 20-15 (1), in the fluctuation pattern determination table [for failure], out of the range of MR3 determination values from 1 to 997, values from 1 to 700 are fluctuation patterns for "long fluctuation failure", and 701 ~800 is a variation pattern of "high speed miss", 801 to 900 is a "high speed normal reach miss" variation pattern, 901 to 950 is a "super reach A miss" variation pattern, 951 to 997 is a "super reach B" variation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of line".

As shown in Figure 20-15 (2), in the fluctuation pattern determination table [for jackpot], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 997 is the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A Jackpot". Assigned.

As shown in Figure 20-15 (3), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for time-saving small win], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 300 are fluctuations of "high-speed time-saving small win". Patterns 301 to 500 are assigned to the variation pattern of "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win", and patterns 501 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach A time-saving small win".

As shown in Figure 20-15 (4), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for normal small hit], of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 997 are "Super reach B normal small hit" assigned to the variation pattern.

<[For a time saving state (Jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [For pending 1 to 4 items] Fluctuation pattern judgment table>
Figures 20-16 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [1 to 4 reservations] in [a time saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. It is. That is, FIGS. 20-16 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [for pending 1 to 4 items] for [for a time saving state (Dream RUSH)] in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 20-16 (1), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for [missing], out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, 1 to 800 are variation patterns for "high speed deviation", and 801 to 800 are "high speed deviation" fluctuation patterns. Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of "high-speed normal reach missed", 901 to 950 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach A missed", and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B missed" variation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (2), in the fluctuation pattern determination table [for jackpot], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 997 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A Jackpot". Assigned.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (3), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for time-saving small win], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 300 are fluctuations of "high-speed time-saving small win". Patterns 301 to 500 are assigned to the variation pattern of "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win", and patterns 501 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach A time-saving small win".

As shown in Figure 20-16 (4), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for normal small hit], out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 997 are "Super Reach B normal small hit" assigned to the variation pattern.

<[For a time saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3)], [1st variation] variation pattern judgment table>
FIGS. 20-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [1st variation] for [a time saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3)] in this embodiment. Further, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value=3 in the time saving state a, the production mode is controlled to "ultra high speed HYPER RUSH" (see FIGS. 20-25). That is, FIGS. 20-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the variation pattern determination table for [the first variation of the a time saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH) controlled for the first time after the first hit] in this embodiment. It is.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (1), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for failure], of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, values from 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for “inrush fluctuation failure”. It is being

As shown in Figure 20-17 (2), in the fluctuation pattern determination table [for jackpot], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "rushing fluctuation jackpot". It is being

As shown in Figure 20-17 (3), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for time-saving small hit], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 997 are for "rush fluctuation time-saving small hit". Assigned to a variation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (4), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for normal small hit], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 997 are “rush fluctuation normal small hit”. Assigned to a variation pattern.

<[For a time saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000), [0 pending]] Fluctuation pattern judgment table>
Figures 20-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 pending items] for [a time saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000)] in this embodiment. . Note that when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first variation is excluded. Further, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10,000 in the time saving state a, the performance mode is controlled to "ultra high speed HYPER RUSH" (see FIGS. 20-25). That is, FIGS. 20-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 items on hold] for [a time saving state (ultra high-speed HYPER RUSH)] in this embodiment (for jackpot When the occurrence count value = 3, the first variation is excluded).

As shown in Figure 20-18 (1), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for [missing], 1 to 700 out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fluctuation". 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super high speed off", 901 to 950 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach C off", and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach C off" variation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of ``Reach B is off''.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (2), in the [Jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, out of the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern. ing.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (3), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for time-saving small win], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 700 are “ultra-high speed time-saving small win”. 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach C Time Saving Small Win".

As shown in Figure 20-18 (4), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for normal small hit], out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 997 are "Super reach B normal small hit" assigned to the variation pattern.

<[A time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000), [for 1 to 4 pending items]] Fluctuation pattern judgment table>
Figures 20-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [for pending 1 to 4 items] for [a time saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000)] in this embodiment. It is. Note that when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first variation is excluded. Further, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10,000 in the time saving state a, the performance mode is controlled to "ultra high speed HYPER RUSH" (see FIGS. 20-25). That is, FIGS. 20-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [for pending 1 to 4 items] in [for a time saving state (ultra high-speed HYPER RUSH)] in this embodiment. (If the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first variation is excluded).

As shown in Figure 20-19 (1), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for [missing], out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, values from 1 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-high-speed deviation". 901 to 975 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach C is off", and 976 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach B is off".

As shown in Figure 20-19 (2), in the [Jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, out of the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern. ing.

As shown in Figure 20-19 (3), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for time-saving small win], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 700 are for "ultra-high speed time-saving small win". 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach C Time Saving Small Win".

As shown in Figure 20-19 (4), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for normal small hit], out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 997 are "Super Reach B normal small hit" assigned to the variation pattern.

<[B time saving state] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
FIGS. 20-20 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [b time saving state] in this embodiment. Furthermore, in this example, when in the b time saving state, the performance mode is controlled to "invincible RUSH" (see FIGS. 20-25). That is, FIGS. 20-20 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [b time saving state (invincible RUSH)] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (1), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for [missing], out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, values from 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for "high-speed deviation". ing.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (2), in the [Jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, out of the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern. ing.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (3), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for time-saving small win], out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 997 are fluctuations of "high-speed time-saving small win". assigned to a pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (4), in the [normal small hit] fluctuation pattern judgment table, out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 997 are fluctuations of "high speed normal small win" assigned to a pattern.

In this way, during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state, if the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000 (more than the mode switching judgment value), the fluctuation display period is shorter than 1000ms. The rate at which the "miss" variation pattern is executed is about 80%. On the other hand, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1 or 2 (less than the mode switching judgment value), the percentage of execution of the "ultra high speed non-reach miss" variation pattern with a variation display period shorter than 1000ms is 0%. . Therefore, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or greater than the mode switching judgment value of "3", the fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation display period than 1000 ms is displayed than when the jackpot occurrence count value is less than the mode switching judgment value of "3". The rate of execution is high.

[Control table after winning by game state]
FIGS. 20-21 are explanatory diagrams showing control tables after winning by game state in this embodiment. Figure 20-21 (1) shows the gaming state that is controlled after a hit when the display result is a "jackpot" when the gaming state is the normal state, according to each display result (jackpot type). There is. In addition, Figure 20-21 (2) shows the gaming state that is controlled after winning when the display result is "small win" when the gaming state is a time saving state, for each display result (small win type). and whether or not V-winning has occurred. In addition, Figure 20-21 (3) shows the gaming state that is controlled after winning when the display result is "small win" when the gaming state is in time saving state b, for each display result (small win type). and whether or not V-winning has occurred.

As shown in Figure 20-21 (1), when the gaming state is the normal state,
(No. 1-1) If the display result is "Symbol 3R normal jackpot", it will be controlled to the normal state after the jackpot,
(No. 1-2) If the display result is "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot", after the jackpot, it is controlled to a time-saving state,
(No. 1-3) When the display result is "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot", control is made to the b time-saving state after the jackpot.

As shown in Figure 20-21 (2), when the gaming state is in the time saving state a,
(No. 2-1) If the display result becomes "normal small win" and a V winning does not occur during the small win, it will be controlled to the normal state after the small win,
(No. 2-2) If the display result becomes "normal small hit" and a V win occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the jackpot via the small hit,
(No. 2-3) If the display result is "time-saving small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, the control will return to the normal state after the small hit,
(No. 2-4) If the display result becomes "time-saving small hit" and a V win occurs during the small win, control is made to the time-saving state a after the jackpot via the small win.

As shown in Figure 20-21 (3), when the gaming state is in the time saving state b,
(No. 3-1) If the display result becomes "normal small win" and no V winning occurs during the small win, the control is made to the b time saving state after the small win,
(No. 3-2) If the display result becomes "normal small hit" and a V win occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the jackpot via the small hit,
(No. 3-3) If the display result is "Time-saving small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, the control will return to the normal state after the small hit.
(No. 3-4) If the display result becomes "time-saving small hit" and a V win occurs during the small win, control is made to the time-saving state a after the jackpot via the small win.

In this way, when the gaming state is a time saving state, (No. 2-1) the display result becomes "normal small win" and if the V winning does not occur during the small win, the small win will be While it was later controlled to the normal state, when the gaming state was in the b-time saving state, (No. 3-1) the display result became "normal small win" and no V winning occurred during the small win. In this case, it is controlled to the b time saving state after the small hit.

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S113) in the special symbol process process.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step S02TM1010).

In this embodiment, the jackpot flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and in the special symbol normal processing (S110) shown in FIG. It is set to the on state based on that. On the other hand, based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is cleared and becomes an OFF state.

If the jackpot flag is on (YES in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 sets the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot (step S02TM1020), and advances the process to step S02TM1030. In the process of step S02TM1020, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 makes settings to send a jackpot start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S02TM1030), clears the jackpot flag to turn it off (step S02TM1040), and executes the process in step S02TM1050. Proceed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot start designation command is a command (jackpot fanfare command) that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state, and is a command that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state, and is a command that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state, and is a command that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state, and is a command that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game state. include. In the jackpot start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the jackpot type determination result. In the process of step S02TM1030, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the jackpot start designation command is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. be done.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data by adding 1 (step S02TM1050), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) ( At step S02TM1060), the process ends.

In this embodiment, the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data is the stored value of the jackpot occurrence counter. The jackpot occurrence counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and specifiably counts the number of times it is determined to control to a jackpot in the gaming state, including the first jackpot that triggered the control to the jackpot gaming state.

In this example, the jackpot occurrence counter is set to an initial count value of "0", and every time it is determined that the jackpot will be controlled, including the first jackpot that triggered the control to the jackpot gaming state. is updated by adding "1" to the stored value of the jackpot occurrence count value. Then, when the number of times it is decided to control the jackpot, including the first jackpot that triggered the control to the jackpot gaming state, reaches a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 10,000 times) (limit When reaching: jackpot occurrence count value=10000), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "0". Thereafter, the jackpot occurrence count value is incremented by "1" each time it is determined to control the jackpot, including the first jackpot, until the limit value is reached again.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value is updated by adding 1, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the jackpot occurrence count value may be updated by subtracting 1 from the jackpot occurrence count value.

For example, the initial count value of "10000" is set in the jackpot occurrence counter as an initial state, and each time it is determined to control to a jackpot, including the first jackpot that triggered the control to the jackpot gaming state, The jackpot occurrence count value, which is a stored value, is updated by subtracting "1". Then, when the number of times it is decided to control the jackpot, including the first jackpot that triggered the control to the jackpot gaming state, reaches a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 10,000 times) (limit When reaching: jackpot occurrence count value = 0), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "10000". After that, until the limit value is reached again, the jackpot occurrence count value is subtracted by "1" every time it is determined to control the jackpot including the first jackpot.

Further, when the jackpot flag is off in step S02TM1010 (NO in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is on (step S02TM1110).

In this embodiment, the small hit flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and in the special symbol normal processing (S110) in FIG. It is set to the on state based on what has been determined. On the other hand, based on the fact that the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is cleared and becomes an OFF state.

If the small hit flag is off (NO in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step S02TM1210), and ends the process as is. do.

If the small hit flag is on (YES in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 sets a performance wait at the start of the small hit (step S02TM1120), and advances the process to step S02TM1130. In the process of step S02TM1120, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the production waiting time at the start of the small hit is set in the game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 makes settings to send a small hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step S02TM1130), clears the small hit flag to turn it off (step S02TM1140), and starts the special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small winning release preprocessing (S118) (step S02TM1150), and the process is ended as is.

In this embodiment, the small win start designation command is a command (small win fanfare command) that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a small win game state, and is an effect supplied from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Included in control commands. In the small win start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the determination result of the small win type. In the process of step S02TM1130, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the small hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the small win start designation command is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. is stored in

[Jackpot end process]
FIG. 20-23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S117) in the special symbol process process.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step S02TM2010).

In this embodiment, when updating the value of the special figure process flag to "7" in the jackpot release post-processing (S116) in FIG. is set in the game control process timer. In the process of step S02TM2010, the gaming control process timer value, which is the stored value of the gaming control process timer, is updated by subtracting 1, and the updated gaming control process timer value becomes a predetermined waiting time elapsed judgment value (in this embodiment, It is determined whether or not the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed depending on whether or not it matches with "0").

If the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has not elapsed (NO in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 directly ends the process.

If the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed (YES in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value corresponds to the limit value (in this example, 10,000 times) as the predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether a limit reaching determination value (in this example, "10000") as a predetermined specific value has been reached (step S02TM2020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value has reached the limit reaching judgment value (in this example, "10000") (YES in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter and clears the jackpot occurrence counter, which is the stored value. The count value is initialized to "0" (step S02TM2030), and the process advances to step S02TM2110.

If the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the limit attainment judgment value (in this example, "10000") (NO in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is a jackpot via a small hit or not. (Step S02TM2040).

In the process of step S02TM2040, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 is referred to, and it is determined whether the jackpot type is a jackpot via small hit. In this example, it is determined whether the jackpot type is either "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small hit" or "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit".

In the process of step S02TM2040, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is a jackpot via small hit (YES in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit type corresponding to the jackpot is a "normal small hit" or not. (Step S02TM2050).

If the small hit type corresponding to the jackpot is "normal small hit" (YES in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter and initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2100). ), the process advances to step S02TM2110.

If the small hit type corresponding to the jackpot is not "normal small hit" (NO in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S02TM2060.

In the process of step S02TM2040, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not a jackpot via small hit (NO in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type is "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (step S02TM2080 ).

If the jackpot type is "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (YES in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2090), and returns to step S02TM2110. Proceed with the process.

If the jackpot type is not "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (NO in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S02TM2060.

If it is determined NO in step S02TM2050 or NO in step S02TM2080, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot (step S02TM2060), and sets the time saving number counter to "10000". '' is set as the initial count value (step S02TM2070), and the process proceeds to step S02TM2110.

In this embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for being controlled to be in the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flag includes an a time saving flag and a b time saving flag. Note that in the following description, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The a time saving flag is a "10 Ra time saving jackpot" that occurred during the normal state, a "10 Ra time saving jackpot via a time saving small hit" that occurred during the time saving state, or a "10 Ra time saving jackpot via a time saving small hit" that occurred during the time saving state b. It is set when the machine is controlled to the a time saving state after any of the jackpots in "Jackpot". This a time saving flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and when the a time saving state ends (the timing when a jackpot occurs during the a time saving state, the time saving control for the specified number of times (10,000 times) ends and the normal It is erased at a timing controlled by the state, etc.).

The b time saving flag is set when the b time saving state is controlled after the jackpot of "symbol 10Rb time saving jackpot" which occurs during the normal state. This b time saving flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and when the b time saving state ends (the timing when a jackpot occurs during the b time saving state, the specified number of times (10000 times) time saving control is completed and the normal It is erased at a timing controlled by the state, etc.).

After the processing of step S02TM2030, after the processing of step S02TM2070, after the processing of step S02TM2090, and after the processing of step S02TM2100, the CPU 103 changes the value of the special symbol process flag to the special symbol normal processing (S110). It is updated to the corresponding value (step S02TM2110), and the process ends.

In this way, even in an irregular case where a V winning occurs in a "normal small win" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, in the jackpot end process, it is determined as YES in step S02TM2050, and the time saving flag is By skipping the process of setting (step S02TM2060), it becomes possible to control to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state without being controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, if a "symbol 3R normal jackpot" occurs in the normal state by determining YES in step S02TM2080 and executing the process of clearing the jackpot occurrence counter (step S02TM2090), after the jackpot ends, Since the control is in the normal state, the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized when the jackpot ends. In addition, if it is determined as YES in step S02TM2050 and a "10Ra jackpot via normal small hit" occurs by executing the process of clearing the jackpot occurrence counter (step S02TM2100), after the end of the jackpot, the normal Since the jackpot occurrence count value is controlled by the state, the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized when the jackpot ends.

[Small winning end processing]
FIG. 20-24 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S120) in the special symbol process process.

First, the CPU 103 updates the V winning prize validity period timer by -1 (step S02TM3010), and checks whether the V winning prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (step S02TM3020).

If the V winning prize validity period timer has not timed out (NO in step S02TM3020), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag, which is set when a V winning prize is detected, has already been set (step S02TM3020). S02TM3030).

If the V winning flag is set (YES in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 immediately ends the process.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a V winning that occurs due to a game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. In order to determine whether or not the V winning switch 87a is in the on state (step S02TM3040).

If the V winning switch is not in the on state (NO in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 ends the process.

On the other hand, when the V winning switch is in the ON state (YES in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 indicates that the V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and that the V winning is detected. A V winning flag is set (step S02TM3050).

Then, the CPU 103 performs processing for transmitting the V winning prize designation command (step S02TM3060), and ends the processing. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that a V winning prize has occurred.

If the V prize validity period timer has timed out in step S02TM3020, the CPU 103 performs processing to transmit a small winning end designation command (step S02TM3070). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control by changing the state of the solenoid 22 to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (step S02TM3080).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (step S02TM3090).

If the V winning flag is set (YES in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines that it is a jackpot, and sets the jackpot flag (step S02TM3100).

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the small hit stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot is officially won due to the occurrence of the V winning. It is formally stored (step S02TM3110).

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data by adding 1 (step S02TM3120), and once resets the time saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3130).

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in the small winning ending process that is executed at the timing when the small winning gaming state ends, if a V winning prize has occurred, the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data is added by 1. Although we have shown an example in which the update process (step S02TM3120) is executed by updating the V winning prize, this is not limited to this form. If this has occurred, processing may be performed to update the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data by adding one.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value is updated by adding 1, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and updating may be performed by subtracting 1 from the jackpot occurrence count value. Since this can be realized by a method similar to that shown in step S02TM1050, the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in step S02TM3110 (step S02TM3140). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state has started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) in the jackpot control timer (step S02TM3150).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, and determines the number of openings (for example, 3 times, 10 times, etc.), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and interval time according to the jackpot type. Opening pattern data indicating an opening mode such as (big winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (step S02TM3160). Among such data, data on the number of openings is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (step S02TM3170), and ends the process. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small winning gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V winning flag is not set in step S02TM3090 (NO in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the b time saving flag among the time saving flags is set (step S02TM3180).

If the b time saving flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S02TM3200. As a result, when the b time saving flag is not set, that is, when the V winning is not generated by a small win that occurs during the a time saving state or the normal state, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed. .

On the other hand, when the b time saving flag is set (YES in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit type of the small hit is "normal small hit" (step S02TM3190).

If the small win type of the small win is "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM3190), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S02TM3200. As a result, if the b time-saving flag is set and a V-win does not occur in a small hit where the small-win type is "time-saving small hit", in other words, a V-winning occurs in a time-saving small hit that occurs during the b-time saving state. If this does not occur, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed.

If NO is determined in step S02TM3180 or NO in step S02TM3190, the CPU 103 once resets the time saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3200) and clears the time saving number counter. , initializes the time saving number count value to "0" (S02TM3210), clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM3220), and advances the process to step S02TM3230.

If the determination is YES in step S02TM3190 or after the process in step S02TM3220, the CPU 103 erases the data indicating the jackpot type via small hit stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 (step S02TM3230), and processes the special symbol. The value of the flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step S02TM3240), and the processing is ended as is. As a result, when a V win does not occur in the small winning gaming state, the state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, when the V winning flag is not set, the b time saving flag is set, and the small hit type is "normal small hit" (YES at step 02TM3180 → YES at step S02TM3190), that is, If the normal small win that occurs during the time saving state b does not result in a V win, the time saving flag is reset and the time saving number counter is cleared by skipping the series of processes from step S02TM3200 to step S02TM3210. If it is inside, even if a normal small hit occurs, the control in the b time saving state can be continued without being controlled to the normal state (falling down).

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be explained. In this example, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the production mode when the first flag, second flag, and third flag, which will be described later, are not set is [normal mode ], and the gaming state is controlled to either the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) or the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the first flag described later is set. The production mode is [Dream RUSH], the game state is controlled to b time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) or normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the second flag described later is When set, the production mode is [Invincible RUSH], and the gaming state is controlled to either a time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) or normal state (low accuracy/low base state), The production mode when a third flag, which will be described later, is set is [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figures 20-25).

In the example of the game flow shown in FIGS. 20-25, a jackpot occurs when the performance mode is [normal mode], and after the jackpot game state ends, the control is switched to the normal state, a time saving state, or b time saving state. and when controlled to the normal state, it shifts to [normal mode], when it is controlled to a time-saving state, it shifts to [Dream RUSH], and when it is controlled to b time-saving state, Transition to [Invincible RUSH].

In this game flow, explanations regarding irregular situations during the game will be omitted. As an example of an irregular situation during a game,
・Situations where a jackpot or small hit occurs on special map 2 during the normal state ・Situations where a V prize is won due to a small hit that occurs during the normal state ・Situations where a jackpot or small hit occurs on special map 1 during the time saving state ・Normal A situation where you won a V prize with a small hit - A situation where you did not win a V prize with a time saving small hit - A situation where the display result is "miss" in all fluctuation displays of 10,000 time savings - A situation where the number of jackpots occurs 10,000 times, etc. There is. These specific examples of irregular situations are only examples, and other situations not described here are also included.

(1) <Normal time>
The performance control CPU 120 changes the performance mode to [normal mode] when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state) and none of the first flag, second flag, and third flag is set. ].

(2) <First hit>
When a variable display in which the display result is a "jackpot" is executed in the above-mentioned state (1), the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types of the first special symbol include (2A) "symbol 3R normal jackpot", (2B) "symbol 3Ra time-saving jackpot", and (2C) "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot".

(2A) → (1)
When the jackpot is completed when the jackpot type is "symbol 3R normal jackpot", the state is controlled to (1).

(2B) → (3)
When the jackpot is completed when the jackpot type is "symbol 3Ra time-saving jackpot", the state is controlled to (3).

(2C) → (4)
When the jackpot is completed when the jackpot type is "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot", the state is controlled to (4).

(3) <a time saving 10,000 times>
The production control CPU 120 sets the production mode to [DREAM RUSH ].

(4) <b time saving 10,000 times>
The production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to [Invincible RUSH] when the game state is controlled to b time saving state (low accuracy/high base state), the second flag is set, and 10,000 variable displays are executed. ].

(5) <Jackpot>
In the state of (3) or (4) described above, or (7) described later, if the display result becomes "big hit" or "time-saving small win" in any of the variable displays, the jackpot gaming state (through the small win) (including the jackpot gaming state). In this embodiment, the jackpot type of the second special symbol when the display result is "jackpot" is "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot", and the second special symbol when the display result is "time-saving small hit" There is a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" as a jackpot type via a small hit.

(5) → (3)
When the jackpot is completed when the number of jackpot occurrences is "2", the state is controlled to (3).

(5) → (7)
When the jackpot is completed when the number of jackpot occurrences is "3" or more ("3" to "10000"), the state is controlled to (7).

(7) <a time saving 10,000 times>
The performance control CPU 120 controls the game state to be a time saving state (low accuracy/high base state), sets the third flag, and sets the performance mode to [ultra high speed] when 10,000 variable displays are executed. HYPER RUSH].

(6) <Falling hit>
In the above-mentioned state (3) or (7), when the display result becomes "normal small win" in any of the variable displays, the small win game state is controlled. In this embodiment, in the small winning game when the display result is "normal jackpot", the opening pattern of the V judgment winning device 87 is the first opening pattern, and the game ball is placed in the V judgment winning device 87. It is extremely difficult to do so, and it is virtually impossible to hit the jackpot.

(6) → (1)
If the small win type is "normal small win" and the small win ends without a V winning, the state is controlled to (1).

[First flag, second flag, third flag]
Next, the first flag, second flag, and third flag in this embodiment will be explained.

<First flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot (such as "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot", "a-time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit", etc.) is controlled to the jackpot game state. Further, it is assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 1 or 2. After the jackpot game state ends, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 and the game state is controlled to the time saving state a, the performance control CPU 120 sets the first flag.

A jackpot (including a jackpot via a small hit) in any of the variable displays after the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state a until the end of the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "lost". occurs and the jackpot game state is controlled, the performance control CPU 120 resets (erases) the first flag.

In addition, when the 10,000th variation display in which the display result is "miss" after the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) ends, the gaming state changes to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state). ) is controlled by A variable display based on the pending memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and A jackpot (including a jackpot via a small win) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the suspended memory (maximum of 4 in this example), and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or When the display result becomes "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the pending storage (maximum of 4 in this example), the performance control CPU 120 resets the first flag.

<Second flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot (such as "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot") that is controlled to the b time-saving state occurs after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. After the end of the jackpot game state, when the game state is controlled to b time saving state, the performance control CPU 120 sets the second flag.

A jackpot (including a jackpot via a small hit) in any of the variable displays after the gaming state is controlled to the b-time saving state until the end of the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "lost". occurs and the jackpot game state is controlled, the performance control CPU 120 resets (erases) the second flag.

Further, when the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "lost" after the gaming state is controlled to b time saving state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state). A variable display based on the pending memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and A jackpot (including a jackpot via a small win) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the suspended memory (maximum of 4 in this example), and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or When the display result becomes "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the pending memory (maximum of 4 in this example), the performance control CPU 120 resets the second flag.

<3rd flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the time-saving state a after the end of the jackpot (such as "time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit") occurs and the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Further, it is assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 3 or more. After the end of the jackpot game state, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more and the game state is controlled to the time saving state a, the performance control CPU 120 sets the third flag.

A jackpot (including a jackpot via a small hit) in any of the variable displays after the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state a until the end of the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "lost". occurs and the jackpot game state is controlled, the performance control CPU 120 resets (erases) the third flag.

In addition, when the 10,000th variation display in which the display result is "miss" after the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) ends, the gaming state changes to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state). ) is controlled by A variable display based on the pending memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and A jackpot (including a jackpot via a small win) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the suspended memory (maximum of 4 in this example), and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or When the display result becomes "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the pending memory (maximum of 4 in this example), the performance control CPU 120 resets the third flag.

[Production mode]
As shown in FIGS. 20-25, in this example, the production modes are [Normal Mode], [Dream RUSH], [Invincible RUSH], and [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH]. Among the production modes in this embodiment, production examples of [Dream RUSH], [Invincible RUSH], and [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] will be described below.

<Dream RUSH>
In this embodiment, the production mode when the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state or normal state and the first flag is set is [Dream RUSH] (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "[Dream RUSH] mode"). (See Figure 20-25 (3)). FIGS. 20-26 are explanatory diagrams showing effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is [Dream RUSH].

As shown in FIGS. 20-26 (1) to (4), based on the fact that the production mode is [Dream RUSH], the production control CPU 120 displays the first logo ( In this example, the words "Dream RUSH") are displayed. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed hitting promotion image on the upper right side of the screen of the image display device 5. This always right-handed driving promotion image is an image that includes the characters "right-handed hitting" and an arrow image that instructs right-handed hitting in order to enter the second starting prize opening.

(Fluctuating display of decorative patterns in [Dream RUSH])
In this embodiment, the decorative patterns when the production mode is [Dream RUSH] are composed of numerical patterns indicating numbers, etc., and are blue even-numbered patterns (corresponding to the numbers "2", "4", and "6"). red odd-numbered designs excluding the number "7" (numbered designs corresponding to the numbers "1", "3", "5"), and gold odd-numbered designs with the number "7" (number "7") It consists of a number pattern corresponding to Hereinafter, the decorative pattern when the production mode is [Dream RUSH] will be appropriately referred to as a "first decorative pattern." Note that the first decorative pattern may be composed of a number pattern and a pedestal pattern to be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the production mode is [Dream RUSH], the first decorative pattern is displayed in a scrolling manner in the vertical direction in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The vertical scroll display is a scroll display from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen. When this scroll display is being executed, the visibility of the decorative pattern is significantly reduced, and in this example, it is assumed that it is virtually impossible to visually recognize the decorative pattern.

Also, when the variation display of the first decorative pattern is executed when the production mode is [Dream RUSH], the size of the first decorative pattern does not change between the start of variation and the end of variation. shall be.

(Example of variable display of decorative designs in [Dream RUSH])
As shown in FIG. 20-26 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of the determined first decorative symbols (in this example, "245 ”) is displayed. At this time, a combination of small symbols ("245" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays one second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second pending display area 02TM02E, and corresponds to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed in the active display area 02TM03E. active display 02TM03 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (2), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is "miss", the performance control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the variation pattern, variable display of the first decorative pattern is started in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 newly displays an active display 02TM03 in a normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (3), at the timing when the first decorative symbol in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the following in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of first decorative symbols (in this example, "412") whose display result is "miss" is stopped and displayed. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the production control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At , the combination of the determined first decorative symbols (in this example, "412") is determined and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "412") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

(First logo display in [Dream RUSH])
In this embodiment, by changing the first logo display at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to perform a first logo cycle change effect that emphasizes the name of the currently controlled effect mode. The first logo cycle change performance is a performance that changes the first logo display in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 20-27 (A), when the first logo period change effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first logo (the letters "Dream RUSH") at a predetermined cycle. Lights up from the left edge to the right edge. The change period of the first logo period change effect is set to 5 seconds. In this way, by emitting light from the left end to the right end of the first logo display, during [Dream RUSH], it not only improves the entertainment of the performance, but also suggests a right-handed hit to win the prize into the second starting prize opening. are doing.

(First system display in [Dream RUSH])
In the embodiment described above, when controlled by [Dream RUSH], a right-hand hitting promotion image ("Right-handling ” character and arrow image), but it is not limited to this form, and when controlled by [Dream RUSH], it can be used as a promotional image to make the player enter the second starting prize opening. An image different from the right-handed hitting promotion image may be displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 at all times.

For example, when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the first system display may be displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting prize opening. The first system display is a moving image that includes the words "Right hit" and an arrow image for winning a prize into the second starting prize opening, and is a moving image that periodically moves in the left and right direction. The periodic interval of the operation of the first system display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

(First rotation compatible display in [Dream RUSH])
In the above embodiment, when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed are round objects. Although the example is shown in which a still image is displayed, the display is not limited to this form, and when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the second hold display corresponding to the number of second hold memories and the executed The active display corresponding to the variable display may be displayed in a display mode different from that of the still image of the round object.

For example, when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed are a round object that performs a rotating motion. It may also be displayed as a moving image. The second hold display or active display that performs the rotation operation at this time is referred to as a first rotation compatible display. The rotation period of this first rotation correspondence display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

<Invincible RUSH>
In this embodiment, the performance mode when the game state is controlled to b time saving state or normal state and the second flag is set is [Invincible RUSH] (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "[Invincible RUSH] mode"). (See Figure 20-25 (4)).

Based on the fact that the production mode is [Invincible RUSH], the production control CPU 120 displays a subtitle display including the words "Congratulations" at the upper right and lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 ([Invincible RUSH]). RUSH] background image). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed hitting promotion image on the upper right side of the screen of the image display device 5. This always right-handed driving promotion image is an image that includes the characters "right-handed hitting" and an arrow image that instructs right-handed hitting in order to enter the second starting prize opening.

(Fluctuating display of decorative patterns in [Invincible RUSH])
In this embodiment, the decorative pattern when the performance mode is [Invincible RUSH] is composed of the same numerical pattern as the decorative pattern when the performance mode is [Dream RUSH]. However, the decorative patterns when the production mode is [Invincible RUSH] are displayed in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 in a smaller format than the decorative patterns when the production mode is [Dream RUSH]. (See Figures 20-55 and 20-56). Below, the decorative pattern when the performance mode is [Invincible RUSH] will be appropriately referred to as a "second decorative pattern."

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second decorative pattern when the production mode is [Invincible RUSH] is the same as the variable display of the first decorative pattern when the production mode is [Dream RUSH]. In the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, the second decorative symbols are scrolled and displayed in the vertical direction. In addition, when the production mode is [Invincible RUSH], the variable display of the second decorative pattern is such that the second decorative pattern is updated and displayed, or the second decorative pattern is transformed in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. It may also be enlarged/reduced.

<Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH>
In this embodiment, the production mode when the game state is controlled to a time-saving state or normal state and the third flag is set is [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] (hereinafter referred to as "[Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] mode" as appropriate) ) (see Figure 20-25 (7)). FIGS. 20-28 are explanatory diagrams showing effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH].

As shown in FIGS. 20-28 (1) to (4), the performance control CPU 120 displays a second logo at the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the performance mode is [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH]. A display (in this example, the words "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH") is displayed. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed hitting promotion image on the upper right side of the screen of the image display device 5. This always right-handed driving promotion image is an image that includes the characters "right-handed hitting" and an arrow image that instructs right-handed hitting in order to enter the second starting prize opening.

(Fluctuating display of decorative patterns in [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, the decorative pattern when the performance mode is [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] is composed of a numeric pattern indicating a number, etc., and a pedestal pattern corresponding to the shape of this numeric pattern. Also, among the decorative patterns displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the center (design display area 5C) decorative pattern is located between the pedestal pattern and the number pattern (in this example, the center back of the number pattern). A light ray effect display is displayed from to the screen frame. The light ray effect display is an image that has a higher display priority than the pedestal pattern. Further, the numerical pattern is an image that has a higher display priority than the light beam effect display. Therefore, it appears to the player that the numerical symbols, the light beam effect display, and the pedestal symbols are displayed in this order. Below, the production mode is [Ultra High Speed HYPER]
RUSH], the decorative pattern is appropriately referred to as a "third decorative pattern".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the production mode is [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], the third decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner by enlarging/reducing the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this embodiment, the variable display (enlargement/reduction) of the third decorative pattern is executed in the following order (1)→(2)→(3).

(1) When the variable display starts, the third decorative pattern, which has been fixed and stopped corresponding to the display result of the previously executed variable display, is enlarged and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter referred to as , the third decorative pattern at this time is appropriately referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: large)"). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced and the light beam effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed, the display color of the third decorative pattern (blue, red, gold) is changed to white, thereby reducing the visibility of the third decorative pattern. . In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the transmittance of the third decorative pattern can be changed, and by setting the layer transmittance to a value other than 0% when the third decorative pattern is enlarged, the third decorative pattern can be changed. The visibility of the design may be reduced.

(2) Next, the third decorative pattern that had been enlarged and displayed immediately before is displayed in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time will be referred to as "the third decorative pattern (size ). The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols corresponding to the display result of the variable display. Further, as in the case of the enlarged display of the third decorative pattern, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced and the light ray effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, by changing the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative pattern to white and reducing the size of the third decorative pattern, The visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced. By reducing the visibility of the third decorative pattern in this way, even in the state (2) where the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the display result of the variable display is displayed, the player can This makes it difficult to recognize the display results of the variable display.

(3) Next, the third decorative pattern that was previously reduced and displayed is stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time will be referred to as "the third decorative pattern (size ). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is improved and a light ray effect display is displayed. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the display color of the third decorative pattern is changed from white to each color (blue, red, gold) to improve the visibility of the third decorative pattern. ing.

In this example, when the enlarged display/reduced display is executed, it is assumed that although the visibility of the display size and display color of the decorative pattern decreases, it is possible to visually recognize the decorative pattern.

(Example of fluctuating display of decorative designs in [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH])
As shown in FIG. 20-28 (1), the performance control CPU 120 selects the combination of the determined third decorative symbols (in this example, “245 ”) is displayed. At this time, a combination of small symbols ("245" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays one second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second pending display area 02TM02E, and corresponds to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed in the active display area 02TM03E. active display 02TM03 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (2), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is "miss", the performance control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the variation pattern, variable display of the third decorative pattern is started in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the third decorative pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display color of the third decorative pattern (blue, red, gold) to white and erases the light beam effect display. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "245") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display that was executed immediately before (in this example, "miss"). be.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 newly displays an active display 02TM03 in a normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-28(3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative pattern in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "412") corresponding to the display result of the variable display (in this example, "miss").

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "412") that results in a "miss" is stopped and displayed. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the production control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this step, the combination of the determined third decorative pattern (in this example, "412") is determined and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "412") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

In this way, as shown in Figure 20-26 (2), when the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is executed in [Dream RUSH], the decorative symbols are There are times when it becomes invisible. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 20-28 (2) to (5), when the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is executed in [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], the period from the start of the fluctuating display to the end is In this case, there is no timing when the decorative pattern becomes invisible, and it is possible to visually recognize it at any timing.

(Second logo display in [Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, by changing the second logo display at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to perform a second logo cycle change effect that emphasizes the name of the currently controlled effect mode. The second logo cycle change performance is a performance that changes the second logo display in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 20-27(B), when the second logo period change effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second logo display (the words "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH") at a predetermined period. Lights up from the left edge of the logo display to the right edge. The change period of the second logo period change effect is set to 0.5 seconds. In this way, by emitting light from the left end to the right end of the second logo display, during [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to improve the entertainment of the performance, and also to make the right-hand hit to win the prize into the second starting prize opening. It suggests.

(Second system display in [Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, when controlled to [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], a right-hitting promotion image (" We have shown an example of displaying the words "Right hit" and an arrow image, but this is not limited to this type of example. As the promotion image, an image different from the right-handed hitting promotion image may be displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 at all times.

For example, when controlled to [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], the second system display may be displayed on the upper right side of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting prize opening. The second system display is a moving image that includes the words "Right hit" and an arrow image for winning a prize into the second starting winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves in the left and right direction. The periodic interval of the second system display operation is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

(2nd rotation compatible display in [Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, when controlled by [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the number of second pending memories and the active display corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed are round shaped. Although an example is shown in which a still image of an object is displayed, it is not limited to this form, and when controlled by [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], a second hold display corresponding to the number of second hold memories and a second hold display corresponding to the number of second hold memories are shown. , the active display corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed may be displayed in a different display manner from the still image of the round object.

For example, when controlled by [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the number of second pending memories and the active display corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed are circular shapes that rotate. may be displayed as a moving image of the object. The second hold display or active display that performs the rotation operation at this time is referred to as a second rotation compatible display. The rotation period of this second rotation compatible display is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

[Accessories]
In this embodiment, a movable body 02TM100, which is an accessory, is provided near (above) the image display device 5. The movable body 02TM100 is controlled by the production control board 12 between an initial position, an intermediate production position (a position where a part of the movable body is exposed), and a maximum production position (a position where the entire movable body is exposed). Operate. Hereinafter, the intermediate performance position and the maximum performance position will be appropriately referred to as "performance position."

For example, the movable body 02TM100 operates as follows: initial position → intermediate presentation position → initial position, initial position → maximum presentation position → initial position, initial position → intermediate presentation position → maximum presentation position → initial position. Alternatively, the operation may be performed in the order of maximum presentation position → intermediate presentation position → initial position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-29, when the movable body 02TM100 is at the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is not located in front of the image display device 5. That is, in this embodiment, when the movable body 02TM100 is at the initial position, the configuration is such that it does not overlap the area of the image display device 5 and does not affect the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It has become.

On the other hand, in the process of moving the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the production position (intermediate production position, maximum production position), or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the production position, the movable body 02TM100 moves in front of the image display device 5. It is supposed to be located. That is, in this embodiment, when the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the production position or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the production position, the image overlaps with the area of the image display device 5 and is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The configuration affects the visibility of images displayed. In this example, when the first change effect described later is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the intermediate effect position, and when the second change effect described later is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the maximum effect position. It shall be. In the following, a performance in which the movable body 02TM100 operates in the order of initial position → intermediate performance position → initial position will be appropriately referred to as "intermediate motion performance", and a performance in which the movable body 02TM100 operates in the order of initial position → maximum performance position → initial position The performance is appropriately referred to as "maximum motion performance."

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the movable body 02TM100 has a regular hexagonal shape including a design imitating an ally character. The ally character of this movable body 02TM100 is the same character as the ally character that appears in the super reach performance (in this example, the super reach A performance).

In addition, the movable body 02TM100 is provided with a movable body LED, and when moving from the initial position to the production position, or at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the push button 31B is operated) when the movable body is in the production position, the movable body LED is activated. It may also be configured to be able to perform a light emitting effect in which the LED emits white light. Further, a plurality of different presentation modes may be provided as modes of the light emission presentation. For example, in addition to the presentation mode in which the movable body LED provided on the movable body 02TM100 emits white light, there may be a presentation mode in which it emits red light.

[Logo panel]
In this embodiment, a logo panel 02TM110 is provided near (above) the image display device 5. This logo panel shows the characters "XXX" (the name of the gaming machine, etc.), and the part of the logo panel with the characters "XXX" is assumed to emit light.

<Positional relationship between accessories and logo panel>
In this embodiment, a logo panel 02TM110 is arranged on the front side (player side) of the movable body 02TM100. As shown in FIG. 20-29 (1), when the movable body 02TM100 is at the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is located on the rear side (gaming machine side) of the logo panel 02TM110, so it is Visibility is reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-29 (2A), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate presentation position, a part of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, about the lower 2/3 of the movable body) is Since it is located below the area where panel 02TM110 is arranged, it is visible to the player. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20-29 (2B), when the movable body 02TM100 is at the maximum presentation position, the entire movable body 02TM100 (in this example, the entire movable body) is covered with the logo panel 02TM110. Since it is located below the area where the player is playing, it is visible to the player.

In this way, when the movable body 02TM100 is at the intermediate presentation position, only a part of the ally characters on the movable body are visible to the player. On the other hand, when the movable body 02TM100 is at the maximum performance position, all of the ally characters on the movable body are visible to the player.

[Change production]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The change effect is to change the corresponding display (pending display or active display) that corresponds to the variable display that was the subject of judgment at the time of start-up winnings to a blue mode (main display) that is different from the normal mode (in this example, a white round display). In this example, this is an example of a preview effect that is displayed in either a blue round display) or a red format (in this example, a red round display).

Specifically, among the change effects, execution of a pending change effect that causes the display mode of the pending display to be displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (either a blue mode or a red mode) is suspended. This is a pre-read preview that suggests the display result of the reserved memory. In addition, among the change effects, the active change effect that displays the display mode of the active display in a display mode different from the normal mode (either the blue mode or the red mode) is the display effect of the fluctuating display that is being executed. It is a preview performance that suggests that there will be changes. The timing at which the change effect is executed and the change pattern of the hold display will be explained in detail in FIGS. 20-39 (B1) to 20-40 (B4), which will be described later. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the change effects, a first change effect, a second change effect, and a third change effect, which have different presentation modes, can be executed.

<First change performance>
The first change effect is a series of effects consisting of (1A) to (1D) shown below.
(1A) A change precursor production in which a wavy effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wavy effect display") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. (1B) The movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the intermediate production position to the initial stage. (1C) Character appearance performance in which characters related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (1D) Friendly characters are displayed in response (active display, The first effect change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display by throwing one bomb against the pending display)

In addition, in (1D), the effect in which an ally character throws one bomb at the corresponding display (active display, pending display) is called the "first effect effect", and the effect in which the friendly character throws one bomb at the corresponding display where one bomb is thrown is The effect that changes the display mode is referred to as a "first corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, the first special It is possible to execute the first change effect when the variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed, and to execute the first change effect when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed. The configuration is such that it is not possible to do so.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the time saving state (a time saving state, b time saving state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed is the variation pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. There are many variation patterns with a shorter variation display period than the variation patterns selected in the normal state, and it is difficult to secure a period for executing the first change effect in the time saving state, so the second special A configuration is adopted in which the first change performance cannot be executed when a variable display corresponding to a symbol is executed.

However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first change effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and the structure corresponding to the second special symbol may be adopted. A configuration may be adopted in which the first change effect can be executed when the variable display is executed. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first change effect can be executed when a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, in order to secure a period for executing the first change effect, , the first change effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which after the change precursor effect is executed, the intermediate action effect, character appearance effect, and first action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, this is not limited to this form, and after the change precursor effect is executed, the intermediate action effect, character appearance effect, and first effect change effect are executed at a rate different from 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. There may be cases where it does not.

For example, if the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), only the change precursor performance is executed, and the false change precursor performance in which the intermediate action performance and subsequent performances of the first change performance are not executed. Performs processing to determine whether or not to execute the performance. At this time, it is decided to perform the false change precursor performance at a rate of 3%, and it is determined to not perform the false change precursor performance at a rate of 97%.

(Example of first change production)
FIGS. 20-30 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images of each effect related to the first change effect. This example shows an example in which the first change effect is executed while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the image in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Start the variable display of decorative patterns. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (2), at the timing when one second has elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays (1A) of the first change performance. A change precursor effect is executed, and a wavy effect display 02TM200 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 at the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (1A) change precursor performance of the first change performance and erases the wavy effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (1B) intermediate motion performance of the first change performance is executed, and the blackout display 02TM200B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the intermediate performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (4), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (1B) intermediate action performance of the first change performance and erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (1C) character appearance effect of the first change effect is executed, and the ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Similar ally characters) are displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the intermediate performance position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (5), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (1C) character appearance performance of the first change performance and erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (1D) first action change performance of the first change performance is executed, and the ally character 02TM30C that throws one bomb is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 against the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (6), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first action change performance (1D) of the first change performance, and displays the effect from the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. The character 02TM30C is erased, and the first effect display 02TM211 is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E. This first action effect display is an image larger than the active display 02TM03 and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, it appears to the player that only the first action effect display is being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-31 (7), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first action change performance (1D) of the first change performance, and displays an ally at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time as displaying the character 02TM30A, the first effect display 02TM211 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E, and the normal mode active display 02TM03 is changed to the blue mode active display 02TM03B.

<Second change performance>
The second change effect is a series of effects consisting of (2A) to (2D) shown below.
(2A) A change precursor production in which a wavy effect display (hereinafter referred to as a "wavy effect display") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. (2B) The movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the maximum production position to the initial stage. (2C) Character appearance effect in which characters related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (2D) Friendly characters are displayed in correspondence (active display, A second effect change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display by throwing three bombs at the pending display)

In addition, in (2D), the production in which the ally character throws three bombs at the response display (active display, pending display) is called the "second effect production", and the production in which the friendly character throws three bombs at the response display where three bombs are thrown is The effect that changes the display mode is referred to as a "second corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, the first special When the variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed, it is possible to execute the second change effect, and when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, the second change effect is executed. The configuration is such that it is not possible to do so.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the time saving state (a time saving state, b time saving state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed is the variation pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. There are many variation patterns with a shorter variation display period than the variation patterns selected in the normal state, and it is difficult to secure a period for executing the second change effect in the time saving state. A configuration is adopted in which the second change effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed.

However, this is not limited to this form, and a configuration may be adopted in which the second change effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and the second change effect cannot be executed. A configuration may be adopted in which a second change effect can be executed when the change display is executed. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the second change effect can be executed when a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, in order to secure a period for executing the second change effect, , the second change effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which after the change precursor effect is executed, the maximum action effect, character appearance effect, and second effect change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, this is not limited to this form, and after the change precursor effect is executed, the maximum action effect, character appearance effect, and second effect change effect are executed at a rate different from 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. There may be cases where it does not.

For example, when the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), only the change precursor performance is executed, and the false change precursor performance in which the maximum motion performance and subsequent performances of the second change performance are not executed. Performs processing to determine whether or not to execute the performance. At this time, it is decided to perform the false change precursor performance at a rate of 3%, and it is determined to not perform the false change precursor performance at a rate of 97%.

(Example of second change production)
FIG. 20-32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the second change performance. This example shows an example in which the second change effect is executed while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Start the variable display of decorative patterns. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (2), at a timing when one second has elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays (2A) of the first change performance. A change precursor effect is executed, and a wavy effect display 02TM200 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 at the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (2A) change precursor performance of the second change performance and erases the wavy effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the maximum motion effect (2B) of the second change effect is executed, and the blackout display 02TM200B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the maximum performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (4), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (2B) maximum movement performance of the second change performance and erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (2C) character appearance effect of the second change effect is executed, and the ally character 02TM30B (in this example, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Similar ally characters) are displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the maximum performance position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (5), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (2C) character appearance performance of the second change performance and erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the (2D) second action change performance of the first change performance is executed, and an ally character 02TM30C that throws three bombs is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 against the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (6), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second effect change performance of the second change performance, The character 02TM30C is erased, and the second effect display 02TM212 is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E. This second action effect display is an image larger than the active display 02TM03 and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, it appears to the player that only the second action effect display is being displayed. Further, the second effect display is a larger image than the first effect display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (7), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second action change performance (2D) of the second change performance, and displays an ally at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time as displaying the character 02TM30A, the second effect display 02TM212 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E, and the normal mode active display 02TM03 is changed to the red mode active display 02TM03R.

In this way, the (2D) second effect change effect of the second change effect is displayed in the number of bombs thrown by the ally character and in the active display area than the (1D) first effect change effect of the first change effect. The action is performed in an exaggerated manner in terms of the size of the effect display.

Note that in the above embodiment, the second change performance is more emphasized than the first change performance in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the ally characters and the size of the effect display displayed in the active display area. Although an example has been shown, the second change effect may be emphasized more than the first change effect using other methods.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which the first change effect is executed with a white background image when the effect is executed, and the second change effect is executed with a red background image when the effect is executed, the background In terms of the image, the second change effect may be more emphasized than the first change effect (red>white).

In addition, in the first change production, an ally character (small) is displayed when the production is executed, and in the second variation production, an ally character (large) whose display size is larger than the ally character (small) is displayed when the production is executed. By doing so, the second change effect may be more emphasized than the first change effect in terms of the display size of the ally character (ally character (large)>ally character (small)).

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the corresponding display (pending display or active display) can be displayed in two types of display modes, a blue mode and a red mode, which are different from the normal mode. The corresponding display is not limited to this format, and the corresponding display may be displayed in less than two types of display modes different from the normal mode, or may be displayed in three or more types of display modes different from the normal mode.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the corresponding display can be displayed in three or more display modes different from the normal mode, the corresponding display may be displayed in a blue mode, a red mode, a green mode, or a gold mode, which are different from the normal mode. It may be displayed in four types of display modes. At this time, the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of blue aspect<green aspect<red aspect<gold aspect.

<3rd change production>
The third change effect is (i) the timing at which the nth pending display corresponding to the starting prize is displayed in the pending display area (timing at the starting winning), (ii) the timing at which the pending display corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the pending display area. , the timing at which the fluctuation ranking in the pending display area shifts to a higher position (active display area side) (in the case of n≧2), and (iii) the pending display corresponding to the starting prize shifts to the active display area. At the timing (timing at which the active display corresponding to the starting prize is displayed), the corresponding display (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning is displayed in a manner different from the normal mode. be.

The third change production includes (i) a production that displays the pending display mode corresponding to the starting prize in a display mode different from the normal mode at the timing of the starting winning, and (ii) or (iii) shift. This includes an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display depending on the timing. In addition, in the third change production, like the first change production and the second change production, during the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol corresponding to this), it acts on the corresponding display (for example, when an ally character is bombing It does not include any effects that change the display mode (such as by throwing something) (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "action effects").

In this embodiment, the first special A configuration is adopted in which the third change effect can be executed in both cases, when a variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed and when a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed. ing.

In this embodiment, most of the variation patterns selected in the time saving states (a time saving state, b time saving state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed have extremely short variation display periods. Therefore, although it is difficult to secure a period to execute the change performance (first change performance, second change performance) that involves action performance in the time-saving state, the third change performance that does not involve action performance in the time-saving state Since it is easy to secure a period for executing, either when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed or when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed. However, the configuration is such that the third change performance can be executed even if

However, this is not limited to this form, and a configuration may be adopted in which the third change effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and the third change effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the third change effect cannot be executed when the variable display is executed.

[Ahead preview performance]
In the present embodiment, a preview effect or the like that foretells the expected degree of jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the expected level of jackpot in the variable display that is being executed, and a pre-read preview performance that foretells the expected level of jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending). In addition to the above-mentioned pending change performance, a first look-ahead performance and a second look-ahead performance can be executed as the look-ahead performance.

<First look-ahead performance>
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the first look-ahead effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first look-ahead effect is to indicate that the display result of the variable display that was subject to judgment at the time of starting winning is a "time-saving small hit" by using decorative patterns displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a type of advance preview production.

The first look-ahead performance is a series of performances consisting of (A) and (B) shown below.
(A) In <fluctuating display where the first look-ahead counter = 2>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the characters "HOLD") is displayed superimposed on the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area 5L. In the first look-ahead A performance in which the decorative design is fixed (the numerical design is not updated) (B) <Fluctuating display where the first look-ahead counter = 1>, the fixed icon is attached to the decorative design displayed in the design display areas 5L and 5C. (In this example, an icon containing the word "HOLD") is displayed in a superimposed manner, and these decorative patterns are fixed (the numerical patterns are not updated). 1st look-ahead B effect. For the 1st look-ahead counter, see Figure 20. -38 will be described in detail later.

In this embodiment, the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead A performance and the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead B performance are decorative patterns that include a common number pattern. Therefore, when the variable display that is subject to advance notice is executed, the variable display is started with the ready-to-reach state established in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C.

When it is decided to execute this first look-ahead effect in the starting winning effect determination process (see Figure 20-38), in the variable display that is executed when the first look-ahead counter = 1, the first look-ahead A A decorative pattern of a type common to the decorative pattern fixed by the performance is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C. By doing this, the types of decorative symbols fixed in the first look-ahead A performance and the first look-ahead B performance are common, and a ready-to-win state can be achieved in the variable display that is the target of the preview.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the notice is determined to be a "time-saving small hit", the variable display that is the subject of the notice will be of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead effect. It is assumed that the decorative symbol is determined as the final decorative symbol to be stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing this, it is possible to make the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead performance and the decorative pattern that is finally fixed and stopped in the variable display subject to notice to be a common type of decorative pattern. , it is possible to realize appropriate performance control as a look-ahead preview performance using decorative patterns.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the target of the preview is determined to be "off", the display result of the variable display that is the target of the preview will be a decoration of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead effect. The symbol is determined as a determined decorative symbol to be stopped in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and a decorative symbol of a different type from the decorative symbol fixed in the first look-ahead performance is determined as a determined decorative symbol to be stopped in the symbol display area 5R. shall be taken as a thing.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the first look-ahead effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect using decorative patterns in the pattern display area, but the present invention is not limited to this form. As the pre-reading preview effect, a different effect from the first pre-reading effect may be executed.

For example, as a look-ahead preview performance using decorative patterns in the pattern display area, a pattern enlargement effect in which the decorative pattern becomes gigantic is executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be suggested whether the display result of the fluctuation display is a "time-saving small hit" or not.

As a look-ahead preview performance using decorative patterns in the symbol display area, a pattern destruction performance in which the decorative patterns are destroyed (cut to pieces) in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is executed, and the special warning target is displayed. It may be suggested whether the display result of the variable symbol display is a "time-saving small hit" or not.

(Example of first look-ahead performance)
FIGS. 20-34 and 20-35 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images of each effect related to the first look-ahead effect.

In this example, when the performance mode is [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] (Jackpot occurrence count value = 3 or more, a time saving state), the number of second pending memories is 4, and 4 second pending displays are displayed. has been done. In addition, the display result of the pending memory whose fluctuation ranking is in the third position among these four pending memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win", and the starting winning time when the starting winning corresponding to this pending memory occurs. In the effect determination process (see FIG. 20-38), it is decided to execute the first look-ahead effect, and 3 is set in the first look-ahead counter.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (1), the performance control CPU 120 selects the fixed third decorative pattern combination of the previously executed variable display in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. (in this example, "721") is displayed. At this time, a combination of small symbols ("721" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second pending displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second pending display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIGS. 20-28).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (2), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next pending memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and causes the third decorative pattern to be displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first lookahead performance, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the first lookahead counter, the first lookahead A of the first lookahead performance The effect is executed to display the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E as the second pending memory number becomes 3, and also displays the active display 02TM03 in the second pending display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one to the active display area 02TM03E side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative pattern in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The third decorative pattern combination at this time is a third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "772") that indicates that the display result is "miss".

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5. Fixed icon 02TM41 is displayed in a superimposed manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "772") that results in a "miss" is stopped and displayed. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5. Fixed icon 02TM41 is displayed in a superimposed manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this step, the determined third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "772") is determined and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "772") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5. Fixed icon 02TM41 is displayed in a superimposed manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (6), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 1) based on the next pending memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and causes the third decorative pattern to be displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first lookahead performance, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the first lookahead counter, the first lookahead B of the first lookahead performance The effect is executed to display the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E as the second pending memory number becomes 2, and also causes the active display 02TM03 to be displayed in the second pending display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one to the active display area 02TM03E side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative pattern in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The third decorative pattern combination at this time is a third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "771") that indicates that the display result is "miss".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first prefetch B effect of the first prefetch effect, and displays the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5. A fixed icon 02TM41 is displayed superimposed on each of the ``7'' and ``7''.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "771") that results in a "miss" is stopped and displayed. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first prefetch B effect of the first prefetch effect, and displays the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5. A fixed icon 02TM41 is displayed superimposed on each of the ``7'' and ``7''.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the production control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this step, the combination of the determined third decorative pattern (in this example, "771") is determined and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols ("771" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first prefetch B effect of the first prefetch effect, and displays the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5. A fixed icon 02TM41 is displayed superimposed on each of the ``7'' and ``7''.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (10), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 0) based on the next pending memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and causes the third decorative pattern to be displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, which is a look-ahead notice performance, and the third decorative pattern (in this example, " 7" and "7"), the fixed icons 02TM41 are deleted from each of them.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E as the second pending memory number becomes 1, and also displays the active display 02TM03 in the second pending display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one to the active display area 02TM03E side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (11), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative pattern in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates that the display result is a "time-saving small hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") indicating that "time-saving small hit" is displayed is stopped. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At , the combination of the determined third decorative pattern (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

<Second pre-reading performance>
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the second look-ahead performance based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The second pre-reading effect is a system that indicates that the display result of the variable display that is subject to judgment at the time of starting winning is a "time-saving small hit" without using the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a type of advance preview production.

In the second look-ahead effect, the second look-ahead image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, thereby suggesting that the display result will be a "time-saving small win" in the variable display that is the subject of advance notice. In this example, the second look-ahead image is a combination of third decorative symbols indicating that the display result that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 is a "time-saving small hit". This is an image that includes a part of the image (in this example, "777"). Hereinafter, an image imitating the third decorative pattern included in this second pre-read image will be appropriately referred to as a "pseudo third decorative pattern". However, this pseudo third decorative pattern is a different image from the third decorative pattern because it does not correspond to the variable display being executed.

In this embodiment, the pseudo third decorative pattern is an image that includes a number pattern and a pedestal pattern, but does not include a light ray effect display. However, the pseudo third decorative pattern is not limited to such a form, and may be a decorative pattern that includes at least one of a number pattern, a pedestal pattern, and a light ray effect display.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example of an image including a part of the pseudo third decorative pattern is shown as the second pre-read image. May be used.

For example, the second pre-reading image may be an image including the character "V" or an image including the character "FEVER" indicating that the display result will be a "time-saving small win." Alternatively, the image may include an ally character related to a success performance or a victory performance in super reach.

In this embodiment, in the start-up winning effect determination process, the value of the second look-ahead counter that is set when it is decided to execute the second look-ahead effect becomes 2nd look-ahead counter = 1, 2. In the variable display, a second look-ahead effect is executed. However, the second lookahead effect is not limited to such a form, and the second lookahead effect may be performed in a variable display where the second lookahead counter is any value of 1, 2, 3, or 4. Note that the second look-ahead counter will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 20-38.

In this embodiment, when the second pre-read image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the second pre-read image is displayed on the screen other than the other performance images (the third decorative pattern, the words "Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH" at the top of the screen). etc.) has a lower display priority than other images. Therefore, it appears to the player that the other effect images and the second prefetched image are displayed in that order.

However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a configuration may be adopted in which the second prefetched image is an image having a higher display priority (display layer) than other effect images. In this case, by making the second pre-read image transparent, the second image is displayed in front of other effect images, but since the second pre-read image is transparent, It becomes possible to visually recognize the effect images (other effect images, etc.) related to the variable display.

In this embodiment, when the production mode is [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], when the second prefetch effect is executed and the second prefetch image is displayed on the image display device 5, the third decorative pattern is displayed. The visibility of the second pre-read image changes depending on the mode (enlarged display/reduced display). When the third decorative pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner, the visibility of the second pre-read image is reduced. That is, when the third decorative pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner, the visibility of the pseudo third decorative pattern included in the second pre-read image is reduced. Furthermore, when the third decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, the visibility of the second pre-read image is improved. That is, when the third decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, the visibility of the pseudo third decorative pattern included in the second pre-read image is improved.

(Example of second look-ahead performance)
FIGS. 20-36 and 20-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images of each effect related to the second look-ahead effect.

In this example, when the performance mode is [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] (Jackpot occurrence count value = 3 or more, a time saving state), the number of second pending memories is 4, and 4 second pending displays are displayed. has been done. In addition, the display result of the pending memory whose fluctuation ranking is in the third position among these four pending memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win", and the starting winning time when the starting winning corresponding to this pending memory occurs. In the effect determination process (see FIG. 20-38), it is decided to execute the second prefetch effect, and 3 is set in the second prefetch counter.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the fixed third decorative pattern combination of the previously executed variable display in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. (in this example, "721") is displayed. At this time, a combination of small symbols ("721" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second pending displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second pending display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various effect images corresponding to the effect mode being [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIGS. 20-28).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (2), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next pending memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and causes the third decorative pattern to be displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, executes the second look-ahead performance and The second pre-read image 02TM42 is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E as the second pending memory number becomes 3, and also displays the active display 02TM03 in the second pending display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one to the active display area 02TM03E side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36(3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative pattern in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The third decorative pattern combination at this time is a third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "415") that indicates that the display result is "miss".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the second prefetch effect and displays the second prefetch image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "415") that results in a "miss" is stopped and displayed. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the second prefetch effect and erases the second prefetch image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the production control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At , the combination of the determined third decorative pattern (in this example, "415") is determined and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "415") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (6), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol (second lookahead counter = 1) based on the next pending memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and causes the third decorative pattern to be displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, executes the second look-ahead performance and The second pre-read image 02TM42 is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E as the second pending memory number becomes 2, and also displays the active display 02TM03 in the second pending display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one to the active display area 02TM03E side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative pattern in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The third decorative pattern combination at this time is a third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "342") that indicates that the display result is "miss".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the second prefetch effect and displays the second prefetch image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "342") that results in a "miss" is stopped and displayed. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the second prefetch effect and erases the second prefetch image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the production control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this step, the combination of the determined third decorative pattern (in this example, "342") is determined and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "342") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (10), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 0), the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and causes the third decorative pattern to be displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E as the second pending memory number becomes 1, and also displays the active display 02TM03 in the second pending display area 02TM02E. The second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode is shifted one by one to the active display area 02TM03E side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (11), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative pattern in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates that the display result is a "time-saving small hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the display results in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") indicating that "time-saving small hit" is displayed is stopped. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the production control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At , the combination of the determined third decorative pattern (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

[Start winning performance decision process]
When a starting winning occurs, the CPU 103 sends a symbol designation command indicating the determination result of whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results, the determination result of the type of jackpot, and the winning determination result. A fluctuation category command that indicates the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and a pending memory number addition specification command that specifies that the number of pending memories has increased by 1 (first pending memory number addition specification command or second pending memory number addition specification command) and are sent to the performance control CPU 120.

FIG. 20-38 is a flowchart showing the start-up winning performance determination process. The performance control CP 120 executes the start-up winning performance determination process in the advance notice setting process (step S161) of the performance control process shown in FIG.

In the start-winning performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first issues a set of start-win commands (for example, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, and , the first pending storage number addition designation command, or the second pending storage number addition designation command) is confirmed (step S02TM4010).

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 stores a set of symbol designation commands, a fluctuation category designation command, a pending memory number addition designation command (a first pending memory number addition designation command, or a second It is determined whether a command for adding the number of pending memories has been newly stored. If the command at the time of one set of starting winnings has not been newly received (NO in step S02TM4010), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When a new command for one set of starting winnings is received (YES in step S02TM4010), the production control CPU 120 determines that the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the starting winnings is "Jackpot" or "Time". It is determined whether it is either "short or small hit" (step S02TM4015).

The variable display different from the variable display of the starting prize is the variable display currently being executed and the variable display of the pending memory other than the pending memory corresponding to the starting winning. Therefore, in the process of step S02TM4015, at the time of starting winning, the display result of the currently running variable display or the changing display of the pending memory other than the pending memory corresponding to the starting winning is "big hit" or "time-saving small win". It is determined whether or not.

If the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the starting prize is either a "big hit" or a "time-saving small win" (YES in step S02TM4015), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the starting prize is neither a "big hit" nor a "time-saving small win" (NO in step S02TM4015), the performance control CPU 120 sets a change pre-reading prohibition flag to be described later. It is determined whether or not (step S02TM4020). If the change prefetching prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4020), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S02TM4090.

In this embodiment, the change pre-reading prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the fact that it has been determined that at least one change performance (pending change performance, active change performance) will be executed. Since the process of steps S02TM4030 to S02TM4080 is skipped because the change prefetching prohibition flag is set, the change effect is executed for the pending memory whose execution is pending or the active display currently being executed. In the determined state, it is possible to restrict the execution of a change performance that changes the pending display or active display with respect to the variable display corresponding to a new starting winning. This change pre-reading prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the start winning performance determination process when the change pre-reading prohibition flag is set is completed.

If the change pre-reading prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4020), the production control CPU 120 sets the final display mode of the active display in the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 20-39 (A)). (Step S02TM4030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (step S02TM4040). If the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES at step S02TM4040), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S02TM4090.

If the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), the production control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display and the active display using the change pattern determination table (FIG. 20-39 (B1) to FIG. 20- 40 (B4))) (Step S02TM4050).

Here, the case where the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040) means that the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode. When the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode, a change effect is performed on the pending display or the active display to display it in a mode other than the normal mode. In other words, since at least one change effect is executed, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), either the pending display or the active display can be executed in any change pattern. You need to decide whether to change it. Therefore, in the case of NO in step S02TM4040, the change pattern of the pending display and active display is determined in the process of step S02TM4050 based on the change pattern determination table.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode of the changing performance based on the performance mode determination table for the changing performance (see FIGS. 20-41 (1) and (2)) (step S02TM4060).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets a change lookahead counter (step S02TM4070), which will be described later, and sets a change lookahead prohibition flag (step S02TM1080).

In this embodiment, a prefetch counter is set that indicates the number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch preview effect is executed. In this example, a look-ahead counter that indicates the number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the change performance among the look-ahead preview performances is executed is called a "change look-ahead counter", and The look-ahead counter that indicates the number of times the variable display that is the target of the variable display is executed is called the "first look-ahead counter", and the variable display that is the target of the second look-ahead performance of the look-ahead preview performance is executed. The prefetch counter that indicates the number of times the variable display is displayed is called a "second prefetch counter."

In the case of YES in step S02TM4020, in the case of YES in step S02TM4040, or after step S02TM4080, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more (step S02TM4090). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or more, that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (NO in step S02TM4090), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more, that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10,000 (YES in step S02TM4090), the performance control CPU 120 determines that the value of the second pending memory number is 3 or more. It is determined whether there is one (step S02TM4100). If the value of the second pending memory number is not 3 or more (NO in step S02TM4100), that is, if the value of the second pending memory number is between 0 and 2, the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the value of the second pending memory number is 3 or more (YES in step S02TM4100), that is, if the value of the second pending memory number is 3 or 4, the production control CPU 120 specifies the design by the symbol designation command. It is determined whether the displayed result is either a "miss" or a "time-saving small win" (step S02TM4110). If the display result specified by the symbol designation command is neither "miss" nor "time-saving small hit" (NO in step S02TM4110), that is, the display result designated by the symbol designation command is "big hit" or "normal small hit". If it is either "win", it is determined whether or not a first prefetching prohibition flag, which will be described later, is set (step S02TM4120). If the first prefetch prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4120), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S02TM4170.

In this embodiment, the first prefetching prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the fact that it has been determined that the first prefetching effect will be performed. Since the processing of steps S02TM4130 to S02TM4160 is skipped because the first prefetching prohibition flag is set, it has been decided to execute the first prefetching effect on the suspended memory whose execution is pending. In this state, execution of the first look-ahead effect can be restricted for the variable display corresponding to a new starting prize. This first pre-reading prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the starting winning performance determination process when the first pre-reading prohibiting flag is set is completed.

If the first prefetching prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4120), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first prefetching performance using the first prefetching performance execution/nonexecution determination table (FIG. 20-39 (B1)). (see step S02TM4130).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (step S02TM4140). If it is not determined to execute the first look-ahead effect (NO in step S02TM4140), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S02TM4170.

If it is determined to execute the first look-ahead effect (YES in step S02TM4140), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first look-ahead counter (step S02TM4150) and sets the first look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4160). ), the process proceeds to step S02TM4170.

In the case of YES in step S02TM4120, in the case of NO in step S02TM4140, or after step S02TM4160, the production control CPU 120 determines whether a second prefetch prohibition flag, which will be described later, is set (step S02TM4170). If the second prefetch prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4170), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

In this embodiment, the second prefetching prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the fact that it has been determined that the second prefetching effect will be performed. Since the processing of steps S02TM4180 to S02TM4210 is skipped because the second prefetch prohibition flag is set, it has been decided to execute the second prefetch effect on the suspended memory whose execution is pending. In this state, execution of the second look-ahead effect can be restricted for the variable display corresponding to a new start-up winning. This second pre-reading prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the starting winning performance determination process when the second pre-reading prohibiting flag is set is completed.

If the second pre-reading prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4170), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect using the second pre-reading effect execution/non-execution determination table (FIG. 20-39 (B2)). (see step S02TM4180).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the second prefetch performance (step S02TM4190). If it is not determined to execute the second look-ahead effect (NO in step S02TM4190), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If it is determined to execute the second look-ahead effect (YES in step S02TM4190), the effect control CPU 120 sets a second look-ahead counter (step S02TM4200) and sets a second look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4210). ), the process ends.

In this way, in the process of step S02TM4015, if the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the starting prize is neither "big hit" nor "time-saving small win", the corresponding display (pending display, active display) By skipping the process of determining whether to execute a change effect for (step S02TM4020 to step S02TM4080) and the process of determining whether to execute a first look-ahead effect or a second look-ahead effect (step S02TM4090 to step S02TM4210). , In a state where there is a variable display that has previously been determined to be a "big hit" or "time-saving small win," it is decided to perform a pre-read preview effect on the variable display corresponding to a new starting prize. It is possible to prevent appropriate performance control from being executed.

[Table referenced in process for determining performance at start-up winning]
FIGS. 20-39 to 20-42 are specific examples of tables that are referred to in any one of the starting winning performance determination processes. FIG. 20-39(A) is an example of an active display final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the active display final display mode in step S02TM4030. FIGS. 20-39 (B1) to 20-40 (B4) are examples of change pattern determination tables that are referred to when determining change patterns of the pending display and active display in step S02TM4050. FIG. 20-41 is an example of a performance mode determination table for a change effect that is referred to when determining a performance mode for a change effect in step S02TM4060. FIG. 20-42(1) is an example of a table for determining whether or not to perform the first pre-read effect that is referred to when determining whether to perform the first pre-read effect in step S02TM4130. FIG. 20-42 (2) is an example of a table for determining whether or not to perform the second pre-read effect that is referred to when determining whether or not to perform the second pre-read effect in step S02TM4180.

<Final display mode determination table for active display>
FIG. 20-39(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 20-39(A), in this embodiment, it is possible to determine one of the "normal mode", "blue mode", and "red mode" as the final display mode of the active display. A determination value is assigned to each of these aspects.

As shown in Figure 20-39 (A), if the judgment result at the time of the starting prize is "miss" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting prize is The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on (new pending memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 90%, and the blue mode (blue circle display) at a rate of 8%. ), and a red appearance (red circle display) occurs at a rate of 2%.

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "jackpot" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "jackpot"), a variable display based on the starting winning (new pending memory) The final display mode of the active display corresponding to is a normal mode at a rate of 75%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, and a red mode at a rate of 10%.

<Change pattern determination table>
FIGS. 20-39 (B1) and (B2) and FIGS. 20-40 (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of change pattern determination tables for pending display and active display. When the number of pending memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to a starting prize, (i) the timing at which the n-th pending display corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the pending display area (at the time of starting winning (timing), (ii) the timing at which the pending display corresponding to the starting winning is shifted to a higher position (active display area side) in the pending display area (in the case of n≧2), and (iii) the At the timing when the pending display corresponding to the starting prize shifts to the active display area (the timing at which the active display corresponding to the starting winning is displayed), the display information corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (pending display or active display) may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

In addition, in the explanation of FIGS. 20-39 (B1) and (B2) and FIGS. 20-40 (B3) and (B4), active shift means that the pending display shifts from the pending display area to the active display area. (As a result, an active display corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of determination at the time of starting winning is displayed).

In this embodiment, at any of the timings (i) to (iii) described above, a hold change effect is created in which display information (hold display) corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize is displayed in a manner different from the normal manner. It is doable. In this example, this hold change effect includes (i) an effect that displays the hold display mode corresponding to the start win in a display mode different from the normal mode at the timing of the start win, and (ii) or ( This includes an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display at the shift timing of iii). In addition, not limited to this form, the holding change effect may include acting on the holding display (for example, an arrow is stuck in the holding display) during the variable display of the special symbol (decorative pattern corresponding to this). An effect that changes the display mode may be included.

In Figures 20-39 (B1) and (B2) and Figures 20-40 (B3) and (B4), the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. It shows how the information (pending display or active display) will be displayed. In the change pattern shown in the figure, "normal" indicates a normal mode with a white round display, "blue" indicates a blue mode with a blue circle display, and "red" indicates a blue mode with a blue circle display. indicates a red form, which is a red circle.

([For 1 pending item] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of pending memories stored in the number of pending memories storage area is "1", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for one pending item shown in FIG. 20-39 (B1). . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 101 to 105 in accordance with the determined final display mode of active display.

The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the pending display of the notice target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, a change pattern from normal to normal. be.

Similarly, the change pattern 102 is from normal to blue, the change pattern 103 is from blue to blue, the change pattern 104 is from blue to red, and the change pattern 105 is from red to red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, "miss", "big hit", or "small hit"), the final display mode of the determined active display is Regarding the case of the blue mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 90%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is a red mode, the change pattern 101 is 10%, the change pattern 102 is 2%, the change pattern 103 is 10%, the change pattern 104 is 8%, the change pattern The determination values are assigned such that 105 is determined at a rate of 70%.

([For 2 pending items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of pending memories stored in the number of pending memories storage area is "2", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for two pending items shown in FIG. 20-39 (B2). . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 201 to 208 in accordance with the determined final display mode of the active display.

Change pattern 201 is such that the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, then the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display remains unchanged in the normal mode, that is, a change pattern from normal to normal to normal.

Similarly, the change pattern 202 is normal → normal → blue, the change pattern 203 is normal → blue → blue, the change pattern 204 is blue → blue → blue, the change pattern 205 is normal → blue red, the change pattern 206 is blue → The change pattern 207 is blue → red → red, and the change pattern 208 is a change pattern red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, "miss", "big hit", or "small hit"), the final display mode of the determined active display is In the case of the blue mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 80%. .

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is a red mode, the change pattern 201 is 10%, the change pattern 202 is 2%, the change pattern 203 is 2%, the change pattern 204 is 10%, the change pattern The determination values are allocated such that the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 1%, the change pattern 206 at 8%, the change pattern 207 at 8%, and the change pattern 208 at a rate of 60%.

([For 3 pending items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory number storage area is "3", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 3 pending items shown in FIG. 20-40 (B3). . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 301 to 308 in accordance with the determined final display mode of active display.

In the change pattern 301, after displaying the pending display of the preview target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the preview target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and then at the timing of the second pending shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, and the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, a change pattern of normal→normal→normal→normal.

Similarly, the change pattern 302 is normal → normal → blue → blue, the change pattern 303 is normal → blue → blue → blue, the change pattern 304 is blue → blue → blue → blue, and the change pattern 305 is normal → blue → red →red, change pattern 306 is blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 307 is blue → red → red → red, change pattern 308 is red → red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, "miss", "big hit", or "small hit"), the final display mode of the determined active display is In the case of the blue mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 6%, the change pattern 302 at 2%, the change pattern 303 at 2%, and the change pattern 304 at a rate of 90%. .

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is a red mode, the change pattern 301 is 10%, the change pattern 302 is 2%, the change pattern 303 is 2%, the change pattern 304 is 10%, the change pattern The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 1%, the change pattern 306 at 8%, the change pattern 307 at 8%, and the change pattern 308 at a rate of 60%.

([For 4 pending items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory number storage area is "4", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 4 pending items shown in FIG. 20-40 (B4). . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 401 to 412 in accordance with the determined final display mode of active display.

In the change pattern 401, after displaying the pending display of the preview target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the preview target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and then at the timing of the second pending shift. At the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains unchanged in the normal mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal mode. This is a change pattern that does not change as it is, that is, a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 402 is normal → normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 403 is normal → normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 404 is normal → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 405 is blue → blue → blue → blue → blue The change pattern 406 is normal → normal → blue → red → red, the change pattern 407 is normal → blue → blue → red → red, and the change pattern 408 is normal → blue → red → red → Red, change pattern 409 is blue → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 410 is blue → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 411 is blue → red → red → red → red, change pattern 412 is red → The pattern is red → red → red → red.

Here, regarding the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, "miss" or "jackpot") The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 401 is determined at 10%, the change pattern 402 at 10%, the change pattern 403 at 10%, the change pattern 404 at 10%, and the change pattern 405 at 60%. There is.

Further, when the final display mode of the determined active display is a red mode, the change pattern 401 is 20%, the change pattern 402 is 5%, the change pattern 403 is 5%, the change pattern 404 is 5%, the change pattern 405 is 20%, change pattern 406 is 2%, change pattern 407 is 2%, change pattern 408 is 2%, change pattern 409 is 7%, change pattern 410 is 6%, change pattern 411 is 6%, change pattern 412 Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio of 20% is determined.

<Table for determining the performance mode of change production>
FIGS. 20-41 (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of production mode determination tables for changing production. As shown in FIGS. 20-41 (1) and (2), in this embodiment, judgment values are assigned such that the determination ratio of the production mode of the variation production differs depending on the timing of the variation in the variation pattern. .

FIG. 20-41 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode determination table for the change presentation [for the first special symbol].

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal → blue", it is decided to execute the first change effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute the second change effect at a rate of 0%. , it is decided to execute the third change effect at a rate of 80%.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal → red", it is decided to execute the first change effect at a rate of 15%, and it is decided to execute the second change effect at a rate of 80%. , it is decided to execute the third change effect at a rate of 5%.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "blue → red", it is decided to execute the first change effect at a rate of 40%, and it is decided to execute the second change effect at a rate of 50%. , it is decided to execute the third change effect at a rate of 10%.

FIG. 20-41 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode determination table for the change presentation [for the second special symbol].

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal→blue", it is determined to execute the third change effect at a rate of 100%.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal→red", it is determined to execute the third change effect at a rate of 100%.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "blue→red", it is determined to execute the third change effect at a rate of 100%.

<First look-ahead performance production mode determination table>
FIG. 20-42(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table of the first look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 20-42 (1), in this embodiment, the determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect varies depending on the display result specified by the symbol designation command. ing.

If the display result is "miss", it is decided not to perform the first look-ahead effect at a rate of 90%, and it is decided to execute the first look-ahead effect at a rate of 10%.

Further, when the display result is "time saving small win", it is decided not to perform the first pre-reading performance at a rate of 70%, and it is decided to execute the first pre-reading performance at a rate of 30%.

<Table for determining the performance mode of the second look-ahead performance>
FIG. 20-42(2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table of the second look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 20-42 (2), in this embodiment, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of determining whether or not to execute the second look-ahead effect varies depending on the display result specified by the symbol designation command. ing.

If the display result is "miss", it is decided not to perform the second pre-reading effect at a rate of 95%, and it is decided to execute the second pre-reading effect at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the display result is "time saving small win", it is decided not to perform the first pre-reading performance at a rate of 80%, and it is decided to execute the first pre-reading performance at a rate of 20%.

In this way, when the display result is "miss", the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. Further, when the display result is "time saving small win", the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

Further, among the pre-read preview performances, the pattern enlargement performance may be executed at a higher rate than the pending pre-read preview performances. Further, the sum of the execution ratios of the first look-ahead performance and the pattern enlarging performance may be higher than the sum of the execution ratios of the second look-ahead performance and the suspended look-ahead preview performance.

[Jackpot count display]
In this embodiment, when the count value of the jackpot occurrence counter (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot occurrence count value" as appropriate) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (hereinafter as appropriate referred to as "mode switching determination value"), It uses a configuration in which the production mode changes during the state.

In this example, the mode switching determination value is set to "3". When the number of jackpot occurrences is 1 to 2 times counting from the first hit (that is, when the jackpot occurrence count value < mode switching judgment value), it can be controlled to [Dream RUSH] as the performance mode in the a time saving state, and the jackpot occurs. When the number of hits is 3 or more counting from the first hit (that is, when the jackpot occurrence count value≧mode switching judgment value), it is possible to control to "ultra high speed HYPER RUSH" as the performance mode in the a time saving state.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is less than or equal to the mode switching determination value, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period of time. The jackpot count display can inform you of the number of jackpots that have occurred since the first hit (jackpot occurrence count value), as well as the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching judgment value (mode switching judgment value - jackpot occurrence count value). Therefore, by displaying the jackpot count, you can determine how many jackpots are left to occur before moving to [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], in which the rate of execution of fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation display periods (fast fluctuation speed) is high. This can be suitably shown to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform a required number of jackpot notification performance in which the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching judgment value is notified without using a jackpot count display during the ending period of the jackpot. In the required number of jackpot notification performance, the required number of jackpots related to the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching determination value is reached is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The display of the required number of jackpots includes the words "n more times until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" (n=1, 2) (see FIG. 20-51 (8) and FIG. 20-56 (23)).

In this example, when a jackpot occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, two more jackpots are required to reach the mode switching judgment value, so the necessary number of jackpot notification performance is performed when a jackpot occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1. is appropriately referred to as "required jackpot number notification performance [twice]". In addition, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2, one more jackpot is required until the mode switching judgment value is reached, so the necessary number of jackpot notification performance that is executed when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 is It is appropriately referred to as "required number of jackpot notification performance [one time]".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (that is, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1, 2, or 3), a specific type of jackpot game state (in this example, "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot") ”, “Symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot”, “10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit”), or during the small-hit game period of a specific type of small-hit game state (in this example, “time-saving small win”), A jackpot count display is displayed on the left side or center of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, during the period when the performance mode in the a-time saving state is controlled to [Dream RUSH] (variable display start waiting period, variable display period), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

The jackpot count display is composed of four parts from the bottom of the screen to the top of the screen: a first count part, a second count part, a third count part, and a reaching part. The letters "V" and "WIN" are displayed in the first count section, second count section, and third count section of the jackpot count display. In addition, the words "PREMIUM FEVER" are displayed at the reaching part of the jackpot count display. Hereinafter, the first count section of the jackpot count display will be appropriately referred to as a "jackpot count display (first count section)" or "first count section." The same applies to the second count section, third count section, and reach section of the jackpot count display. Further, at least one of the first count section, second count section, and third count section of the jackpot count display will be appropriately referred to as a "count section".

<Display format of jackpot count display>
In this embodiment, in the jackpot count display, the display size of the reaching section is larger than the display size of any count section. Also, among the count parts of the jackpot count display, the display size of the third count part is larger than the display size of the first count part and the second count part, and the display size of the second count part is the display size of the first count part. larger than That is, the display size increases in the order of the first count section, second count section, third count section, and arrival section. Therefore, the information displayed in the count section (letter "V", letter "WIN", etc.) is different from the information displayed in the first count section, the information displayed in the second count section, and the information displayed in the third count section. The display size increases (displayed with emphasis) in the order of displayed information. Also, the information displayed in the arrival section (the letters "PREMIUM FEVER") is larger than the information displayed in any of the count sections (the letters "V", the letters "WIN", etc.). (highlighted).

In the above embodiment, as a method of varying the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display, an example was shown in which the degree of emphasis is varied by changing the display size. However, other methods are not limited to this method. The degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display may be varied using the above method.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which each part of the jackpot count display can emit light, the jackpot can be achieved by increasing the luminance of the light in the order of the first count part, second count part, third count part, and reaching part. The degree of emphasis of each part of the count display may be varied.

In addition, when adopting a configuration that allows each part of the jackpot count display to blink, the jackpot can be realized by shortening the blinking interval in the order of the first count part, second count part, third count part, and reach part. The degree of emphasis of each part of the count display may be varied.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of emphasis is varied by changing the display mode of each part of the jackpot count display, but the present invention is not limited to such a format, and it is possible to vary the overall display mode of the jackpot count display. The degree of emphasis may be varied depending on the situation.

For example, in a configuration where the transmittance of the jackpot count display can be set to an arbitrary value, when the jackpot count display corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value = 1 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display has a transmittance of 90%. When the jackpot count display corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 is displayed in the display mode, the entire jackpot count display is displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 50%, and the jackpot count display corresponds to the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. When the jackpot count display is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transmittance of 0%.

In this embodiment, the count section (first count section, second count section, third count section) of the jackpot count display has three types of display modes: an initial mode, a first variation mode, and a second variation mode. It can be displayed in In the present embodiment, a performance that changes the count section from the initial mode to the first change mode is referred to as a V change mode, and a performance that changes the count section from the first change mode to the second change mode is called a WIN change mode.

A series of performances of the V change performance and the WIN change performance performed for the first count part are appropriately referred to as "first stage performance", and the V change performance and the WIN change performance performed for the second count part A series of performances will be appropriately referred to as a "second stage performance", and a series of performances of the V change performance and the WIN change performance executed for the third counting section will be appropriately referred to as a "third stage performance".

When the count section is displayed in the initial mode, the information displayed on the count section is a white letter "V", and when the count section is displayed in the first variation mode, the information displayed on the count section is "V" in red letters, and when the count section is displayed in the second variation mode, the information displayed on the count section is "WIN" in red letters.

In this embodiment, when a V change effect is executed for the counting section, a jackpot occurrence display related to the occurrence of a jackpot displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, in FIG. 51 (5)) acts on the white character "V" displayed in the count section in the initial mode, the "V" displayed in the count section in the first variation mode is "V" in red.

Further, the reached portion of the jackpot count display can be displayed in two types of display modes: an initial mode and a changed mode. In this embodiment, the effect of changing the reaching part from the initial mode to the changed mode is referred to as the reaching part changing effect.

When the destination section is displayed in the initial mode, the information displayed on the destination section is "PREMIUM FEVER" in white text, and when the destination section is displayed in the changed mode, the information displayed on the destination section is "PREMIUM FEVER" is written in red.

<[At the time of jackpot] Display timing and change timing of jackpot count display>
In this embodiment, if it is decided to display the jackpot count display in the jackpot performance determination process (see Figure 20-43), each time a jackpot occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2, 3. In the jackpot game state, a jackpot count display can be displayed, and the display mode of each count part corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value is changed in the order of an initial mode, a first variation mode, and a second variation mode.

In this embodiment, a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more is mainly a jackpot that occurs when the control is in a time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed. It is. When the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the display result becomes a "small hit" and the V-winning occurs, rather than a jackpot that occurs due to the display result becoming a "jackpot". A jackpot via a small hit, which is a jackpot, has a higher probability of occurring (see Figure 20-2 (B2)). Therefore, in this example, when explaining the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more, we will use an example where a jackpot occurs via a small hit, but the display result will be a "jackpot". The same applies to the case of a jackpot that occurs, so the explanation will be omitted.

(1) <When a jackpot occurs with jackpot occurrence count value = 1>
(1-1) During the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the right-hand hit notification of the first round ends to the timing when the second round ends), the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A jackpot count display will be displayed. At this time, each count section and arrival section are both displayed in the initial format (see FIG. 20-51 (5)).

(1-2) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts to the timing when the first predetermined period has elapsed), a jackpot appears in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A count display is displayed. At this time, a V change effect is executed for the first count section, and the first count section changes from the initial mode to the first change mode. Further, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section are all continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 20-51 (6)).

(1-3) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has elapsed to the timing when the second predetermined period has elapsed), an image is displayed. A jackpot count display is continuously displayed in the center of the screen of the device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed for the first count section, and the first count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. Further, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section are all continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 20-51 (7)).

(2) <When a jackpot occurs with jackpot occurrence count value = 2>
(2-1) The small winning game period in the small winning gaming state and the jackpot round period in the jackpot gaming state (in this example, from the timing when the V winning prize in the small winning gaming period is issued until the end of the second round of the jackpot round period period), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second changed mode, and the second count section, the third count section, and the reaching section continue to be displayed in the initial mode ( (See Figure 20-56 (20)).

(2-2) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts to the timing when the first predetermined period has elapsed), a jackpot appears in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A count display is displayed. At this time, a V change effect is executed for the second counting section, and the second counting section changes from the initial mode to the first changing mode. Furthermore, the first count section is continuously displayed in the second changed mode, and the third count section and the reaching section are both continuously displayed in the initial mode (Figure 20-56 (21) reference).

(2-3) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has elapsed to the timing when the second predetermined period has elapsed), an image is displayed. A jackpot count display is continuously displayed in the center of the screen of the device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed for the second counting section, and the second counting section changes from the first changing mode to the second changing mode. Furthermore, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second changed mode, and both the third count section and the reaching section continue to be displayed in the initial mode (Figure 20-56 (22) reference).

(3) <When a jackpot occurs with jackpot occurrence count value = 3>
(3-1) The small winning game period in the small winning gaming state and the jackpot round period in the jackpot gaming state (in this example, from the timing when the V winning prize in the small winning gaming period is issued to the end of the second round of the jackpot round period period), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section and the second count section are continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the third count section and the reaching section are both continuously displayed in the initial mode (Fig. 20-59 (11)).

(3-2) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts to the timing when the first predetermined period has elapsed), a jackpot appears in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A count display is displayed. At this time, a V change effect is executed for the third counting section, and the third counting section changes from the initial mode to the first changing mode. Furthermore, the first count section and the second count section are continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the reaching section is continuously displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 20-59 (12)). .

(3-3) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has elapsed to the timing when the second predetermined period has elapsed), an image is displayed. A jackpot count display is continuously displayed in the center of the screen of the device 5. At this time, the second change effect is performed on the third count section, and the third count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. The first count section and the second count section are continuously displayed in the second changed mode, and the arrival section is continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 20-59 (13)).

(3-4) Next, the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts and the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period have elapsed to the timing when the third predetermined period has elapsed) ), the jackpot count display is continuously displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the reaching part change effect is executed for the reaching part, and the reaching part changes from the initial mode to the changed mode. The first count section, second count section, and third count section are continuously displayed in the second variation mode (see Figure 20-59 (14)).

<Display timing of jackpot count display in [time saving state]>
In this embodiment, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the a time saving state that is controlled after a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2 occurs.

In this example, in the a time saving state = [Dream RUSH] that is controlled after a jackpot occurs where the jackpot occurrence count value = 1 or 2, the variable display is displayed based on the jackpot count display flag described later being set. During the start waiting period and variable display period, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (see Figures 20-58 (1) and (2), and Figures 20-61 (1) to () 3)).

However, in the a time saving state = [Dream RUSH] which is controlled after a jackpot occurs where the jackpot occurrence count value = 1 or 2, the super reach effect will not work even during the variable display period when the jackpot count display flag is set. During the period when is being executed, the jackpot count display is erased from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 and is not displayed (see Figures 20-58 (3) and (8), and Figure 20-61 (4)). ) to (7)). If it has developed into a super reach effect, the display result will be a ``time-saving small hit'' (via the small hit), and the display will notify whether or not a jackpot will occur, or the display result will be a ``normal small hit'' and fall back to the normal state. We are performing a performance to let you know whether or not it will happen. The information that informs the current number of jackpot occurrences (jackpot occurrence count value) (jackpot count display) is more important than the information related to the super reach effect (super reach effect effect image) that informs the display results of the fluctuating display that is being executed. Since the priority for the player is low, the jackpot count display is not displayed when the super reach effect is developed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display is not displayed when the super reach effect is developed, but it is not limited to this form, and even when the super reach effect is developed, the jackpot count display is not displayed. A jackpot count display may be displayed.

<Display mode of jackpot count display in [time saving state]>
In the present embodiment, the jackpot count display displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 is controlled to the a time saving state in the a time saving state that is controlled after a jackpot with the jackpot occurrence count value = 1 or 2 occurs. It is displayed in the same display mode as the display mode immediately before being erased when it was displayed in the previous jackpot.

In this example, in the a time-saving state = [Dream RUSH] that is controlled after a jackpot occurs where the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, the jackpot immediately before being erased when it is displayed as a jackpot (jackpot count = 1) Display mode of count display (the first count section is displayed in the second change mode, and the second count section, third count section, and arrival section are all displayed in the initial mode (Figure 20-51 (7) A jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the same display manner as (see)).

In addition, in the a time saving state = [Dream RUSH] that is controlled after a jackpot occurs where the jackpot occurrence count value = 2, the jackpot count display immediately before being erased when it is displayed as a jackpot (jackpot count = 2) The display mode (the first count section and the second count section are displayed in the second change mode, and the third count section and the reaching section are displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 20-56 (22)) In a similar display manner, a jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

[Jackpot production decision processing]
FIG. 20-43 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the jackpot. The performance control CPU 120 executes the jackpot performance determination process shown in FIG. 20-43 in the jackpot performance process (step S176) of the performance control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the jackpot start designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance to be performed during the jackpot (and the performance not to be performed) by the performance determination process during the jackpot shown in FIG. 20-43.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (step S02TM5010).

If the jackpot type of the jackpot is "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (YES in step S02TM5010), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the jackpot type of the jackpot is not "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (NO in step S02TM5010), that is, the jackpot type is "symbol 10Ra time saving jackpot", "symbol 10Rb time saving jackpot", "10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small hit", etc. If it is any of the jackpot types, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM5020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM5020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10000), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM5020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is one of 1 to 3, the performance control CPU 120 will display the jackpot count display. It is determined (step S02TM5030), and a jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM5040).

The jackpot count display flag is a type of flag that is set when it is determined that the jackpot count display is to be displayed at the start of a jackpot or when a V win occurs in a small win. This jackpot count display flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot count display is to be displayed in the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, or time saving state, and the above-mentioned first flag or second flag is erased (reset). It will be deleted at the same timing as the timing.

After the process of step S02TM5040, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (step S02TM5050).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (YES in step S02TM5050), the performance control CPU 120 executes the first stage performance (V change performance, WIN change performance) for the first count part of the jackpot count display. It is decided to do so (step S02TM5060), and it is decided to execute the necessary number of jackpot notification effect [2 times] (step S02TM5070), and the process is ended as it is.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 1 (NO in step S02TM5050), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (step S02TM5080).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (YES in step S02TM5080), the performance control CPU 120 executes the second stage performance (V change performance, WIN change performance) for the second count part of the jackpot count display. It is decided to do so (step S02TM5090), and it is decided to execute the necessary number of jackpot notification effect [1 time] (step S02TM5100), and the process is ended as it is.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 2 (NO in step S02TM5080), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (step S02TM5110). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 (NO in step S02TM5110), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (YES in step S02TM5110), the performance control CPU 120 executes the third stage performance (V change performance, WIN change performance) for the third count part of the jackpot count display. It is decided to do so (step S02TM5120), and it is decided to execute the arrival part change effect (step S02TM5130), and the process is immediately terminated.

[Small hit performance determination process]
FIG. 20-44 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during a small hit. The performance control CPU 120 executes the small hit performance determination process shown in FIG. 20-44 in the small hit performance process (step S174) of the performance control process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the small hit start designation command, the production control CPU 120 determines the production to be executed during the small win (and the production not to be executed) through the production determination process during the small win shown in FIG. 20-44. .

In this example, in the small winning opening process that is executed when the small winning gaming state is controlled, if a V winning has occurred, the jackpot occurrence count value as predetermined numerical data is added by 1. It is assumed that the update process is being executed.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the V winning flag is set (step S02TM6010). If the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM6010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V winning flag is set (YES in step S02TM6010), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM6020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10000), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM6020), that is, the jackpot occurrence count value is between 1 and 3 (the jackpot via the small hit at the first time (jackpot occurrence count value = 1) is irregular). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM6030), sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM6040), and ends the process.

[Process for determining performance while waiting for fluctuation to start]
FIG. 20-45 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the start waiting period of the variable display. The performance control CPU 120 executes the variation start waiting performance determination process shown in FIG. 20-45 in the variable display start waiting performance process (step S170) of the performance control process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the customer waiting demo command, the production control CPU 120 determines the production to be executed (and the production not to be executed) during the waiting period for the variable display start, using the variation start waiting production determination process shown in FIG. 20-45. decide.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM7010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM7010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM7010), the production control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM7020) and ends the process.

[Process for determining performance at the start of fluctuation]
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result specification command that specifies a display result, a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern, and a pending memory number subtraction specification command (first pending memory number subtraction specification). command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) to the production control CPU 120.

When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number subtraction designation command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the number of pending memories has been subtracted. memory number subtraction designation command or second pending memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot, loss, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, etc.), and the variation time and amount of special symbols. A variable display of special symbols is executed based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 00, such as a variable pattern designation command that specifies production content (reach, pseudo-run, etc.); , it is possible to specify the variation time of the special symbol and the content of the performance (reach, pseudo-run, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is determined, the performance control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and receives the special symbol (the first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 20-46 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of variation. The performance control CPU 120 executes the variation start performance determination process shown in FIG. 20-46 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. A production control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern is set based on the specified variation pattern. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 20-46.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM8010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM8010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM8010), the production control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count (step S02TM8020).

In this way, in this variation start performance determination process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot count display that was determined to be displayed in the variation start wait performance determination process (see FIG. 20-45) should be continuously displayed at the start of variation. We are determining whether

[Fluctuating performance judgment processing]
FIG. 20-47 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the execution period of the variable display. The performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display determination process shown in FIG. 20-47 in the variable display performance process (step S172) of the performance control process shown in FIG. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance to be performed (and the performance not to be performed) during the execution period of the fluctuating display by the fluctuating performance determination process shown in FIG. 20-47.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM9010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM9010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM9010), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020), indicating the timing of the development of the fluctuation pattern to super reach. It is determined whether or not (step S02TM9030).

The CPU 103 determines whether the special symbol process shown in FIG. 16 measures the elapsed time after the special symbol starts changing or whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In the special symbol variation process (S112) which includes the process of determining whether or not it is possible to obtain information regarding the elapsed time of the currently executed variation display. Then, in step S02TM9030, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current variation time is the development timing to super reach in the variation pattern based on the information.

If it is not the timing for the variation pattern to develop to super reach (NO in step S02TM9030), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If it is the timing for the variation pattern to develop to super reach (YES in step S02TM9030), the production control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display (step S02TM9040) and ends the process.

In this way, in this performance determination process during fluctuation, it is determined whether or not to continue displaying the jackpot count display that was determined to be displayed during the fluctuation start waiting performance determination process (see FIG. 20-45) during fluctuation. It also determines whether or not to erase the data while it is changing.

[Example of production when the first hit is "Symbol 3R normal jackpot"]
An example of the performance when the first hit of "symbol 3R normal jackpot" occurs while the game is controlled in [normal mode] will be explained using FIGS. 20-48 to 20-49.

FIG. 20-48 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the first hit of "symbol 3R normal jackpot" occurs when the control is in [normal mode]. is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to the case where the first hit of "symbol 3R normal jackpot" occurs when the game is controlled in the [normal mode].

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to [normal mode], after the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is a "jackpot" ("symbol 3R normal jackpot") is executed, the jackpot game state, and then the production mode is controlled to [normal mode].

First, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (1), when the production mode is controlled to [normal mode], the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol at the timing (T1 shown in FIG. 20-48). At this timing), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, selects a combination of confirmed decorative symbols (in this example Now, "222") is fixedly stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value has been updated to 1 in the special symbol stop process (see FIGS. 20-22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 20-48), the production control CPU 120 receives the jackpot start designation command, and starts the production. The control for setting the mode to the [normal mode] is ended, and a jackpot start image (in this example, the characters "FEVER") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-48), the performance control CPU 120 , causes the image display device 5 to display a jackpot round game image. This jackpot round game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot round game, and a prize pitch number display (in this example, "TOTAL") indicating the total number of awarded balls. 00000").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed hitting promotion image at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. This image that always promotes right-handed hitting is an image that includes the words "right-handed hitting" and an arrow image that instructs right-handed hitting in order to win into the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening (in this case, the big winning opening). .

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round game in the jackpot game state (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-48), the performance control CPU 120 receives the jackpot end designation command. displays a jackpot end image (in this example, a total number of prize balls display (letters "TOTAL 00450") indicating the total number of prize balls given, and an ally character) on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared in the jackpot termination process (see FIGS. 20-23).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the jackpot game state (timing T5 shown in FIG. 20-48), the production control CPU 120 changes the production mode to [normal mode]. The controller is controlled to display a fixed decorative pattern combination (in this example, ``222'') that is common to the fixed decorative pattern combination fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, a combination of small symbols ("222" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, a background image corresponding to the [normal mode] (in this example, a sunny background image including the sun and mountains) is displayed as the background image.

[Example of production when the first hit is “Symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot”]
An example of the performance when the first hit of "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" occurs when the game is controlled in [normal mode] will be explained using FIGS. 20-50 to 20-52.

FIG. 20-50 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the first hit of "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" occurs when the control is in [normal mode]. And FIG. 20-52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to the case where the first hit of "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot" occurs when the control is in the [normal mode].

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to [normal mode], after the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is a "jackpot" ("symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot") is executed, the jackpot game The production mode is then controlled to [Dream RUSH].

First, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (1), when the production mode is controlled to [normal mode], the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol at the timing (T1 shown in FIG. 20-50). At this timing), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, selects a combination of confirmed decorative symbols (in this example Now, "555") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "555") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value has been updated to 1 in the special symbol stop process (see FIGS. 20-22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 20-50), the production control CPU 120 receives the jackpot start designation command, and starts the production. The control for setting the mode to [normal mode] is ended, and a jackpot start image (in this example, the words "Dream FEVER") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-48), the performance control CPU 120 As described in FIG. 20-49 (3), the right-handed hitting promotion image is always displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the emphasized right-handed hitting promotion image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-handed hitting promotion image is an image that includes the text "Right-handed hitting" and an arrow image that instructs right-handed hitting in order to win into the big winning hole, and the image containing text and arrow images is more important than the constant right-handed hitting promotion image. is emphasized.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the jackpot round game start image to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. However, this jackpot round game start image has a lower display priority than the emphasized right-hitting promotion image. Therefore, it appears to the player that the highlighted right-hitting promotion image and the jackpot round game start image are displayed in this order. However, in this example, since the display area of the jackpot round game start image and the emphasized right-handed hitting promotion image is common (the entire screen of the image display device 5), only the emphasized right-handed hitting promotion image can be viewed by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (4), the performance control CPU 120 erases the emphasized right-hitting promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-50). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the jackpot round game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This jackpot round game start image has a round display indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot round game (in this example, the words "Round 1"), and the words "Aim for the attacker!!" to enter the jackpot and the right side. This is an image that includes a jackpot right-hitting promotion image that includes an arrow image that instructs hitting, and an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (5), the performance control CPU 120 erases the jackpot round game start image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the initial mode on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. Display the jackpot count display 02TM300 (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 20-50).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes a jackpot occurrence display (in this example, a red letter "V") to be displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (6), the performance control CPU 120 moves the jackpot count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes the V change performance for the first count section. Then, the first count section is changed from the initial mode (white letters "V") to the first change mode (red letters "V") (timing T6 shown in FIG. 20-50).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a round display corresponding to the currently executed round (in this example, the characters “Round 3”) at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5. At the bottom right of the screen, a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00300") corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes the WIN change effect on the first count section, and changes the first count section to the first change mode (white letters of "V"). ) to the second change mode (red letter “V”) (timing of T7 shown in FIG. 20-50).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently executed round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the assigned current round display. A prize ball number display (in this example, characters "TOTAL 00330") corresponding to the prize ball number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round game in the jackpot game state (timing T8 shown in FIG. 20-50), the production control CPU 120 receives the jackpot end designation command. executes the required number of jackpot notification effect, and displays the required number of jackpots related to the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching judgment value on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (“2 more to ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH”) ” characters) are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-52 (9), the performance control CPU 120 ends the required number of jackpot notification performance, erases the display of the required number of jackpots from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and A production mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream RUSH") is displayed on the entire screen (timing T9 shown in FIG. 20-50).

[Example of production when the first hit is "Symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot"]
When controlled by [Normal mode], the first hit of "Symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, and then when controlled by [Invincible RUSH], the jackpot of "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" occurs. Examples of effects when this occurs will be explained using FIGS. 20-53 to 20-56.

Figure 20-53 shows that when controlled to [Normal mode], the first hit of "Symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, and then when it is controlled to [Invincible RUSH], "10Rb via time-saving small hit" occurs. 20-54 to 20-56 are time charts showing the execution timing of each performance related to the case where a jackpot of "Time-saving jackpot" occurs. An explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to the case where the first hit of "Time saving jackpot" occurs and then the jackpot of "10Rb time saving jackpot via time saving small hit" occurs while being controlled by [Invincible RUSH]. be.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to [normal mode], after the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is "jackpot" ("symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot") is executed, the jackpot game After that, the production mode is controlled to [Invincible RUSH], and during this [Invincible RUSH], the variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is "Time-saving small hit" is executed, and the said small hit is executed. It is assumed that a V winning occurs and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (1), when the production mode is controlled to [normal mode], the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol at the timing (T1 shown in FIG. 20-53). At this timing), the performance control CPU 120, which received the symbol confirmation designation command, selects a combination of confirmed ornamental symbols (in this example Now, "777") is permanently stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value has been updated to 1 in the special symbol stop process (see FIGS. 20-22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 20-53), the production control CPU 120 receives the jackpot start designation command and starts the production. The control for setting the mode to [normal mode] is ended, the first part of the 3000 notification effect is executed, and the words "Dream FEVER" are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (3), the performance control CPU 120 executes the second part of the 3000 notification performance and displays the words "Dream FEVER" on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Then, a crack image showing a cracked screen is superimposed and displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-53). The cracked image has a higher display priority than the words "Dream FEVER". Therefore, it appears to the player that the cracked image and the words "Dream FEVER" are displayed in that order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (4), the performance control CPU 120 executes the third part of the 3000 notification performance and erases the words "Dream FEVER" and the cracked image from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the blackout display 02TM200B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-53).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (5), the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth part of the 3000 notification performance, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and also erases the image display. The characters "3000" are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the device 5 (timing T5 shown in FIG. 20-53).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the accessory does not operate when the 3000 notification effect is executed, but the example is not limited to such a form, and even if the accessory operates when the 3000 notification effect is executed. good. For example, when the fourth part of the 3000 notification effect is executed, the movable body 02TM100 may be moved from the initial position to the maximum effect position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (6), the performance control CPU 120 executes the fifth part of the 3000 notification performance and displays the characters "3000 FEVER" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (FIG. T6 timing shown in -53).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, the 3000 notification effect consisting of the first part to the fifth part is executed, and the 10 rounds of the first hit are It is possible to notify that a total of 3,000 prize balls will be awarded, including the prize balls (1,500 balls) for 10 rounds of the next jackpot that are virtually confirmed.

Next, the contents shown in FIGS. 20-54 (7) to 20-55 (11) are the same as the contents shown in FIGS. 20-51 (3) to (7) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (12), the performance control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 enters the b time saving state ([invincible RUSH]) is executed, the characters "3000FEVER" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and "3000FEVER" is displayed in the upper right and lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. A subtitle display containing the words "Congratulations" is displayed (timing T12 shown in FIG. 20-53).

This telop display is the same image as the telop display that is displayed when the production mode is [Invincible RUSH], and the telop display is displayed during the jackpot round period before being controlled by [Invincible RUSH]. By this, it is possible to notify that the b time saving state ([invincible RUSH]) will be controlled after the end of the jackpot game state.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 4") corresponding to the currently executed round at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the assigned current round display. A prize ball number display (in this example, characters "TOTAL 00450") corresponding to the prize ball number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the jackpot game state and starts the b time saving state (timing T13 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120 starts the performance. The mode is controlled to [Invincible RUSH], and in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, the combination of the determined decorative symbols that were determined and stopped in the fluctuating display that was executed immediately before, and the combination of the determined second decorative symbols of the same type. (in this example, "777") is displayed. At this time, a combination of small symbols ("777" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a right hitting promotion image at the time of time saving start on the lower right side of the screen of the image display device 5. This time-saving starting right-handed driving promotion image is an image that includes the words "right-handed hitting" and an arrow image that instructs right-handed hitting in order to win the second starting prize opening.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a telop display including the words "Congratulations" at the upper right and lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that it is controlled by [Invincible RUSH].

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the period controlled by [Invincible RUSH], the number of prize balls (corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the previous jackpot) is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. In the example, the characters "TOTAL 01500" are displayed. In the b time-saving state that is controlled after "Symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot", the next jackpot is virtually confirmed, so the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the previous jackpot continues to be displayed even after the jackpot. By displaying the time-saving state b, the special feeling of the time-saving state is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (14), based on the occurrence of a new starting winning in the second starting winning opening, the CPU 103 changes the second special symbol so that the display result is "lost". When the display starts (timing T14 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120 displays the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and In 5R2, variable display of the second decorative pattern is started. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (15), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T14 shown in FIG. 20-53), the effect control controller that has received the symbol confirmation designation command In the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, the CPU 120 determines and stops the determined second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "142") indicating that the display result is "miss". At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "142") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

It is assumed that after this, variable display is performed m (m≧1) times, and all display results are “miss”. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (16) onwards, in the next variable display, the display result will be "time saving small win".

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (16), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is "time-saving small hit" (timing of T16 shown in FIG. 20-53), the effect is The control CPU 120 starts variable display of the second decorative symbols in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (17), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T17 shown in FIG. 20-53), the production control controller that has received the symbol confirmation designation command In the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, the CPU 120 determines and stops the determined second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is a "time-saving small hit." At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (18), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game state (timing T18 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120 that has received the small winning start designation command , an emphasized right-handed hitting promotion image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-handed driving promotion image is an image that includes the characters "right-handed hitting" and an arrow image that instructs right-handed hitting in order to win a prize in the V winning hole.

In the above embodiment, the emphasized right-handed hitting promotion image during the jackpot game state is displayed during the jackpot round game period after the jackpot fanfare period ends, and the emphasized right-handed hitting promotion image during the small winning gaming state is displayed in the small winning game state. Although an example has been shown in which the image is displayed during the winning fanfare period, it is not limited to this form, and the emphasized right-hit promotion image during the jackpot gaming state may be displayed during the jackpot fanfare period, and the image may be displayed during the jackpot fanfare period. The emphasized right-hitting promotion image may be displayed during the small win fanfare period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (19), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game period (timing T19 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire screen of the image display device 5. The emphasized right-hitting promotion image is deleted from the page. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a small winning game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This small winning game start image is an image that includes a small winning right hitting promotion image including the characters "Aim for V!!" to win a V prize and an arrow image instructing right hitting, and an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (20), when the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened during the small winning game, the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and the game ball is won during the predetermined validity period. At the timing when a game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a (timing T20 shown in FIG. 20-53), the production control CPU 120 displays a jackpot occurrence display (in this example, " "V") is displayed.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. In the jackpot count display at this time, the first count section is displayed in the second variation mode, and the second count section, third count section, and reaching section are displayed in the initial mode.

At the timing when the CPU 103 ends the small winning game state, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated from 1 to 2 in the small winning ending process (see FIGS. 20-24).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (21), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small win game state and starts the jackpot game state (timing T21 shown in FIG. 20-53), the production control The CPU 120 moves the jackpot count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5, executes a V change effect on the second count section, and sets the second count section to the initial state (white letters "V"). to the first change mode (red letter “V”).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a round display corresponding to the currently executed round (in this example, the characters “Round 3”) at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5. A prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 01800") corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded is displayed at the bottom right of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (22), the effect control CPU 120 executes the WIN change effect on the second count section, and changes the second count section to the first change mode (the red letters "V"). ) to the second change mode (red letters of "WIN") (timing of T22 shown in FIG. 20-53).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently executed round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the assigned current round display. A prize ball number display (in this example, characters "TOTAL 01830") corresponding to the prize ball number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (23), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round game in the jackpot game state (timing T23 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120 receives the jackpot end designation command. executes the necessary number of jackpot notification effect, and displays the required number of jackpots related to the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching judgment value on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (“1 more until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH”) ” characters) are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (24), the performance control CPU 120 ends the required number of jackpot notification performance, erases the display of the required number of jackpots from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and A production mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream RUSH") is displayed on the entire screen.

In this way, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the first hit, the first stage effect is executed for the first count part of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot], and the corresponding jackpot game state After the end, a special notification effect will be executed to inform you that you will be in the b-time saving state ([Invincible RUSH]), and the second jackpot that occurred during the b-time saving state that was controlled after the first jackpot ([invincible RUSH]) will be executed. During the winning (10Ra time saving jackpot), the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed for the second count part of the jackpot count display.

By executing the special notification effect in [1st jackpot], the second stage effect is executed for the jackpot count display, that is, there is only 1 remaining until the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value. It is possible to notify the player that it is substantially certain that the game will become the same, and it is possible to give the player a special feeling regarding the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot".

In this way, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the first hit, the player can clear the majority (2/3) of the value (3 of the mode switching judgment value) that the player should aim for in the jackpot count display. , the special feeling of "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" is better than other jackpot types at the first hit.

In the above embodiment, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, during the [first jackpot], the first stage effect (V change effect, WIN During the [2nd jackpot] (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit) that occurred during the controlled b time-saving state after the first jackpot was executed, the second count part of the jackpot count display An example is shown in which the second stage performance (V change performance, WIN performance) is executed.

However, this is not limited to such a form, and during the [first jackpot], the first stage effect is executed for the first count part of the jackpot count display, and during the controlled b time saving state after the first jackpot. The second stage performance (V change performance, WIN performance) is executed for the second count part of the jackpot count display at a different timing from the [second jackpot] (10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small hit) that occurred. may be done.

(1) to (3) are shown below as an example of the execution timing when the second stage effect is executed in response to the jackpot count display.
(1) Jackpot round period during [1st jackpot] (for example, the timing immediately after the first stage performance)
(2) Jackpot ending period during [1st jackpot] (3) Period during which b time saving is controlled after [1st jackpot] (for example, b time saving 1st variation)

For example, in the case of (1) above, if the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the first hit, the first stage effect will be executed for the first count part of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot]. After that, a second stage performance may be performed on the second count section of the jackpot count display.

In other words, when a "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" that is controlled to the b time-saving state after a jackpot occurs, the next jackpot is also virtually confirmed, so the [second jackpot] does not actually occur. Although this is not the case, at the time of the [first jackpot], the second stage performance may be executed along with the first stage performance on the jackpot count display.

[Example of production when a jackpot occurs with jackpot occurrence count value = 3]
Regarding the production example when a jackpot of "10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small hit" with jackpot occurrence count value = 3 occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 and it is controlled by [Dream RUSH], the figure This will be explained using FIGS. 20-57 to 20-59.

Figure 20-57 shows a case where a jackpot of "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" with jackpot occurrence count value = 3 occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 and it is controlled by [Dream RUSH]. FIG. 20-58 and FIG. 20-59 are time charts showing the execution timing of each production related to the above, and FIGS. 20-58 and 20-59 show the jackpot occurrence count when controlled by [Dream RUSH] with the jackpot occurrence count value = 2. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to a case where a jackpot of “10Ra time saving jackpot via time saving small hit” with a value of 3 occurs.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH] with the jackpot occurrence count value = 2, the display result is "Time-saving small hit" ("10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit"), and the fluctuation pattern The variable display of the second special symbol that becomes "Super Reach A time-saving small win" is executed, a V winning occurs in the small win, the jackpot game state is controlled, and the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 in this jackpot game state. (mode switching judgment value). Further, it is assumed that a jackpot count display corresponding to a state where the jackpot occurrence count value=2 is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (1), with the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 and the production mode being controlled to [Dream RUSH], the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol. At the timing (timing T1 shown in FIG. 20-57), the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. In the jackpot count display at this time, the first count section and the second count section are displayed in the second changed mode, and the third count section and the reaching section are displayed in the initial mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (2), at the timing when the ready-to-reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (timing T2 shown in FIG. 20-57), the effect control CPU 120 changes the symbol display on the image display device 5. A ready-to-win state is established by stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol (in this example, "7") in areas 5L and 5R. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner. That is, also in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and in the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, The small symbols are continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (3), at the timing when the fluctuation pattern should be developed into a super reach (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-57), the performance control CPU 120 executes the challenge performance and changes the image. The words "BOMB Challenge" and an image imitating a rock are displayed on the entire screen of the display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the variable display of the reduced first decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 in a manner in which the variable display of the first decorative pattern that has been executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is reduced. It is executed at the top left.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 calculates the jackpot count from the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that it is determined to erase the jackpot count display in the fluctuating performance determination process (see FIG. 20-47). Clear display 02TM300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge effect and displays on the entire screen of the image display device 5 ``Explode the rock and get the jackpot!!'' and an image imitating a rock (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (5), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge performance and displays an ally character performing a bomb-throwing action on the entire screen of the image display device 5 ( timing of T5 shown in Figure 20-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (6), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge performance and displays an image simulating a bomb exploding on the entire screen of the image display device 5. (Timing of T6 shown in Figure 20-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (7), the performance control CPU 120 executes the success performance of the challenge performance, and displays an image ( In this example, the characters "Success" and a friendly character making a peace sign are displayed (timing T7 shown in FIG. 20-57).

Next, at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be stopped and displayed (timing T8 shown in FIG. 20-57), the performance control CPU 120 displays a message on the entire screen of the image display device 5 that the ally character has succeeded in the challenge. While the image shown is displayed, the first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is a "time-saving small hit" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. let At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command moves the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this step, the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is a "time-saving small win" is determined and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, the contents shown in FIGS. 20-59 (9) and (10) are the same as the contents shown in FIGS. 20-56 (18) and (19) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (11), when the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened during the small winning game, the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and the game ball is won during the predetermined validity period. At the timing when a game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a (timing T11 shown in FIG. 20-57), the production control CPU 120 displays a jackpot occurrence display (in this example, " "V") is displayed. At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has updated the jackpot occurrence count value from 2 to 3 in the small hit ending process (see FIGS. 20-24), the performance control CPU 120 displays " 3 consecutive wins!!" will be displayed.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. In the jackpot count display at this time, the first count section and the second count section are displayed in the second changed mode, and the third count section and the reaching section are displayed in the initial mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (12), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small hit game state and starts the jackpot game state (timing T12 shown in FIG. 20-57), The CPU 120 moves the jackpot count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5, executes a V change effect on the third count section, and sets the third count section to the initial state (white letters "V"). to the first change mode (red letter “V”).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a round display corresponding to the currently executed round (in this example, the characters “Round 3”) at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5. At the bottom right of the screen, a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 03300") corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (13), the effect control CPU 120 executes the WIN change effect on the third count section, and changes the third count section to the first change mode (the red letters "V"). ) to the second change mode (red letters of "WIN") (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 20-57).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently executed round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the assigned current round display. A prize ball number display (in this example, characters "TOTAL 03330") corresponding to the prize ball number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (14), the performance control CPU 120 executes the reaching part change rendering for the reaching part, and changes the reaching part from the initial state (white letters of "PREMIUM FEVER") to the changed state. (red text of "PREMIUM FEVER") (timing of T14 shown in Figure 20-57). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes two types of ally characters to be displayed on the left part of the screen and the right part of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently executed round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the assigned current round display. A prize ball number display (in this example, characters "TOTAL 03360") corresponding to the prize ball number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (15), the performance control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 (timing T15 shown in FIG. 20-57). At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays a reached jackpot display (in this example, "PREMIUM FEVER") on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the jackpot is jackpot occurrence count value ≧ mode switching judgment value (3). ” characters) are displayed.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 4") corresponding to the currently executed round at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the assigned current round display. A prize ball number display (in this example, characters "TOTAL 03450") corresponding to the prize ball number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (16), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round game in the jackpot game state (timing T16 shown in FIG. 20-57), the performance control CPU 120 receives the jackpot end designation command. displays the word "READY" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" will start (the "inrush fluctuation" will start).

[Example of production when a small hit normally occurs]
Regarding the production example when a small hit of "normal small hit" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 and it is controlled by [Dream RUSH], and it is not possible to win a V prize in this small hit. , will be explained using FIGS. 20-60 to 20-62.

Figure 20-60 shows that when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 and it is controlled by [Dream RUSH], a small hit of "normal small hit" occurs, and it is not possible to win a V prize with this small hit. 20-61 and 20-62 are time charts showing the execution timing of each production related to the case where the "Dream RUSH" is executed when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to a case where a small hit of "normal small hit" occurs and it is not possible to win a V prize in this small hit.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH] with the jackpot occurrence count value = 2, the display result will be "Normal small hit" and the fluctuation pattern will be "Super reach B normal small hit". It is assumed that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the V winning does not occur in the small hit, and the control is maintained in the normal state. Further, it is assumed that a jackpot count display corresponding to a state where the jackpot occurrence count value=2 is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (1), with the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 and the production mode being controlled to [Dream RUSH], the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol. At the timing (timing T1 shown in FIG. 20-60), the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. In the jackpot count display at this time, the first count section and the second count section are displayed in the second changed mode, and the third count section and the reaching section are displayed in the initial mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (2), the performance control CPU 120 displays a fall suggestion display 02TM400 (in this example, a triangular object containing "!" and "WARNING" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5). ”) is displayed (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 20-60).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (3), at the timing when the ready-to-reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-60), the production control CPU 120 moves the The fall suggestion display 02TM400 is erased from the section, and the first decorative symbol ("2" in this example) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, thereby creating a ready-to-reach state. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner. That is, also in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and in the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, The small symbols are continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (4), at the timing when the variation pattern should be developed into a super reach (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-60), the performance control CPU 120 executes a fall promotion performance, With the ready-to-reach state established in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, a special symbol (in this example, a decorative symbol of the characters "END") is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. The special symbol at this time is displayed in a display mode with high transmittance (for example, 50% transmittance), and is a display mode that suggests a temporary stop.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 calculates the jackpot count from the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that it is determined to erase the jackpot count display in the fluctuating performance determination process (see FIG. 20-47). Clear display 02TM300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (5), the performance control CPU 120 displays the words "Destroy!" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and an operation prompt prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. Display 02TM31B is displayed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 20-60).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (6), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated by the player (timing T6 shown in FIG. 20-60), the production control CPU 120 controls the symbol display area 5C. , a special symbol indicating that the display result is a "normal small win" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T7 shown in FIG. 20-60), the production control controller that has received the symbol confirmation designation command The CPU 120 determines and stops the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "2 [END] 2") indicating that the display result is "normal small win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game state (timing T8 shown in FIG. 20-60), the performance control CPU 120 that has received the small winning start designation command , the result image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This result image is an image that includes an indication of the total number of balls awarded (in this example, "TOTAL 03000") and a teammate character.

In this small winning game state, the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 opens in the first opening pattern in which the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 0.04 seconds, so it is extremely difficult to win a V prize. In this example as well, it is assumed that the small winning game state ends without a V winning occurring.

Next, the content shown in FIG. 20-62 (9) is the same as the content shown in FIG. 20-49 (5), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Fire interval and pending consumption speed]
In this embodiment, when the player operates the ball-hitting operation handle 30, a game ball can be fired from the ball-launching device and hit into the game area. Then, when the game ball hit in this gaming area enters the starting prize opening (wins), a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the jackpot type) and fluctuation pattern, and the pending information is stored as. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns is executed based on the extracted random numbers. In addition, after storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgment, etc. It will be done.

Therefore, the greater the number of game balls that are fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area per hour, the greater the chance that the game ball will enter the starting prize slot, resulting in a jackpot (small win). Since the chances of a lottery such as whether or not to win are also increased, it is possible to provide a game in an even more advantageous state for the player.

However, in pachinko gaming machines, it is prohibited to fire more than 101 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. That is, it is possible to fire up to 100 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. In order to maximize the number of game balls hit into the game area, a configuration is adopted in which 100 game balls are fired from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. When this configuration is adopted, the firing interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds per game ball (second/ball).

Furthermore, in order to generate a starting prize by hitting the game ball into the gaming area, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the starting winning hole. This pachinko game machine is configured to include a winning ball device (for example, a variable winning ball device) that forms a starting winning hole (for example, a second starting winning hole) that can change between a closed state and an open state. When entering the game ball into the second starting prize opening, it is necessary to take steps (1) to (3) shown below.
(1) Passing through the passage gate → Lottery of normal symbols (2) The display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol" → the variable winning ball device is in the open state (3) Entering the variable winning ball device that is in the open state , (X) The surface of the game board 2 is equipped with a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails, and (Y) If the game ball does not enter any of the winning holes. , since they are taken into the out opening provided at the bottom of the gaming area, it is virtually impossible for all the fired game balls to clear steps (1) to (3) and enter the starting prize opening. is impossible.

Therefore, when the firing interval per game ball is 0.6 seconds, considering the above-mentioned (X) and (Y) and steps (1) to (4), the starting winning opening of the game ball The entry interval (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "winning interval") is 0.6+α (α>0) seconds.

In addition, in this embodiment, a variable display whose execution is suspended (maximum of 4 in this example) of special symbols corresponding to starting winnings that occur during the period until the end of the currently executed variable display ), the next variable display of the suspended memory is started at the timing when the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (variable display period) and the symbol confirmation period corresponding to this variable display have elapsed. Hereinafter, the period that is the combination of the variable display period and the symbol confirmation period, and which is the period until the next pending storage is started, will be appropriately referred to as the "suspended consumption period."

<Relationship table between firing interval and pending expiration period>
FIG. 20-63 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between the firing interval and the pending expiration period in this embodiment. In Figure 20-63, the firing interval, the winning interval (hereinafter referred to as [Int01] as appropriate), the variable display period, the symbol confirmation period, and the hold consumption period (hereinafter referred to as [Int02] as appropriate). , shows the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02]. In this example, when the player operates the batting ball operation handle 30, 100 game balls are fired from the batting ball firing device in 60 seconds and hit into the right gaming area, and any of the fired game balls A case in which the game ball enters the second starting prize opening will be explained.

((A) When the fluctuation display period <0.2 seconds)
As shown in FIG. 20-63(A), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a variable pattern in which the variable display period is extremely short (shorter than 0.2 seconds) (variable display period: 0. 05 seconds) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6+α seconds, the variable display period is 0.05 seconds, The symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] pending consumption period is 0.55 seconds. Further, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]>[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (A))
FIG. 20-64 is a time chart showing the relationship between [Int01] winning interval, [Int02] pending expiration period, and pending storage number in case (A).

In this example, it is assumed that the value of "α" at the winning interval of 0.6+α seconds is a unique value for each winning interval. For example, the value of α of the winning interval corresponding to the first starting winning shown in Figure 20-64 is 0.5 seconds, and the value of α of the winning interval corresponding to the next starting winning is 1.3 seconds. be. The same applies to FIGS. 20-65 and 20-66.

As shown in Figure 20-64, in case (A), that is, when [Int01]>[Int02], the hold-up period (0.55 seconds) is longer than the winning interval (0.6+α seconds). Since this is shorter, the pending redemption period ends before a new starting prize occurs. Therefore, the second pending storage number is "1" only at the timing when the starting winning occurs, but is "0" during other periods.

((B) When fluctuation display period = 0.2 seconds)
As shown in Figure 20-63(B), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a variable pattern with a moderately short variable display period (variable display period: 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected. If a configuration is adopted, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6+α seconds, the variable display period is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. and [Int02] pending consumption period is 0.7 seconds. Further, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]≦[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of pending memories in case (B))
FIG. 20-65 is a time chart showing the relationship between [Int01] winning interval, [Int02] pending expiry period, and pending memory number in case (B).

As shown in Figure 20-65, in case (B), that is, when [Int01]≦[Int02], the winning interval (0.6+α seconds) is shorter than the pending consumption period (0.55 seconds). Since the winning period is shorter, a new starting winning occurs before the pending redemption period ends. Therefore, the number of second pending memories increases as time passes (the number of second pending memories is "4" at most).

((C) When the fluctuation display period > 0.2 seconds)
When a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern with a long variation display period (longer than 0.2 seconds) (variation display period: 1 second) is mainly selected when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, The firing interval is 0.6 seconds, [Int01] winning interval is 0.6+α seconds, the variable display period is 1 second, the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds, and [Int02] the pending consumption period is It is 1.5 seconds. Further, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]<[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of pending memories in case (C))
FIG. 20-66 is a time chart showing the relationship between [Int01] winning interval, [Int02] pending expiry period, and pending storage number in case (C).

As shown in Figure 20-66, in case (C), that is, when [Int01]<[Int02], the winning interval (0.6+α seconds) is shorter than the pending consumption period (1.5 seconds). Since the winning period is shorter, a new starting winning occurs before the pending redemption period ends. Therefore, the number of second pending memories increases as time passes (the number of second pending memories is "4" at most).

As shown in FIG. 20-64, when a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern with an extremely short variation display period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) (variation display period: 0.05 seconds) is mainly selected, Although it is possible to realize a pachinko game machine that can quickly digest the pending memory, it is not possible to store the second pending memory, so a look-ahead notice that foretells the expected jackpot in the variable display before execution (the variable display where execution is pending) is required. It is not possible to execute the presentation, etc., resulting in a decrease in interest in the preview presentation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20-66, if a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern with a long variation display period (variation display period: 1 second) is mainly selected, it is possible to store the second hold memory. Therefore, although it is possible to perform a pre-read preview effect on the variable display before execution, it is not possible to realize a pachinko game machine that can quickly digest the reserved memory, and it is not possible to realize a pachinko machine that can quickly digest the reserved memory. This will lead to a decline.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 20-65, if a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern with a moderately short variation display period (variation display period: 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected, the digestion speed of retained memory will decrease. While realizing a pachinko game machine that is fast, it is possible to store the second pending memory, so it is possible to execute a pre-read preview effect on the variable display before execution, and to improve the performance of the pre-read notice effect and the processing of the pending memory. You can improve your interest in terms of speed.

In this way, in a pachinko game machine that is capable of firing up to 100 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds, when controlled to [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH] as in this embodiment, By adopting a configuration in which the fluctuation display period is 0.2 seconds and the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds, the rate of execution of the "ultra-high-speed error" fluctuation pattern is high, the retention memory is digested quickly. While realizing a pachinko game machine, it is possible to realize a pachinko game machine that is capable of executing a pre-read preview performance in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is suspended).

(Effect 02-1)
As shown in Figures 20-15 and 20-16, as well as Figures 20-18 and 20-19, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value in the time saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3) The rate at which the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "ultra high speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" whose fluctuation display period is shorter than the symbol confirmation stop period of 0.5 seconds is determined by the jackpot occurrence count value is the mode switching judgment When the value has not been reached (Jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2), the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "Ultra high speed error (0.2 seconds)" whose fluctuation display period is shorter than the symbol confirmation stop period 0.5 seconds is executed at a higher rate.

Also, as shown in Figures 20-51, 20-55, 20-56, 20-58, and 20-59, the jackpot count display 02TM300 regarding the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching judgment value , a display of the required number of jackpots ("X more times until super high speed HYPERRUSH") is displayed on the image display device 5.

According to such a gaming machine, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value, the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period (symbol confirmation stop period 0.5 seconds) than when the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the mode switching judgment value. ), the frequency with which the variable display is executed increases in the time saving state, resulting in a more advantageous state for the player. Therefore, when a player is controlled to be in a time-saving state, he or she will have a high interest in how many times the player will be controlled into a jackpot gaming state, and will be motivated to play the game so that the jackpot gaming state continues. Become. Furthermore, on the premise that such variable display control is performed, the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display regarding the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching determination value are displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest. It is possible to provide performance information in line with the above, and to further improve interest when the time is controlled to be short.

(Effect 02-2)
As shown in Figure 20-1 (1) and Figure 20-3 (A1), based on the fact that the display result of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols executed when the control is in the normal state is an even number symbol. When the pattern is controlled to "3R normal jackpot" after the end of the 3R jackpot game state, it is controlled to the low base state without shifting to the time saving state, and the variation of the decorative symbol executed while being controlled to the normal state. When the display result is an odd number symbol other than 7 and the display is controlled to "10Ra time saving jackpot", after the 10R jackpot game state ends, it is controlled to the a time saving state and then to the normal state. If the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed at the time is an odd symbol of 7, if the control is made to "symbol 10Rb time saving jackpot", it is possible to control to the b time saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends. be done.

According to such a gaming machine, based on the variable display executed when the machine is controlled to the normal state, there are cases in which the game machine is not controlled to the time-saving state and cases in which it is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, when the time saving state is controlled, there are times when it is controlled to the time saving state a and times when it is controlled to the time saving state b. can attract people's attention.

(Effect 02-3)
As shown in Figures 20-51 to 20-52 and Figures 20-54 to 20-56, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed when the control is in the normal state is the odd numbered symbol. ("555", "777", etc.), when the jackpot is controlled to 10R, the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required jackpot number display are changed by at least one step.

According to such a gaming machine, since the jackpot occurrence count value is related to the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the form of display of the required number of jackpots, the player pays attention to the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the form of the display of the required number of jackpots. Since the appearance of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots will change based on the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state, the player's interest in the variable display executed in the normal state will be reduced. can be increased.

(Effect 02-4)
As shown in Figures 20-54 to 20-56, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed when the control is in the normal state is an odd symbol of 7 ("777"). When the jackpot is controlled to 10R based on the control, the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display are changed by one step, and one step is changed during the next jackpot game state based on the variable display executed in the b time saving state. It's changing.

According to such a gaming machine, the degree of advantage for the player after the end of the jackpot game state is associated with the number of stages when the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpot display modes change, so that the jackpot count display It is possible to further increase interest in 02TM300 and changes in the display format of the required number of jackpots.

(Effect 02-5)
As shown in Figures 20-54 to 20-56, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed when the control is in the normal state is an odd symbol of 7 ("777"). If the jackpot is controlled to 10R based on the above, the prize balls for the first 10 rounds (1,500 balls) and the prize balls for the 10 rounds of the next jackpot (1,500 balls) that are virtually confirmed, totaling 3,000 balls. A 3000 notification effect suggesting that a prize ball will be awarded is being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the variable display executed in the normal state, the 1500 prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state and the prize balls of the jackpot gaming state are Since it is suggested that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded including the 1500 prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state based on the variable display executed in the b time saving state which is controlled after the end, the b time saving state It is possible to increase a player's sense of expectation before the game is controlled.

(Effect 02-6)
As shown in Figure 20-4 (A1), the display result of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols executed when the control is in the normal state is an odd numbered pattern of 7 ("Design 10Rb time-saving jackpot"). When controlled to a 10R jackpot based on this, the variable display of decoration identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the b time saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state When the display result is controlled to the 3R jackpot gaming state based on the display result being a combination of odd symbols other than 7 (such as "333") ("symbol 3Rb time saving jackpot"), after the jackpot gaming state ends, the b time saving state [Invincible RUSH] continues.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the time saving state b from ending due to the variable display of the first special symbol being executed even though the time saving state b has been controlled. By doing so, it is possible to prevent players from being dissatisfied. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed despite being controlled to the b-time saving state, and based on this, the jackpot game state is controlled, the b-time saving state By making the control possible, it is possible to ensure the expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state regardless of the type of special symbol.

(Effect 02-7)
As shown in Figure 20-4 (A1), the 10R jackpot is determined based on the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed when the control is in the normal state becoming "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot". When controlled, the display result of the variable display of decoration identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the b time saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state is an odd number symbol of 7 When controlled to a 10R jackpot gaming state based on a match (such as "777") ("Symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot"), if a small hit occurs and no V prize is won, the state returns to the normal state. Controlled a Time saving state [Dream RUSH].

According to such a gaming machine, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed even though it is controlled to the time saving state b, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fact that the symbol 10Ra is a time saving jackpot. When an irregular situation occurs in which the player loses the game, by controlling the game to the time saving state a, it is possible to ensure the expectation that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state regardless of the type of special symbol. Note that when such a situation occurs, by at least not controlling the time saving state b, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

(Effect 02-8)
As shown in Figures 20-55 and 20-56, the information displayed in the second count section (letter "V", letter "WIN") according to the jackpot occurrence count value > the first count section The display size of the information displayed (the letters "V" and the letters "WIN") is enlarged and highlighted in that order. Further, depending on the jackpot occurrence count value, it is possible to increase the light emission brightness in the order of the second counting section>the first counting section, and it is also possible to shorten the blinking interval (not shown).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value depending on the form of the jackpot count display, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the jackpot count display. .

(Effect 02-9)
As shown in FIGS. 20-18 and 20-19, when controlled in the a time saving state [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH], the display result is a "miss" (missing symbol), which is a variable display, It is possible to perform a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fix stop period of 0.5 seconds.

In addition, as shown in Figure 20-19, among the variable displays that are executed when the display result is "off" while being controlled in the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], at least the number of pending memories is If it is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected, and the selection rate for all other variation patterns is higher. higher than the sum of

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is "miss", there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "big win" (including a jackpot via a small win) is being executed.

(Effect 02-10)
As shown in Figures 20-15 and 20-16, in the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when being controlled by the a time saving state [Dream RUSH], the fluctuation of "ultra high speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" The pattern does not contain a corresponding random number.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to characterize [DREAM RUSH] and [ULTRA-HIGH SPEED HYPER RUSH] among the time-saving states by the difference in the variable display period, and the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously. It is possible to make the player focus on this, and also to make the player realize the special nature of the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-11)
As shown in Figure 20-17 (1), if the display result is "off" in the first fluctuating display when controlled to the a time saving state [ultra high speed RUSH] for the first time, the fluctuating display period is A variation display of a variation pattern of "rush variation deviation (rush effect + super high speed deviation)" which is 30.2 seconds is executed.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (1) and Figure 20-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern (30.2 seconds) of "inrush fluctuation deviation (inrush effect + super high speed deviation)" continues to shorten a time. In the fluctuation display when controlled by the state [Ultra High Speed RUSH], which fluctuation patterns are executed when the display result is "Out" ("Pseudo Fluctuation Miss" (2.8 seconds), "Ultra High Speed RUSH"). ” (0.2 seconds), “Super reach C missed” (10 seconds), and “Super reach B missed” (20 seconds).

As shown in Figures 20-7 to 20-10, in the variation display of the variation pattern of "Rush variation miss (rush effect + super high speed miss)", an acceleration pseudo variation production and a mode start suggestion production are executed. .

According to such a gaming machine, a time saving state can be achieved by the "inrush fluctuation deviation" (30.2 seconds), which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "super high speed deviation" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern. It is possible to suggest to the player that the game has entered [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-12)
As shown in Figure 20-17 (1), Figure 20-18 (1), and Figure 20-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern of "rush fluctuation is off" (30.2 seconds) is from the start of fluctuation to 30. In the first period until 0.7 seconds have elapsed, an acceleration pseudo fluctuation effect and a mode start suggestion effect are executed, and in the second period from this first period until 0.7 seconds have elapsed, the display results are actually announced. A decorative pattern fluctuation display period (0.2 seconds) and a pattern confirmation stop period (0.5 seconds) are provided for this purpose.

In addition, as shown in Figures 20-28 (2) to (5) and Figures 20-9 (18) to 20-10 (21), for actually reporting the display results in the second period, The fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has the same effect as the "ultra-high-speed deviation" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern.

According to such a gaming machine, the fluctuation pattern of "rushing fluctuation is off" indicates to the player that it has entered the time saving state [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], and the actual fluctuation display period is "Ultra-high speed off". Even though it is not as short as the variation pattern of "a", it can be made to feel that the variation display period has become extremely short from the first variation display after entering the a time saving state [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-13)
As shown in Figure 20-6, the unit pseudo fluctuation display period is gradually changed to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds. As shown in Figures 20-7 to 20-10, in the fluctuation pattern of "Rush fluctuation missed" (30.2 seconds), 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation. In the first period until then, the mode start notification effect is executed after the acceleration pseudo fluctuation effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first period from the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of "inrush fluctuation deviation" (30.2 seconds) to the elapse of 30 seconds is effectively used to enter the a time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER].
RUSH], it is possible to make the user aware that the variable display period will be shortened when shifting to [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and to notify that the mode will shift to a production mode corresponding to the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-14)
As shown in FIGS. 20-34 and 20-35, in the central area of the screen including the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a decorative pattern corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed is used (a decorative pattern that has not been fixed or stopped) is used. A first look-ahead effect (displaying a fixed icon containing the characters "HOLD" in a superimposed manner) is being executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-36 and 20-37, the display result of the second look-ahead image (in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5) is a "time-saving small hit". A second look-ahead effect is being executed to display a combination of pseudo third decorative patterns (in this example, an image including a part of "777") indicating that.

As shown in Figures 20-42 (1) and (2), when the display result is "miss", the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. be. Further, when the display result is "time saving small win", the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is "miss", there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "big hit" (a jackpot via a small win) is being executed. In addition, the first suggestion performance, which is executed at a relatively high rate, is a performance using decorative symbols, and is executed in a symbol display area that is easy for players to pay attention to. ] It is possible to increase the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state while making the player feel the shortness of the variable display period.

(Effect 02-15)
Among the advance preview performances, the pattern enlargement performance has a higher execution rate than the pending advance preview performance (not shown). Further, the sum (ratio) of the execution ratios of the first look-ahead performance and the pattern enlargement performance is higher than the sum of the execution ratios of the second look-ahead performance and the suspended look-ahead preview performance (not shown). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to make the user realize how short the variable display period is in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-16)
As shown in Figure 20-28, in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], the third decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that moves from the back of the screen to the front, unlike the manner in which it scrolls up and down on the screen. (A mode in which the third decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size after being displayed in an enlarged manner).
(1) Displayed (enlarged display) in a manner that is larger in size and has higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the fluctuating display that was executed immediately before,
(2) It is displayed (reduced display) in a manner that is smaller in size and has higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the fluctuating display that was executed immediately before. It is displayed in the same size and transparency as the correspondingly stopped third decorative pattern (stopped display).

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display in which the display result is "miss" is executed continuously, the period during which the third decorative symbol is displayed within the range that the player is paying attention to is determined. In addition to being able to increase the length, the transparency of the third decorative pattern changes within the range that the player is paying attention to, so that the player can feel more strongly the high speed of the variable display in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH]. I can do it.

(Effect 02-17)
As shown in Figure 20-28, in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], the third decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that moves from the back of the screen to the front, unlike the manner in which it scrolls up and down on the screen. (a mode in which the third decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size after being enlarged), and as a combination of the third decorative pattern when the variable display that becomes "off" is continuously executed,
In the case of (1) mentioned above, the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the immediately preceding variable display,
In the case of (2) mentioned above, the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
In the case of (3) mentioned above, the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
is displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is "miss", there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "big hit" (a jackpot via a small win) is being executed. In addition, at least a part of the third decorative pattern used for the variable display of the "ultra-high-speed error" executed earlier is also used for the variation display of the "ultra-high-speed error" executed later. While giving a sense of speed through the fluctuating display of "Ultra-high-speed error," the system is designed to prevent the player from feeling cluttered due to excessive presentation information accompanying the fluctuating display of "Ultra-high-speed error." There is.

(Effect 02-18)
As shown in Figure 20-28, when controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], the third decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area is the number pattern and the background side of the number pattern. It is composed of a pedestal pattern which is added and corresponds to the outline of the numeric pattern, and a radial light ray effect display which is added to the background side of the numeric pattern and in front of the pedestal pattern and is displayed on the entire screen. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 20-26, when controlled to the a time saving state [Dream RUSH], the first decorative pattern is composed of only numeric symbols.

According to such a gaming machine, the decorative pattern is more emphasized in the time-saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], thereby making it easier to recognize the decorative pattern in a situation where the fluctuation display period is short, and also making the decorative pattern easier to recognize when the fluctuation display period is short. It is possible to emphasize the sense of speed when displaying.

(Effect 02-19)
As shown in Figure 20-18 (1), when the number of pending memories is 0 while being controlled to the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], "Ultra-high-speed error" (0.2 seconds ) It is possible to select the variation pattern of "pseudo variation deviation" (2.8 seconds), which has a longer variation display period than the variation pattern of (2.8 seconds).

In addition, as shown in Figure 20-11, Figure 20-12, and Figure 20-13, when the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fluctuation error" (2.8 seconds) is executed, the [fluctuation display] A constant-velocity pseudo-fluctuation performance that executes unit pseudo-fluctuation (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of decorative symbols) four times with a cycle of 0.2 seconds equivalent period + 0.5 seconds equivalent period of symbol fixed stop = 0.7 seconds] It is running.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is "miss", there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "big hit" (a jackpot via a small win) is being executed. In addition, if the number of pending memories is 0, the fluctuation display of the "pseudo fluctuation off" fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation display period is executed, thereby avoiding as much as possible a situation where the fluctuation display is not executed. By making the player see the variable display as if it were being executed multiple times, the sense of speed in the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is not impaired.

(Effect 02-20)
As shown in Figure 20-18 (1), when the number of pending memories is 0 while being controlled to the a time saving state [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH], a "pseudo fluctuation error" (2.8 seconds ) is selected at a higher rate than any other variation pattern, and is higher than the sum of the selection rates of all other variation patterns.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency and sense of speed of the variable display in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] from being impaired as much as possible.

(Effect 02-21)
As shown in Figure 20-15, when the number of pending memories is 0 while being controlled in the a-time saving state [Dream RUSH], the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fluctuation is off" (2.8 seconds) is If it is not selected, it is possible to select a variation pattern of "long variation off" (10 seconds).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to clarify the characteristics of the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fluctuation deviation" (2.8 seconds) in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], and also to ], it is possible to avoid as much as possible a situation where the variable display is not executed.

(Effect 02-22)
As shown in FIGS. 20-27, the first logo cycle change effect that changes the first logo display and the second logo cycle change effect that changes the second logo display are executable, and the second logo cycle change effect is possible. The change period (0.5 s) in the presentation is shorter than the change period (5 s) in the first logo period change presentation.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is "miss", there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "big hit" (a jackpot via a small win) is being executed. In addition, in the a time saving state [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH] where the variation display of the variation pattern of "ultra high speed deviation" is executed at a high rate, the mode of the second logo display changes frequently, so that the a time saving state [a] It is possible to emphasize the shortness of the fluctuation display period in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH.

(Effect 02-23)
As shown in FIGS. 20-27, a first logo cycle change effect that changes the first logo display and a second logo cycle change effect that changes the second logo display are executable, and the first logo cycle change effect changes the first logo display. The light emission mode changes periodically from the left end to the right end, and the light emission mode changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display.

According to such a gaming machine, by displaying the first logo, it is notified that the machine is controlled to the a-time saving state [Dream RUSH], and that the area where the player should shoot the gaming ball is the right gaming area. In addition, the second logo display notifies that the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] is being controlled, and the area where the player should shoot the game ball is the right game area. It becomes possible to notify that the

(Effect 02-24)
a When the time saving state [Dream RUSH] is controlled, the first system display can be displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting prize opening. The first system display is a moving image that includes the words "Right hit" and an arrow image for winning a prize into the second starting prize opening, and is a moving image that periodically moves in the left and right direction.

In addition, when controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], a second system display can be displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting prize opening. be. The second system display is a moving image that includes the words "Right hit" and an arrow image for winning a prize into the second starting winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves in the left and right direction.

The movement period of the arrow in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the movement period of the arrow in the first system display is 3 seconds (not shown).

According to such a gaming machine, the first system display and the second system display notify the player of the area in which to shoot the game ball, and also shorten the variable display period in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH]. can be emphasized more.

(Effect 02-25)
a When controlled by the time saving state [Dream RUSH], the second hold display corresponding to the number of second hold memories and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are circular A first rotation-compatible display as a moving image of the object can be displayed.

In addition, when controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], the second hold display corresponding to the number of second hold memories and the active display corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed are activated when the rotating operation is performed. A second rotation-compatible display can be displayed as a moving image of the round object.

The rotation period of the second rotation compatible display is set to 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation compatible display is set to 3 seconds (not shown).

According to such a gaming machine, by rotating the corresponding display (hold display, active display), it is recognized that the time saving state a is being controlled, and the time saving state [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH] is being controlled. When the variable display period is in the a time saving state [Dream RUSH], the corresponding display rotates faster than when controlled by the time saving state [Dream RUSH], so that the shortness of the variable display period can be emphasized more.

(Effect 02-26)
As shown in Figure 20-14, in the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when the variable display of the variable pattern of "direct jackpot" where the display result is "jackpot" is executed, the pattern alignment effect is executed. A jackpot round game is started with the start of a jackpot game state without being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is "miss", there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected. , the player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated by the fact that a variable display that does not result in a "big hit" (jackpot via small win) is being executed. In addition, in the a time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to not stop displaying the decorative symbols when controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the flow of the game from the fluctuating display to the jackpot gaming state is not interrupted. By emphasizing the speed of the fluctuating display that triggers the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to give the impression that the jackpot gaming state is suddenly controlled.

(Effect 02-27)
As shown in Figure 20-5, in the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display is executed in which the display result is "time-saving small hit", the symbol alignment effect is executed and the symbol display area At 5L, 5C, and 5R, a combination of third decorative symbols indicating that the display result is a "time-saving small win" is displayed/determined and stopped.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 20-14, when a variable display is executed in which the display result is "Jackpot" (not including jackpot via small win) in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], The symbol alignment effect is not executed, and the third decorative symbol combination is not displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is "miss", there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected. The player can comfortably play the game without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "big hit" (including a jackpot via a small win) is being executed. In addition, in the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display in which the display result is a "time-saving small hit" is executed, the third decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, thereby improving the flow of the game. By making this clear, it is possible to direct the player's attention to playing the game so that the game ball passes through the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when a fluctuating display is executed where the display result is a "jackpot", the third decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed, so that the flow of the game from the fluctuating display to the jackpot gaming state is not interrupted, and the trigger for the jackpot gaming state is By emphasizing the speed of the fluctuating display, it is possible to give the impression that the game has suddenly been controlled to a jackpot game state.

(Effect 02-28)
As shown in Figure 20-15 (2) and Figure 20-16 (2), in the time saving state [Dream RUSH], when the display result is "Jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A Jackpot" Based on the fact that the fluctuating display is executed and the display result becomes "Jackpot", the success performance including the pattern alignment performance is executed, and the display result is "Time-saving small hit" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination of the first decorative patterns indicating that the first decorative pattern will be displayed/determined is stopped.

According to such a gaming machine, the difference between a time-saving state [Dream RUSH] and a time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is clarified by the difference in the display of decorative symbols, and the difference between a time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] It is possible to create a special feeling when the displayed result becomes a "jackpot".

(Effect 02-29)
When a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time saving state [Dream RUSH], and when the jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time saving state [Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH]. Also in the case of , the execution period (0.1 seconds) of the fanfare performance is shorter than the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot symbol (not shown).

According to such a gaming machine, a special variable is created after the jackpot gaming state starts when the machine is controlled to a time-saving state [DREAM RUSH] and when it is controlled to a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH]. The period until the winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state can be made shorter, and the player is prevented from having to wait for a period until the winning ball is awarded after the display result is announced. be able to. In particular, in the a time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so the special variable winning ball device 7 can be controlled to the open state immediately after the variable display ends, It is possible to show the player a series of steps from the start of variation to the transition to the jackpot round game.

(Effect 02-30)
The special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is equipped with a light emitting device, and in a time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] and b time saving state [Invincible RUSH], the variable display result of the second special symbol is "Jackpot". ”, it is possible to cause the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light at a timing controlled to be in the jackpot game state (not shown).

When the time saving state is controlled, the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is high, and there are many situations in which a big hit occurs when the display result is determined to be a "small hit". However, if the displayed result is determined to be a "jackpot" while the time saving state is being controlled, the user may feel disappointed that it would have been better to have won the prize in the normal state.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and information indicating that a jackpot has occurred (the words "Aim at the attacker!!") is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, by causing the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light, the player's attention is directed from the image display device 5 toward the jackpot, and the displayed result is determined to be a “jackpot,” and a jackpot occurs. You can reduce the feeling of regret over what happened.

(Effect 02-31)
As shown in FIGS. 20-32 and 20-33, (2A) a change precursor production in which a wavy effect display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and (2B) a display in which the movable body 02TM100 changes from the initial position to the maximum production. (2C) A character appearance effect in which the ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; (2D) A second response display that changes the display mode of the response display (normal mode → red mode) by executing a second action effect in which an ally character throws three bombs at the response display (active display, pending display) A series of second change effects consisting of a change effect (second action change effect) is being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the second action change production is performed by cooperation between the movable body 02TM100, the image related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (ally character 02TM30B), and the corresponding display (pending display, active display). Among these, when the second action performance and the second corresponding display change performance among the second action change performance are executed, only a performance that simply acts on the corresponding display or a performance that changes the corresponding display is executed. Compared to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the corresponding display changes.

(Effect 02-32)
As shown in Figures 20-29 to 20-31 and Figure 20-58, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that appears in the Super Reach A production (challenge production) are common characters. ing. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character who succeeds in the challenge in the successful performance in the challenge performance are a common character. Furthermore, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that appears in the super reach D performance (battle performance) are common characters. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that wins over the enemy character in the victory performance in the battle performance are a common character (not shown).

According to such a gaming machine, the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally characters displayed on the image display device 5 makes it possible to give a sense of unity to the series of performances, and also to make the ally characters more visible to the player. It is possible to make the player recognize that the character is important, and to have a strong interest in and affinity for the ally character.

(Effect 02-33)
As shown in Figure 20-41 (1), when the display mode of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to red mode while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first The rate at which the change effect or the second change effect is executed (95%, 90%) is the rate at which the first change effect or the second change effect is executed when the display mode of the corresponding display changes to the blue mode (20%). %).

As shown in FIGS. 20-30 and 20-31, (1A) a change precursor production in which a wavy effect display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and (1B) an intermediate production in which the movable body 02TM100 changes from the initial position to the intermediate production. (1C) A character appearance effect in which the ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; (1D) A first response display change performance (first action change performance) that changes the display mode of the response display by executing a first action performance in which an ally character throws one bomb at the response display. A series of first change performances are being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to diversify the effects that change the display mode of the corresponding display, and also create a sense of expectation that the first action effect will be executed when the movable body 02TM100 operates. You can do it.

(Effect 02-34)
As shown in FIGS. 20-30 and 20-31, in the first change effect, (1D) the first corresponding display change effect (first action effect) changes the display mode of the corresponding display by executing the first action effect. 1 effect change effect) is being executed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-32 and 20-33, in the second change effect, (2D) a second corresponding display change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display by executing the second action effect. (Second action change production) is being executed.

As shown in Figure 20-41 (1), when the display mode of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to red mode while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first The rate at which the second change effect is executed (50% to 80%) is higher than the rate at which the first change effect is executed (15% to 40%).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to diversify the action presentation in which the ally character throws a bomb at the corresponding display, and it is also possible to draw attention to the character appearing in the action presentation. In addition, by performing an action effect in which a friendly character with high visibility throws a bomb at the corresponding display, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the corresponding display changes to a more expected mode.

(Effect 02-35)
As shown in FIG. 20-30 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the intermediate presentation position to the initial position, (1C) character appearance presentation of the first change presentation is executed, and the image display device 5 An ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) is displayed in the center of the screen.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the maximum effect position to the initial position, (2C) character appearance effect of the second change effect is executed, and the image display An ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) is displayed in the center of the screen of the device 5.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to emphasize the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B, and the production effect of the ally character can be highlighted through cooperation between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B. .

(Effect 02-36)
As shown in FIGS. 20-30 and 20-31, (1A) a change precursor production in which a wavy effect display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 is executed, and (1B) the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to An intermediate motion performance is executed in the order of intermediate performance position → initial position, and (1C) a character appearance performance is performed in which the ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. After the execution, (1D) a first response display change performance (first action) that changes the display mode of the response display by executing a first action performance in which an ally character throws one bomb at the response display; change performance) is being executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-32 and 20-33, (2A) a change precursor production in which a wavy effect display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 is executed, and (2B) the movable body 02TM100 is initialized. The maximum motion performance that operates in the order of position → maximum performance position → initial position is executed, and (2C) ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of movable body 02TM100 appears in the center of the screen of image display device 5. After the performance is executed, (2D) a second response display change performance (second action display) in which the ally character throws three bombs at the response display is executed to change the display mode of the response display. 2 effect change production) is being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to make the player expect the movement of the movable body 02TM100 and the appearance of an ally character by using the change precursor effect. Furthermore, it is possible to make the user interested in which of the first action and presentation is executed.

[Other variations]
(1) In the above embodiment, (i) a jackpot game state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display becoming a "jackpot" [type of jackpot], and (ii) the display result of the variable display is "jackpot". Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the V-winning area in the V-winning device, the game medium is controlled to be in a small-winning gaming state based on the fact that the game medium has entered the V-winning area. This is a gaming machine equipped with a [type 2 jackpot] that controls the gaming state. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment is an example of a [type 1 + type 2 mixed machine] that has a pattern of [type 1 jackpot] and [type 2 jackpot] as a pattern for controlling the (i + ii) jackpot gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the various effects shown in the embodiments described above may be applied to gaming machines having different gaming properties.

For example, the effect shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having a game feature of [V-probability changing machine]. [V probability changing machine] is provided with a normal state which is a low probability state and a probability variable state which is a high probability state (a gaming state in which probability variable control is executed). Further, as the variable probability states, a variable probability state and a variable probability state b are provided. As the jackpot types, there are "normal jackpot" in which probability variable control is not executed, "a probability variable jackpot" in which a probability variable control is executed, and "b probability variable jackpot" in which b probability variable control is executed. The table to be referred to when determining the type of jackpot is made different depending on the type of variable probability state.

In the probability variable state, although the next jackpot is determined, 75% of the time it will be a "probable variable jackpot" and 25% of the time it will be a "normal jackpot." On the other hand, in the b-probability variable state, the next jackpot is determined, and the probability of the next jackpot is 100%. For example, in the variable probability state, a ``10R variable jackpot'' occurs at a rate of 75%, and a ``normal jackpot with no ball payout'' occurs at a 25% rate, and in the variable probability condition b, a ``10R variable jackpot'' occurs at a rate of 100%. In other words, in the time-saving state a, the next jackpot is confirmed, but the rate at which the prize ball is actually awarded and the time-saving state continues after the jackpot is 75%, while in the time-saving state b, the next jackpot is not confirmed. The rate at which the time-saving state continues after the prize ball is actually awarded and the jackpot is 100%.

For example, the following jackpot types are provided as the jackpot types of the jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state. All jackpot types differ in terms of whether or not to execute time saving control and whether or not to execute probability variable control (a probability variable control, b probability variable control) after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
(X1) “3R normal jackpot” (40%)
Time-saving control is not executed, and variable probability control is also not executed (X2) “10Ra probability variable jackpot” (40%)
Time saving control is executed, and a variable probability control is also executed (X3) “10Rb variable probability jackpot” (20%)
Time saving control is executed, and b probability variation control is also executed.

The following jackpot types are provided as the jackpot types of the jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the a probability change state.
(Y1) “Normal jackpot without balls” (25%)
Time saving control is not executed and variable probability control is not executed (Y2) "10Ra probability variable jackpot" (75%)
Time saving control is executed, and a probability change control is also executed.

b The jackpot types shown below are provided as the jackpot types of the jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability state.
(Z1) “10Ra certain strange jackpot” (100%)
Time saving control is executed, and a probability change control is also executed.

In such a gaming machine of [V-probability changing machine], various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display is displayed during a predetermined period in the jackpot gaming state or the time saving state, but the jackpot count display is not limited to such a form. or may be displayed in a period different from the predetermined period in the time saving state.

For example, the jackpot count display may be displayed during the fanfare period or ending period of the jackpot gaming state, or may also be displayed during the period after the time-saving state develops to super reach.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the display result is "normal small hit" while being controlled in the b time saving state, the "high speed normal Although we have shown an example in which a variable display of a variation pattern of "small hit" is executed, it is not limited to this form, but when the display result becomes "normal small win" while being controlled to the b time saving state. In addition, a variable display of a variable pattern with a presentation mode different from the “high speed off” variable pattern may be executed.

For example, when the display result is "normal small win" while being controlled to the b time saving state, a variation pattern of "long normal small win" may be provided. The variation pattern of this "long normal small hit" is that the variation display period is 10,000 ms, and the special symbol S (decorative symbol including the letters "SAFE") is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5. It may be possible to notify that a "normal small hit" has occurred in the time saving state b. By notifying that a normal small hit has occurred in the time-saving state b, the game state in which the normal small-hit has occurred is a beneficial feeling that it would have been better to be in the time-saving state b instead of the time-saving state a, which would have fallen into the normal state. This can further enhance the special feeling of the time saving state.

(4) In the above embodiment, when changing the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) to a blue mode or a red mode, it is possible to change it in either the first change effect or the second change effect. Although this example is not limited to this form, when changing the display mode of the corresponding display to a blue mode or a red mode, it is possible to change only one of the first change effect and the second change effect. A configuration that allows this may be adopted.

For example, when the first change effect is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to a blue color at a rate of 100%, and when the second change effect is executed, the corresponding display may be displayed at a rate of 100%. may be changed to a red color. Further, even if the first change effect is executed, the correspondence display may not be changed, and even if the second change effect is executed, the correspondence display may not be changed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the display result becomes "normal small win" when the control is in the a time saving state, the configuration is such that it is extremely difficult to win a V prize in the small win game state. , we have shown an example in which the game falls to the normal state without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, but it is not limited to this form. In this case, the configuration may be such that it is easy to win a V prize in the small winning gaming state, and after controlling to the jackpot gaming state, it may fall back to the normal state.

For example, even in the case of a "normal small hit", a configuration is adopted in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 opens in the second opening pattern, and a jackpot is generated, and prize balls (1500 balls) for 10 rounds are generated. shall be granted. However, in the case of "normal small win" in this case, the control is returned to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state. According to such a configuration, a prize ball can be awarded even in a normal small win, so it is possible to reduce the player's sense of regret that the game is controlled to the normal state after the jackpot game state.

(6) In the above embodiment, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the first hit, 1500 prize balls are awarded at the first hit, and 1500 prize balls are awarded even when the jackpot occurs during the b time-saving state. Although we have shown an example in which balls are awarded, it is not limited to this form, but if a "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the first hit, 1500 prize balls will be awarded at the first hit, and during the b time-saving state. Less than 1,500 prize balls may be awarded in a jackpot that occurs.

For example, when the "symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the first hit, 1500 prize balls are awarded at the first hit, and 1000 prize balls are awarded at the jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state. In this case, at the time of the first hit, a 2500 notification effect may be executed to notify that a total of 2500 (1500+1000) prize balls will be awarded.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the speed of the unit pseudo fluctuation becomes faster when the display size of the third decorative pattern is the same display size in the accelerated pseudo fluctuation performance. However, in the accelerated pseudo fluctuation performance, the speed of the unit pseudo fluctuation may be made faster when the display size of the third decorative pattern is different.

For example, in the accelerated pseudo-variation performance, as the speed of the unit pseudo-variation becomes faster, the display size of the third decorative pattern may become larger, or the display size of the third decorative pattern may become smaller.

(8) In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the variable pattern of "direct jackpot" is executed, the third decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are hidden, while the small symbols Although we have shown an example in which small symbols are displayed in the display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the pattern display area is not limited to this type of display. The third decorative symbols 5L, 5C, and 5R may be hidden, and the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r may also be hidden.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "ultra high speed deviation" (0.2 seconds) is executed only when controlled by [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH]. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when controlled to a production mode different from [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the variation pattern of "Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" may be executed.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation display of a variation pattern of "ultra-high-speed deviation" can be executed when controlled by [Dream RUSH]. In this case, when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "super high speed deviation" is selected is higher than the fluctuation pattern of "ultra high speed deviation" when controlled by [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH]. shall be lower than the selected ratio.

In addition, during the predetermined period when controlled by [Dream RUSH], it is possible to display a variation pattern of "super high speed deviation", which is different from the predetermined period when controlled by [Dream RUSH]. A configuration may be adopted in which it is impossible to display a variation pattern of "ultra-high-speed deviation" during the period.

For example, during the 1st to 50th fluctuation period when controlled by [Dream RUSH], it is possible to display a fluctuation pattern of "ultra high speed deviation", and when controlled by [Dream RUSH], In the period after the 51st variation, it is impossible to display the variation of the variation pattern of "super high speed deviation".

(10) In the embodiment described above, an example was shown in which the mode switching determination value is set to 3, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the mode switching determination value may be set to a value different from 3.

For example, the mode switching judgment value may be set to 5, which is greater than 3, or the mode switching judgment value may be set to 2, which is smaller than 3.

(11) In the above embodiment, there is a case where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time saving state [Dream RUSH], and a case where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH]. In both cases, when a jackpot occurs, the execution period of the fanfare effect (0.1 seconds) is shorter than the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot symbol, but in this case Not limited to the form, a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time saving state [Dream RUSH], and a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time saving state [ultra high speed HYPER RUSH] In either case, the execution period of the fanfare performance may be longer than the symbol confirmation period of the jackpot symbol.

For example, there are cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time saving state [Dream RUSH], and cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH]. In either case, by setting the symbol confirmation period of the jackpot symbol to 0.5 seconds and the execution period of the fanfare effect to 1.0 seconds, the execution period of the fanfare effect is longer than the symbol confirmation period of the jackpot symbol. become longer.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, if the number of pending memories is at least 1 and the display result is determined to be "miss", " The rate of selection of the variation pattern "Ultra high speed deviation" (0.2 seconds) is approximately 90% (900/997), and the rate of selection of any other variation pattern is approximately 10% (97/997). Let us consider an example in which the rate at which the variation pattern of "ultra-high-speed deviation" (0.2 seconds) is selected is much higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected. As shown, the proportion of variation patterns with "ultra-high-speed deviation" (0.2 seconds) being selected is far greater than the proportion of any other variation pattern being selected, regardless of this form. It does not have to be selected by percentage.

For example, when being controlled to the a time saving state [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], if the number of pending memories is at least 1 or more and the display result is determined to be "Out", then "Ultra High Speed Out" (0. The rate at which the variation pattern (2 seconds) is selected is 25%, and the rate at which variation patterns A to D are selected as other variation patterns is around 20%, and may be less than 25% ( 100% in total).

The feature section 02TM described above includes the following configurations.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
a normal state (low base state); a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state; a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, production control CPU 120) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols); ,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
Display means (image display device 5),
In the special state (time-saving state), when the number of times the game is continuously controlled to the advantageous state exceeds a predetermined number of times (“2”, which is 1 less than the mode switching judgment value = 3) (when the jackpot occurrence count value ≧ 3) ), the rate at which a variable display with a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern whose variable display period is shorter than the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds) is executed is as follows: When the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times (“2”, which is one less than the mode switching judgment value = 3) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2), a variable display with a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period ( "Ultra high speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation pattern fluctuation display) is higher than the execution rate,
In the special state, when the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times, the performance execution means displays a specific display (jackpot count display 02TM300, " A game machine characterized in that it is possible to display on the display means "X times left until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH."

According to such a gaming machine, when the number of consecutive times the advantageous state is controlled exceeds a predetermined number of times, the variable display period becomes shorter than the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the number of times the variable display period has not exceeded the predetermined number of times. This increases the frequency with which the variable display is performed in the special state, resulting in a more advantageous state for the player. Therefore, when a player is controlled to a special state, he or she becomes highly interested in how many times the player is controlled to an advantageous state, and plays the game with motivation to keep the advantageous state continuous. Further, on the premise that such variable display control is performed, a specific display regarding the number of times the advantageous state is controlled until the number of consecutive times the advantageous state is controlled exceeds a predetermined number of times is displayed. , it is possible to provide performance information that matches the player's interests, and to further improve interest when the game is controlled in a special state.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
The gaming machine of means 1,
The special state (time saving state) includes a first special state (a time saving state) and a second special state (b time saving state: invincible RUSH) which is more advantageous for the player than the first special state,
The variable display means includes a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variably displaying decoration identification information (decoration patterns) on the display means,
controllable to the advantageous state when the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific display result (a combination of decorative patterns that becomes a jackpot pattern);
The specific display results include a first specific display result (a combination of even numbered symbols), a second specific display result different from the first specific display result (a combination of odd numbered symbols excluding 7), and the first specific display result (a combination of even numbered symbols). There is a third specific display result (a combination of 7 symbols) that is different from both the specific display result and the second specific display result,
The state control means includes:
When the control is performed to the advantageous state (symbol 3R normal jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state becomes the first specific display result. , without controlling to the special state after the end of the advantageous state (controlling to the low base state without shifting to the time saving state after the end of the 3R jackpot gaming state),
When the control is performed to the advantageous state (symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed when the control is in the normal state becoming the second specific display result. , can be controlled to the first special state after the end of the advantageous state (can be controlled to the time saving state a after the end of the 10R jackpot gaming state),
When the control is performed to the advantageous state (symbol 10Rb time-saving jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed when the control is in the normal state becoming the third specific display result. , can be controlled to the second special state after the end of the advantageous state (can be controlled to the b time saving state after the end of the 10R jackpot gaming state)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, there are cases in which the game machine is not controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state, and cases in which it is controlled to the special state, based on the variable display executed when the game machine is controlled in the normal state. , Furthermore, when controlled to a special state, there are times when it is controlled to the first special state and times to be controlled to the second special state, so the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state may vary. This can attract the attention of players.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
The gaming machine of means 2,
The specific display can be displayed on the display means in the special state (a time saving state, b time saving state) and the advantageous state,
The performance execution means is
When the number of times is updated, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in stages (it is possible to update the jackpot count display 02TM300 in stages from the first stage to the third stage, and , it is possible to update the remaining number of times "X times left until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH"),
Based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed when the control is in the normal state is the second specific display result or the third specific display result (a combination of odd numbered symbols) A gaming machine characterized in that when controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot), the mode of the specific display can be changed by at least a predetermined step (one step).

According to such a gaming machine, since the number of times the machine is continuously controlled to an advantageous state is related to the specific display mode, the player pays attention to the specific display mode. Since the aspect of the specific display changes based on the display result of the executed variable display, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the variable display executed in the normal state.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
The gaming machine of means 3,
When the control is performed to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed when the control is performed to the normal state being the third specific display result (seven symbols aligned); Control to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed when the control is in the normal state becomes the second specific display result (a set of odd numbered symbols excluding 7). The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state is higher than when If a hit occurs and you do not win a V prize, it will be controlled to the normal state, but in the b time saving state, even if a small win occurs and you do not win a V prize, it will not be controlled to the normal state, so the next jackpot will be It is almost confirmed)
The effect executing means executes the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed when the control is in the normal state being the third specific display result (seven symbols aligned). , the mode of the specific display is changed by more steps than the predetermined step (updated by one step during the jackpot game state with 7 symbols aligned, and the next jackpot based on the variable display executed in the time saving state) It is possible to update one more step during the gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the degree of advantage for the player after the end of the advantageous state is associated with the number of stages when the specific display mode changes, thereby further increasing interest in the change in the specific display mode. I can do it.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4,
Control to the advantageous state (10R jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of decoration identification information executed when the control is in the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols aligned) , it is possible to give a predetermined gaming value (1,500 prize balls based on winnings in the big prize opening) in the advantageous state, and the special state (b time saving state: invincible) after the advantageous state. RUSH) is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot), the predetermined gaming value (1500 prize balls based on winning in the big prize opening) is awarded in the advantageous state. It is possible to
When the effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while being controlled to the normal state becomes the third specific display result. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an award effect (a 3000 notification effect that displays the characters "3000 FEVER") that suggests that the predetermined game value will be awarded a plurality of times (1500 x 2 times).

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, a predetermined gaming value is given in the advantageous state, and the control is performed after the advantageous state ends. Since it is suggested that a gaming value including a predetermined gaming value that is awarded in an advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state will be awarded, it is possible to reduce the expectations of the player before the special state is controlled. can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5,
The variable display means includes special identification information variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B) capable of variably displaying special identification information (special symbol), and decorative identification information (decoration). a decorative identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variably displaying a symbol);
The decorative identification information variable display means is capable of variably displaying the decorative identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to the variable display of the special identification information,
The special identification information includes first special identification information (first special symbol) and second special identification information (second special symbol).
When controlled in the normal state, the start condition for variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for variable display of the second special identification information (normal state (low base) state), the starting condition for the first special symbol is easier to satisfy than the starting condition for the second special symbol),
When controlled in the special state, the start condition for variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for variable display of the first special identification information (time saving state (high base)). state), the starting conditions for the second special symbol are easier to satisfy than the starting conditions for the first special symbol),
The state control means changes the advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed when the control is in the normal state is the third specific display result (seven symbols in a row). (10R jackpot), the decoration executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state. When the display result of the variable display of identification information is controlled to the advantageous state (3R jackpot gaming state) based on the second specific display result (odd symbols other than 7), the advantageous state It is possible to control to the second special state after the end (it is possible to continue the time saving state (invincible RUSH))
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the special state from ending due to the variable display of the first special identification information being executed even though the special state has been controlled. It is possible to prevent players from being dissatisfied. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which a variable display of the first special identification information is executed despite being controlled to the second special state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state based on this, the second By making it possible to control the vehicle to a special state, it is possible to ensure a sense of expectation that the vehicle will be controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information.

The gaming machine of means 7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 6,
The variable display means includes special identification information variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B) capable of variably displaying special identification information (special symbol), and decorative identification information (decoration). a decorative identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variably displaying a symbol);
The decorative identification information variable display means is capable of variably displaying the decorative identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to the variable display of the special identification information,
The special identification information includes first special identification information (first special symbol) and second special identification information (second special symbol).
When controlled in the normal state, the start condition for variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for variable display of the second special identification information (normal state (low base) state), the starting condition for the first special symbol is easier to satisfy than the starting condition for the second special symbol),
When controlled in the special state, the start condition for variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for variable display of the first special identification information (time saving state (high base)). state), the starting conditions for the second special symbol are easier to satisfy than the starting conditions for the first special symbol),
The state control means changes the advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed when the control is in the normal state is the third specific display result (seven symbols in a row). (10R jackpot), the decoration executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state. When the display result of the variable display of identification information is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot gaming state) based on the display result of the second specific display result or the third specific display result (7 odd symbols aligned) The first special state (a time-saving state: a time-saving state that is controlled to the normal state when a normal small win occurs and no V prize is won) after the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine.

According to such a gaming machine, the variable display of the first special identification information is executed despite being controlled to the second special state, and the second specific display result or the third specific display result is obtained. By making it possible to control to at least the first special state when an irregular situation occurs where the control is controlled to an advantageous state, the expectation that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information is increased. can be ensured. Note that when such a situation occurs, by preventing control from at least to the second special state, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

The gaming machine of means 8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The specific display (jackpot count display) is displayed in a first emphasis mode (a mode in which only the first count part is emphasized) and in a manner that is more emphasized than the first emphasis mode (higher visibility than the first emphasis mode). ) can be displayed on the display means in a second emphasized mode (a mode in which the first count part and the second count part are highlighted),
If the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times (2),
When the number of times does not exceed a first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the first emphasized manner,
When the number of times exceeds the first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the second emphasized mode. Game machine.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until the number of times the game is continuously controlled to an advantageous state exceeds a predetermined number of times depending on the mode of the specific display, thereby increasing the player's interest in the specific display. I can do it.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
a normal state (low base state); a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state; a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, production control CPU 120) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols); , comprising;
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (missing symbol) different from the specific display result when controlled in the special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), and the variable display period is However, a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (“ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)” where the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds) (variation display of variation pattern) can be performed,
Of the variable displays in which the display result executed when the special state is controlled is the predetermined display result, a proportion of the variable displays in which the special variable display is executed is such that a variable display different from the special variable display is executed. (At least when the number of retained memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected. higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when a display result becomes a predetermined display result during a period controlled in a special state, an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected. To comfortably play a game without feeling frustrated by the fact that variable display is being executed.

The gaming machine of means 10 is
The gaming machine of means 9,
The state control means is capable of controlling to a predetermined state (a time saving state of dream RUSH mode) after the end of the advantageous state,
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to the special state (time saving state a of the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) when the number of times the state has been continuously controlled to the advantageous state exceeds a predetermined number of times (2);
The special variable display is not executed in the predetermined state (when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2: a time saving state of Dream RUSH mode) ("Ultra high speed loss (0.2 seconds)" is displayed in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss). does not include random numbers corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of )
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to characterize a predetermined state and a special state by a difference in variable display period, and it is possible to make the player emphasize that advantageous states occur consecutively, and also to distinguish between the special state and the special state. It is possible to make the player feel the specialness.

The gaming machine of means 11 is
The gaming machine of means 10,
Equipped with a performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
The state control means changes the special state after the end of the advantageous state based on the variable display executed while the state is controlled to the predetermined state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1 to 2: a time saving state of Dream RUSH mode). (Jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000: Super high speed HYPER
It can be controlled to a time saving state in RUSH mode,
The variable display means is configured to display a first display result in which the display result becomes the predetermined display result (missing symbol) when the special state is controlled based on the variable display executed when the predetermined state is controlled. As a variable display, a special variable display with a longer variable display period than the above-mentioned special variable display (a variable display of the "Rush variation miss (rush effect + super high speed miss)" variation pattern with a fluctuating display period of 30.2 seconds) is executed. It is possible and
The variable display period of the special variable display is determined when the special state is controlled again (in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) after the advantageous state based on the variable display executed while the special state is controlled. a When the time saving state continues), the variable display period of the first variable display in which the display result is the predetermined display result (missing pattern) (pseudo fluctuation missing (2.8 seconds), ultra-high speed falling (2.8 seconds)) 0.2 seconds), super reach C is off (10 seconds), and super reach B is off (20 seconds).
The effect executing means executes a suggestive effect (an acceleration pseudo-variable effect, a mode start suggestive effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled in response to the special variable display (inrush variation deviation (30.2 seconds)). A gaming machine characterized by being executable.

According to such a gaming machine, the special variable display, which has a longer variable display period than the special variable display, can indicate to the player that a special state has entered.

The gaming machine of means 12 is
The gaming machine of means 11,
The performance execution means has a variable display period (variable display period 30.2 seconds) of the special variable display and a fixed period (symbol fixed period 0.2 seconds) from the end of the special variable display to the start of the next variable display. The above-mentioned suggestion effect can be executed during the first period (from the start of fluctuation to 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation) of the period including 5 seconds), and the second period after the first period (30 seconds from the start of fluctuation) - At 30.2 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (remaining fluctuation display period 0.2 seconds + symbol confirmation period 0.5 seconds), the same aspect as the special variable display (ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds) fluctuation) A game machine characterized in that the predetermined display result (missing pattern) can be displayed by displaying a decorative pattern variably in a manner common to the pattern.

According to such a gaming machine, the special variable display indicates to the player that the special state has entered, and even though the actual variable display period is not as short as the special variable display, the special variable display indicates that the player has entered the special state. It can be felt that the variable display period has become extremely short since the first variable display.

The gaming machine of means 13 is
The gaming machine of means 12,
Comprising a display means (image display device 5),
The variable display means includes a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variably displaying decoration identification information (decoration patterns) on the display means,
The decorative identification information variable display means includes:
Within the variable display period of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a re-variable display (unit pseudo fluctuation) in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and then variably displayed,
In the first period, multiple revariable displays (unit pseudo fluctuations) can be performed, and the variable display period of the subsequent revariable display can be made shorter than the variable display period of the previous revariable display. (An acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect that gradually shortens the period corresponding to the fluctuation display to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds) feasible),
The performance execution means notifies a transition to a performance mode corresponding to the special state during the first period (from the start of fluctuation to 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation) (informs a mode start notification performance after executing the acceleration pseudo fluctuation performance) (feasible)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the first period is effectively used to make the user aware that the variable display period will be shortened when the special state is entered, and also to make the player aware that the variable display period will be shortened when the special state is entered, and also to make the user aware that the variable display period will be shortened when the special state is entered. Can be notified.

The gaming machine of means 14 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
a normal state (low base state); a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state; a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, production control CPU 120) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols); ,
Suspended storage means (RAM 102) that stores information regarding variable display that has not been executed as suspended storage;
A determining means (CPU 103 that executes jackpot determination at the time of starting winning) that determines whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display is executed;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes the performance,
Display means (image display device 5),
The variable display means includes a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variably displaying decoration identification information (decoration patterns) on the display means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (missing symbol) different from the specific display result when controlled in the special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), and the variable display period is However, a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (“ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)” where the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds) (variation display of variation pattern) can be performed,
Of the variable displays that are executed when the special state is controlled and the display result is the predetermined display result, the proportion of the execution of the special variable display is such that a variable display different from the special variable display is executed. (If the number of retained memories is at least 1, the rate at which the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected. is also high (higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns),
The display area of the display means includes a first display area (the central area of the screen including the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R), and a first display area that is closer to the periphery of the screen than the first display area. a second display area (an area on the screen edge side excluding the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) that is narrower than the area;
The effect execution means targets the suspended memory with a suggestive effect (a first pre-read effect, a second pre-read effect) that suggests that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state, and executes the suggestive effect during the variable display prior to the suspended memory. executable in the display means;
The suggestion effect is executed in the first display area, and includes a first suggestion effect (fixed icon containing the word "HOLD" in a decorative pattern that has not been finalized or stopped) using decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display being executed. A first look-ahead effect that displays the images in a superimposed manner), and a second suggestion effect that is different from the first suggestion effect and is executed in the second display area (a second look-ahead image that displays a second look-ahead image including an image of all seven symbols). 2 look-ahead production) and,
The execution rate of the first suggestion effect is higher than the execution rate of the second suggestion effect (the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than the second look-ahead effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when a display result becomes a predetermined display result during a period controlled in a special state, an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected. To comfortably play a game without feeling frustrated by the fact that variable display is being executed. Furthermore, since the first suggestion effect, which is executed at a relatively high rate, is an effect using decoration identification information, and is executed in the first display area where the player easily draws attention, the variable display period in the special state is It is possible to increase the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state while making the driver realize how short the period is.

The gaming machine of means 15 is:
The gaming machine of means 14,
There are multiple types of the first suggestion performance (first look-ahead performance, pattern enlarging performance), and there are multiple types of the second suggestion performance (second look-ahead performance, pending look-ahead performance),
The sum of the execution proportions of all types of the first suggestion effects (the execution proportion of the first look-ahead effect + the execution proportion of the symbol enlarging effect) is the sum of the execution proportions of all types of the second suggestion effects (the second (execution ratio of look-ahead effects + execution ratio of suspended look-ahead effects), or the execution rate of any type of the first suggestion effect (execution rate of the first look-ahead effects) is higher than the execution rate of any type of second effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution rate of the suggestive performance is higher than the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect, the execution rate of the pending look-ahead effect.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to make the player realize how short the variable display period in the special state is.

The gaming machine of means 16 is
The gaming machine of means 14 or 15,
In the special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode),
The variable display of decorative identification information (ornamental patterns) differs from the manner in which the decorative identification information scrolls up and down on the screen, and the manner in which the decorative identification information moves from the back of the screen to the front (a manner in which the decorative pattern rapidly expands). and
A mode in which when the variable display in which the display result is the predetermined display result (missing design) is executed continuously, the size is larger and the transparency is higher than the decoration identification information that was stopped in response to the previous variable display. A gaming machine characterized in that after the decoration identification information corresponding to the subsequent variable display is displayed, the size of the decoration identification information becomes smaller.

According to such a gaming machine, when a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result is continuously executed, the period during which the decoration identification information is displayed within the range that the player is paying attention to is lengthened. In addition, since the transparency of the decorative identification information changes within the range that the player is paying attention to, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly the high speed of the variable display in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 17 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
a normal state (low base state); a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state; a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, production control CPU 120) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols); ,
Display means (image display device 5),
The variable display means includes a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variably displaying decoration identification information (decoration patterns) on the display means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (missing symbol) different from the specific display result when controlled in the special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), and the variable display period is However, a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (“ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)” where the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds) (variation display of variation pattern) can be performed,
Of the variable displays that are executed when the special state is controlled and the display result is the predetermined display result, the proportion of the execution of the special variable display is such that a variable display different from the special variable display is executed. (If the number of retained memories is at least 1, the rate at which the "ultra-fast deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected. is also high (higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns),
When the special variable display is executed continuously (when the "ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation pattern continues), the decoration identification information used for the previous special variable display and the special variable It is possible to execute the special variable display using the decoration identification information that becomes the display result (the combination of decorative symbols that was fixed and stopped in the previous ultra-high-speed deviation fluctuation starts the subsequent ultra-high-speed deviation fluctuation). When the combination is enlarged, the transparency becomes high, and then, when the combination of decorative patterns is reduced, the combination of decorative patterns becomes a combination of decorative patterns that is fixed and stopped by the ultra-high speed fluctuation. Change)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when a display result becomes a predetermined display result during a period controlled in a special state, an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected. To comfortably play a game without feeling frustrated by the fact that variable display is being executed. In addition, the decorative identification information used for the special variable display that was executed first is also used for the special variable display that is executed later. This is to prevent players from feeling complicated due to excessive presentation information.

The gaming machine of means 18 is
The gaming machine according to means 17,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) executes the above-mentioned performance in response to the stopped decoration identification information (decoration pattern) while being controlled in the special state (a-time saving state of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode). The first additional information added to the background side of the decoration identification information (the pedestal pattern added to the background side of the number pattern in the third decoration pattern and corresponding to the outline of the number pattern) and the Second additional information that is displayed outside the area of the first additional information (In the third decorative pattern, a radial light effect display that is added to the background side of the number pattern and the front side of the pedestal pattern, and is displayed on the entire screen. ) and can be displayed,
When controlled to a predetermined state different from the special state (time saving state a of Dream RUSH mode), at least the second additional information is not displayed (the pedestal pattern and the light rays) corresponding to the stopped decoration identification information. (Both effect displays are not displayed, or the pedestal pattern is displayed but the ray effect display is not displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the decoration identification information is more emphasized in the special state, thereby making it easier to recognize the decoration identification information in a situation where the variable display period is short, and also making it easier to recognize the decoration identification information when the decoration identification information is variably displayed. It can emphasize the sense of speed.

The gaming machine of means 19 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
a normal state (low base state); a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state; a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, production control CPU 120) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols); ,
The starting condition (winning into the starting winning opening) was met, but the starting condition (fluctuating display of special symbols is not being executed and is not being controlled in either the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state) is not met. a retention storage means (RAM 102) that stores the number of variable displays that are not displayed as a retention storage number;
Display means (image display device 5),
The variable display means includes a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variably displaying decoration identification information (decoration patterns) on the display means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (missing symbol) different from the specific display result when the special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) is controlled and the number of pending memories is not 0. , and the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a special variable display whose variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds) (0.2 seconds) "variation display of variation pattern)" can be executed,
Of the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result, which are executed when the special state is controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0, the proportion at which the special variable display is executed is determined by the special variable display. higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the higher than the rate at which the pattern is selected and higher than the sum of the selection rates of all other variable patterns),
A special variable display having a longer variable display period than the special variable display can be executed as a variable display whose display result is the predetermined display result when the special state is controlled and the number of pending memories is 0. (If the number of pending memories is 0, it is possible to select the "Pseudo fluctuation deviation (2.8 seconds)" fluctuation pattern, which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "Ultra high speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation pattern. ),
In the special variable display, a variable display period common to the variable display period of the decoration identification information when the special variable display is executed ([variable display equivalent period 0.2 seconds + symbol fixed stop period equivalent 0.5 seconds = A game characterized by being able to carry out special control (uniform velocity pseudo-fluctuation performance) that executes variable display of decorative identification information (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of decorative patterns) multiple times with a period of 0.7 seconds). Machine.

According to such a gaming machine, when a display result becomes a predetermined display result during a period controlled in a special state, an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected. To comfortably play a game without feeling frustrated by the fact that variable display is being executed. In addition, if the number of pending memories is 0, a special variable display with a long variable display period is executed to avoid a situation where the variable display is not executed as much as possible, and to avoid the situation where the variable display is not executed multiple times. By making it appear to the player that the game is being executed, the sense of speed in the special state is not impaired.

The gaming machine of means 20 is
The gaming machine of means 19,
Among the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result, the special variable display is controlled in the special state (a-time saving state of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) and is executed when the number of pending memories is 0. is executed at the highest rate (if the number of retained memories is 0, the rate at which the "Pseudo fluctuation is off (2.8 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected. is also high and higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency and speed of the variable display in the special state from being impaired as much as possible.

The gaming machine of means 21 is
The gaming machine of means 19 or 20,
When the control is in a predetermined state different from the special state (time saving state a of Dream RUSH mode) and the number of pending memories is 0, the special control is not executed and the variable display period is longer than the special variable display. It is possible to execute a long predetermined variable display (the "pseudo fluctuation deviation (2.8 seconds)" fluctuation pattern is not selected, but the "long fluctuation deviation (10 seconds)" fluctuation pattern can be selected)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to clarify the characteristics of the special variable display in the special state, and also to avoid as much as possible a situation where the variable display is not executed even when controlled to a predetermined state. can.

The gaming machine of means 22 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
a normal state (low base state); a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state; a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, production control CPU 120) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols); ,
Display means (image display device 5),
The special states include a first special state (time-saving state a of Dream RUSH mode) and a second special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special state. can be,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled in the second special state, the display result is a predetermined display result (missing symbol) different from the specific display result, and the variable display period is the next one from the end of the variable display. It is possible to perform a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period until the variable display starts (fluctuating display of the "ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern whose variable display period is shorter than the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds) and
Of the variable displays that are executed when the second special state is controlled and the display result is the predetermined display result, the proportion of the special variable display that is executed is such that the variable display that is different from the special variable display is higher than the execution rate (if the number of pending memories is at least 1, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected) higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns),
The rate at which the variable display period of the variable display at which the display result when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second) is when the display result is controlled to the first special state. a variable display period of the variable display whose display result is the predetermined display result is higher than a ratio that is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second);
The performance execution means is
When being controlled to the first special state, a first special display (first logo display) can be displayed on the display means to notify that the first special state is being controlled;
A first specific change performance (first logo period change performance) that changes the aspect of the first special display can be executed,
When being controlled to the second special state, a second special display (second logo display) can be displayed on the display means to notify that the second special state is being controlled;
A second specific change performance (second logo period change performance) that changes the aspect of the second special display can be executed,
The cycle in which the aspect of the second special display changes in the second specific change effect is shorter than the cycle in which the aspect of the first special display changes in the first specific change effect (the change in the second logo cycle change effect) The cycle (0.5s) is shorter than the change cycle (5s) in the first logo cycle change performance)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when a display result becomes a predetermined display result during a period controlled in a special state, an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected. To comfortably play a game without feeling frustrated by the fact that variable display is being executed. Furthermore, in the second special state where the special variable display is executed at a high rate, the period in which the aspect of the second special display changes is short, so that it is possible to emphasize the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state. .

The gaming machine of means 23 is
The gaming machine of means 22,
comprising a game area (2) from which game media is ejected;
The gaming area includes a first gaming area (left gaming area) and a second gaming area (right gaming area),
When the control is in the normal state (low base state), it is more advantageous for the player to fire the game medium into the first game area than the second game area (starting condition for special symbol variation display). is likely to hold true),
When controlled to the special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state), it is easier for the player to fire the game media into the second gaming area than into the first gaming area. It is advantageous for (the starting conditions for special symbol fluctuation display are easily established),
In the first specific change production, the mode of the first special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (periodically emits light from the left end to the right end of the first logo display). aspect changes),
In the second specific change performance, the mode of the second special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (periodically emits light from the left end to the right end of the second logo display). aspect changes)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the first special display not only informs that it is controlled to the first special state, but also informs that the area in which the player should shoot the gaming medium ball is the second gaming area. In addition, the second special display notifies that the player is in the second special state, and also informs that the area in which the player should shoot the game media is the second gaming area. It becomes possible to do so.

The gaming machine of means 24 is
The gaming machine of means 22 or 23,
comprising a game area (2) from which game media is ejected;
The gaming area includes a first gaming area (left gaming area) and a second gaming area (right gaming area),
When controlled to the special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state), an instruction display instructing to fire the game medium into the second gaming area (for "right-handed hit") a first system display and a second system display including characters and a rightward arrow) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5);
The mode of the instruction display changes from the first gaming area to the second gaming area (a mode in which a right-pointing arrow periodically moves from left to right),
The speed of change in the mode of the instruction display in the second special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is the speed of change of the mode of the instruction display in the first special state (time-saving state a of the dream RUSH mode). (The movement period of the arrow in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the movement period of the arrow in the first system display is 3 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the instruction display not only informs the player of the area in which the game medium should be fired, but also makes it possible to further emphasize the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state.

The gaming machine of means 25 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 22 to 24,
A storage unit (RAM 102) that stores information regarding variable displays for which the start condition has been met but not the start condition (pending information) and information regarding the variable display for which the start condition has been met (information regarding the variable display being executed). )and,
A production execution means (production control CPU 120) for executing production;
The performance execution means is
A corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
When controlled to the special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state), it is possible to rotate the corresponding display,
When being controlled in the second special state (time saving state a of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), the corresponding display is more effective than when being controlled in the first special state (time saving state a of dream RUSH mode). The rotation speed is large (the rotation period of the second rotation compatible display is 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation compatible display is 3 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, by rotating the corresponding display, it is recognized that the special state is being controlled, and when the second special state is being controlled, the first special state is being controlled. The shortness of the variable display period can be further emphasized by rotating the corresponding display faster than when the variable display period is present.

The gaming machine of means 26 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
a normal state (low base state); a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state; a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, production control CPU 120) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols); ,
A production execution means (production control CPU 120) for executing production;
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state;
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result when the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) is controlled, and the variable display period is the variable display. Special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end to the start of the next variable display (“Ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)” where the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds) display) is possible, and
Of the variable displays in which the predetermined display result is the display result executed while being controlled in the special state (the a-time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the ratio at which the special variable display is executed is as follows: higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of retained memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which other variable displays are executed) higher than the selection rate of any variation pattern and higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns),
The performance execution means is
When the variable display (variable display of special symbols) in which the display result is the specific display result (jackpot symbol) is executed, it is possible to stop displaying the decoration identification information (when all the common decorative symbols are aligned). It is possible to perform a "design alignment effect" that stops and displays a combination of decorative designs).
In the special state (a-time saving state of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) whose display result is the specific display result (jackpot symbol) is executed, the decoration identification information is stopped. It is possible to not display it (in the symbol jackpot, it is possible to start the round display at the start of the jackpot game state without executing the "symbol alignment effect")
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, when a display result becomes a predetermined display result during a period controlled in a special state, an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected. To comfortably play a game without feeling frustrated by the fact that variable display is being executed. In addition, in the special state, it is possible to not stop displaying the decorative identification information when controlled to be in an advantageous state, so the flow of the game from the variable display to the advantageous state is not interrupted, and the variable display that triggers the advantageous state is not interrupted. By emphasizing the speed of the display, it is possible to give the impression that the system has suddenly been controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 27 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
a normal state (low base state); a special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state; a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, production control CPU 120) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols); ,
A production execution means (production control CPU 120) for executing production;
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state;
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a special display result (small winning symbol), it can be controlled to a special state (small winning gaming state) different from the advantageous state,
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the game medium passing through a specific area (V winning area 870) while being controlled in the special state;
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result when the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) is controlled, and the variable display period is the variable display. Special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period from the end to the start of the next variable display (“Ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)” where the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds) display) is possible, and
Of the variable displays in which the display result is the predetermined display result, which is executed when the special state (a-time saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is controlled, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is: higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra high-speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed). (higher than the selection rate of any variation pattern, higher than the sum of the selection proportions of all other variation patterns),
The performance execution means is
When the variable display (variable display of special symbols) in which the display result is the specific display result (jackpot symbol) is executed, it is possible to stop displaying the decoration identification information (when all the common decorative symbols are aligned). It is possible to perform a "design alignment effect" that stops and displays a combination of decorative designs).
In the special state (a-time saving state of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) whose display result is the special display result (small winning symbol) is executed, the decoration identification information is It is possible to make a static display (it is possible to perform a "symbol alignment effect" in the case of a jackpot via a small hit), and a variable display (variable display of special symbols) in which the display result is the specific display result (jackpot symbol). ) is executed, it is possible to not stop displaying the decoration identification information (in the case of a symbol jackpot, it is possible to start the round display accompanying the start of the jackpot game state without executing the "symbol alignment effect"). A gaming machine characterized by the following.

According to such a gaming machine, when a display result becomes a predetermined display result during a period controlled in a special state, an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected. To comfortably play a game without feeling frustrated by the fact that variable display is being executed. In addition, in the special state, when a variable display with a special display result is executed, the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed, thereby clarifying the flow of the game and ensuring that the game medium passes through a specific area. It is possible to direct attention to playing games. On the other hand, when a variable display in which the display result becomes a specific display result is executed, the decoration identification information is not stopped and displayed, so that the flow of the game from the variable display to the advantageous state is not interrupted, and the variable display that triggers the advantageous state is not interrupted. By emphasizing the speed of the display, it is possible to give the impression that the system has suddenly been controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 28 is
The gaming machine of means 26 or 27,
The state control means is capable of controlling to a predetermined state (time saving state a of Dream RUSH mode) different from the special state (time saving state a of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode),
In the predetermined state, when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol) is executed, the decoration identification information can be stopped and displayed (when the symbol is a jackpot symbol). It is possible to perform “design alignment effect”)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to clarify the difference between a predetermined state and a special state by a difference in the display of decoration identification information, and to create a special feeling when the display result becomes a specific display result in the special state. can.

The gaming machine of means 29 is
The gaming machine according to means 28,
Equipped with a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state,
A variable display in which the display result is the predetermined display result (missing symbol), which is executed in the special state (a time saving state of the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), and the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period. The execution rate of (fluctuating display of "ultra high speed deviation (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation display period is shorter than the symbol confirmation period 0.5 seconds) is executed in the predetermined state (a time saving state of Dream RUSH mode) is higher than the execution rate of a variable display whose display result is the predetermined display result (missing symbol) and whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period;
After the end of the start performance corresponding to the start of the advantageous state, the special variable means is controlled to the second state (the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state after the end of the fanfare performance),
Execution of the start effect when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the predetermined state and when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state. The period is shorter than the fixed period of the specific display result (in the case where a jackpot occurs based on the fluctuating display executed in the a time saving state of Dream RUSH mode, and in the case where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time saving state of the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) When a jackpot occurs based on the fluctuating display, in both cases, the execution period of the fanfare effect is shorter than the symbol confirmation period of the jackpot symbol.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the period from the start of the advantageous state to when the special variable means is controlled to the second state is more variable between when the predetermined state is controlled and when the special state is controlled. The period can be made even shorter, and it is possible to prevent the player from having to wait for a period after the display result is announced until the game value is awarded. In particular, in the special state, since control is executed to shorten the variable display period, the special variable means can be controlled to the second state immediately after the end of the variable display, and the advantageous state is reached after the start of the variable display. It is possible to show the player a series of steps up to when a gaming value is awarded.

The gaming machine of means 30 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 26 to 29,
A special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state;
A special light emitting means (light emitting device provided around the special variable winning ball device 7 or in the opening/closing part) provided corresponding to the position of the special variable means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a special display result (small winning symbol), it can be controlled to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the game medium passing through a specific area (V winning area 870) while being controlled in the special state;
When controlled to the special state (high base state (time saving state): a time saving state, b time saving state), the state is controlled to the special state more than when being controlled to the normal state (low base state). Frequently,
The performance execution means is
When controlled to the special state (a time saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), when the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result becoming the specific display result (symbol jackpot occurs), and when the gaming medium is controlled to the advantageous state based on passing through the specific area while being controlled to the special state (when a jackpot via small hit occurs). , at any time, the special light emitting means is made to emit light (the light emitting device of the special variable winning ball device 7 is made to emit light), and the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the display result has become the specific display result. When the special variable means is controlled to the second state, an instruction display (display of "Aim at the attacker!!") instructing the special variable means to fire the game medium is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of displaying information on the display means (image display device 5).

According to such a gaming machine, when the game machine is controlled to be in a special state, either the case where it is controlled to an advantageous state based on the special state or the case where it is controlled to be an advantageous state based on a specific display result. In this case, since the special light emitting means emits light and the instruction display is displayed, it is difficult for the player to notice that the player has been controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result. In other words, even though it is controlled to a special state and is easily controlled to an advantageous state via the special state, an advantageous state based on a specific display result that can occur with the same probability even in a normal state. It is possible to avoid feeling regretful about what happened.

The gaming machine of means 31 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 30,
A movable accessory (movable body 02TM100),
Display means (image display device 5);
storage means (RAM 102) for storing information regarding variable display;
a determination unit (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
Corresponding information corresponding to the variable display (pending display corresponding to the variable display not being executed (suspended memory), active display corresponding to the variable display being executed) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5). can be,
The display mode of the correspondence display includes a first mode (normal mode) and a second mode (red mode) in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first mode,
The performance execution means is
Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a mode change effect that changes the correspondence display from the first mode to the second mode;
It is possible to perform a movable accessory performance (maximum motion performance) in which the movable accessory is moved from a first position (initial position) to a second position (maximum performance position),
After the execution of the movable accessory production, in response to moving the movable accessory from the second position to the first position, a related display related to the movable accessory (same as the ally character of the movable object 02TM100) ally character 02TM30B) can be displayed on the display means,
The related display acts on the corresponding display (the second effect change production in which the ally character 02TM30C throws three bombs toward the pending display or the active display), and The mode change production that targets the corresponding display that is the target of the effect production (a second response display change in which the pending display or active display hit by a bomb changes from the normal mode to the red mode, among the second effect change effects) A gaming machine characterized by being able to perform a performance.

According to such a gaming machine, an effect production and a mode change production are executed through cooperation between a movable accessory, a related display related to the movable accessory, and a corresponding display, so that a production that simply acts on the corresponding display is performed. Compared to the case where only a performance in which the corresponding display changes or the corresponding display changes, it is possible to improve the interest when the corresponding display changes.

The gaming machine of means 32 is
The gaming machine of means 31,
The movable accessory (movable body 02TM100) has a shape imitating a specific character (ally character),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the specific character,
The performance execution means is
A battle performance in which the specific character battles (battle performance in which an ally character and an enemy character battle) can be executed on the display means (image display device 5),
When the battle performance is executed, a victory performance in which the specific character wins (a victory performance in which an ally character defeats an enemy character) can be performed when the specific character is controlled to be in the advantageous state. Machine.

According to such a gaming machine, the relationship between the movable accessory and the specific character displayed on the display means makes it possible to give a sense of unity to the series of performances, and also to make it possible to give a sense of unity to the series of performances, as well as to show that the specific character is important to the player. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is a character, and to have a strong interest in and familiarity with the specific character.

The gaming machine of means 33 is
The gaming machine of means 31 or 32,
As a display mode of the corresponding display (hold display, active display), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first mode (normal mode), and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the second mode (red mode). There is a predetermined mode (blue mode) with low expectations that is controlled by
The effect execution means includes, as the aspect change effect, a first mode change effect (change from a normal mode to a blue mode) that changes the corresponding display from the first mode to the predetermined mode; A second mode change effect (change from normal mode to red mode) that changes from the first mode to the second mode is possible,
When the second mode change effect is executed, the action effect targets the corresponding display that is the target of the second mode change effect (a first effect in which an ally character throws a bomb toward the suspended display or the active display) The rate at which the effect (or the second effect) is executed is that when the first aspect change effect is executed, the effect effect targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the first aspect change effect is executed. higher than the percentage;
The performance execution means is
moving the movable accessory (movable body 02TM100) from the first position (initial position) to a predetermined position (intermediate performance position) between the first position and the second position (maximum performance position); is possible,
Displaying the related display (ally character 02TM30B) in response to moving the movable accessory from the predetermined position to the first position, and performing the action effect in which the related display acts on the corresponding display; A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the first aspect change performance targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the action performance.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to diversify the appearance change effects, and when the movable accessory moves, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the action effects will be executed.

The gaming machine of means 34 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 33,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) executes a first action performance (a first action performance in which an ally character throws one bomb toward the pending display or the active display) and the first action performance. It is possible to execute a second action performance (a second action performance in which an ally character throws three bombs toward the pending display or active display) that has higher visibility than
When the second aspect change effect is executed, the rate at which the second action effect is performed for the corresponding display that is the target of the second aspect change effect is the rate at which the first aspect change effect is executed The gaming machine is characterized in that the rate at which the second action performance is executed is higher than the rate at which the second effect performance is executed for the corresponding display that is the target of the first aspect change performance when the first aspect change performance is performed.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to diversify the effects and presentations, and it is also possible to draw attention to the characters appearing in the effects and presentations. Further, by executing an effect with high visibility, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the corresponding display will change to a more highly anticipated manner.

The gaming machine of means 35 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 34,
The movable accessory (movable body 02TM100) has a shape imitating the face of the specific character (an ally character of the movable body 02TM100),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the specific character's face,
After executing the movable accessory performance, the performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) performs an operation when the movable accessory is moving from the second position (maximum performance position) to the first position (initial position). and when the movable accessory moves to the first position (initial position), the related display (ally character 02TM30B) can be continuously displayed on the display means (image display device 5). A gaming machine with special features.

According to such a gaming machine, the relationship between the movable accessory and the related display can be emphasized, and the production effect of the specific character can be highlighted by the cooperation of the movable accessory and the related display.

The gaming machine of means 36 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 35,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
The action production includes a first action production (a production in which an ally character throws a bomb toward the reserved display or active display), and a second action production (a production in which an ally character throws a bomb toward the pending display or active display), which has higher visibility than the first action production (a production in which an ally character holds a bomb). Throwing three bombs towards the display or active display) can be executed.
It is possible to perform the movable accessory performance (intermediate action performance) and execute the first action performance after performing a suggestion performance (change precursor performance) that suggests that the action performance will be performed. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after executing the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute the movable accessory effect (maximum movement effect) and execute the second action effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the suggestive performance can make the player expect the movement of the movable accessory and also make the player expect the appearance of a specific character. Furthermore, it is possible to make the user interested in which of the first action and presentation is executed.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 31B Push button 31B
32 Movable body 100 Microcomputer 120 for game control CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
a state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means for performing variable display,
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
controllable to the advantageous state when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result;
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result when controlled to the second special state, and the variable display period is such that the next variable display starts from the end of the variable display. It is possible to execute a special variable display that is shorter than the fixed period until
Of the variable displays that are executed when the second special state is controlled and the display result is the predetermined display result, the proportion of the special variable display that is executed is such that the variable display that is different from the special variable display is higher than the rate of execution;
The proportion of the variable display period of the variable display in which the display result when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result is shorter than the predetermined period, the display result when controlled to the first special state is the predetermined display result. a variable display period of the variable display resulting in the predetermined display result is higher than a ratio that is shorter than the predetermined period;
The game control means is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium enters the starting region;
Executing variable display of the specific identification information,
Based on the result of the determination, select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns,
when determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command to the production control means;
when determining the second variation pattern, transmitting a second command to the production control means;
The performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
When being controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating that the first special state is being controlled can be displayed on the display means;
A first specific change effect that changes a mode of the first special display can be executed,
When being controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating that the second special state is being controlled can be displayed on the display means;
A second specific change effect that changes the aspect of the second special display can be executed,
The period in which the aspect of the second special display changes in the second specific change effect is shorter than the period in which the aspect of the first special display changes in the first specific change effect, and the display means:
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The decoration identification information is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach, and the display position of the decoration identification information in the reach mode is used in the title display part in the specific reach, so as to correspond to the specific reach. A gaming machine that displays a title display.

Images